Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
WW934774/WW295750
Recommended pages in the Help Guide
Support information
Finding functions from MENU
You can check the list of the menu items. You can also move to the explanation page for each item from the menu
item on the list.
Memory cards that can be used
Information about memory cards that can be used with this camera.
Customization features of the camera
The camera has various customization features, such as custom keys and a function to register shooting settings.
Log Shooting
Shoots with the assumption that color grading will be applied in post-production.
Picture Profile (still image/movie)
Allows you to change the settings for the color, gradation, etc.
TC/UB
The time code (TC) and the user bit (UB) information can be recorded as data attached to movies.
Firmware, Questions & Answers and Compatibility
This website provides Firmware update, Question & Answers and Compatibility information
Basic Knowledge
Improve your shooting techniques by learning the basics of camera.
1
How to use the “Help Guide”
Notes on using your camera
Safety precautions
Precautions
Lending, transferring or discarding the camera and/or memory card to others (Notes on protecting private
information)
Notes on the battery pack and charging the battery
Notes on memory card
Cleaning the image sensor (Sensor Cleaning)
On cleaning
Checking the camera and the supplied items
Names of parts
Front side
Rear side
Top side
Sides
Bottom
XLR handle unit (ILME-FX2 only)
Basic icons displayed on the monitor
Touch function icons
Basic operations
Touch panel
Touch function icons
Control wheel
Multi-selector
Still/Movie switch
MENU button
HOME (Home) button
Main menu (shooting setting list)
2
Fn (function) button
Custom buttons
DISP (Display Setting) button
Delete button
Front dial and rear dial
Keyboard screen
In-Camera Guide
Functions for accessibility
Preparing the camera/Basic shooting operations
Charging the battery pack
Inserting/removing the battery pack
Charging the battery with a USB-PD-compatible device
Using the battery charger abroad
Supplying power from a wall outlet (wall socket)
Memory cards that can be used
Inserting/removing a memory card
Attaching/removing a lens
Attaching the supplied XLR handle unit (only with ILME-FX2)
Performing initial setup for the camera
Basic shooting operations
Confirmation before shooting
Shooting movies
Shooting still images (Intelligent Auto)
Finding functions from MENU
Using the shooting functions
Contents of this chapter
Selecting a shooting mode
Exposure Ctrl Type
Auto/Manual Swt. Set.
3
Shoot Mode (still image)/Shoot Mode (movie)
Shoot Mode:
Intelligent Auto
Shoot Mode:
Program Auto
Shoot Mode:
Aperture Priority
Shoot Mode:
Shutter Priority
Shoot Mode:
Manual Exposure
Shutter Mode
Bulb shooting
BULB Timer Settings
Convenient functions for shooting self-portrait videos and vlogs
Self-timer
(movie)
Auto Framing Settings
Framing Stabilizer
Focusing
Selecting the focus method (Focus Mode)
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)
Tracking subject (Tracking function)
Manual Focus
Direct manual focus (DMF)
Subject Recognition AF
Focusing using subject recognition functions
Subject Recog in AF (still image/movie)
Recognition Target (still image/movie)
Recog Trgt Select Set (still image/movie)
Right/Left Eye Select (still image/movie)
Sbj Recog Frm Disp. (still image)
Sbj Recog Frm Disp. (movie)
Face Memory (still image/movie)
Regist. Face Priority (still image/movie)
Selecting a person to track (Select Face to Track)
4
Using focusing functions
Focus Standard
Adjusting the focus area settings to the camera’s orientation (horizontal/vertical) (Switch V/H AF Area)
Registering the current focus area (AF Area Registration)
Deleting a registered AF Area (Del. Regist. AF Area)
Focus Area Limit
(still image/movie)
Circ. of Focus Point
(still image/movie)
AF Frame Move Amt
(still image/movie)
Focus Area Color
(still image/movie)
AF Area Auto Clear
Area Disp. dur Tracking
AF-C Area Display
Phase Detect. Area
AF Lvl for Crossing
AF Trk for Spd Chng
AF Transition Speed
AF Subj. Shift Sensitivity
AF Assist
AF/MF Selector
Full Time DMF
AF w/ Shutter
AF On
Focus Hold
Pre-AF
Priority Set in AF-S
Priority Set in AF-C
Aperture Drive in AF
Preset Focus/Zoom
AF in Focus Mag.
5
Auto Magnifier in MF
Focus Magnifier
Focus Magnif. Time (still image/movie)
Initial Focus Mag. (movie)
Initial Focus Mag. (still image)
Focus Map
Peaking Display
Adjusting the exposure/metering modes
Exposure Comp. (still image/movie)
Histogram display
Exposure step (still image/movie)
Exposure Std. Adjust (still image/movie)
D-Range Optimizer (still image/movie)
Metering Mode (still image/movie)
Face Priority in Multi Metering (still image/movie)
Spot Metering Point (still image/movie)
ND Filter
AE lock
AEL w/ Shutter
Auto Slow Shutter
Zebra Display
Selecting the ISO sensitivity
ISO
(still image/movie)
ISO Range Limit (still image/movie)
ISO AUTO Min. SS
White balance
White Balance
(still image/movie)
Capturing a standard white color to set the white balance (custom white balance)
WB Capt. Frame Size (still image/movie)
Priority Set in AWB (still image/movie)
6
Shutter AWB Lock
Shockless WB
Log shooting settings
Log shooting
Log Shooting Setting (movie)
Select LUT
Manage User LUTs
Base ISO
Base ISO Switch EI
Exposure Index
Display LUT
Log Shooting Setting (still image)
Adding effects to images
Creative Look
(still image/movie)
Picture Profile
(still image/movie)
Shooting with drive modes (continuous shooting/self-timer)
Drive Mode
Cont. Shooting
Selection/Memo Shot
Self-timer(Single)
Self-timer(Cont)
Cont. Bracket
Single Bracket
Indicator during bracket shooting
Focus Bracket
WB bracket
DRO Bracket
Bracket Settings
Self-timer
(movie)
Interval Shoot Func.
7
Setting the image quality and recording format
JPEG/HEIF Switch
Image Quality Settings: File Format (still image)
Image Quality Settings: RAW File Type
Image Quality Settings: JPEG Quality/HEIF Quality
Image Quality Settings: JPEG Image Size/HEIF Image Size
Aspect Ratio
HLG Still Image
Color Space
File Format (movie)
Movie Settings (movie)
FPS
Proxy Settings
APS-C S35 (Super 35mm) Shooting (still image/movie)
Angle of view
Using touch functions
Touch Operation
Touch Panel/Pad
Touch Panel Settings
Touch Pad Settings
Focusing using touch operations (Touch Focus)
Starting tracking with touch operations (Touch Tracking)
Shooting with touch operations (Touch Shutter)
Adjusting the exposure with touch operations (Touch AE)
Shutter settings
Silent Mode Settings (still image/movie)
Shutter Type
Release w/o Lens
(still image/movie)
Release w/o Card
Anti-flicker Set.
8
Differences between the [Anti-flicker Shoot.] and [Var. Shutter] functions
Using the zoom
The zoom features available with this product
Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom
Zoom Range (still image/movie)
Zoom Lever Speed (still image/movie)
Custom Key Z. Speed (still image/movie)
Remote Zoom Speed (still image/movie)
About zoom scale
Zoom Ring Rotate
Using the flash
Using flash (sold separately)
Flash Mode
Flash Comp.
Exp.comp.set
Wireless Flash
Red Eye Reduction
FEL lock
External Flash Set.
Reg. Flash Shooting Set
Reducing blur
SteadyShot (still image)
SteadyShot (movie)
SteadyShot Adjust. (still image/movie)
SteadyShot focal length (still image/movie)
Framing Stabilizer
Lens Compensation (still image/movie)
Noise reduction
Long Exposure NR
High ISO NR
9
Setting the monitor display during shooting
Auto Review
(still image)
Remain Shoot Display (still image)
Grid Line Display (still image/movie)
Grid Line Type (still image/movie)
Live View Display Set.
Aperture Preview
Shot. Result Preview
Bright Monitoring
Emphasized REC Display
Marker Display (still image)
Marker Display (movie)
Gamma Display Assist
Gamma Disp. Assist Typ.
De-Squeeze Display
Recording movie audio
Audio Recording
Audio Rec Level
Audio Out Timing
Wind Noise Reduct.
Shoe Audio Set.
Recording audio using the XLR handle unit
Creating still images while recording a movie
Automatic creation of still images from Shot Marks
Shot Marks after still image creation (shooting)
TC/UB settings
TC/UB
TC/UB Disp. Setting
Matching the time code with other devices
Livestreaming video and audio
10
Network Streaming (movie)
USB Streaming (movie)
Customizing the camera
Contents of this chapter
Customization features of the camera
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
Changing the function of the dial temporarily (My Dial Settings)
Registering and recalling camera settings
Camera Set. Memory
Recalling registered shooting settings (Memory recall)
Memory/Recall Media
Registering shooting settings to a custom key (Reg. Custom Shoot Set)
Registering frequently used functions to the function menu
Fn Menu Settings (still image/movie)
Fn Menu Settings (playback)
Registering frequently used functions to My Menu
Add Item
Sort Item
Delete Item
Delete Page
Delete All
Display From My Menu
Separately adjusting the camera settings for still images and movies
Different Set for Still/Mv
Customizing the functions of the ring/dial
Av/Tv Rotate
Function Ring(Lens)
Lock Operation Parts
Using the shutter button when shooting movies
11
REC w/ Shutter
(movie)
Adding Shot Marks with the shutter button (movies)
Monitor/viewfinder settings
Select Finder/Monitor
Monitor Flip Direction
Vertical Display
DISP (Screen Disp) Set (Monitor/Finder)
Home (Lower Left)
Viewing
Contents of this chapter
Viewing images
Play Set of Multi. Media
Disp Set of Multi Media
Playing back still images
Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)
Enlarge Initial Mag.
Enlarge Initial Position
Rotating recorded images automatically (Display Rotation)
Playing back movies
Playback/Monitor. Vol.
4ch Audio Monitoring (movie)
Playing back images using slideshow (Slide Show)
Cont. Play for Interval
Play Speed for Interval
Changing how images are displayed
Playing back images on the image index screen (Image Index)
Playback Filter Condition
Image Order
Display as Group
12
Focus Frame Display (playback)
Aspect Marker Disp. (still image)
Disp Specified Time Img.
Setting the method for jumping between images (Image Jump Setting)
Protecting recorded images (Protect)
Adding information to images
Rating
Rating Set(Custom Key)
Clip Flag
Rotating an image (Rotate)
Crop
Extracting still images from a movie
Photo Capture
Creating still images from Shot Marks
Shot Marks after still image creation (playback)
JPEG/HEIF Switch
(Photo Capture / Creating still images from Shot Marks)
Copying images from one memory card to another (Copy)
Deleting images
Deleting multiple selected images (Delete)
Delete pressing twice
Delete confirm.
Viewing images on a TV
Viewing images on a TV using an HDMI cable
Changing the camera settings
Memory card settings
Format
Rec. Media Settings (still image/movie): Recording Media (still image)
Rec. Media Settings (still image/movie): Recording Media (movie)
Rec. Media Settings (still image/movie): Auto Switch Media Card
13
Recover Image DB (still image/movie)
Display Media Info. (still image/movie)
File settings
File/Folder Settings
Select REC Folder
Create New Folder
File Settings
Display File Name (movie)
IPTC Information
Copyright Info
Write Serial Number
(still image/movie)
Network settings
Wi-Fi Connect
WPS Push
Access Point Set.
Wi-Fi Frequency Band (models supporting 5 GHz)
Display Wi-Fi Info.
SSID/PW Reset
Bluetooth Settings
Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl
Wired LAN
(USB-LAN)
USB-LAN/Tethering
Airplane Mode
Edit Device Name
Importing root certification to the camera (Import Root Certificate)
Access Authen. Settings
Access Authen. Info
Wi-Fi Direct Settings
Reset Network Set.
FTP Transfer Func.
14
Viewfinder/monitor settings
Monitor Brightness
Viewfinder Bright.
Finder Color Temp.
Finder Frame Rate
(still image)
Power settings
Monitor Off
(still image)
Power Save Start Time
Power Save by Monitor
Auto Power OFF Temp.
Fan Control
(movie)
Display Quality (still image)
USB settings
USB Connection Mode
USB LUN Setting
USB Power Supply
External output settings
HDMI Resolution
HDMI Output Settings (movie)
HDMI Info. Display
CTRL FOR HDMI
General settings
Language
Area/Date/Time Setting
NTSC/PAL Selector
Audio Signal(Shooting)
Audio Signal(Start/End)
Audio Signal Volume
REC Lamp
Video Light Mode
15
Anti-dust Function
Auto Pixel Mapping
Pixel Mapping
Version
Display Serial Number
Privacy Notice
Screen Reader
Enlarge Screen
Save/Load Settings
Setting Reset
Functions available with a smartphone
Functions available with a smartphone (Creators' App)
Monitor & Control
Pairing the camera with a smartphone (Smartphone Connection)
Using a smartphone as a remote commander
Using a smartphone as a remote commander
Remote Shoot Setting
Transferring images to a Smartphone
Select on Cam & Send
(transferring to a smartphone)
Reset Transfer Status (transferring to a smartphone)
Connecting while the camera is turned OFF
Cnct. while Power OFF
(smartphone)
Reading location information from a smartphone
Using a computer
Recommended computer environment
Connecting/disconnecting the camera and a computer
Connecting the camera to a computer
Disconnecting the camera from the computer
Managing and editing images on a computer
16
Introduction to desktop application (Imaging Edge Desktop/Catalyst)
Importing images to the computer
Operating the camera from a computer
Operating the camera from a computer (Remote Shoot Function)
Remote Shoot Setting
USB Streaming (movie)
Using the cloud service
Creators' Cloud
Creating an account for Creators' Cloud and linking your camera to the account (Cloud Connection)
Displaying cloud connection information (Cloud Information)
Notes on using the cloud service (Creators' Cloud)
Appendix
Audio accessories compatible with the Multi Interface Shoe
Mount Adaptor
Mount Adaptor
LA-EA3/LA-EA5 Mount Adaptor
LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor
Multi Battery Adaptor Kit
Battery life and number of recordable images
Number of recordable images
Recordable movie times
List of icons on the monitor
List of icons on the screen for shooting movies
List of icons on the screen for shooting still images
List of icons on the playback screen
List of default setting values
List of default setting values (Shooting)
List of default setting values (Exposure/Color)
List of default setting values (Focus)
17
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
How to use the “Help Guide”
The “Help Guide” is a “Web Instruction Manual” that has been designed to describe the functions and operating methods
of this camera. Use the “Help Guide” to search for any information that you require in order to make full use of the
camera.
(The “Help Guide” screens shown on this page are for reference only. They may differ from the actual on-screen display
of your model.)
Hint
The “Startup Guide” supplied with the camera describes basic operating methods and precautions for use. Please refer to the
“Startup Guide” in combination with this “Help Guide.”
Icons used in the “Help Guide”
: Menu items displayed in the still image shooting modes
: Menu items displayed in the movie recording modes
: Menu items displayed in both the still image shooting and movie recording modes
For details on the relationship between each shooting mode and the menu, refer to “MENU button.”
Finding your desired information
Method A: Searching by keyword
Enter a search keyword (“white balance,” “focus area,” etc.), and use the search results to display the description page
that you want to view. If you enter two or more keywords by separating them with spaces (blanks), you can search for
pages that contain all of those keywords.
Method B: Viewing the table of contents
Click (Table of contents) to display the table of contents. Select a heading from the table of contents to display the
description page.
Screen displayed on a computer
19
Viewing information about related features
“Related Topic” at the bottom of each page lists sections that contain information related to the description page currently
being displayed. For a deeper understanding of the currently displayed page, refer to the listed sections as well.
Going to the previous/next page
Select the “Previous” or “Next” in the bottom of the page to move to the previous or next page without returning to the
table of contents.
Printing all the pages of the “Help Guide”
To print all the pages, select the [ Download PDF] button in the bottom left corner of the top page. When the PDF file
appears, use the printing menu of the browser to print it out.
This function is not available for certain languages.
21
Printing only the currently displayed page (only on a computer)
To print only the page currently being displayed, select the [ Print This Page] button at the bottom of the page. When
the printing screen appears, specify your printer.
Changing the display language
Go to the language selection page from [ Language Selection Page] at the bottom of the page and select a language.
TP1001659657
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
22
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Safety precautions
To prevent injury or electric shock due to improper use, as well as damage to property such as fire, be sure to observe
the following.
Warning
To avoid serious injury or burns; fire due to leakage, overheating, ignition, or explosion; or accidental ingestion, read the
following precautions carefully.
Battery pack
If used improperly, the battery may explode and cause a fire or chemical burns. Observe the following
precautions:
Do not disassemble or modify the battery pack.
Do not apply shock or force to the battery pack, such as by hitting it with a hammer or stepping on or dropping it.
Do not short-circuit the battery pack or allow the battery pack to come into contact with any metal objects such as
paperclips.
Do not leave the battery pack in locations where the temperature may reach 60°C (140°F) or higher, such as in a
car parked under direct sunlight.
Do not dispose of battery packs in fire or incinerate them.
Do not use leaking or damaged lithium-ion batteries.
Do not charge the battery pack in any manner other than that specified.
Keep the battery pack out of reach of infants and children.
Do not expose the battery pack to water.
Be sure to use only genuine Sony branded battery packs.
Recycle used batteries.
Do not leave the battery pack in extremely cold environments at -20°C (–4°F) or lower or in extremely low-
pressure environments at 11.6 kPa or lower.
Coin battery / button cell
Do not swallow coin batteries or button cells. They can cause chemical burns.
This product contains a coin battery or button cell. If you swallow a coin battery or button cell, death or serious
injury may occur. A swallowed coin battery or button cell can cause internal chemical burns in as little as 2 hours.
Keep new and used batteries out of reach of children. If the battery cover does not close securely, stop using the
camera and keep it out of the reach of children.
Seek immediate medical attention if a battery is suspected to have been swallowed or inserted inside any part of
the body.
Do not charge coin batteries or button cells.
If the battery leaks, observe the following.
Immediately remove the battery from any sources of fire. There is a risk of fire or explosion due to leaked liquid or
gas from the battery igniting.
If leaked liquid gets into your eyes, do not rub them. Instead, immediately wash them thoroughly with clean water
and seek medical attention.
If you get leaked liquid in your mouth or lick it, immediately rinse your mouth with water and seek medical
attention.
If leaked liquid gets on your body or clothes, rinse it off thoroughly with water.
Caution
23
If you do not observe the following precautions, fire, serious injury, or death may occur.
Do not disassemble or modify this product.
Doing so may result in fire or electric shock. For inspection or repair, consult your dealer or local authorized
service facility.
Do not allow water or any objects (metal, flammable objects, etc.) to get inside the product.
Doing so may result in fire or electric shock. If water or other objects get into the product, immediately turn off the
camera and remove the battery. Unplug the AC adaptor and battery charger from the wall outlet (wall socket), and
then consult your dealer or local authorized service facility.
Do not use the product while driving.
Do not shoot or play back images or look at the monitor while driving a car or motorcycle, etc. Doing so may result
in a traffic accident.
Pay attention to your surroundings while shooting.
Do not shoot images without being aware of your surroundings. Doing so may cause accidents or injuries.
Do not touch a powered AC adaptor, powered battery charger, or charging battery for long periods of time.
Even if the product or its accessories do not feel hot to you while using them, leaving the same part of the skin
exposed to them for a long time may cause low-temperature burns, resulting in redness and blisters.
Do not damage cables.
Placing cables near a heater or heating or processing cables may cause a fire or electric shock. When unplugging
cables, always hold the plug to avoid damaging the cord.
Do not point assist lights such as a flash at people at a close distance.
Using a flash or assist light at a close distance may cause vision problems. When you shoot infants and small
children, keep a distance of 1 m (3.28 ft.) or more.
Emitting a flash or an assist light at drivers may dazzle them and cause an accident.
Do not look at sunlight or a strong light source through the camera viewfinder or removed lens.
Doing so may result in vision impairment or blindness.
Do not use the product with wet hands.
Doing so may cause an electric shock.
Attach the battery pack, the shoulder belt, and the strap correctly.
If these are not attached correctly, the product may fall and cause an injury. Also, make sure that the belt or strap
is not damaged before use.
Notes
To prevent injury or damage to property, be sure to observe the following.
Do not use the product in highly humid locations where water droplets may fall, etc. or in locations exposed
to a lot of dust, oily smoke, or steam.
Doing so may cause a fire or electric shock.
Do not place the product in an unstable location.
Placing the product on an unstable or tilted surface or using the tripod in an unstable position may cause the
product to fall or tip over and result in injury.
Do not cover the air vent.
24
Using the product with the air vent covered may cause heat to build up inside, resulting in a fire or malfunction.
Do not cover the product with a cloth while in use.
Doing so may cause heat to build up inside, resulting in deformation of the case or even fire or electric shock.
Do not subject the lens or monitor to impacts.
The lens and monitor are made of glass and may break if subjected to a strong impact, resulting in injury.
When using headphones, do not listen at high volumes for long periods of time.
Listening at high volumes for long periods of time may have a detrimental effect on your hearing.
Do not leave the lens under direct sunlight.
Sunlight may focus through the lens and cause a fire.
Be careful in handling the product when using it with other accessories attached via brackets, etc.
It may cause an unexpected accident due to falling, etc.
Disconnect the product from the power source before a long period of time without using it.
If you will not use the product for a long period of time, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet (wall socket)
and remove the battery from the product before storing it.
TP1002003325
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
25
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Precautions
Refer also to “Notes on use” in the Startup Guide (supplied) for this product.
We use environmentally conscious packaging materials
Environmentally conscious packaging materials were used for the camera and supplied accessories. Due to the
characteristics of the packaging materials, note the following points.
Powder, etc. from the packaging materials may adhere to the camera or supplied accessories. In this case, remove it
with a commercially available blower or cleaning paper before use.
The packaging materials will deteriorate with continuous use. Be careful when carrying the product by the packaging.
On the data specifications described in this manual
The data on performance and specifications in this manual are based on an ordinary ambient temperature of 25ºC
(77°F), except where otherwise indicated.
For the battery pack, the data are based on a battery pack that was fully charged until the charge lamp turned off.
On operating temperatures
Shooting in extremely cold or hot environments that exceed the operating temperature range is not recommended.
Under high ambient temperatures, the temperature of the camera rises quickly.
When the temperature of the camera rises, the image quality may deteriorate. It is recommended that you wait until
the temperature of the camera drops before continuing to shoot.
Depending on the camera and battery temperature, the camera may become unable to record movies or the power
may turn off automatically to protect the camera. A message will be displayed on the screen before the power turns
off or you can no longer record movies. In this case, leave the power off and wait until the camera and battery
temperature goes down. If you turn on the power without letting the camera and battery cool sufficiently, the power
may turn off again, or you may still be unable to record movies.
Notes on recording/streaming for long periods of time or recording 4K movies
During use, the camera and battery may become warm. This is not a malfunction.
Especially during 4K shooting, the recording time may be shorter under low temperature conditions. Warm up the
battery pack or replace it with a new battery.
Notes on playing movies on other devices
XAVC HS and XAVC S movies can only be played back on compatible devices.
Notes on recording/playback
Before you start recording, make a trial recording to make sure that the camera is working correctly.
The recorded image may be different from the image you monitored before recording.
Playback of images recorded with your product on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with
other equipment on your product are not guaranteed.
Sony can provide no guarantees in the event of failure to record, or loss of or damage to recorded images or audio
data, due to a malfunction of the camera or recording media, etc. We recommend backing up important data.
Once you format the memory card, all the data recorded on the memory card will be deleted and cannot be restored.
Before formatting, copy the data to a computer or other device.
Attach the shoulder strap to the camera to prevent it from falling.
26
When using this product with a tripod or grip, be sure to attach the camera securely.
Notes on using a tripod
Use a tripod with a screw less than 5.5 mm (7/32 inches) long. Otherwise, you cannot firmly secure the camera, and
damage to the camera may occur.
Notes on handling memory cards
The temperature of memory cards may rise after saving. This is not a malfunction.
Backing up memory cards
Data may be corrupted in the following cases. Be sure to back up the data for protection.
When the memory card is removed, the USB cable is disconnected, or the product is turned off in the middle of a
read or write operation.
When the memory card is used in locations subject to static electricity or electrical noise.
Database file error
If you insert a memory card that does not contain an image database file into the product and turn on the power, the
product automatically creates an image database file using some of the memory card’s capacity. The process may
take a long time and you cannot operate the product until the process is completed.
If a database file error occurs, export all the data to your computer, etc. to save it, and then format the memory card
using this product.
Do not use/store the product in the following places
In an extremely hot, cold or humid place
In places such as in a car parked in the sun, the camera body may become deformed and this may cause a
malfunction.
Storing under direct sunlight or near a heater
The camera body may become discolored or deformed, and this may cause a malfunction.
In a location subject to rocking vibration
It may cause malfunctions and an inability to record data. In addition, the recording media may become unusable,
and recorded data may be corrupted.
Near strong magnetic place
In sandy or dusty places
Be careful not to let sand or dust get into the product. This may cause the product to malfunction, and in some cases
this malfunction cannot be repaired.
In places with high humidity
This may cause the lens to mold.
In areas where strong radio waves or radiation are being emitted
Recording and playback may not function correctly.
On moisture condensation
If the product is brought directly from a cold to a warm location, moisture may condense inside or outside the product.
This moisture condensation may cause a malfunction of the product.
To prevent moisture condensation when you bring the product directly from a cold to a warm location, first put it in a
plastic bag and seal it to prevent air from entering. Wait for about an hour until the temperature of the product has
reached the ambient temperature.
If moisture condensation occurs, turn off the product and wait about an hour for the moisture to evaporate. Note that if
you attempt to shoot with moisture remaining inside the lens, you will be unable to record clear images.
Precaution on carrying
Do not hold, hit, or apply excessive force to the following parts, if your camera is equipped with them:
27
The lens part
The movable monitor part
The movable flash part
The movable viewfinder part
Do not carry the camera with the tripod attached. This may cause the tripod socket hole to break.
Do not sit down in a chair or other place with the camera in the back pocket of your trousers or skirt, as this may
cause malfunction or damage the camera.
Notes on handling the product
Although this camera is designed and built to be dustproof and drip-proof, it cannot completely prevent the ingress of
dust or water droplets.
Before you connect the cable to the terminal, be sure to check the orientation of the terminal. Then, insert the cable
straight. Do not insert or remove the cable forcefully. This may cause the terminal part to break.
The camera uses magnetic parts including magnets. Do not bring objects affected by magnetism, including credit
cards and floppy disks, close to the camera.
On storing
For lens-integrated cameras
Always attach the lens cap when you are not using the camera. (Only for models supplied with a lens cap)
For interchangeable-lens cameras
Always attach the lens front cap or body cap when you are not using the camera. To prevent dust or debris from
getting inside the camera, remove dust from the body cap before attaching it to the camera.
If the camera is dirty after use, clean it. Water, sand, dust, salt, etc. left in the camera may cause a malfunction.
Notes on using lenses
When using the power zoom lens, be careful not to get your fingers or any other objects caught in the lens. (Only for
models with a power zoom feature or interchangeable lens cameras)
If you must place the camera under a light source such as sunlight, attach the lens cap to the camera. (Only for
models supplied with a lens cap or interchangeable lens cameras)
If sunlight or a strong light source enters the camera through the lens, it may focus inside the camera and cause
smoke or fire. Attach the lens cap to the lens when storing the camera. When you shoot with backlighting, keep the
sun sufficiently far away from the angle of view. Note that smoke or fire may occur even if the light source is slightly
away from the angle of view.
Do not directly expose the lens to beams such as laser beams. These may damage the image sensor and cause the
camera to malfunction.
If the subject is too close, the image may show any dust or fingerprints on the lens. Wipe the lens with a soft cloth,
etc.
Notes on the flash (Only for models with a flash)
Keep your fingers away from the flash. The light-emitting part may get hot.
Remove any dirt from the surface of the flash. Dirt on the surface of the flash may emit smoke or burn due to heat
generated by the emission of light. If there is dirt/dust, clean it off with a soft cloth.
Restore the flash to its original position after using it. Make sure that the flash portion is not sticking up. (Only for
models with a movable flash)
Notes on the Multi Interface Shoe (Only for models with a Multi Interface Shoe)
When using the camera with an accessory attached to the Multi Interface Shoe, be sure to lower the viewfinder. If you
change the viewfinder angle while an accessory is attached to the Multi Interface Shoe, it may interfere with the
viewfinder and cause scratches.
When attaching or detaching accessories to or from the Multi Interface Shoe, first turn off both the accessory and the
camera. When attaching an accessory, confirm that it is firmly fastened to the camera.
Do not use the Multi Interface Shoe with a commercially available flash that applies voltages of 250 V or more or has
the opposite polarity of the camera. It may cause a malfunction. (Only models that support flash shooting)
28
Notes on the viewfinder and flash (Only for models with a viewfinder or a flash)
Take care that your finger is not in the way when pushing the viewfinder or flash down. (Only for models with a
movable viewfinder or a movable flash)
If water, dust or sand adheres to the viewfinder or flash unit, it may cause a malfunction. (Only for models with a
movable viewfinder or a movable flash)
Notes on the viewfinder (Only for models with a viewfinder)
When shooting with the viewfinder, you may experience symptoms such as eyestrain, fatigue, travel sickness, or
nausea. We recommend that you take a break at regular intervals when you are shooting with the viewfinder.
In case you may feel uncomfortable, refrain from using the viewfinder until your condition recovers, and consult your
doctor if necessary.
Although the viewfinder is built with high-precision technology for 99.99% or more effective pixels, black dots may
appear, and white, red, blue, and green dots may not disappear. This is not a malfunction. These dots are not
recorded.
Do not forcibly push down the viewfinder when the eyepiece is pulled out. It may cause a malfunction. (Only for
models with a movable viewfinder and an eyepiece that can be pulled out)
If you pan the camera while looking into the viewfinder or move your eyes around, the image in the viewfinder may be
distorted or the color of the image may change. This is a characteristic of the lens or display device and is not a
malfunction. When you shoot an image, we recommend that you look at the center area of the viewfinder.
The image may be slightly distorted near the corners of the viewfinder. This is not a malfunction. When you want to
see the full composition with all its details, you can also use the monitor.
If you use the camera in a cold location, the image may have a trailing appearance. This is not a malfunction.
When the temperature of the camera changes, the color tone of the viewfinder display may change due to the
characteristics of the display device.
Do not directly expose the viewfinder to beams such as laser beams. These may damage the inside of the viewfinder
and cause the camera to malfunction.
Notes on the monitor
Although the monitor is built with high-precision technology for 99.99% or more effective pixels, black dots may
appear, and white, red, blue, and green dots may not disappear. This is not a malfunction. These dots are not
recorded.
Do not press against the monitor. The monitor may be discolored and that may cause a malfunction.
If the monitor has drops of water or other liquids on it, wipe it with a soft cloth. If the monitor stays wet, the surface of
the monitor may change or deteriorate. This may cause a malfunction.
If you use the camera in a cold location, the image may have a trailing appearance. This is not a malfunction.
When you connect cables to the terminals on the camera, the rotating range of the monitor may become limited.
Notes on the image sensor
If you point the camera at an extremely strong light source while shooting images with a low ISO sensitivity, highlighted
areas in the images may be recorded as black areas.
Notes on the cooling fan
Do not cover the air vent. The design ensures ventilation even when the monitor is closed.
The air vent may get hot.
Do not use the camera in areas where there are dust or sand particles in the air.
If the cooling fan emits abnormal noises, stop using the camera and contact a service facility.
Notes on the XLR handle unit (supplied) (Only for models supplied with the XLR handle unit)
Before connecting/disconnecting an external microphone or device to/from the INPUT1 or INPUT2 jack, be sure to
set the INPUT1 (LINE/MIC/MIC+48V) or INPUT2 (LINE/MIC/MIC+48V) switch to a position other than “MIC+48V.”
Plugging/unplugging the cable into/from the external microphone or device while the switch is set to “MIC+48V” may
cause loud noise or a malfunction of the device.
29
While recording is in progress, operating and handling noises from the camera or lens may be recorded. Touching the
handle while recording is in progress will cause noise to be included in the recording.
While recording is in progress, do not change the INPUT1 or INPUT2 switch settings.
If the microphone of the handle is in proximity to a speaker, acoustic feedback may occur. In this case, move the
handle away from the speaker to allow the maximum distance between the microphone and the speaker, or lower the
speaker volume.
If dust or water droplets are present on the surface of the microphone, successful recording may not be possible. Be
sure to clean the microphone surface before using the handle.
Turn off the camera before attaching/removing the handle.
When the handle is connected to the camera and the HANDLE AUDIO ON/OFF switch is set to ON, the internal
microphone of the camera cannot record audio input.
When attaching the handle to the camera, fasten the two handle-attachment screws securely. Using the handle
without fastening the handle-attachment screws may damage the Multi Interface Shoe terminal or cause the handle
to fall off.
On image data compatibility
This product conforms with DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan
Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association).
Services and software provided by other companies
Network services, content, and the [operating system and] software of this Product may be subject to individual terms
and conditions and changed, interrupted or discontinued at any time and may require fees, registration and credit card
information.
Notes on connecting to the internet
When connecting to a wireless LAN network, this camera cannot connect to an access point that only uses WEP or
WPA, which are security methods with potential vulnerabilities.
This camera is not a network device (e.g., a router or switching hub). We strongly recommend connecting this
camera to a network that can be properly configured and managed to protect against network-based attacks such as
DoS (Denial of Service) attacks.
When connecting this camera to a network, connect it via a properly configured and managed router or connect it to a
LAN port with the same functionality as such a router. If you do not connect it in this way (for example, if you connect
it to a free Wi-Fi network), security issues may occur. Properly configuring the router will provide sufficient protection
against DoS attacks or loss of functionality of devices in the network. If you notice any abnormality, immediately
disconnect the camera from the network.
Notes on security
If you set [Security] to [None] in the camera’s wireless LAN settings and connect the camera to an access point,
wireless communications between the camera and the access point will not be encrypted, and third parties within the
signal range may be able to intercept the content of the communications. Use WPA3 or WPA2, which are more
secure security methods.
SONY WILL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM FAILURE TO IMPLEMENT
PROPER SECURITY MEASURES ON TRANSMISSION DEVICES, UNAVOIDABLE DATA LEAKS CAUSED BY
TRANSMISSION SPECIFICATIONS, OR OTHER SECURITY PROBLEMS.
Depending on the usage environment, unauthorized third parties on the network may be able to access the product.
When connecting the camera to a network, be sure to confirm that the network is protected securely.
Notes on the FTP function
FTP does not encrypt content, usernames, or passwords. To ensure secure transfers, use FTPES (FTPS) or SFTP.
About the SFTP and FTPES (FTPS) functions
The SFTP and FTPES (FTPS) functions support various encryption algorithms to ensure secure file transfers. To ensure
compatibility with a wide range of servers, they support multiple encryption algorithms, including some that do not comply
with current security best practices. For details, refer to the following URL.
30
https://helpguide.sony.net/di/sftp/v1/h_zz/index.html
Optional accessories
It is recommended that you use genuine Sony accessories.
Some Sony accessories are only available in certain countries and regions.
Available models and kits
Some models and kits are only available in certain countries and regions.
TP1001658278
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
31
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Lending, transferring or discarding the camera and/or memory card to others (Notes
on protecting private information)
Important information may be recorded on the camera and/or memory card depending on the functions and camera
settings.
Before lending, transferring, or discarding the camera and/or memory card to others, be sure to read the following and
make sure that you have completed the procedures.
Notes on lending, transferring, or discarding the camera to others
Before lending, transferring, or discarding the camera to others, be sure to perform the following operation to protect
private information.
Select MENU → (Setup) → [Reset/Save Settings] → [Setting Reset] → [Initialize].
When you initialize the device, the following information is deleted:
Faces registered in [ Face Memory]
Root certificates for RTMP, the cloud, and the correct date and time
Root certificates for FTP
Access point information
Access authentication information
FTP server settings
Cloud connection information
Network streaming connection information
Notes on using the cloud service (Creators' Cloud)
Before lending or transferring the camera, make sure that the camera linkage information and upload settings are
appropriate to prevent damage such as the content on the camera being uploaded to an unintended third party’s
Creators' Cloud. If the settings are not appropriate, be sure to perform the following operations.
If you will transfer or lend the camera: initialize the camera or cancel the linkage with Creators' Cloud on the camera.
Also, cancel the camera linkage in Creators' Cloud.
If the camera is transferred to you or you borrow the camera: initialize the camera or cancel the linkage with Creators'
Cloud on the camera.
Note that Creators' Cloud may only be available in certain countries and regions.
Notes on lending, transferring, or discarding a memory card to others
Executing [Format] or [Delete] on the camera or a computer may not completely delete the data on the memory card.
Before lending or transferring a memory card to others, we recommend that you delete any data on it completely using
data deletion software. When discarding a memory card, we recommend that you physically destroy it.
Notes on network functions
When you use network functions, unintended third parties on the network may access the camera, depending on the
usage environment. For example, unauthorized access to the camera may occur in network environments to which
another network device is connected or can connect without permission. Sony bears no responsibility for any loss or
damage caused by connecting to such network environments.
32
Notes on the [ Face Memory] function
Faces registered through the [ Face Memory] function are considered biometric information. Before lending or
transferring this camera, initialize the camera to prevent face information registered through the [ Face Memory]
function from being passed on to an unintended third party.
Notes on location information
If you upload and share still images or movies taken with this camera on the Internet while the location information is
linked with the dedicated smartphone application, you may accidentally reveal the location information to a third party. To
prevent third parties from obtaining your location information, deactivate the [Location Information Linkage] function of
the dedicated application.
Warning on copyrights
Television programs, films, videotapes, and other materials may be copyrighted. Unauthorized recording of such
materials may be contrary to the provisions of the copyright laws.
Related Topic
Creating an account for Creators' Cloud and linking your camera to the account (Cloud Connection)
Displaying cloud connection information (Cloud Information)
TP1001665529
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
33
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Notes on the battery pack and charging the battery
Notes on using the battery pack
Be sure to use only genuine Sony brand battery packs.
The correct remaining battery indicator may not be displayed under some operating or environmental conditions.
Do not expose the battery pack to water. The battery pack is not water-resistant.
Do not leave the battery pack in extremely hot places, such as in a car or under direct sunlight.
Notes on charging the battery pack
Charge the battery pack (supplied) before using the product for the first time.
The charged battery pack will discharge little by little even if you do not use it. Charge the battery pack each time
before you use the product so that you do not miss any opportunities to shoot images.
Do not charge battery packs except battery packs specified for this product. Doing so can result in leaks, overheating,
explosions, electric shocks, burns, or injuries.
When you use a completely new battery pack or a battery pack that has not been used for a long time, the charge
lamp (CHARGE) may flash quickly when the battery is charged. If this happens, remove the battery pack and then re-
insert it to recharge.
We recommend charging the battery pack in an ambient temperature of between 10 °C and 30 °C (50 °F and 86 °F).
The battery pack may not be correctly charged in temperatures outside this range.
Operation cannot be guaranteed with all external power supplies.
When charging is finished, disconnect the AC Adaptor from the wall outlet (wall socket) or disconnect the USB cable
from the camera. Not doing so may result in a shorter battery life.
Do not continuously or repeatedly charge the battery pack without using it if it is already fully charged or close to fully
charged. Doing so may cause a deterioration in battery performance.
If the product's charge lamp flashes while charging, remove the battery pack being charged, and then insert the same
battery pack firmly back into the product. If the charge lamp flashes again, this may indicate a faulty battery or that a
battery pack other than the specified type has been inserted. Check that the battery pack is the specified type.
If the battery pack is the specified type, remove the battery pack, replace it with a new or different one and check that
the newly inserted battery is charging correctly. If the newly inserted battery is charging correctly, the previously
inserted battery may be faulty.
If the charge lamp flashes while charging the battery pack inside the camera, this indicates that charging has stopped
temporarily and is on standby. Charging stops and enters standby status automatically when the temperature is
outside of the recommended operating temperature. When the temperature returns to the appropriate range,
charging resumes and the charge lamp lights up again.
Remaining battery indicator
The remaining battery indicator appears on the screen. It takes about one minute for the correct remaining battery
indicator to appear.
The correct remaining battery indicator may not be displayed under some operating or environmental conditions.
If the remaining battery indicator does not appear on the screen, press the DISP (Display Setting) button to display it.
Effective use of the battery pack
Battery performance decreases in low temperature environments. So in cold places, the operational time of the
battery pack is shorter. To ensure longer battery pack use, we recommend putting the battery pack in your pocket
close to your body to warm it up, and insert it in the product immediately before you start shooting. If there are any
metal objects such as keys in your pocket, be careful of causing a short-circuit.
34
The battery pack will run down quickly if you use the flash or continuous shooting function frequently, turn the power
on/off frequently, or set the monitor very bright.
We recommend preparing spare battery packs and taking trial shots before taking the actual shots.
If the battery terminal is dirty, you may not be able to turn on the product or the battery pack may not be properly
charged. In that case, clean the battery by lightly wiping off any dust using a soft cloth or a cotton swab.
How to store the battery pack
To maintain the battery pack’s function, charge the battery pack and then fully discharge it in the camera at least once a
year before storing it. Store the battery in a cool, dry place after removing it from the camera.
On battery life
The battery life is limited. If you use the same battery repeatedly, or use the same battery for a long period, the
battery capacity decreases gradually. If the available time of the battery is shortened significantly, it is probably time to
replace the battery pack with a new one.
The battery life varies according to how the battery pack is stored and the operating conditions and environment in
which each battery pack is used.
TP1001619316
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
35
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Notes on memory card
If (overheating warning icon) is displayed on the monitor, do not remove the memory card from the camera right
away. Instead, wait for a while after turning off the camera, and then remove the memory card. If you touch the
memory card while it is hot, you may drop it and the memory card may be damaged. Be careful when removing the
memory card.
If you repeatedly shoot and delete images for a long time, fragmentation of data in a file in the memory card may
occur, and movie recording may be interrupted in the middle of shooting. If this happens, save your images to a
computer or other storage location, then execute [Format] using this camera.
Do not remove the battery pack or the memory card, disconnect the USB cable, or turn the camera off while the
access lamp is lit up. This may cause the data on the memory card to become damaged.
Be sure to back up the data for protection.
Not all memory cards are guaranteed to operate correctly.
Images recorded on an SDXC/CFexpress Type A memory card cannot be imported to or played on computers or AV
devices not compatible with exFAT when connected using a USB cable. Make sure that the device is compatible with
exFAT before connecting it to the camera. If you connect your camera to an incompatible device, you may be
prompted to format the card. Never format the card in response to this prompt, as doing so will erase all data on the
card.
(exFAT is the file system used on SDXC memory cards or CFexpress Type A memory cards.)
Do not expose the memory card to water.
Do not strike, bend or drop the memory card.
Do not use or store the memory card under the following conditions:
High temperature locations such as in a car parked under the sun
Locations exposed to direct sunlight
Humid locations or locations with corrosive substances present
If the memory card is used near areas with strong magnetization, or used in locations subject to static electricity or
electrical noise, the data on the memory card may become damaged.
Do not touch the terminal section of the memory card with your hand or a metal object.
Do not leave the memory card within the reach of small children. They might accidentally swallow it.
Do not disassemble or modify the memory card.
The memory card may be hot just after it has been used for a long time. Be careful when you handle it.
Memory card formatted with a computer is not guaranteed to operate with the product. Be sure to format the memory
card using this product.
Data read/write speeds differ depending on the combination of the memory card and the equipment used.
Do not press down hard when writing in the memo space on the memory card.
Do not attach a label on the memory card itself nor on a memory card adaptor. You may not be able to remove the
memory card.
If the write-protect switch or delete-protect switch of an SD memory card is set to the LOCK position, you cannot
record or delete images. In this case, set the switch to the record position.
To use a microSD memory card with this product:
Be sure to insert the memory card into a dedicated adaptor. If you insert a memory card into the product without a
memory card adaptor, you might not be able to remove it from the product.
When inserting a memory card into a memory card adaptor, be sure that the memory card is inserted in the
correct direction and then insert it as far as it will go. If the card is not inserted properly, it may result in a
malfunction.
Related Topic
36
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Cleaning the image sensor (Sensor Cleaning)
If dust or debris gets inside the camera and adheres to the surface of the image sensor (the part that converts the light to
an electric signal), it may appear as dark spots on the image, depending on the shooting environment. If this happens,
clean the image sensor quickly by following the steps below.
Hint
For how to check the amount of dust on the image sensor, and for further details on cleaning methods, please refer to the
following URL.
https://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/www/support/ilc/sensor/index.php
Note
When executing the cleaning mode, remove the lens with the camera turned on.
Do not turn off the camera during cleaning.
Make sure that the remaining battery level is 51% or more before performing cleaning.
To clean the image sensor with the camera turned off, set [Shutter When Pwr OFF] under [Anti-dust Function] to [Off].
Do not use a spray type blower as it may scatter water droplets inside the camera body.
Confirm that the battery has been charged sufficiently.
1
MENU → (Setup) → [Setup Option] → [Anti-dust Function] → [Sensor Cleaning] → [Enter].
The image sensor vibrates a little to shake off the dust.
2
Detach the lens.
3
Use a commercially available blower to clean the image sensor surface and the surrounding area.
Hold the camera slightly face downward so that the dust falls out.
4
Turn off the camera.
5
Attach the lens.
6
38
Do not put the tip of a blower into the cavity beyond the lens mount area, so that the tip of the blower does not touch the image
sensor.
When cleaning the image sensor with a blower, do not blow too hard. If you blow the sensor too hard, the inside of the product
may be damaged.
If the dust remains even after you cleaned the product as described, consult the service facility.
During cleaning, the image sensor emits a vibrating noise. This is not a malfunction.
Cleaning may be performed automatically when the power is turned off.
Related Topic
Attaching/removing a lens
Anti-dust Function
TP1001619257
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
39
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
On cleaning
Cleaning the lens
Do not use a cleaning solution containing organic solvents, such as thinner, or benzine.
When cleaning the lens surface, remove dust with a commercially available blower. In case of dust that sticks to the
surface, wipe it off with a soft cloth or tissue paper slightly moistened with lens cleaning solution. Wipe in a spiral
pattern from the center to the outside. Do not spray lens cleaning solution directly onto the lens surface.
Cleaning the camera body
Do not touch the parts of the product inside the lens mount, such as a lens signal contact. To clean inside the lens mount,
use a commercially available blower* to blow any dust off.
Cleaning the product surface
Clean the product surface with a soft cloth slightly moistened with water, then wipe the surface with a dry cloth. To
prevent damage to the finish or casing:
Do not expose the product to chemical products such as thinner, benzine, alcohol, disposable cloths, insect repellent,
sunscreen or insecticide.
Do not touch the product with any of the above on your hand.
Do not leave the product in contact with rubber or vinyl for a long time.
Cleaning the monitor
If you wipe the monitor firmly using tissue paper, etc., the monitor may be scratched.
If the monitor becomes dirty with fingerprints or dust, gently remove the dust from the surface, and then clean the
monitor using soft cloth, etc.
TP1001619319
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
Do not use a spray-type blower as doing so may cause a malfunction.
*
40
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Checking the camera and the supplied items
The number in parentheses indicates the number of pieces.
Camera (1)
NP-FZ100 Rechargeable Battery Pack (1)
Eyepiece Cup (1)
XLR handle unit (1) (ILME-FX2 only)
Handle shoe cap (1) (attached to the handle) (ILME-FX2 only)
Body Cap (1) (Attached to the camera)
Shoe Cap (1) (Attached to the camera)
Model names XLR handle unit
ILME-FX2 Supplied
ILME-FX2B Not supplied
41
Startup Guide (1)
Reference Guide (1)
Accessories may differ depending on the country or region. Please check the Startup Guide for details on accessories.
TP1001667048
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
42
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Front side
1 button (Custom button 1)/IRIS (Iris) button1.
Shutter button2.
W/T (zoom) lever3.
Front dial
You can quickly adjust the settings for each shooting mode.
4.
Lens release button5.
WLAN antenna (built-in)
Wi-Fi communication may be blocked if you cover this part with your hand, etc.
6.
Visible light and IR sensor
Do not cover this part during shooting.
7.
Recording lamp8.
Microphone9.
6 button (Custom button 6)/REC (Recording) button10.
Mounting index11.
Image sensor*12.
Mount13.
Lens contacts*14.
Do not directly touch these parts.
*
43
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Rear side
Diopter-adjustment dial
Adjust the diopter-adjustment dial according to your eyesight until the display appears clearly in the viewfinder.
If it is hard to operate the diopter-adjustment dial, remove the eyepiece cup before operating the dial.
1.
Eye sensor2.
Viewfinder
You can adjust the viewfinder angle to suit the shooting situation.
(A): Approx. 90°
3.
Eyepiece Cup
To attach the eyepiece cup
Fit the eyepiece cup hook (A) into the groove on the viewfinder (B), and while slightly stretching the eyepiece cup, fit
the other side into the same groove.
4.
45
Monitor/Touch panel
You can adjust the monitor to an easily viewable angle and shoot from any position.
(A): Approx. 176°
(B): Approx. 270°
You may not be able to adjust the monitor angle depending on the type of a tripod you use. In such a case,
release the tripod screw once to adjust the monitor angle.
Do not apply excessive force when opening, closing, or rotating the monitor. Doing so may cause a malfunction.
5.
Power switch6.
Ventilation inlet
Do not cover the ventilation inlet. The design ensures ventilation even when the monitor is closed.
7.
Power lamp
When the camera is in the power-saving mode, the power lamp turns off.
Before removing the battery pack, make sure that the power switch is set to (standby) and the power lamp is
turned off. Removing the battery pack while the power switch is set to (On) may damage the camera or the
memory card.
8.
Recording lamp9.
MENU button10.
Still/Movie switch11.
Rear dial
You can quickly adjust the settings for each shooting mode.
12.
5 button (Custom button 5)13.
Fn (Function) button/MODE (Mode) button14.
HOME (Home) button15.
Control wheel16.
Access lamp17.
For shooting: 4 button (Custom button 4)
For viewing: (Delete) button
18.
46
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Top side
REC (Recording) button
When recording is started by pressing the REC (Recording) button, the button lights up in red.
1.
Multi-selector2.
3 button (Custom button 3)/ISO (ISO sensitivity) button3.
2 button (Custom button 2)/WB (White balance) button4.
Multi Interface Shoe*
Some accessories may not go in all the way and protrude backward from the Multi interface shoe. However, when the
accessory reaches the front end of the shoe, the connection is completed.
5.
Image sensor position mark
The image sensor is the sensor that converts light into an electric signal. The position of the image sensor is
indicated by (Image sensor position mark). When you measure the exact distance between the camera and
the subject, refer to the position of the horizontal line.
If the subject is closer than the minimum shooting distance of the lens, the focus cannot be confirmed. Make sure
you put enough distance between the subject and the camera.
6.
Thread holes for accessories
Support 1/4-20 UNC screws
Use an accessory with a screw less than 5.5 mm (7/32 inches) long. Otherwise, you will be unable to firmly secure
the accessory, and damage to the camera may occur.
7.
48
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Sides
7 button (Custom button 7)1.
Hooks for shoulder strap (sold separately)2.
HDMI type A jack3.
Thread hole for accessories
Uses M3 screws
Use an accessory with a screw less than 3.5 mm (1/8 inches) long. Otherwise, you will be unable to firmly secure the
accessory, and damage to the camera may occur.
4.
Multi/Micro USB Terminal
This terminal supports Micro USB-compatible devices.
5.
USB Type-C® terminal6.
Charge lamp7.
(Microphone) jack
When an external microphone is connected, the built-in microphone and the XLR handle unit (supplied or sold
separately) turn off automatically. When the external microphone is a plugin-power type, the power of the microphone
is supplied by the camera.
8.
(Headphones) jack9.
Ventilation outlet
Do not use the camera while touching the area around the ventilation outlet for a long time. Doing so may cause low-
temperature burns.
10.
Hooks for shoulder strap (sold separately)11.
Thread hole for accessories
Supports 1/4-20 UNC screws
12.
50
Notes on USB terminals
You can use either the USB Type-C terminal or the Multi/Micro USB Terminal for USB communications. However, you
cannot conduct USB communications with both terminals simultaneously. Use the USB Type-C terminal to supply power
and charge the battery pack. This camera cannot be powered via the Multi/Micro USB terminal.
You can use accessories for the Multi/Micro USB Terminal, such as a remote commander (sold separately), while
supplying power or performing remote shooting using the USB Type-C terminal.
Notes on the terminal cover
Ensure that the terminal cover is closed before use.
Related Topic
Front side
Rear side
Top side
Bottom
TP1001667056
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
Use an accessory with a screw less than 5.5 mm (7/32 inches) long. Otherwise, you will be unable to firmly secure
the accessory, and damage to the camera may occur.
SLOT 1 (Memory card slot 1)13.
SLOT 2 (Memory card slot 2)14.
51
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Bottom
Lock lever1.
Battery insertion slot2.
Battery cover
Before attaching an accessory such as the Multi Battery Adaptor Kit (sold separately), remove the battery cover.
To remove the battery cover
Pull the battery cover release lever (A) in the direction of the arrow, and then remove the battery cover.
To attach the battery cover
Insert the shaft on one side of the battery cover into the attachment site, and then push in the battery cover by
attaching the shaft on the opposite side.
3.
52
Related Topic
Front side
Rear side
Top side
Sides
TP1001667057
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
Ventilation inlet
Do not cover the ventilation inlet.
4.
Tripod socket hole
Supports 1/4-20 UNC screws
Use a tripod with a screw less than 5.5 mm (7/32 inches) long. Otherwise, you cannot firmly secure the camera, and
damage to the camera may occur.
5.
53
ATT (INPUT1) switch
Select the standard input level of the INPUT1 jack. This switch setting is active when the INPUT1
(LINE/MIC/MIC+48V) switch is set to “MIC” or “MIC+48V.”
1.
INPUT1 (LINE/MIC/MIC+48V) switch
Select the option suitable for the device connected to the INPUT1 jack.
2.
ATT (INPUT2) switch
Select the standard input level of the INPUT2 jack. This switch setting is active when the INPUT2
(LINE/MIC/MIC+48V) switch is set to “MIC” or “MIC+48V.”
3.
INPUT2 (LINE/MIC/MIC+48V) switch
Select the option suitable for the device connected to the INPUT2 jack.
4.
LOW CUT (INPUT1) switch
Use this switch to minimize unwanted noise by attenuating low-frequency components of the input audio from the
INPUT1 jack.
5.
AUTO/MAN (INPUT3) switch
Select the method (Auto/Manual) for adjusting the volume level of the input audio from the INPUT3 jack.
6.
AUTO/MAN (INPUT1) switch
Select the method (Auto/Manual) for adjusting the volume level of the input audio from the INPUT1 jack.
7.
AUDIO LEVEL (INPUT1) dial
Adjust the recording volume level of the input audio from the INPUT1 jack.
8.
AUTO/MAN/LINK (INPUT2) switch
Select the method (Auto/Manual/Link to INPUT1) for adjusting the volume level of the input audio from the INPUT2
jack.
9.
AUDIO LEVEL (INPUT2) dial
Adjust the recording volume level of the input audio from the INPUT2 jack.
10.
55
Ports and jacks
Note
Do not touch the connectors with bare hands.
TP1001661320
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
LOW CUT (INPUT2) switch
Use this switch to minimize unwanted noise by attenuating low-frequency components of the input audio from the
INPUT2 jack.
11.
AUDIO LEVEL (INPUT3) dial
Adjust the recording volume level of the input audio from the INPUT3 jack.
12.
INPUT SELECT switch
Select the audio input for recording audio to the channels on the attached camera.
13.
HANDLE AUDIO switch
Enable audio input from the XLR adaptor.
14.
INPUT3 jack (stereo mini-jack, plug-in-power compatible)1.
Release lever2.
INPUT2 jack (3-pin XLR/TRS, female type, phantom-power compatible)3.
INPUT1 jack (3-pin XLR/TRS, female type, phantom-power compatible)4.
Micro USB port5.
56
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Basic icons displayed on the monitor
This section describes the screen display when the shooting mode is (Flexible Exp. Mode) for movie shooting and
(Program Auto) for still image shooting.
The following is an example of the display when [DISP (Screen Disp) Set] is set to [Display All Info.] and the touch
function icons are hidden.
The displayed content and positions are for reference only, and may differ from the actual display. Some icons may
not be displayed depending on the camera settings.
For information on how to show/hide the touch function icons and examples of the touch function icon display, refer to
“Touch function icons.”
During movie recording
Display when holding the camera vertically
[ Shoot Mode] is set to (Flexible Exp. Mode).1.
Audio level2.
[Fixed/Variable Select] is set to [Fixed] and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [59.94p].3.
Time code4.
The camera is in the shooting standby mode.5.
The focus mode is set to [Continuous AF].6.
57
During still image shooting
Display when holding the camera vertically
[ File Format] is set to [4K].7.
Slot number of the memory card recording the shooting data and recordable movie time8.
Remaining battery level9.
Shutter speed10.
Aperture value11.
Exposure compensation12.
ISO sensitivity13.
[ White Balance] is set to [Auto].14.
[ Shooting] is set to [On] or [Auto], and the recordable area is the APS-C-equivalent size.15.
[D-Range Optimizer: Auto] is selected.16.
[ Metering Mode] is set to [Multi].17.
Slot number of the memory card recording the shooting data and recordable number of still images1.
[JPEG/HEIF Switch] is set to [JPEG]. [JPEG Quality] is set to [Fine].2.
[JPEG Image Size] is set to [L: 33M].3.
[ SteadyShot] is set to [On].4.
The focus mode is set to [Single-shot AF].5.
Remaining battery level6.
[ Shoot Mode] is set to [Program Auto].7.
[Drive Mode] is set to [Single Shooting].8.
[ Focus Area] is set to [Wide].9.
[D-Range Optimizer: Auto] is selected.10.
[ Creative Look] is set to [ST(Standard)].11.
[ Metering Mode] is set to [Multi].12.
[ White Balance] is set to [Auto].13.
[ Subject Recog in AF] is set to [On] and [ Recognition Target] is set to [Human].14.
[Shutter Type] is set to [Auto].15.
58
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Touch function icons
Some functions have icons for touch operations (touch function icons). You can execute or change the settings of the
functions by touching the icons.
Settings for using the touch function icons
[Touch Operation]: [On]
[Shooting Screen] under [Touch Panel Settings]:
Set [Shooting Screen] to [On].
[Swipe Right] or [Swipe Left] → desired setting.
To show/hide the touch function icons
Swipe right or left on the shooting standby screen. The touch function icons will appear on the left and right sides of the
screen according to the settings for [Swipe Right] and [Swipe Left] under [Shooting Screen].
To hide the touch function icons, swipe the screen in the opposite direction from when you made the icons appear.
Examples of the touch function icon display and functions of each icon
The examples show the display when you set the icons to appear on both the left and right sides.
During movie recording
Icons on the left side: Shoot Mode, Self-timer, Focus Mode, Picture Profile, Creative Look
Icons on the right side: Starts recording movies, Focus Map, Recog. Target Select, Touch Func. in Shooting, switches to
the playback screen*
During still image shooting
Icons on the left side: Shoot Mode, Drive Mode, Focus Area, Picture Profile, Creative Look
Icons on the right side: Shoots a still image, starts recording movies, Recog. Target Select, Touch Func. in Shooting,
switches to the playback screen*
The shot mark button is displayed during movie recording so that shot marks can be set for the movie being recorded.
*
60
Hint
When MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [Touch Panel Settings] → [Playback Screen] is set to [On], the touch
function icons on the playback screen are always displayed.
If you set MENU → (Setup) →[Touch Operation] → [Touch Panel Settings] → [Shooting Screen] → [Icon When Monitor
Flipped] to [Flip], you can set whether to switch the left and right icons on the shooting screen when the monitor is flipped.
Related Topic
Touch Panel Settings
Shoot Mode (still image)/Shoot Mode (movie)
Self-timer (movie)
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)
Picture Profile (still image/movie)
Creative Look (still image/movie)
Shooting movies
Focus Map
Recognition Target (still image/movie)
Playing back movies
Shooting still images (Intelligent Auto)
Drive Mode
Playing back still images
TP1001665535
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
The shot mark button is displayed even during movie recording in the still image shooting mode so that shot marks can be set for the movie
being recorded.
*
61
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Touch panel
By touching the monitor, you can intuitively perform operations such as focusing on the shooting screen and operating
the playback screen. You can also use swipe gestures to control whether the Fn menu, touch icons, etc. are displayed or
hidden.
Touch operations during shooting
Touch the monitor to specify where to focus (Touch Focus).
Touch a subject on the monitor to use the touch tracking function (Touch Tracking).
You can also focus on a subject and shoot images simply by touching the subject on the screen (Touch Shutter).
When you touch the subject on the screen, the camera adjusts the brightness automatically according to the subject
(Touch AE). [Touch AE] can also be used in combination with [Touch Focus], [Touch Tracking], or [Touch Shutter].
For information on how to switch the function activated by touch operation, refer to “ Touch Panel Settings .”
Touch operations during playback
During single-image playback, swipe the screen to the left or right to move to the previous or next image.
During single-image playback, you can enlarge or reduce the displayed image by moving apart or bringing together two
fingers on the screen (pinch-out/pinch-in).
You can also double-tap the monitor to enlarge a still image or exit the enlarged image.
During movie playback, you can start or pause playback using touch operations.
62
Swipe to control the screen
You can open the function menu by swiping upward quickly on the shooting screen or playback screen.
You can show and hide the icons for functions displayed on the left and right sides of the screen by swiping left and right
quickly on the shooting screen.
You can open the home screen by swiping downward quickly on the shooting screen. (only when shooting movies)
Hint
You can also operate the camera by touching the guides displayed on the bottom of the screen (Except when in the [Intelligent
Auto] mode).
You can set whether to enable touch operations and configure detailed settings under [Touch Panel Settings].
Related Topic
Touch Operation
Touch Panel/Pad
Touch Panel Settings
Focusing using touch operations (Touch Focus)
Starting tracking with touch operations (Touch Tracking)
Shooting with touch operations (Touch Shutter)
Adjusting the exposure with touch operations (Touch AE)
Fn (function) button
Touch function icons
63
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Touch function icons
Some functions have icons for touch operations (touch function icons). You can execute or change the settings of the
functions by touching the icons.
Settings for using the touch function icons
[Touch Operation]: [On]
[Shooting Screen] under [Touch Panel Settings]:
Set [Shooting Screen] to [On].
[Swipe Right] or [Swipe Left] → desired setting.
To show/hide the touch function icons
Swipe right or left on the shooting standby screen. The touch function icons will appear on the left and right sides of the
screen according to the settings for [Swipe Right] and [Swipe Left] under [Shooting Screen].
To hide the touch function icons, swipe the screen in the opposite direction from when you made the icons appear.
Examples of the touch function icon display and functions of each icon
The examples show the display when you set the icons to appear on both the left and right sides.
During movie recording
Icons on the left side: Shoot Mode, Self-timer, Focus Mode, Picture Profile, Creative Look
Icons on the right side: Starts recording movies, Focus Map, Recog. Target Select, Touch Func. in Shooting, switches to
the playback screen*
During still image shooting
Icons on the left side: Shoot Mode, Drive Mode, Focus Area, Picture Profile, Creative Look
Icons on the right side: Shoots a still image, starts recording movies, Recog. Target Select, Touch Func. in Shooting,
switches to the playback screen*
The shot mark button is displayed during movie recording so that shot marks can be set for the movie being recorded.
*
65
Hint
When MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [Touch Panel Settings] → [Playback Screen] is set to [On], the touch
function icons on the playback screen are always displayed.
If you set MENU → (Setup) →[Touch Operation] → [Touch Panel Settings] → [Shooting Screen] → [Icon When Monitor
Flipped] to [Flip], you can set whether to switch the left and right icons on the shooting screen when the monitor is flipped.
Related Topic
Touch Panel Settings
Shoot Mode (still image)/Shoot Mode (movie)
Self-timer (movie)
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)
Picture Profile (still image/movie)
Creative Look (still image/movie)
Shooting movies
Focus Map
Recognition Target (still image/movie)
Playing back movies
Shooting still images (Intelligent Auto)
Drive Mode
Playing back still images
TP1001665535
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
The shot mark button is displayed even during movie recording in the still image shooting mode so that shot marks can be set for the movie
being recorded.
*
66
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Control wheel
On the menu screen or the screen displayed by pressing the Fn button, you can move the selection frame by turning the
control wheel or by pressing the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel. Your selection is confirmed when you
press the center of the control wheel.
The DISP (Display Setting), SHUTTER (L.PressTv Auto/Manual), ZEBRA (Zebra Display Select), and PEAKING
(Peaking Display Select) functions are assigned to the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel. In addition, you
can assign selected functions to the left/right/bottom side and the center of the control wheel, and to the rotation of
the control wheel.
During playback, you can display the next/previous image by pressing the right/left side of the control wheel or by
turning the control wheel.
During vertical display, the movement directions of the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel are also rotated
to match the orientation of the monitor so that intuitive operation is possible. The functions assigned to the
top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] will not
rotate during vertical display.
Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
Changing the function of the dial temporarily (My Dial Settings)
TP1001642579
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
67
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Multi-selector
You can move the focus area by pushing the multi-selector up/down/left/right. You can also assign a function to be
activated when you press the center of the multi-selector.
Put your finger right on top of the multi-selector to manipulate it more precisely.
You can move the focus area when [ Focus Area] is set to the following parameters:
[Zone]
[Spot: XL] / [Spot: L] / [Spot: M] / [Spot: S]
[Expand Spot]
[Custom 1] - [Custom 3]
[Tracking: Zone]
[Tracking: Spot XL] / [Tracking: Spot L] / [Tracking: Spot M] / [Tracking: Spot S]
[Tracking: Expand Spot]
[Tracking: Custom 1] - [Tracking: Custom 3]
The [Focus Standard] function is assigned to the center of the multi-selector in the default settings.
Related Topic
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)
Focus Standard
TP1001651472
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
68
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Still/Movie switch
You can use the Still/Movie switch to select a shooting mode.
You can select the still image shooting mode or movie recording mode as the shooting mode using the Still/Movie switch.
Hint
After selecting the still image or movie recording mode, press and hold the Fn (Function) button to display the [ Shoot Mode] or
[ Shoot Mode] screen and select the desired exposure mode.
The menu items displayed in the [Shooting], [Exposure/Color], and [Focus] tabs of the menu screen vary depending on the
shooting mode (still image/movie). Before you adjust these settings, select the desired shooting mode with the Still/Movie switch.
For each item in still image shooting and movie recording, you can select whether to use a common setting or separate settings.
Select the items you want to set separately in [Different Set for Still/Mv].
Related Topic
Different Set for Still/Mv
TP1001665628
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
69
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
MENU button
The menu screen is displayed by pressing the MENU button. You can change settings related to all of the camera
operations including shooting and playback, or you can execute a function from the menu screen.
(A) Menu tab
Menu tabs are categorized by usage scenario, such as shooting, playback, network settings, etc.
(B) Menu group
In each tab, menu items are grouped by function.
The number assigned to the group is the serial number in the tab. Refer to the number to determine the location of the
group in use.
(C) Menu item
Select the function you want to set or execute.
Hint
The name of the selected tab or group is displayed at the top of the screen.
When [Touch Operation] is set to [On] and [Menu Screen] under [Touch Panel Settings] is set to [On], touch operations on the
menu screen are possible.
Basic operations on the menu screen
Press the MENU button to display the menu screen.1.
Move within the menu tree and find the desired menu item by pressing the top/bottom/left/right side of the control
wheel.
The displayed menu items differ between the still image shooting modes and movie recording modes.
2.
70
Hint
In the (Main) tab, you can view a list of the current shooting settings. Select a setting value in the tab to open the
corresponding menu item and change the setting value.
You can display the menu screen by assigning the [MENU] function to a custom key using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [
Custom Key/Dial Set.], and then pressing that key.
Relationship between the Still/Movie switch and menu screen
The menu groups and menu items displayed in the [Main], [Shooting], [Exposure/Color], and [Focus] tabs vary depending
on the Still/Movie switch position.
Still image shooting modes
Menu items for shooting still images are displayed.*
Movie recording modes
Menu items for recording movies are displayed.
(A) Menu tabs
(B) Menu groups
(C) Menu items
Press the center of the control wheel to select the menu item.
The setting screen or execution screen for the selected item will appear on the monitor.
3.
Select a parameter or execute the function.
If you want to cancel changing the parameter, press the MENU button and go back to the previous screen.
4.
Press the MENU button to exit the menu screen.
You will return to the shooting screen or playback screen.
5.
Since you can record movies with the REC (recording) button even in the still image shooting mode, some basic movie menu items are also
displayed.
*
71
Notification badge
If newer camera software is available, a red notification badge will appear over the (Setup) tab, [Setup Option],
and [Version] in the menu screen to notify you that an update is available.
When [Screen Reader] is set to [On] and the latest screen reader data is available, a red notification badge will
appear over the (Setup) tab, [ Accessibility], [Screen Reader], and [Screen Reader Language] on the menu
screen.
Icons used in the “Help Guide”
: Menu items displayed in the still image shooting modes
: Menu items displayed in the movie recording modes
: Menu items displayed in both still image shooting and movie recording modes
Related Topic
Add Item
Display From My Menu
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
Main menu (shooting setting list)
Version
Screen Reader
TP1001642581
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
72
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
HOME (Home) button
When you press the HOME button in the movie recording mode, the home screen appears on the monitor, allowing you
to check recording and device settings all at once. You can also change recording settings by touching the screen.
Home screen
Press the HOME button in the movie recording mode to display the home screen. Press the HOME button again to return
to the recording screen.
Hint
When [Swipe Down] under [Shooting Screen] is set to [Open Home Screen], the home screen can be displayed using touch
operations by swiping downward quickly on the shooting screen.
Setting values for movie recording are displayed in areas 1 to 6. Touching each item will take you to the setting screen for
that item.
FPS (Frame rate)
You can switch between [Fixed] and [Variable] from this screen. When set to [Variable], you can also set the frame
rate.
1.
ISO/Base ISO
When [ Log Shooting] is set to [Off] or [Flexible ISO], the ISO value is displayed. When [ Log Shooting] is
set to [Cine EI Quick] or [Cine EI], the EI value of the Base ISO is displayed.
2.
Shutter angle/Shutter speed
When [Shutter Mode] is set to [Speed], the shutter speed is displayed.
3.
Aperture4.
73
Hint
To select a setting item from 1 to 6, you can use the control wheel in addition to touch controls. Press the center of the control
wheel to highlight an item, and then use the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel to move the highlighted position. Press
the center button again to confirm your selection.
Switching to the menu screen or Fn menu screen
Just as when switching from the shooting screen to the menu screen or Fn menu screen, to switch from the home screen
to the menu screen or Fn menu screen, press the MENU button or Fn button. Pressing either button again will return to
the home screen. Also, you can switch to the home screen by pressing the HOME button on the menu screen or Fn
menu screen.
(A): Menu screen
(B): Home screen
(C): Fn menu screen
(D): Recording screen
Note
By changing the settings in [Home (Lower Left)], you can change the item displayed from [Aperture] to [ND Filter].
Picture Profile/Select LUT
When [ Log Shooting] is set to [Off], [Gamma] and [Color Mode] for [ Picture Profile] are displayed. When [
Log Shooting] is set to an item other than [Off], the setting value of [Select LUT] is displayed.
5.
White Balance6.
Other camera settings
Displays the camera status and setting values. Settings cannot be changed even if touched.
7.
74
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Main menu (shooting setting list)
Select the (Main) tab on the menu screen to display a list of shooting settings. You can confirm the settings before
shooting or for each scene, and also change the settings directly from this screen.
Main menu for shooting movies
Main 1
Main 2
Rec Frame Rate
*1
1.
Shutter angle
*2
2.
Aperture3.
ISO4.
White Balance5.
Picture Profile6.
File Format7.
Record Setting8.
Gamma Display Assist9.
Gamma Disp. Assist Typ.10.
Proxy Recording11.
Wind Noise Reduct.12.
Audio Rec Level13.
When [Fixed/Variable Select] is set to [Variable], both [Rec Frame Rate] and [FPS Select] are displayed.
*1
When [Shutter Mode] is set to [Speed], the shutter speed is displayed.
*2
76
Main menu for shooting still images
Main 1
Fixed/Variable Select1.
Log Shooting Setting2.
Shooting3.
Recording Media4.
Available recording time5.
File Settings6.
Shoot Mode7.
SteadyShot8.
Focus Mode9.
Focus Area10.
Subject Recog in AF11.
Recognition Target12.
Remaining battery level13.
Shutter Speed
*
1.
Aperture
*
2.
Exposure Comp.3.
ISO4.
77
Main 2
Hint
If you assign the [Display Main Menu] function to the desired key using the custom key settings, you can also open the Main
menu by pressing the assigned key.
You can open the setting screens by touching the icons on the main menu when [Touch Operation] is set to [On] and [Menu
Screen] under [Touch Panel Settings] is set to [On].
Touch the item for available recording time/number of recordable images to open the [Format] screen.
Related Topic
MENU button
Number of recordable images5.
Image Quality Settings6.
Aspect Ratio7.
Log Shooting Setting8.
Rec. Media Settings9.
Shoot Mode10.
Drive Mode11.
Flash Mode12.
Flash Comp.13.
Wireless Flash14.
White Balance15.
Focus Mode16.
Focus Area17.
When the shooting mode is [Program Auto], the shutter speed and aperture value are displayed in the same area. You can perform Program Shift
by selecting the area.
*
Gamma Display Assist1.
Gamma Disp. Assist Typ.2.
Remaining battery level3.
78
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Fn (function) button
If you press the Fn (function) button while shooting or playing back images, a menu (function menu) containing frequently
used functions will appear on the screen, allowing you to quickly call up the functions.
In the default settings, you can recall the [ Shoot Mode] or [ Shoot Mode] setting screen by pressing and holding
the Fn button when shooting.
Example of function menu
The displayed items differ depending on the camera status.
Hint
Use [ Fn Menu Settings]/[ Fn Menu Settings] to register your favorite functions to the function menus for shooting still
images, for shooting movies, and for playing back images, respectively. You can register 12 functions to each function menu.
When [Touch Operation] is set to [On] and [Shooting Screen]/[Playback Screen] under [Touch Panel Settings] is set to [On], touch
operations on the function menu screen are possible.
When [Touch Operation] is set to [On] and [Shooting Screen]/[Playback Screen] under [Touch Panel Settings] is set to [On], you
can also open [ Fn Menu Settings]/[ Fn Menu Settings] by holding down the icon in the function menu.
When [Swipe Up] under [Shooting Screen] is set to [Open the Fn Menu], the function menu can be displayed using touch
operations by swiping the shooting screen upward quickly. When [Playback Screen] is set to [On], the function menu can be
displayed using touch operations by swiping the playback screen upward quickly.
Swipe downward from the area outside of the function menu or touch the area outside of the function menu to close the function
menu.
Press the Fn (Function) button.
On the shooting screen, press DISP on the control wheel repeatedly to display a screen mode other than [
For viewfinder], and then press the Fn button.
1
Press the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel to select a function to set.
2
80
Using the Fn button in the [ For viewfinder] display
If you press the Fn button while the monitor display is set to [ For viewfinder], you can directly operate items you want
to change.
In the auto mode
In the P/A/S/M mode
The displayed contents and their positions shown in the illustrations are just a guideline, and may differ from the
actual display.
To adjust settings from the dedicated setting screens
Select the icon for the desired function and then press the center of the control wheel. The dedicated setting screen for
the function will appear. Follow the operating guide (A) to adjust settings.
On the shooting screen, turn the front dial to select the desired setting.
Some functions can be fine-tuned using the rear dial.
3
Press the center of the control wheel.
4
81
Note
Items that are grayed out on the [ For viewfinder] screen cannot be changed by pressing the Fn button.
On the [ For viewfinder] screen, you cannot set fine adjustments such as [ Creative Look] or [ Picture Profile]. To
configure these settings or check the effects of the settings on the monitor, open the dedicated setting screen.
Related Topic
Shoot Mode (still image)/Shoot Mode (movie)
Fn Menu Settings (still image/movie)
Fn Menu Settings (playback)
DISP (Display Setting) button
Touch Operation
Touch Panel Settings
TP1001619191
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
82
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Custom buttons
If you assign frequently used functions to the custom buttons (1-7) in advance, you can quickly call up those functions
simply by pressing the buttons during shooting or playback.
Recommended functions are assigned to the custom buttons by default.
To check/change the functions of the custom buttons
You can confirm the function currently assigned to each custom button via the following procedure.
MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key/Dial Set.], [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [
Custom Key Setting].
If you want to change the function of the custom button, press the center of the control wheel while the custom button is
selected. The functions that can be assigned to that button will appear. Select your desired function.
Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
TP1001659757
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
83
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
DISP (Display Setting) button
By pressing the DISP (Display Setting) button, you can change the content displayed on the screen during shooting and
playback. The display switches each time the DISP button is pressed. The viewfinder display and the monitor display for
shooting can be set separately.
Hint
The monitor can be turned off with the DISP button. Add a check mark to [Monitor Off] under MENU → (Setup) → [Operation
Customize] → [DISP (Screen Disp) Set] → [Monitor].
During shooting (Monitor)
Display All Info. → No Disp. Info. → Histogram → Level → For viewfinder → Display All Info.
When shooting movies:
When shooting still images:
During shooting (Viewfinder)
Level → No Disp. Info. → Histogram → Level
When shooting movies:
84
When shooting still images:
To switch the information displayed on the viewfinder, press the DISP button while looking into the viewfinder.
During playback (Monitor/Viewfinder)
Display Info. → Histogram → No Disp. Info. → Display Info.
If the image has an overexposed or underexposed area, the corresponding section will blink on the histogram display
(overexposed/underexposed warning).
The settings for playback are also applied in [ Auto Review].
Hint
If [Vertical Display] is set to [On], the information display will rotate vertically to fit the orientation of the camera when you hold the
camera vertically in the shooting mode.
Note
The displayed contents and their position shown in the illustration are just a guideline, and may differ from the actual display.
The following are not displayed in the default settings.
Monitor Off
Display All Info. (when using the viewfinder)
In the movie recording modes, [ For viewfinder] cannot be displayed. If the monitor display is set to [ For viewfinder], the
display will switch to all information when movie shooting starts.
If the camera is connected to a TV, monitor, etc. via an HDMI cable, the playback screen will not be displayed in the viewfinder.
Related Topic
DISP (Screen Disp) Set (Monitor/Finder)
TP1001659803
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
85
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Delete button
You can delete an image currently being displayed by pressing the (Delete) button.
When a confirmation message appears after you press the (Delete) button, use the control wheel to select
[Delete] and press the center.
You can also delete two or more images at once.
Select MENU → (Playback) → [Delete] → [Delete]. Then, select the images you want to delete.
Hint
If you set MENU → (Playback) → [Delete] → [ Delete pressing twice] to [On], you can delete images by pressing the
(Delete) button twice in a row.
Other than the single-image playback screen, you can also use the (Delete) button for the following operations.
Custom Key
Opening the context menu ([Add to My Menu]/[In-Camera Guide])
Related Topic
Deleting multiple selected images (Delete)
Delete confirm.
Delete pressing twice
Custom buttons
In-Camera Guide
TP1001619247
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
86
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Front dial and rear dial
You can use the front dial (A) or rear dial (B) to quickly change the setting values in the following cases:
When you want to adjust the aperture value or shutter speed.
When you want to change the camera settings during shooting.
During playback, you can turn the dials to browse images.
(A): Front dial
(B): Rear dial
Hint
You can use [ Custom Key/Dial Set.]/[ Custom Key/Dial Set.] to assign the desired functions to each dial.
You can also use the [My Dial Settings] function to assign your desired functions to the dials, and recall those functions when
required.
Related Topic
Exposure Ctrl Type
Changing the function of the dial temporarily (My Dial Settings)
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
Av/Tv Rotate
TP1001659762
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
87
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Keyboard screen
When manual character entry is required, a keyboard is displayed on the screen. For examples of functions that use the
keyboard, see “Related Topic” at the bottom of this page.
The procedure for entering alphabetic characters is explained below.
Input box
The characters you entered are displayed.
1.
Switch character types
Each time you press this key, the character type will switch between alphabet letters, numerals and symbols.
2.
Keyboard
Each time you press this key, the characters corresponding to that key will be displayed one-by-one in order. To
switch letters from lower to upper case, press (Up arrow).
3.
(Left arrow)
Moves the cursor in the input box to the left.
4.
(Right arrow)
Moves the cursor in the input box to the right. This key is also used to finalize the input of a character being edited
and move to the next character.
5.
(Delete)
Deletes the character preceding the cursor.
6.
(Up arrow)
Switches a letter to upper or lower case.
7.
(Space)
Enters a space.
8.
OK
Press this key after entering characters to finalize the entered characters.
9.
Use the control wheel to move the cursor to the desired key.
Each time you press the center of the control wheel, the characters will change.
To switch the letter to upper or lower case, press (Up arrow).
1
When the character that you want to enter appears, press (Right arrow) to confirm the character.
Make sure to confirm one character at a time. Unless a character is confirmed, you cannot enter the next
character.
Even if you do not press (Right arrow), the entered character will be automatically confirmed after several
seconds.
2
After you finish entering all characters, press [OK] to finalize the entered characters.
3
88
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
In-Camera Guide
The [In-Camera Guide] displays descriptions of MENU items, Fn (Function) items, and settings.
TP1001642594
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
Select the MENU or Fn item for which you want to see a description, and then press the (Delete) button
(A).
The descriptions of the item are displayed.
Select [In-Camera Guide] and press the center of the control wheel when the context menu appears.
1
90
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Functions for accessibility
The camera is equipped with functions for accessibility to serve as visual aids.
Screen reader function
The camera reads aloud information such as menu screens and messages.
To always enable the screen reader function, enable the screen reader function on the initial setup screen displayed after
you turn the camera on for the first time.
Once you use the screen reader function on the initial setup screen, the screen reader function will be kept enabled after
the initial setup, and you can switch it on and off by pressing and holding the MENU button.
The MENU button is located on the back of the camera, above the monitor, to the right of the power switch, and is a
circular button.
Enlarge screen function
You can enlarge the menu screen display for better readability of the text. (Some menu screens do not support the
enlarging function.)
Select MENU → (Setup) → [ Accessibility] → [Enlarge Screen] to enable the function. The menu screen display
will be enlarged when you press the custom key on the menu screen.
For details, refer to “ Enlarge Screen .”
Hint
If you did not use the screen reader function on the initial setup screen, you can enable the function from the menu. Select MENU
→ (Setup) → [ Accessibility] → [Screen Reader] → [Screen Reader] → [On].
If you did not use the screen reader function on the initial setup screen, [ Long Press to Switch] under [Screen Reader] will be
set to [Off]. Set [ Long Press to Switch] to [On] when you want to switch the screen reader function on and off by pressing and
holding the MENU button.
In addition to the pre-installed languages, you can install one additional language as a screen reader language (this may vary
depending on the country or region).
Refer to “ Screen Reader ” for installation instructions.
Note
Depending on the language you selected on the initial setup screen or in [ Language], the screen reader function may not be
supported.
When you update the camera’s system software, you may need to update the screen reader data accordingly.
For information on how to update the screen reader data, refer to “ Screen Reader .”
Related Topic
Screen Reader
Enlarge Screen
TP1001667131
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
91
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Inserting/removing the battery pack
To remove the battery pack
Make sure that the access lamp is not lit, and turn off the camera. Then, slide the lock lever (A) and remove the battery
pack. Be careful not to drop the battery pack.
Slide the switch on the battery cover to open the cover.
1
Insert the battery pack while pressing the lock lever (A) with the tip of the battery until the battery locks into
place.
2
Close the cover and slide the switch to the LOCK side.
3
92
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Charging the battery with a USB-PD-compatible device
Hint
You can also charge using a device that is not compatible with USB PD. Use a USB Type-C cable (USB-A - USB-C)
(commercially available). When you use an AC adaptor, use one with a rated output of 1.5 A or higher.
Charging may take longer than when using a USB-PD-compatible device.
Note
Use a nearby wall outlet (wall socket) when using the AC Adaptor/Battery Charger. If any malfunction occurs, disconnect the plug
from the wall outlet (wall socket) immediately to disconnect from the power source. If you use the product with a charge lamp,
note that the product is not disconnected from the power source even when the lamp turns off.
If you turn on the camera, power will be supplied from the wall outlet (wall socket) and you will be able to operate the camera.
However, the battery pack will not be charged.
USB charging is not possible from the Multi/Micro USB terminal. Use the USB Type-C terminal to charge the battery pack.
Turn off the camera.
1
Connect the USB Type-C terminal of the camera to the USB Type-C terminal of a device compatible with
USB PD (USB Power Delivery) using a commercially available USB Type-C cable (USB-C® – USB-C).
Use a USB-PD-compatible device with an output of 18 W (9 V/2 A) or more and a USB Type-C cable (USB-C –
USB-C) that supports 3 A or more.
Charge lamp on the camera (orange)
Lit: Charging
Off: Charging finished
Flashing: Charging error or charging paused temporarily because the camera is not within the proper temperature
range
Charging time (Full charge): The charging time is approximately 175 min. (when using a USB-PD-compatible
device with an output of 27 W (9 V/3 A)).
The charging time varies depending on the USB-PD-compatible device and USB cable.
The above charging time applies when charging a fully depleted battery pack at a temperature of 25 °C (77 °F).
Charging may take longer depending on conditions of use and circumstances.
The charge lamp turns off when charging is completed.
If the charge lamp lights up and then immediately turns off, the battery pack is fully charged.
2
94
If the product is connected to a laptop computer that is not connected to a power source, the laptop battery level decreases. Do
not leave the product connected to a laptop computer for an extended period of time.
Do not turn on/off or restart the computer, or wake the computer from sleep mode when a USB connection has been established
between the computer and the camera. Doing so may cause a malfunction. Before turning on/off or restarting the computer, or
waking the computer from sleep mode, disconnect the camera from the computer.
Charging cannot be guaranteed with a custom-built computer, modified computer, or a computer connected through a USB hub.
The camera may not operate correctly when other USB devices are used at the same time.
Before charging, be sure to also read “Notes on the battery pack and charging the battery.”
Related Topic
Inserting/removing the battery pack
Notes on the battery pack and charging the battery
TP1001642571
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
95
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Using the battery charger abroad
You can use the battery charger (sold separately) in any country or region where the power supply is within 100 V to 240
V AC and 50 Hz/60 Hz.
Depending on the country/region, a converting plug adaptor may be needed to connect to a wall outlet (wall socket).
Consult a travel agency, etc., and prepare one in advance.
Note
Do not use an electronic voltage transformer as doing so may cause a malfunction.
TP1001619323
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
96
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Supplying power from a wall outlet (wall socket)
Use an AC adaptor, etc. to shoot and play back images while power is supplied from a wall outlet (wall socket). This
conserves the camera's battery power.
We recommend using a device that is compatible with USB PD (USB Power Delivery) and has an output of 27 W (9 V / 3
A) or more.
Note
USB power cannot be supplied from the Multi/Micro USB Terminal. Use the USB Type-C terminal to supply power.
As long as the power is on, the battery pack will not be charged even if the camera is connected to the AC Adaptor, etc.
Under certain conditions, power may be supplied from the battery pack supplementarily even if you are using the AC adaptor, etc.
Do not remove the battery pack while power is supplied from a wall outlet (wall socket). If you remove the battery pack, the
camera will be turned off.
Only connect the USB cable to the camera or disconnect the USB cable from the camera while the camera is turned off.
Depending on the camera and battery temperature, the continuous recording time may be shortened while power is supplied from
a wall outlet (wall socket). The area around the terminal may become hot. Be careful when handling it.
When using a mobile charger as a power source, confirm that it is fully charged before use. Also, be careful of the remaining
power on the mobile charger during use.
Operation cannot be guaranteed with all external power supplies.
Related Topic
Inserting/removing the battery pack
TP1001642573
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
Insert a sufficiently charged battery pack into the camera.
The camera will not activate if there is no remaining battery. Insert a sufficiently charged battery pack into the
camera.
1
Connect a USB cable (commercially available) to the USB Type-C terminal on the camera.
2
Connect to a wall outlet (wall socket) using an AC adaptor, etc.
3
Turn on the camera.
An icon ( ) indicating USB power supply will appear next to the battery display on the monitor, and power
supply will start.
4
97
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Memory cards that can be used
This camera supports CFexpress Type A memory cards and SD memory cards (UHS-I, UHS-II compatible).
When using microSD memory cards with this camera, be sure to use the appropriate adaptor.
For still-image shooting
The following memory cards can be used.
CFexpress Type A memory cards
SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards
For movie recording (When [ Proxy Recording] is set to [Off])
Recording formats and compatible memory cards are as shown in the table below.
For movie recording (When [ Proxy Recording] is set to [On])
Recording formats and compatible memory cards are as shown in the table below.
Proxy recording is not possible when the recording frame rate is [119.88p]/[100p] or [24.00p].
File Format
Maximum recordable bit rate when
recording
Supported memory card
XAVC HS 4K 200Mbps
CFexpress Type A memory card
SDHC/SDXC card (U3/V30 or higher)
XAVC S 4K 200Mbps
CFexpress Type A memory card
SDHC/SDXC card (U3/V30 or higher)
XAVC S HD 100Mbps
CFexpress Type A memory card
SDHC/SDXC card (U3/V30 or higher)
XAVC S-I 4K 600Mbps
CFexpress Type A memory card (VPG200 or
higher)
SDXC V90 or higher
XAVC S-I HD 222Mbps
CFexpress Type A memory card (VPG200 or
higher)
SDXC V90 or higher
XAVC S-I DCI
4K
600Mbps
CFexpress Type A memory card (VPG200 or
higher)
SDXC V90 or higher
98
Depending on the setting for [ File Format], the maximum recording bit rate may be lower than when [ Proxy
Recording] is set to [Off].
When [Fixed/Variable Select] is set to [Variable] (When [ Proxy Recording] is set to [Off])
Recording formats and compatible memory cards are as shown in the table below.
File Format
Maximum recordable bit rate when
recording
Supported memory card
XAVC HS 4K 200Mbps + 16Mbps*
CFexpress Type A memory card (VPG200 or
higher)
SDXC card (V60 or higher)
XAVC S 4K 200Mbps + 16Mbps*
CFexpress Type A memory card (VPG200 or
higher)
SDXC card (V60 or higher)
XAVC S HD 50Mbps + 16Mbps*
CFexpress Type A memory card
SDHC/SDXC card (U3/V30 or higher)
XAVC S-I 4K 600Mbps + 16Mbps*
CFexpress Type A memory card (VPG200 or
higher)
XAVC S-I HD 222Mbps + 16Mbps*
CFexpress Type A memory card (VPG200 or
higher)
XAVC S-I DCI
4K
600Mbps + 16Mbps*
CFexpress Type A memory card (VPG200 or
higher)
The maximum recording bit rate for proxy movies on this camera is 16 Mbps.
*
File Format
Maximum recordable bit rate when
recording
Supported memory card
XAVC HS 4K 250Mbps
CFexpress Type A memory card (VPG200 or
higher)
SDXC V60 or higher
XAVC S 4K 280Mbps
CFexpress Type A memory card (VPG200 or
higher)
SDXC V60 or higher
XAVC S HD 250Mbps
CFexpress Type A memory card (VPG200 or
higher)
SDXC V60 or higher
99
When [Fixed/Variable Select] is set to [Variable] (When [ Proxy Recording] is set to [On])
Recording formats and compatible memory cards are as shown in the table below.
Proxy recording is not possible when the recording frame rate is [119.88p]/[100p] or [24.00p].
Depending on the setting for [ File Format], the maximum recording bit rate may be lower than when [ Proxy
Recording] is set to [Off].
File Format
Maximum recordable bit rate when
recording
Supported memory card
XAVC S-I 4K 600Mbps
CFexpress Type A memory card (VPG200 or
higher)
XAVC S-I HD 445Mbps
CFexpress Type A memory card (VPG200 or
higher)
SDXC V90 or higher
XAVC S-I DCI
4K
600Mbps
CFexpress Type A memory card (VPG200 or
higher)
File Format
Maximum recordable bit rate when
recording
Supported memory card
XAVC HS 4K 250Mbps + 16Mbps*
CFexpress Type A memory card (VPG200 or
higher)
SDXC V60 or higher
XAVC S 4K 280Mbps + 16Mbps*
CFexpress Type A memory card (VPG200 or
higher)
SDXC V60 or higher
XAVC S HD 125Mbps + 16Mbps*
CFexpress Type A memory card (VPG200 or
higher)
SDXC V60 or higher
XAVC S-I 4K 600Mbps + 16Mbps*
CFexpress Type A memory card (VPG200 or
higher)
XAVC S-I HD 222Mbps + 16Mbps*
CFexpress Type A memory card (VPG200 or
higher)
XAVC S-I DCI
4K
600Mbps + 16Mbps*
CFexpress Type A memory card (VPG200 or
higher)
The maximum recording bit rate for proxy movies on this camera is 16 Mbps.
*
100
Note
When [Fixed/Variable Select] is set to [Variable], the recording bit rate is higher than usual. You may need a memory card that can
be written at a higher speed.
CFexpress Type B memory cards cannot be used.
When an SDHC memory card is used to record movies over extended periods of time, the recorded movies are divided into files 4
GB in size.
When recording a movie on memory cards in both the Slot 1 and the Slot 2, insert two memory cards with the same file system.
Movies cannot be recorded simultaneously when using a combination of the exFAT file system and FAT32 file system.
Charge the battery pack sufficiently before attempting to recover the database files on the memory card.
If the marks below appear on the memory card icon when shooting, use another memory card:
: Indicates that the number of times the memory card can be rewritten is close to the upper limit.
: Indicates that the number of rewrites on the memory card has reached the upper limit.
Related Topic
Notes on memory card
Number of recordable images
Recordable movie times
TP1001642577
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
Memory card File system
CFexpress Type A memory card, SDXC memory card exFAT
SDHC memory card FAT32
101
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Inserting/removing a memory card
Explains how to insert a memory card (sold separately) to the camera. You can use CFexpress Type A memory cards
and SD memory cards with this camera.
While sliding the switch on the memory card cover in the direction of , slide the cover in the direction of
to open it.
1
Insert the memory card into the slot 1.
When using two memory cards, insert the second one into the slot 2.
Slot 1 supports both CFexpress Type A memory cards and SD memory cards. Slot 2 supports SD memory cards
only.
In the default settings, images are recorded on the memory card in Slot 1.
Insert a CFexpress Type A memory card with the label facing the monitor, and an SD memory card with the
terminal facing the monitor. Insert the card until it clicks into place.
2
Close the cover.
3
102
Hint
When you use a memory card with the camera for the first time, it is recommended that you format the card on the camera for
more stable performance of the memory card.
You can change the memory card slot for recording by selecting MENU → (Shooting) → [Media] → [ Rec. Media
Settings] → [ Recording Media] or [ Recording Media]. The Slot 1 is used in the default settings.
To record the same image on two memory cards at the same time or to sort recorded images onto two memory card slots by the
image type (still image/movie), select MENU → (Shooting) → [Media] → [ Rec. Media Settings], and then change the
settings of [ Recording Media] or [ Recording Media].
To remove the memory card
Open the memory card cover and make sure that the access lamp (A) is not lit, then push in the memory card lightly
once to remove it.
Related Topic
Memory cards that can be used
Notes on memory card
Format
Rec. Media Settings (still image/movie): Recording Media (still image)
Rec. Media Settings (still image/movie): Recording Media (movie)
Play Set of Multi. Media
TP1001642575
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
103
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Attaching/removing a lens
Turn off the camera before attaching or removing the lens.
Remove the body cap (A) from the camera and the rear lens cap (B) from the rear of the lens.
It is recommended that you attach the front lens cap when you have done shooting.
1
Mount the lens by aligning the two white index marks (mounting indexes) on the lens and camera.
Hold the camera with the lens mount facing down to prevent dust and debris from entering the camera.
2
While pushing the lens lightly toward the camera, turn the lens slowly in the direction of the arrow until it
clicks into the locked position.
3
104
To remove the lens
Keep pressing the lens release button (A) and turn the lens in the direction of the arrow until it stops.
After removing the lens, attach the body cap to the camera and the lens caps to the front and rear of the lens to prevent
dust and debris from entering the camera and lens.
Note
When attaching/removing the lens, work quickly in a dust-free location.
Do not press the lens release button when attaching a lens.
Do not use force when attaching a lens.
A Mount Adaptor (sold separately) is required to use an A-mount lens (sold separately). When using the Mount Adaptor, refer to
the operating manual supplied with the Mount Adaptor.
If you want to shoot full-frame images, use a full-frame size compatible lens.
When you use a lens with a tripod socket, attach a tripod to the tripod socket of the lens to help balance the weight of the lens.
When carrying the camera with a lens attached, hold both the camera and the lens firmly.
Do not hold the part of the lens that is extended for zoom or focus adjustment.
Related Topic
Mount Adaptor
TP1001651427
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
Be sure to hold the lens straight when attaching it.
105
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Attaching the supplied XLR handle unit (only with ILME-FX2)
By attaching the XLR handle unit, you can use the functions of the XLR adaptor.
Note
Turn off the camera before attaching/removing the handle.
When attaching the handle to the camera, fasten the two handle-attachment screws securely. Using the handle without fastening
the handle-attachment screws may damage the Multi Interface Shoe terminal or cause the camera to fall off.
Remove the shoe cap, and then attach the XLR handle unit to the Multi Interface Shoe.
1
Tightly fix the screws on either side by using a coin, etc.
2
106
TP1001661323
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
107
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Performing initial setup for the camera
By establishing a Bluetooth connection (pairing) between the camera and a smartphone and using the smartphone
application Creators' App, you can perform initial camera settings such as date and time settings from the smartphone.
Install Creators' App from your smartphone’s application store. If the application is already installed, be sure to update it
to the latest version.
You can also install Creators' App by scanning the QR Code displayed on the screen of the camera using your
smartphone.
For details on Creators' App, refer to the following website.
https://www.sony.net/ca/
On maintaining the date and time
This camera has an internal rechargeable backup battery for maintaining the date and time and other settings regardless
of whether the power is turned on or off, or whether the battery pack is charged or discharged.
To charge the internal backup battery, insert a charged battery pack into the camera, and leave the product for 24 hours
or more with the power turned off.
If the clock resets every time the battery pack is charged, the internal rechargeable backup battery may be worn out.
Consult your service facility.
Hint
To turn on the screen reader function, press and hold the MENU button on the initial setup screen. Depending on the language
you have selected, the screen reader function may not be supported.
Set the power switch to “ ” (On) to turn on the camera.
1
Select the desired language and then press the center of the control wheel.
The setting screen for the screen reader function and a privacy notice will appear. Follow the on-screen
instructions.
Read the notice regarding biometrics carefully by opening the link provided on the privacy notice screen.
2
Follow the instructions on the camera screen to connect the camera with your smartphone.
Launch Creators' App on your smartphone to connect the camera with your smartphone.
If you do not connect a smartphone, the area/date/time setting screen will appear.
To connect your smartphone to the camera after the initial setup, select MENU → (Network) → [
Cnct./Remote Sht.] → [Smartphone Connection].
3
Perform initial camera setup on the Creators' App screen.
Follow the instructions on the screen to set the following items.
Date and time / Display format
Auto Power OFF Temp.
Device name
You can change these settings later from the camera menu.
4
108
By connecting the camera and a smartphone via the Bluetooth function, you can operate the camera using the smartphone and
transfer images from the camera to the smartphone.
Note
If the date and time setting is canceled halfway, the setting screen for the date and time appears every time you turn on the
camera.
The built-in clock of the camera may exhibit time errors. Adjust the time at regular intervals.
When establishing a Bluetooth connection, only pair with trusted devices. Avoid unsolicited pairing requests or connections to
unknown devices.
Turn off the Bluetooth function when not in use.
Check your paired devices regularly and delete any unnecessary ones.
Related Topic
Pairing the camera with a smartphone (Smartphone Connection)
Area/Date/Time Setting
Auto Power OFF Temp.
Edit Device Name
Privacy Notice
TP1001663365
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
109
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Confirmation before shooting
This section introduces useful settings and functions that you should know when using the camera. We recommend that
you confirm these settings and functions before using the camera.
From each item name listed below, you can jump to the page explaining the respective functions.
Preparing a memory card for use with this camera
Format
Recover Image DB (still image/movie)
Selecting a memory card for recording
Rec. Media Settings (still image/movie): Recording Media (still image)
Rec. Media Settings (still image/movie): Recording Media (movie)
Rec. Media Settings (still image/movie): Auto Switch Media Card
Preventing accidental failure to insert a memory card
Release w/o Card
Selecting a memory card for playback
Play Set of Multi. Media
Setting whether camera operating sounds are generated
Audio Signal(Shooting)
Setting whether to always accept manual focusing operations
Full Time DMF
Making it easy to check whether the camera is on standby or recording when set to a
movie mode
Emphasized REC Display
Resetting shooting settings or resetting all camera settings
Setting Reset
TP1001659764
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
110
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Shooting movies
You can set the recording format and exposure and record movies by using the dedicated menu items for movies.
Set the Still/Movie switch to MOVIE (Movie) to select the movie recording mode.
1
Press and hold the Fn (Function) button to open the [ Shoot Mode] screen, select the desired shooting
mode using the control wheel, and then press the center of the control wheel.
In the default settings, you can only select [Flexible Exp. Mode] or [Memory recall]. If you want to change the
shooting mode, set [Exposure Ctrl Type] to [P/A/S/M Mode].
2
Press the REC (Recording) button to start recording.
3
111
To shoot with the touch function icons
You can also start shooting by touching an icon on the screen instead of pressing the REC (Recording) button. Swipe the
monitor left or right to display the touch function icons, and then touch the (start recording) icon. You can view the
captured image by touching the (switch to playback screen) icon.
For details on how to display the touch function icons, see “Touch function icons.”
To select the recording format ( File Format)
The resolution and degree of compatibility vary depending on the recording format (XAVC HS 4K/XAVC S 4K/XAVC S
HD/XAVC S-I 4K/XAVC S-I HD/XAVC S-I DCI 4K). Select the format in accordance with the purpose of the movie to be
shot.
To select the frame rate or image quality ( Movie Settings)
The frame rate determines the smoothness of motion in movies. ([ Movie Settings] → [Rec Frame Rate])
The image quality changes with the bit rate. ([ Movie Settings] → [Record Setting])
If the bit rate is high, the amount of information will increase and you can shoot high-quality movies. However, this will
result in a larger volume of data.
Select the frame rate and bit rate according to your preference and purpose.
To record slow-motion or quick-motion movies (FPS Select)
You can record slow-motion or quick-motion movies by changing the recording frame rate and the shooting frame rate.
First, set [Fixed/Variable Select] to [Variable], and then select the frame rate to be used during shooting in [FPS Select]. If
the frame rate during shooting is higher than the [Rec Frame Rate] value, the movie will be in slow-motion. If the frame
rate is lower, the movie will be in quick-motion.
To adjust the exposure (Exposure Ctrl Type/Shooting mode)
When [Exposure Ctrl Type] is set to [P/A/S/M Mode], select the shooting mode using the shutter speed and aperture
value combination in the same way as when shooting a still image.
When [Exposure Ctrl Type] is set to [Flexible Exp. Mode], you can set the shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO
sensitivity automatically or manually.
Also, if you enable [Touch AE] under [Touch Func. in Shooting], you can adjust the exposure to the touched area.
To select the focusing method ( Focus Mode/ Focus Area)
Select (Continuous AF) or (Manual Focus) for [ Focus Mode]. You can specify the focus area by setting
[ Focus Area].
Even during shooting with manual focus, you can temporarily switch to auto focus in the following ways.
Press the custom key to which [AF On] is assigned, or press the shutter button halfway.
Press the custom key to which [Subject Recognition AF] is assigned.
Touch the subject on the monitor. (when [Touch Func. in Shooting] under [Shooting Screen] is set to [Touch Focus] or
[Touch Tracking])
To record movie audio in 4 channels
Attach the XLR handle unit (supplied or sold separately) or a genuine Sony accessory that supports 4-channel and 24-bit
audio recording to the Multi Interface Shoe of the camera.
Hint
You can also assign the start/stop movie recording function to a preferred key.
You can focus quickly while shooting movies by pressing the shutter button halfway down. (The sound of auto focus operation
may be recorded in some cases.)
Press the REC button again to stop recording.
4
112
You can change the settings for ISO sensitivity, exposure compensation, and focus area while shooting movies.
The sounds of the camera and lens in operation may be recorded during movie shooting. To prevent sounds from being recorded,
set [Audio Recording] to [Off].
To prevent the operating sound of the zoom ring from being recorded when a power zoom lens is used, we recommend recording
movies using the zoom lever of the lens. When moving the zoom lever of the lens, be careful not to flip the lever.
When [Auto Power OFF Temp.] is set to [High], the camera can continue movie recording even when the temperature of the
camera becomes high.
Note
An icon indicating that data is being written is displayed after shooting. Do not remove the memory card while the icon is
displayed.
You cannot start recording a movie while writing data. Wait until data writing is completed and “STBY” is displayed before
recording a movie.
If the (Overheating warning) icon appears, the temperature of the camera has risen. Turn the power off and cool the camera
and wait until the camera is ready to shoot again.
The temperature of the camera tends to rise when shooting movies continuously, and you may feel that the camera is warm. This
is not a malfunction. Also, [Internal temp. high. Allow it to cool.] may appear. In such cases, turn the power off and cool the
camera and wait until the camera is ready to shoot again.
For the continuous shooting time of a movie recording, refer to “Recordable movie times.” When movie recording is finished, you
can record another movie by pressing the REC button again. Recording may stop to protect the product, depending on the
temperature of the product or the battery.
Still images cannot be captured during movie recording. If you want to create a still image from a scene during movie recording,
use [ AutoCreateStillImage].
Related Topic
Touch function icons
File Format (movie)
Movie Settings (movie)
Exposure Ctrl Type
Auto/Manual Swt. Set.
Selecting the focus method (Focus Mode)
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)
Shoe Audio Set.
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
REC w/ Shutter (movie)
Audio Recording
Auto Power OFF Temp.
Recordable movie times
Automatic creation of still images from Shot Marks
TP1001619106
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
113
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Shooting still images (Intelligent Auto)
This section describes how to shoot still images in the [Intelligent Auto] mode. In the [Intelligent Auto] mode, the camera
automatically focuses and automatically determines the exposure based on the shooting conditions.
Set the Still/Movie switch to STILL (Still) to select the still image shooting mode.
1
Press and hold the Fn (Function) button to open the [ Shoot Mode] screen, select [Intelligent Auto] using
the control wheel, and then press the center of the control wheel.
The shooting mode will be set to (Intelligent Auto).
2
Adjust the monitor angle, and hold the camera. Or look through the viewfinder and hold the camera.
3
When a zoom lens is mounted, enlarge images by using the zoom lever or the zoom ring.
4
Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.
When the image is in focus, a beep sounds and the indicator ( , etc.) lights up.
5
Press the shutter button fully down.
6
114
To shoot with the touch function icons
You can also shoot by touching an icon on the screen instead of pressing the shutter button. Swipe the monitor left or
right to display the touch function icons, and then touch the (shutter) icon. You can view the captured image by
touching the (switch to playback screen) icon.
For details on how to display the touch function icons, see “Touch function icons.”
To select the focus mode yourself ( Focus Mode / Focus Area)
Specifying [ Focus Mode], such as selecting (Single-shot AF) for landscapes or still subjects and selecting
(Continuous AF) for moving subjects, makes it easier to focus on the desired subject. You can also specify the
focus position and range using [ Focus Area].
Shooting while focusing on human eyes
The [ Subject Recog in AF] function under [Subject Recognition] is enabled in the default settings, so you can use the
Eye AF function immediately.
To shoot images with the focus locked on the desired subject (Focus-lock)
When you focus on the subject, the focus is locked while the shutter button is pressed halfway down. Switch to the
desired composition and press the shutter button all the way down to take the picture.
You can lock the focus on non-moving subjects. Set [ Focus Mode] to (Single-shot AF).
Setting [ Focus Area] to [Center Fix] makes it easier to focus on subjects located in the center of the screen.
Hint
When the product cannot focus automatically, the focus indicator flashes and the beep does not sound. Either recompose the
shot or change the focus mode or focus area settings. In [Continuous AF] mode, (focus indicator) lights up and the beep
indicating that the focus has been achieved does not sound.
Note
An icon indicating that data is being written is displayed after shooting. Do not remove the memory card while the icon is
displayed. Doing so will prevent images from being recorded normally.
When you shoot at high shutter speeds with a large-aperture lens attached, out-of-focus circle produced by the bokeh effect may
get cut off because of the shutter mechanism.
When a lens from another manufacturer (including a Minolta/Konica-Minolta lens) is used, the correct exposure may not be
achieved, or the image brightness may be uneven.
When you shoot at high shutter speeds, the image brightness may become uneven depending on the shooting environment.
Related Topic
Touch function icons
Selecting the focus method (Focus Mode)
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)
Playing back still images
Auto Review (still image)
TP1001642582
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
115
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Finding functions from MENU
The displayed MENU items vary depending on the position of the Still/Movie switch. In the table below, the modes in
which each MENU item is displayed are indicated by the still image/movie icons.
: The menu item is displayed when the Still/Movie switch is set to STILL (still image shooting mode).
: The menu item is displayed when the Still/Movie switch is set to MOVIE (movie recording mode).
: The menu item is displayed regardless of the setting of the Still/Movie switch.
(Main) tab
Shooting settings are displayed in a list. For details, refer to “Main menu (shooting setting list).”
(Shooting) tab
116
Groups Menu items
Image Quality/Rec
JPEG/HEIF Switch
Image Quality Settings: File Format
Image Quality Settings: RAW File Type
Image Quality Settings: JPEG Quality
Image Quality Settings: HEIF Quality
Image Quality Settings: JPEG Image Size
Image Quality Settings: HEIF Image Size
Aspect Ratio
File Format
Movie Settings
FPS
Log Shooting Setting
Log Shooting Setting
Proxy Settings
Shooting
Long Exposure NR
High ISO NR
HLG Still Image
Color Space
Lens Compensation
Media
Format
Rec. Media Settings: Recording Media
Rec. Media Settings: Recording Media
Rec. Media Settings: Auto Switch Media Card
Recover Image DB
Display Media Info.
117
Groups Menu items
File
File/Folder Settings
Select REC Folder
Create New Folder
IPTC Information
Copyright Info
Write Serial Number
File Settings
Shooting Mode
Exposure Ctrl Type
Camera Set. Memory
Shoot Mode
Shoot Mode
Memory/Recall Media
Reg. Custom Shoot Set
Drive Mode
Drive Mode
Bracket Settings
Interval Shoot Func.
Shutter/Silent
Silent Mode Settings
Shutter Type
Release w/o Lens
Release w/o Card
Anti-flicker Set.
Audio Recording
Audio Recording
Audio Rec Level
Audio Out Timing
Wind Noise Reduct.
Shoe Audio Set.
118
Groups Menu items
TC/UB
Time Code Preset
User Bit Preset
Time Code Format
Time Code Run
Time Code Make
User Bit Time Rec
Image Stabilization
SteadyShot
SteadyShot
SteadyShot Adjust.
Focal Length
Framing Stabilizer
Zoom
Zoom Range
Zoom Lever Speed
Custom Key Z. Speed
Remote Zoom Speed
Shooting Display
Grid Line Display
Grid Line Type
Live View Display Set.
Emphasized REC Display
Marker Display
Aspect Marker
Aspect Marker Type
Aspect Marker Level
Marker Display
Center Marker
Aspect Marker
Safety Zone
Guideframe
119
(Exposure/Color) tab
Groups Menu items
Shooting Option
Self-timer
Auto Framing Settings
AutoCreateStillImage
after still img crt
Selection/Memo Shot
Groups Menu items
Exposure
Shutter Mode
BULB Timer Settings
Auto Slow Shutter
ISO
ISO Range Limit
ISO AUTO Min. SS
Base ISO
Base ISO Switch EI
Exposure Index
Auto/Manual Swt. Set.
ND Filter
Exposure Comp.
Exposure Comp.
Exposure step
Exposure Std. Adjust
Metering
Metering Mode
Face Priority in Multi Metering
Spot Metering Point
AEL w/ Shutter
120
(Focus) tab
Groups Menu items
Flash
Flash Mode
Flash Comp.
Exp.comp.set
Wireless Flash
Red Eye Reduction
External Flash Set.
Reg. Flash Shooting Set
White Balance
White Balance
Priority Set in AWB
Shutter AWB Lock
Shockless WB
WB Capt. Frame Size
Color/Tone
D-Range Optimizer
Creative Look
Picture Profile
Select LUT
Manage User LUTs
Zebra Display
Zebra Display
Zebra Level
121
Groups Menu items
AF/MF
Focus Mode
Priority Set in AF-S
Priority Set in AF-C
AF Lvl for Crossing
AF Trk for Spd Chng
Aperture Drive in AF
Preset Focus/Zoom
AF w/ Shutter
Full Time DMF
Pre-AF
AF Transition Speed
AF Subj. Shift Sensitivity
AF Assist
Focus Area
Focus Area
Focus Area Limit
Switch V/H AF Area
Focus Area Color
AF Area Registration
Del. Regist. AF Area
AF Area Auto Clear
Area Disp. dur Tracking
AF-C Area Display
Phase Detect. Area
Circ. of Focus Point
AF Frame Move Amt
122
(Playback) tab
Groups Menu items
Subject Recognition
Subject Recog in AF
Recognition Target
Recog Trgt Select Set
Right/Left Eye Select
Sbj Recog Frm Disp.
Sbj Recog Frm Disp.
Face Memory
Regist. Face Priority
Focus Assistant
Focus Map
Auto Magnifier in MF
Focus Magnifier
Focus Magnif. Time
Initial Focus Mag.
AF in Focus Mag.
Initial Focus Mag.
Peaking Display
Peaking Display
Peaking Level
Peaking Color
Groups Menu items
Playback Target
Play Set of Multi. Media
Disp Set of Multi Media
Playback Filter Condition
Image Order
Magnification
Enlarge Image
Enlarge Initial Mag.
Enlarge Initial Position
Selection/Memo
Protect
Rating
Rating Set(Custom Key)
Clip Flag
123
(Network) tab
Groups Menu items
Delete
Delete
Delete pressing twice
Delete confirm.
Edit
Crop
Rotate
Copy
Photo Capture
Create Still Image
after still img crt
JPEG/HEIF Switch
Viewing
Cont. Play for Interval
Play Speed for Interval
Slide Show
Playback Option
Image Index
Display as Group
Display Rotation
Focus Frame Display
Aspect Marker Disp.
Disp Specified Time Img.
Image Jump Setting
Groups Menu items
Cnct./Remote Sht.
Smartphone Connection
Remote Shoot Function
Select on Cam & Send
Reset Transfer Status
Cnct. while Power OFF
Remote Shoot Setting
FTP Transfer FTP Transfer
Streaming
Network Streaming
USB Streaming
124
(Setup) tab
Groups Menu items
Creators' Cloud
Cloud Connection
Cloud Information
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi Connect
WPS Push
Access Point Set.
Wi-Fi Frequency Band
*
Display Wi-Fi Info.
SSID/PW Reset
Bluetooth
Bluetooth Function
Pairing
Manage Paired Device
Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl
Disp Device Address
Wired LAN
IP Address Setting
Display Wired LAN Info.
USB-LAN/Tethering
USB-LAN Connection
USB-LAN Disconnection
Tethering Connection
Tethering Disconnection
Network Option
Airplane Mode
Edit Device Name
Import Root Certificate
Access Authen. Settings
Access Authen. Info
Wi-Fi Direct Settings
Reset Network Set.
For some models only
*
125
Groups Menu items
Area/Date
Language
Area/Date/Time Setting
NTSC/PAL Selector
Reset/Save Settings
Setting Reset
Save/Load Settings
Operation Customize
Custom Key/Dial Set.
Custom Key/Dial Set.
Custom Key Setting
Fn Menu Settings
Fn Menu Settings
Different Set for Still/Mv
Home (Lower Left)
DISP (Screen Disp) Set
REC w/ Shutter
with Shutter Button
Zoom Ring Rotate
Dial Customize
Custom Key/Dial Set.
Custom Key/Dial Set.
My Dial Settings
Av/Tv Rotate
Function Ring(Lens)
Lock Operation Parts
Touch Operation
Touch Operation
Touch Panel/Pad
Touch Panel Settings
Touch Pad Settings
Accessibility
Screen Reader
Enlarge Screen
126
Groups Menu items
Finder/Monitor
Select Finder/Monitor
Monitor Brightness
Viewfinder Bright.
Finder Color Temp.
Display Quality
Finder Frame Rate
Monitor Flip Direction
Vertical Display
Display Option
TC/UB Disp. Setting
Gamma Display Assist
Gamma Disp. Assist Typ.
Display LUT
De-Squeeze Display
Remain Shoot Display
Auto Review
Display File Name
Power Setting Option
Monitor Off
Power Save Start Time
Power Save by Monitor
Auto Power OFF Temp.
Sound Option
Playback/Monitor. Vol.
4ch Audio Monitoring
Audio Signal(Shooting)
Audio Signal(Start/End)
Audio Signal Volume
USB
USB Connection Mode
USB LUN Setting
USB Power Supply
127
(My Menu) tab
Note
The order in which the menu tabs are listed here differs from the actual display.
TP1001667066
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
Groups Menu items
External Output
HDMI Resolution
HDMI Output Settings
HDMI Info. Display
CTRL FOR HDMI
Setup Option
Video Light Mode
REC Lamp
Fan Control
Anti-dust Function
Auto Pixel Mapping
Pixel Mapping
Version
Display Serial Number
Privacy Notice
Groups Menu items
My Menu Setting
Add Item
Sort Item
Delete Item
Delete Page
Delete All
Display From My Menu
128
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Contents of this chapter
The following table of contents lists the features described in this chapter (“Using the shooting functions”). From each
item name, you can jump to the page describing the respective functions.
Selecting a shooting mode
Exposure Ctrl Type
Auto/Manual Swt. Set.
Shoot Mode (still image)/Shoot Mode (movie)
Shoot Mode: Intelligent Auto
Shoot Mode: Program Auto
Shoot Mode: Aperture Priority
Shoot Mode: Shutter Priority
Shoot Mode: Manual Exposure
Shutter Mode
Bulb shooting
BULB Timer Settings
Convenient functions for shooting self-portrait videos and vlogs
Self-timer (movie)
Auto Framing Settings
Framing Stabilizer
Focusing
Selecting the focus method (Focus Mode)
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)
Tracking subject (Tracking function)
Manual Focus
Direct manual focus (DMF)
Subject Recognition AF
Focusing using subject recognition functions
Subject Recog in AF (still image/movie)
Recognition Target (still image/movie)
Recog Trgt Select Set (still image/movie)
Right/Left Eye Select (still image/movie)
Sbj Recog Frm Disp. (still image)
Sbj Recog Frm Disp. (movie)
Face Memory (still image/movie)
Regist. Face Priority (still image/movie)
Selecting a person to track (Select Face to Track)
Using focusing functions
Focus Standard
Adjusting the focus area settings to the camera’s orientation (horizontal/vertical) (Switch V/H AF Area)
Registering the current focus area (AF Area Registration)
Deleting a registered AF Area (Del. Regist. AF Area)
Focus Area Limit (still image/movie)
Circ. of Focus Point (still image/movie)
129
AF Frame Move Amt (still image/movie)
Focus Area Color (still image/movie)
AF Area Auto Clear
Area Disp. dur Tracking
AF-C Area Display
Phase Detect. Area
AF Lvl for Crossing
AF Trk for Spd Chng
AF Transition Speed
AF Subj. Shift Sensitivity
AF Assist
AF/MF Selector
Full Time DMF
AF w/ Shutter
AF On
Focus Hold
Pre-AF
Priority Set in AF-S
Priority Set in AF-C
Aperture Drive in AF
Preset Focus/Zoom
AF in Focus Mag.
Auto Magnifier in MF
Focus Magnifier
Focus Magnif. Time (still image/movie)
Initial Focus Mag. (still image)
Initial Focus Mag. (movie)
Focus Map
Peaking Display
Adjusting the exposure/metering modes
Exposure Comp. (still image/movie)
Histogram display
Exposure step (still image/movie)
Exposure Std. Adjust (still image/movie)
D-Range Optimizer (still image/movie)
Metering Mode (still image/movie)
Face Priority in Multi Metering (still image/movie)
Spot Metering Point (still image/movie)
ND Filter
AE lock
AEL w/ Shutter
Auto Slow Shutter
Zebra Display
Selecting the ISO sensitivity
ISO (still image/movie)
ISO Range Limit (still image/movie)
ISO AUTO Min. SS
White balance
White Balance (still image/movie)
Capturing a standard white color to set the white balance (custom white balance)
WB Capt. Frame Size (still image/movie)
Priority Set in AWB (still image/movie)
Shutter AWB Lock
Shockless WB
130
Log shooting settings
Log shooting
Log Shooting Setting (movie)
Select LUT
Manage User LUTs
Base ISO
Base ISO Switch EI
Exposure Index
Display LUT
Log Shooting Setting (still image)
Adding effects to images
Creative Look (still image/movie)
Picture Profile (still image/movie)
Shooting with drive modes (continuous shooting/self-timer)
Drive Mode
Cont. Shooting
Selection/Memo Shot
Self-timer(Single)
Self-timer(Cont)
Cont. Bracket
Single Bracket
Indicator during bracket shooting
Focus Bracket
WB bracket
DRO Bracket
Bracket Settings
Self-timer (movie)
Interval Shoot Func.
Setting the image quality and recording format
JPEG/HEIF Switch
Image Quality Settings: File Format (still image)
Image Quality Settings: RAW File Type
Image Quality Settings: JPEG Quality/HEIF Quality
Image Quality Settings: JPEG Image Size/HEIF Image Size
Aspect Ratio
HLG Still Image
Color Space
File Format (movie)
Movie Settings (movie)
FPS
Proxy Settings
APS-C S35 (Super 35mm) Shooting (still image/movie)
Angle of view
Using touch functions
Touch Operation
Touch Panel/Pad
Touch Panel Settings
Touch Pad Settings
Focusing using touch operations (Touch Focus)
131
Starting tracking with touch operations (Touch Tracking)
Shooting with touch operations (Touch Shutter)
Adjusting the exposure with touch operations (Touch AE)
Shutter settings
Silent Mode Settings (still image/movie)
Shutter Type
Release w/o Lens (still image/movie)
Release w/o Card
Anti-flicker Set.
Differences between the [Anti-flicker Shoot.] and [Var. Shutter] functions
Using the zoom
The zoom features available with this product
Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom
Zoom Range (still image/movie)
Zoom Lever Speed (still image/movie)
Custom Key Z. Speed (still image/movie)
Remote Zoom Speed (still image/movie)
About zoom scale
Zoom Ring Rotate
Using the flash
Using flash (sold separately)
Flash Mode
Flash Comp.
Exp.comp.set
Wireless Flash
Red Eye Reduction
FEL lock
External Flash Set.
Reg. Flash Shooting Set
Reducing blur
SteadyShot (still image)
SteadyShot (movie)
SteadyShot Adjust. (still image/movie)
SteadyShot focal length (still image/movie)
Framing Stabilizer
Lens Compensation (still image/movie)
Noise reduction
Long Exposure NR
High ISO NR
Setting the monitor display during shooting
Auto Review (still image)
Remain Shoot Display (still image)
Grid Line Display (still image/movie)
Grid Line Type (still image/movie)
Live View Display Set.
Aperture Preview
Shot. Result Preview
Bright Monitoring
Emphasized REC Display
132
Marker Display (still image)
Marker Display (movie)
Gamma Display Assist
Gamma Disp. Assist Typ.
De-Squeeze Display
Recording movie audio
Audio Recording
Audio Rec Level
Audio Out Timing
Wind Noise Reduct.
Shoe Audio Set.
Recording audio using the XLR handle unit
Creating still images while recording a movie
Automatic creation of still images from Shot Marks
Shot Marks after still image creation (shooting)
TC/UB settings
TC/UB
TC/UB Disp. Setting
Matching the time code with other devices
Livestreaming video and audio
Network Streaming (movie)
USB Streaming (movie)
TP1001667069
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
133
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Exposure Ctrl Type
You can select the method for setting the exposure (shutter speed, aperture, and ISO sensitivity) when shooting movies.
[Flexible Exp. Mode] allows you to individually switch between the automatic and manual settings for aperture value,
shutter speed, and ISO sensitivity.
[P/A/S/M Mode] allows you to select from the P/A/S/M modes in the same manner as the exposure mode for still images.
Menu item details
P/A/S/M Mode:
Select the desired exposure mode from among [Program Auto], [Aperture Priority], [Shutter Priority], and [Manual
Exposure].
Flexible Exp. Mode:
Sets the aperture value, shutter speed, and ISO sensitivity automatically (Auto) or manually (Manual).
You can switch between the automatic and manual settings using the assigned custom key, or change the aperture,
shutter speed, and ISO sensitivity values by turning the front/rear dials and the control wheel.
Note
Even if [Exposure Ctrl Type] is set to [Flexible Exp. Mode], when shooting a movie by pressing the REC (recording) button in a
still image shooting mode, the movie will be shot in the shooting mode for still image shooting.
Related Topic
Auto/Manual Swt. Set.
TP1001659767
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Mode] → [Exposure Ctrl Type] → desired setting.
1
134
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Auto/Manual Swt. Set.
When shooting movies, you can switch between the automatic and manual settings separately for aperture, shutter
speed, and ISO sensitivity as you would with the exposure control system of a professional camera. Set [Exposure Ctrl
Type] to [Flexible Exp. Mode] beforehand.
Menu item details
Av Auto/Manual Switch:
Switches the aperture value between [Auto] and [Manual].
Tv Auto/Manual Switch:
Switches the shutter speed between [Auto] and [Manual].
ISO Auto/Manual Set:
Switches the ISO sensitivity between [Auto] and [Manual].
To switch between [Auto] and [Manual] using a custom keys
When [Exposure Ctrl Type] is set to [Flexible Exp. Mode], the following functions are assigned to the custom keys during
movie recording.
[Av Auto/Manual Switch]: IRIS (Iris) button
[Tv Auto/Manual Switch]: SHUTTER (Shutter) button on the control wheel
[ISO Auto/Manual Set]: ISO (ISO sensitivity) button
Each time you press and hold down the respective custom key, the aperture value, shutter speed, or ISO sensitivity
switches between [Auto] and [Manual].
When [Manual] is selected, values can be locked by pressing the respective key. You can use this function to prevent the
values from being unintentionally changed.
When [Auto] is selected, the proper exposure is set automatically, and when [Manual] is selected, the aperture value,
shutter speed, and ISO sensitivity can be set with the following dials.
Aperture value: front dial
Shutter speed: control wheel
ISO sensitivity: rear dial
Note
When you set the aperture value with the lens aperture ring, the aperture ring value takes priority over the dial value.
Related Topic
Exposure Ctrl Type
TP1001659768
MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Exposure] → [Auto/Manual Swt. Set.] → desired setting item.
1
135
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
136
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Shoot Mode (still image)/Shoot Mode (movie)
You can set the shooting mode according to the subject you want to shoot or the function you want to adjust.
Menu item details
Intelligent Auto (only when shooting still images):
The camera shoots with automatic scene recognition.
Program Auto:
Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).
Aperture Priority:
You can shoot by adjusting the aperture and changing the range in focus, or by defocusing the background.
Shutter Priority:
By adjusting the shutter speed, you can shoot still images with different effects for moving objects, or record movies with
natural movement.
Manual Exposure:
You can shoot with the desired exposure setting by adjusting both the shutter speed and aperture.
Flexible Exp. Mode (only when recording movies):
You can shoot by setting the aperture value, shutter speed, and ISO sensitivity either automatically or manually.
Memory recall:
Allows you to shoot an image after recalling often-used modes or camera settings registered in advance.
Hint
In the default settings, you can also display the [ Shoot Mode] or [ Shoot Mode] screen by pressing and holding the Fn
(Function) button.
When [Exposure Ctrl Type] is set to [Flexible Exp. Mode], the only items that are displayed when you press and hold the Fn
button in the movie shooting mode are [Flexible Exp. Mode] and [Memory recall]. If you want to display other shooting modes, set
[Exposure Ctrl Type] to [P/A/S/M Mode].
TP1001665532
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
Set the Still/Movie switch to the desired shooting mode.
1
MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Mode] → [ Shoot Mode]/[ Shoot Mode] → desired setting.
2
137
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Shoot Mode: Intelligent Auto
The camera shoots images with automatically adjusted settings.
About Scene Recognition
The Scene Recognition function allows the camera to automatically recognize shooting conditions.
When the camera recognizes certain scenes, the following icons and guides are displayed at the top of the screen:
(Portrait)
(Infant)
(Night Portrait)
(Night Scene)
(Backlight Portrait)
(Backlight)
(Landscape)
(Macro)
(Spotlight)
(Low Light)
(Night Scene using a tripod)
(Tripod)
*
Note
The product will not recognize the scene with zoom functions other than the optical zoom.
The product may not properly recognize the scene under certain shooting conditions.
TP1001663279
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
Set the Still/Movie switch to STILL (Still) to select the still image shooting mode.
1
MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Mode] → [ Shoot Mode] → [Intelligent Auto].
2
Point the camera at the subject.
When the camera recognized the scene, the icon for the recognized scene appears on the screen.
3
Adjust the focus and shoot the image.
4
Only an icon is displayed.
*
138
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Shoot Mode: Program Auto
Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).
You can set shooting functions such as [ ISO].
Program Shift (only during still image shooting)
When you are not using a flash, you can change the shutter speed and aperture (F-value) combination without changing
the appropriate exposure set by the camera.
Turn the front/rear dial to select the aperture value and shutter speed combination.
“ ” on the screen changes to “ ” when you turn the front/rear dial.
To cancel program shift, set the shooting mode to other than [Program Auto], or turn off the camera.
If [Footer Icon Touch] under [Shooting Screen] is set to [On], you can also perform program shift by touching the
shutter speed and aperture display area at the bottom of the screen.
Note
According to the brightness of the environment, the program shift may not be used.
Set the shooting mode to another one than “P” or turn off the power to cancel the setting you made.
When the brightness changes, the aperture (F-value) and shutter speed also change while maintaining the shift amount.
TP1001663280
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
Set the Still/Movie switch to the desired shooting mode.
1
MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Mode] → [ Shoot Mode]/[ Shoot Mode] → [Program Auto].
2
Set the shooting functions to your desired settings.
3
Adjust the focus and shoot the subject.
4
139
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Shoot Mode: Aperture Priority
You can shoot by adjusting the aperture and changing the range in focus, or by defocusing the background.
Note
The brightness of the image on the screen may differ from the actual image being shot.
Related Topic
Aperture Preview
TP1001663281
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
Set the Still/Movie switch to the desired shooting mode.
1
MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Mode] → [ Shoot Mode]/[ Shoot Mode] → [Aperture
Priority].
2
Select the desired value by turning the front/rear dial.
Smaller F-value: The subject is in focus, but objects in front of and beyond the subject are blurred.
Larger F-value: The subject and its foreground and background are all in focus.
If the aperture value you have set is not suitable for appropriate exposure, the shutter speed on the shooting
screen will blink. If this happens, change the aperture value.
3
Adjust the focus and shoot the subject.
The shutter speed is automatically adjusted to obtain proper exposure.
4
140
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Shoot Mode: Shutter Priority
By adjusting the shutter speed, you can shoot still images with different effects for moving objects, or record movies with
natural movement.
Hint
Use a tripod to prevent camera-shake when you have selected a slow shutter speed.
When you shoot indoor sports scenes, set the ISO sensitivity to a higher value.
Note
The SteadyShot warning indicator does not appear in [Shutter Priority] mode.
When [Long Exposure NR] is set to [On] and the shutter speed is 1 second(s) or longer with a [Shutter Type] other than
[Electronic Shutter] is set, noise reduction after shooting is performed for the same amount of time that the shutter was open.
However, you cannot shoot any more while noise reduction is in progress.
The brightness of the image on the screen may differ from the actual image being shot.
Related Topic
Shutter Mode
Long Exposure NR
TP1001663283
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
Set the Still/Movie switch to the desired shooting mode.
1
MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Mode] → [ Shoot Mode]/[ Shoot Mode] → [Shutter Priority].
2
Select the desired value by turning the front/rear dial.
If proper exposure cannot be obtained after setup, the aperture value on the shooting screen blinks. If this
happens, change the shutter speed.
When [Shutter Mode] is set to [Angle], the shutter speed for shooting movies is displayed in units of shutter
angles. The default setting is [Angle].
3
Adjust the focus and shoot the subject.
The aperture is automatically adjusted to obtain proper exposure.
4
141
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Shoot Mode: Manual Exposure
You can shoot with the desired exposure setting by adjusting both the shutter speed and aperture.
Hint
You can change the shutter speed and aperture (F-value) combination without changing the set exposure value by pressing the
key to which you assigned [AEL hold] or [AEL toggle] using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.], and rotating
the front dial or rear dial. (Manual shift)
Note
The Metered Manual indicator does not appear when [ ISO] is set to [ISO AUTO].
When the amount of ambient light exceeds the metering range of the Metered Manual, the Metered Manual indicator flashes.
The SteadyShot warning indicator does not appear in manual exposure mode.
The brightness of the image on the screen may differ from the actual image being shot.
TP1001663314
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
Set the Still/Movie switch to the desired shooting mode.
1
MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Mode] → [ Shoot Mode]/[ Shoot Mode] → [Manual
Exposure].
2
Select the desired aperture value by turning the front dial.
Select the desired shutter speed by turning the control wheel.
You can set which dial changes the aperture value and shutter speed with [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [
Custom Key/Dial Set.].
You can also set [ ISO] to [ISO AUTO] in manual exposure mode. The ISO value automatically changes to
achieve the appropriate exposure using the aperture value and shutter speed you have set.
When [ ISO] is set to [ISO AUTO], the ISO value indicator will blink if the value you have set is not suitable for
appropriate exposure. If this happens, change the shutter speed or aperture value.
When [ ISO] is set to other than [ISO AUTO], use MM (Metered Manual)* to check the exposure value.
Toward +: Images become brighter.
Toward -: Images become darker.
0: Appropriate exposure analyzed by the camera.
3
Indicates under/over for appropriate exposure.
*
Adjust the focus and shoot the subject.
4
142
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Shutter Mode
When shooting movies, you can choose between shutter speed or shutter angle as the method for expressing the
exposure time.
Menu item details
Speed:
The exposure time is expressed as a shutter speed.
Angle:
The exposure time is expressed as a shutter angle.
[Angle] is active in the following shooting modes:
(Shutter Priority)
(Manual Exposure)
When [Exposure Ctrl Type] is set to [Flexible Exp. Mode] and the shutter speed is set to [Manual]
Hint
When [Shutter Mode] is set to [Angle], the shutter angle is displayed in the footer settings, main menu, memory registration, etc.
The shutter angle can be selected from the following ranges.
When [Fixed/Variable Select] is set to [Fixed]: 5.6° to 64F
*
When [Fixed/Variable Select] is set to [Variable]: 5.6° to 360°
The shutter angle is not affected by the [ Exposure step] setting, and the value will remain constant.
Note
The settings for [Speed] and [Angle] are stored separately in the camera, so the shutter speed and shutter angle will not be the
same before and after switching between [Speed] and [Angle]. After switching between the shutter speed and shutter angle, reset
the settings as necessary to achieve the proper exposure.
TP1002003328
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Exposure] → [Shutter Mode] → desired setting.
1
When [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [119.88p]/[100p], the range is 5.6° to 360°.
*
143
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Bulb shooting
You can shoot a trailing image of the movement of a subject with long exposure.
Bulb shooting is suitable for shooting trails from stars or fireworks, etc.
Hint
When shooting fireworks, etc., focus at infinity in manual focus mode. If you use a lens whose infinity point is unclear, adjust the
focus on the fireworks in the area you want to focus on in advance.
In order to perform bulb shooting without causing the image quality to deteriorate, we recommend that you start shooting while
the camera is cool.
During bulb shooting, images tend to blur. It is recommended that you use a tripod, a Bluetooth remote commander (sold
separately) or a remote commander equipped with a lock function (sold separately). When using the Bluetooth remote
commander, you can start bulb shooting by pressing the shutter button on the remote commander. To stop bulb shooting, press
the shutter button on the remote commander again. To use the other remote commander, use the model which can be connected
via the Multi/Micro USB terminal.
Note
The longer the exposure time, the more noise will be visible on the image.
When [Long Exposure NR] is set to [On], noise reduction is performed after shooting for the same duration that the shutter was
open. You cannot shoot while noise reduction is in progress.
You cannot set the shutter speed to [BULB] in the following situations:
When the drive mode is set to the following:
[Cont. Shooting]
[Self-timer(Cont)]
[Cont. Bracket]
[Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic Shutter].
Interval shooting
[Silent Mode] under [ Silent Mode Settings] is set to [On]
Set the Still/Movie switch to STILL (Still) to select the still image shooting mode.
1
MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Mode] → [ Shoot Mode] → [Manual Exposure].
2
Turn the control wheel counterclockwise until [BULB] is indicated.
3
Select the aperture value (F-value) using the front dial.
4
Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.
5
Press and hold the shutter button for the duration of the shooting.
As long as the shutter button is pressed, the image sensor is exposed.
6
144
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
BULB Timer Settings
You can set the exposure time for bulb shooting in 1-second increments. This is convenient for long-time exposure
shooting in which the exposure time is predetermined.
Menu item details
BULB Timer:
When set to [On], exposure is performed for the length of time set in [Exposure Time]. When set to [Off], normal bulb
shooting is performed, and exposure lasts only as long as the shutter button is pressed. (On/Off)
Exposure Time:
Sets the exposure time in 1-second increments. (2 seconds to 900 seconds)
Hint
When [BULB Timer] is set to [On], a countdown to the end of the exposure time is displayed. When it is set to [Off], the elapsed
exposure time is displayed.
To stop bulb shooting during the exposure period set in [Exposure Time], press the shutter button on the camera or remote
control.
Related Topic
Bulb shooting
TP1001663276
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU→ (Exposure/Color) → [Exposure] → [BULB Timer Settings] → desired setting.
1
146
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Self-timer (movie)
You can start shooting with the self-timer when recording a movie.
Menu item details
On:
Uses the movie self-timer function.
Off:
Does not use the movie self-timer function.
Hint
To stop the self-timer countdown, press the REC button again or press the button to which the [ Self-timer] function is
assigned.
Note
If you press the REC button in the still image shooting mode to start movie recording, [ Self-timer] will not work.
TP1001663282
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Option] → [ Self-timer] → [On].
The [ Self-timer] setting screen will be displayed.
1
Select [On] using the control wheel and set the desired countdown time.
Rec Start delay: Sets the count time until the start of movie recording. (3 s/5 s/10 s)
Repetition: Sets whether to repeat the movie self-timer. (Repeat/Only Once)
If you select [Repeat], the movie self-timer will be activated repeatedly even after movie recording is completed.
If you select [Only Once], the movie self-timer will be canceled after movie recording is completed, and the
camera will return to the normal movie recording standby mode.
2
Adjust the focus and press the REC (Recording) button.
A countdown will appear on the recording standby screen, a beep will sound, and recording will start after the
designated number of seconds has elapsed.
Press the REC button again to end recording.
3
147
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Auto Framing Settings
During movie recording or streaming, the camera automatically changes the composition by following the recognized
subject and cropping so that even if the camera is fixed, you can shoot with camera-work (auto-framed shooting).
You can set the timing to start shooting with [Auto Framing], the size of the subject on the screen, etc.
This function cannot be used when [Fixed/Variable Select] is set to [Variable].
Menu item details
Auto Framing:
Sets whether to automatically frame shooting. When [On] is selected, the composition is automatically set so that the
recognized person or touch-tracked subject is in the center of the screen. ([On]/[Off])
Framing Oper. Mode:
Sets the start method and operating method for [Auto Framing].
Start When Tracking : Auto-framing starts at the same time as tracking starts with touch tracking, etc.
Auto Start : Auto-framing starts when the subject is recognized.
Auto Start(15s swtc) : When the subject is recognized, the camera repeats camera-work that smoothly switches
between the cropped angle of view and the full angle of view at 15-second intervals.
Auto Start(30s swtc) : When the subject is recognized, the camera repeats camera-work that smoothly switches
between the cropped angle of view and the full angle of view at 30-second intervals.
Crop Level:
Sets the displayed size of the subject within the cropped frame after recognizing the subject. ([Large crop level]/[Medium
crop level]/[Small crop level])
When [ Recognition Target] is set to [Human], or when [ Recognition Target] is set to [Auto] and a human is
recognized, the cropped frame size changes dynamically according to the recognition frame. When [ Recognition
MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Option] → [Auto Framing Settings] → [Auto Framing] → [On].
1
MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Option] → [Auto Framing Settings] → Select an item to set, and
then select the desired setting.
2
Start shooting or streaming.
A cropping frame is displayed on the monitor screen and follows the movement of the subject.
When [Touch Operation] is set to [On], you can select the subject of automatic framing using touch operations.
3
148
Target] is set to an item other than [Human], or when [ Recognition Target] is set to [Auto] and an item other than a
human is recognized, the cropped frame size will be locked.
Framing Tracking Speed:
Sets the subject tracking speed for camera-work. (1 to 5)
Movie Rec/Streaming:
Sets whether the images recorded on the memory card and the images output via streaming are auto-framed images or
full-angle images. ([Crop]/[Do not crop])
When [Crop] is selected, auto-framed images are recorded or streamed.
HDMI Output:
Sets whether the images output to HDMI are auto-framed images or full-angle images. ([Crop]/[Do not crop])
When [Crop] is selected, auto-framed images are output.
Hint
The auto-framing function performs camera-work by cropping the 4K-resolution image. When using the auto-framing function, it is
recommended that you set [ File Format] to HD image quality in order to prevent deterioration of image quality.
When setting the shutter speed manually and shooting with auto framing, it is recommended that you set a faster shutter speed to
reduce blurring of the subject.
When [ Focus Area] is set to [Wide], the subject is recognized and framed. When it is set to [Spot], framing is performed
around the spot frame. You can also change the cropping position by moving the spot frame during shooting.
By using the smartphone application Creators' App, you can check the framing status and perform touch operations even at a
distance from the camera.
For more information about how to use Creators' App, refer to the following website.
https://www.sony.net/ca/help/opr/
Note
Auto-framing is available only in the movie recording mode.
Even when [Auto Framing] is set to [On], the monitor always displays image in the full angle of view, and a frame indicating the
cropping area is displayed during auto-framed shooting.
If there are multiple recognized subjects, only the subject with the highest priority will be targeted.
Depending on the settings for [ File Format] and [ Movie Settings], the angle of view may change when [Auto Framing] is
set to [On].
TP1001665619
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
149
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Framing Stabilizer
The camera automatically corrects the composition so that the subject being tracked is kept at the same position in the
composition, allowing you to record movies with the position of the subject stable.
Menu item details
On:
[Framing Stabilizer] is enabled.
Selects [On: Center], which locks the composition so that the subject being tracked is in the center, or [On: Manual],
which requires you to manually set the position to which the subject being tracked is locked.
When [On: Manual] is selected, you can lock/unlock the position of the subject by touching (composition lock
icon) on the screen or pressing the center of the control wheel.
Off:
[Framing Stabilizer] is disabled.
Hint
When the subject is moving, keeping the camera aimed at the subject while shooting will make it easier to correct the
composition.
With [Framing Stabilizer], the angle of view becomes narrower because cropping is performed using images in 4K resolution.
To avoid deterioration of the image quality, it is recommended that you set [ File Format] to HD image quality when using
[Framing Stabilizer].
Note
The camera may focus on a subject outside the area cropped with [Framing Stabilizer].
It may not be possible to correct the composition depending on the movement of the subject.
TP1001665615
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Stabilization] → [Framing Stabilizer] → desired setting.
1
150
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Selecting the focus method (Focus Mode)
Selects the focus method to suit the movement of the subject.
Menu item details
Single-shot AF:
The product locks the focus once focusing is complete. Use this when the subject is motionless.
Automatic AF:
[Single-shot AF] and [Continuous AF] are switched according to the movement of the subject. When the shutter button is
pressed halfway down, the product locks the focus when it determines that the subject is motionless, or continues to
focus when the subject is in motion. During continuous shooting, the product automatically shoots with [Continuous AF]
from the second shot.
Continuous AF:
The product continues to focus while the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down. Use this when the subject is in
motion. In [Continuous AF] mode, there is no beep when the camera focuses.
DMF:
You can make fine adjustments manually after performing auto focusing, letting you focus on a subject more quickly than
when using [Manual Focus] from the beginning. This is convenient in situations such as macro shooting.
Manual Focus:
Adjusts the focus manually. If you cannot focus on the intended subject using auto focus, use [Manual Focus].
Focus indicator
(lit):
The subject is in focus and the focus is locked.
(flashing):
The subject is not in focus.
(lit):
The subject is in focus. The focus will be adjusted continuously according to the movements of the subject.
(lit):
Focusing is in progress.
Subjects on which it is difficult to focus using auto focus
Dark and distant subjects
Subjects with poor contrast
Subjects seen through glass
Fast-moving subjects
Reflective light or shiny surfaces
Flashing light
MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [ Focus Mode] → desired setting.
1
151
Back-lit subjects
Continuously repetitive patterns, such as the facades of buildings
Subjects in the focusing area with different focal distances
To always enable manual focusing operations when shooting still images (Full Time
DMF)
If you set [Full Time DMF] to [On], you can perform manual focusing operations regardless of the focus mode setting.
You can use both the auto and manual focus without changing the focus mode setting.
(You cannot switch to manual focus while shooting continuously in the [Continuous AF] mode.)
Hint
In [Continuous AF] mode, you can lock the focus by pressing and holding the button that has been assigned the [Focus Hold]
function.
When you set the focus to infinity in [Manual Focus] mode or [DMF] mode, make sure that the focus is on a sufficiently distant
subject by checking the monitor or the viewfinder.
Note
[Automatic AF] is available only when you are using a lens that supports phase detection AF.
When [Continuous AF] or [Automatic AF] is set, the angle of view may change little by little while focusing.
Only [Continuous AF] and [Manual Focus] are available when shooting movies or when the Still/Movie switch is set to MOVIE
(Movie).
Related Topic
Direct manual focus (DMF)
Manual Focus
Full Time DMF
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)
TP1001651423
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
152
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)
Set the type of focusing frame when shooting with the auto focus. Select the mode according to the subject.
Menu item details
Wide:
Focuses on a subject covering the whole range of the screen automatically. When you press the shutter button halfway
down in the still image shooting mode, a green frame is displayed around the area that is in focus.
Zone:
Select a zone on the monitor on which to focus, and the product will automatically select a focus area.
Center Fix:
Focuses automatically on a subject in the center of the image. Use together with the focus-lock function to create the
composition you want.
Spot: XL/Spot: L/Spot: M/Spot: S:
Allows you to move the focusing frame to a desired point on the screen and focus on an extremely small subject in a
narrow area.
Expand Spot:
If the product cannot focus on a single selected point, it uses focus points around the [Spot] as a secondary priority area
for focusing.
Custom 1/Custom 2/Custom 3:
Allows you to set the shape and size of the focusing area.
Tracking:
This setting is available only when the [ Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF]. When the shutter button is pressed
and held halfway down, the product tracks the subject within the selected autofocus area. Point the cursor at [Tracking]
on the [ Focus Area] setting screen, and then select the desired area to start tracking using the left/right sides of the
control wheel. You can also move the tracking start area to the desired point by designating the area as [Tracking: Zone],
[Tracking: Spot XL]/[Tracking: Spot L]/[Tracking: Spot M]/[Tracking: Spot S], [Tracking: Expand Spot], or [Tracking:
Custom 1] through [Tracking: Custom 3].
Note
[ Focus Area] is locked to [Wide] in the following situations:
[Intelligent Auto]
The focus area may not light up during continuous shooting or when the shutter button is pressed all the way down at once.
MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Area] → [ Focus Area] → desired setting.
1
153
When the Still/Movie switch is set to MOVIE (Movie) or during movie shooting, [Tracking] cannot be selected for [ Focus Area].
Examples of the focusing frame display
The focusing frame differs as follows.
When focusing on a larger area
When focusing on a smaller area
When [ Focus Area] is set to [Wide] or [Zone], the focusing frame may switch between “When focusing on a larger
area” and “When focusing on a smaller area” depending on the subject or situation.
When [ Focus Area] is set to [Custom], the focusing frame may switch to “When focusing on a smaller area” if
either the vertical or horizontal side of the focus area is longer than the side of the focusing frame for [Spot: XL].
When you attach an A-mount lens with a Mount Adaptor (LA-EA3 or LA-EA5) (sold separately), the focusing frame for
“When focusing on a smaller area” may be displayed.
When focus is achieved automatically based on the whole range of the monitor
When you use a zoom function other than the optical zoom in the still image shooting mode, the [ Focus Area]
setting is disabled and the focusing frame is shown by the dotted line. The AF operates with priority on and around
the center area.
To change the shape and size of the focus area ([Custom])
If you press the (Delete) button on the screen when an option from [Custom 1] to [Custom 3] is selected for [
Focus Area], a screen for setting the shape and size of the focus frame will be displayed. Use the front dial/rear
dial/control wheel to set the shape and size of the focus frame.
Front dial: Changes the height of the focus frame.
154
Rear dial: Changes the width of the focus frame.
Rotating the control wheel: Enlarges/reduces the size of the focus frame.
The shape and size of the focus frame can also be set using touch operations. Drag the four corners or sides of the
focus frame. You can also enlarge/reduce the size of the focus frame by pinching in/out on the monitor.
You can change the position of the focus frame with the multi selector or the top/bottom/left/right of the control wheel.
Press the (Delete) button to return the focus frame shape and size to the default settings.
To move the focus area
You can move the focus area by operating the multi-selector when [ Focus Area] is set to the following
parameters:
[Zone]
[Spot: XL]/[Spot: L]/[Spot: M]/[Spot: S]
[Expand Spot]
[Custom 1] - [Custom 3]
[Tracking: Zone]
[Tracking: Spot XL]/[Tracking: Spot L]/[Tracking: Spot M]/[Tracking: Spot S]
[Tracking: Expand Spot]
[Tracking: Custom 1] - [Tracking: Custom 3]
If you assign [Focus Standard] to the center of the multi-selector beforehand, you can move the focusing frame back
to the subject being tracked or the center of the monitor by pressing the center of the multi-selector.
Hint
When [ Focus Area] is set to one of the following, you can move the focusing frame over a greater distance at a time by setting
[ AF Frame Move Amt] to [Large].
[Spot]
[Expand Spot]
[Custom 1] - [Custom 3]
You can move the focusing frame quickly by touching and dragging it on the monitor. Set [Touch Operation] to [On], and set
[Touch Func. in Shooting] under [Shooting Screen] in [Touch Panel Settings] to [Touch Focus] beforehand.
To track the subject temporarily when shooting still images and movies (Tracking On)
You can temporarily change the setting for [ Focus Area] to [Tracking] while pressing and holding down the custom
key to which you have assigned [Tracking On] with [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] in advance.
The [ Focus Area] setting before you activated [Tracking On] will switch to the equivalent [Tracking] setting.
For example:
Hint
When [Tracking On + AF On] or [Tracking On + ] is assigned to a custom key using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.], while the
custom key is pressed during still image shooting, autofocus works simultaneously with tracking to keep the subject in focus.
[Tracking On + AF On]: Tracks the subject in the focus area according to the setting for [ Focus Area] before you pressed the
custom key.
[ Focus Area] before you activate [Tracking On] [ Focus Area] while [Tracking On] is active
[Wide] [Tracking: Wide]
[Spot: S] [Tracking: Spot S]
[Expand Spot] [Tracking: Expand Spot]
155
[Tracking On + ]: Tracks the subject in the center of the screen despite the setting for [ Focus Area] before you
pressed the custom key.
Phase detection AF
When there are phase detection AF points within the auto focus area, the product uses the combined autofocus of the
phase detection AF and contrast AF.
Note
Phase detection AF is available only when a compatible lens is attached. If you use a lens that does not support phase detection
AF, you cannot use the following functions.
[Automatic AF]
[AF Lvl for Crossing]
[AF Trk for Spd Chng]
[AF Subj. Shift Sensitivity]
[AF Transition Speed]
Also, even if you use a previously purchased applicable lens, the phase detection AF might not function unless you update the
lens.
Related Topic
Selecting the focus method (Focus Mode)
Touch Operation
Touch Panel Settings
Focusing using touch operations (Touch Focus)
Adjusting the focus area settings to the camera’s orientation (horizontal/vertical) (Switch V/H AF Area)
Registering the current focus area (AF Area Registration)
TP1001642610
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
156
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Tracking subject (Tracking function)
This camera has the function of tracking which tracks the subject, and keeps marking it with the focusing frame.
You can set the start position to track by selecting from focusing areas, or by specifying by touch operation. The required
function varies depending on the setting method.
You can refer to the related functions under “Related Topic” at the bottom of this page.
Setting the start position to track by focusing area ([Tracking] under [ Focus Area])
The selected focusing frame is set as the start position to track, and the tracking starts by pressing the shutter button
halfway down.
This function is available in still image shooting mode.
This function is available when [ Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF].
Setting the start position to track by touch operation ([Touch Tracking] under [Touch
Func. in Shooting])
You can set the subject to track by touching it on the monitor.
This function is available in still image shooting mode and movie shooting mode.
You can use this function for shooting still images when [ Focus Mode] is set to [Single-shot AF], [Automatic AF],
[Continuous AF], or [DMF].
You can use this function for shooting movies when [ Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF] or [Manual Focus].
Changing the setting for [ Focus Area] to [Tracking] temporarily ([Tracking On] by
Custom Key)
Even [ Focus Area] is set to other than [Tracking], you can temporarily change the setting for [ Focus Area] to
[Tracking] while pressing and holding the key to which you have assigned [Tracking On] function.
Assign the [Tracking On] function to a desired key using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] in
advance.
This function is available in still image shooting mode and movie shooting mode.
You can use this function for shooting still images when [ Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF].
You can use this function for shooting movies when [ Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF] or [Manual Focus].
Hint
When [Tracking On + AF On] or [Tracking On + ] is assigned to a custom key using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.], while the
custom key is pressed during still image shooting, autofocus works simultaneously with tracking to keep the subject in focus.
[Tracking On + AF On]: Tracks the subject in the focus area according to the setting for [ Focus Area] before you pressed the
custom key.
[Tracking On + ]: Tracks the subject in the center of the screen despite the setting for [ Focus Area] before you
pressed the custom key.
Temporarily pausing the tracking function
By pressing the key to which you assigned [Tracking Off on Hold] or [Tracking Off on Toggle] using [ Custom Key/Dial
Set.], you can temporarily pause the tracking function.
157
Use this function when you are in a shooting situation where it is difficult to keep tracking, or when the tracking frame
switches to another subject.
If you press the key to which you assigned [Track Recog Off on Hold] or [Track Recog Off Toggle] using [ Custom
Key/Dial Set.], [ Subject Recog in AF] will temporarily switch to [Off], suspending tracking of the recognized subject.
Use this function when the tracking frame switches to an unintended subject.
Related Topic
Selecting the focus method (Focus Mode)
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)
Starting tracking with touch operations (Touch Tracking)
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
TP1001658259
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
158
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Manual Focus
When it is difficult to focus properly in the autofocus mode, you can adjust the focus manually.
Hint
If you set [Full Time DMF] to [On], you can perform manual focusing operations when shooting still images, regardless of the
focus mode setting.
Note
When you use the viewfinder, adjust the diopter level to obtain the correct focus on the viewfinder.
The displayed focus distance is just a reference.
Related Topic
Direct manual focus (DMF)
Full Time DMF
Auto Magnifier in MF
Focus Magnifier
Peaking Display
TP1001619139
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [ Focus Mode] → [Manual Focus].
1
Rotate the focusing ring to achieve sharp focus.
When you shoot a still image, you can display the focus distance on the screen by rotating the focusing ring.
The focus distance is not displayed when the Mount Adaptor (sold separately) is attached.
2
159
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Direct manual focus (DMF)
You can make fine adjustments manually after performing auto focusing, letting you focus on a subject more quickly than
when using the manual focus from the beginning. This is convenient in situations such as macro shooting.
Hint
If you set [Full Time DMF] to [On], you can always perform manual focusing operations without setting the focus mode to [DMF].
(You cannot switch to manual focus while shooting continuously in the [Continuous AF] mode.)
Related Topic
Manual Focus
Full Time DMF
Peaking Display
TP1001619140
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [ Focus Mode] → [DMF].
1
Press the shutter button halfway down to focus automatically.
2
Keep the shutter button pressed halfway down, and then rotate the focusing ring to achieve a sharper
focus.
When you rotate the focusing ring, the focus distance is displayed on the screen.
The focus distance is not displayed when the Mount Adaptor (sold separately) is attached.
3
Press the shutter button fully down to shoot an image.
4
160
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Focusing using subject recognition functions
If you set the subject in advance, the camera will automatically recognize the subject and can focus on the eyes, etc.
when shooting images.
This table describes two methods to focus and shoot using subject recognition. Select the appropriate method according
to your purpose.
To focus on the eyes of an animal or a bird
Before shooting, set [ Recognition Target] to [Animal], [Bird], or [Animal/Bird] according to the subject. You can select
[Eye/Head/Body], [Eye/Head], or [Eye] as the desired part to be recognized with priority in the still image shooting mode.
To focus on insects
Before shooting, set [ Recognition Target] to [Insect].
To focus on cars, trains, or airplanes
Item [ Subject Recog in AF] function [Subject Recognition AF] via a custom key
Advance
preparation
Select [ Subject Recog in AF] → [On].
Select [Auto], [Human], [Animal/Bird],
[Animal], [Bird], [Insect], [Car/Train], or
[Airplane] for [ Recognition Target].
Assign [Subject Recognition AF] to the desired
key using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [
Custom Key/Dial Set.].
Select [Auto], [Human], [Animal/Bird], [Animal],
[Bird], [Insect], [Car/Train], or [Airplane] for [
Recognition Target].
How to focus
Press the shutter button halfway down.
*1
Press the key to which you have assigned the
[Subject Recognition AF] function.
*2
Function
details
The camera focuses on the eye, head,
body, or entirety of the subject recognized
in or around the designated [ Focus
Area].
If the camera does not recognize any
subjects in or around the designated [
Focus Area], normal auto-focusing will be
performed.
The camera focuses on the recognized subject's
eye, head, or body or the entirety of the subject
anywhere on the screen, regardless of the setting
for [ Focus Area].
The camera will not perform auto-focusing if no
subjects are recognized anywhere on the screen.
Focus mode
Follows the setting designated with [
Focus Mode]
Follows the setting designated with [ Focus Mode]
Focus area
Follows the setting designated with [
Focus Area]
The focus area temporarily becomes the entire
screen, regardless of the setting for [ Focus Area].
This operation is for focusing when shooting still images. When shooting movies, the camera will focus on the recognized subject, even if you do
not press the shutter button.
*1
Regardless of whether [ Subject Recog in AF] is set to [On] or [Off], if you have assigned [Subject Recognition AF] to a custom key, you can
use [Subject Recognition AF] while you are pressing that custom key.
*2
161
Before shooting, set [ Recognition Target] to [Car/Train] or [Airplane].
To leave the switching of recognition targets up to the camera for shooting
Set [ Recognition Target] to [Auto] and shoot the images.
Hint
Setting [ Sbj Recog Frm Disp.] to [On] makes it easier to check the detection status of faces or eyes, etc.
[Subject Recognition AF] using a custom key is convenient in the following cases.
When you want to temporarily use [Subject Recognition AF] on the entire screen only while pressing the key, regardless of the [
Focus Area] setting
When you do not want to perform auto-focusing when the camera does not recognize a subject
Positioning the entire subject in the angle of view makes the subject easier to recognize.
Note
It may be difficult to focus on the subject in the following situations:
In low-light or back-lit conditions.
When the subject is in the shade.
When the subject is out of focus.
When the subject is moving too much, etc.
It may be difficult to focus on eyes in the following situations even when the camera recognizes eyes:
When the eyes are closed.
When the eyes are covered by hair, etc.
When the person is wearing sunglasses.
There are also other situations in which it may not be possible to focus on the subjects.
When the camera cannot focus on the part you want to prioritize, such as the eyes of the subject, the camera may automatically
focus on other recognized parts such as the head or body of the subject.
Even when a white subject recognition frame is displayed around the subject's face, etc., the camera may automatically focus on
the part you want to prioritize, such as the subject's eye.
The subject may not be recognized when only a part of the subject is within the angle of view.
When only the hands and feet of a person or animal are visible
When a part of the subject is hidden and cannot be seen, etc.
The camera may accidentally recognize other objects as the designated subject under some conditions.
When [ Recognition Target] is set to [Auto], the camera automatically determines the recognition target, so depending on the
situation, the recognized subject may differ from the intended one. By setting [ Recognition Target] to the desired subject, you
may be able to resolve the issue of unintended subjects being recognized.
Related Topic
Subject Recog in AF (still image/movie)
Recognition Target (still image/movie)
Recog Trgt Select Set (still image/movie)
Right/Left Eye Select (still image/movie)
Sbj Recog Frm Disp. (still image)
Selecting the focus method (Focus Mode)
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)
TP1001663331
162
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
163
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Subject Recog in AF (still image/movie)
Sets whether to recognize and focus on subjects in the focus area when autofocusing.
Menu item details
On:
Focuses on a subject with priority if it has been recognized inside or around the designated focus area.
Off:
Does not recognize subjects when autofocusing.
Hint
By combining the [ Subject Recog in AF] function with [ Focus Area] → [Tracking], you can maintain the focus on a moving
subject.
When [ Subject Recog in AF] is assigned to the desired key using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.],
you can switch the [ Subject Recog in AF] function on or off by pressing the key.
By assigning [Recognition Off on Hold] or [Recog. Off on Toggle] to the desired key with [ Custom Key/Dial Set.], you can
switch [ Subject Recog in AF] to [Off] temporarily using the key.
Note
If the camera does not recognize the subject specified with [ Recognition Target] in or around the designated focus area, it will
focus on another subject.
When the shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto], [ Subject Recog in AF] is locked to [On].
Related Topic
Focusing using subject recognition functions
Recognition Target (still image/movie)
Recog Trgt Select Set (still image/movie)
Right/Left Eye Select (still image/movie)
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
TP1001663332
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU→ (Focus) → [Subject Recognition] → [ Subject Recog in AF] → desired setting.
1
164
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Recognition Target (still image/movie)
Selects the target to be recognized by the subject recognition function when autofocusing.
Menu item details
Auto:
The camera will automatically select and recognize a subject from among the recognition targets to which check marks
were added on the [ Auto Recog. Target] screen.
Human:
Recognizes humans as subjects.
Animal/Bird:
Recognizes animals and birds as subjects.
Animal:
Recognizes animals as subjects.
Bird:
Recognizes birds as subjects.
Insect:
Recognizes insects as subjects.
Car/Train:
Recognizes cars and trains as subjects.
Airplane:
Recognizes airplanes as subjects.
To narrow down the types of recognition targets when using the [Auto] setting
Set [ Recognition Target] to [Auto] and press the right side of the control wheel to display the [ Auto Recog. Target]
screen. Uncheck any subjects you do not want the camera to automatically recognize. One of the checked subjects will
be automatically recognized.
Detailed settings for each recognition target
By pressing the right side of the control wheel on the [ Recognition Target] screen, you can make detailed settings for
each recognition target. Even when [ Recognition Target] is set to [Auto], you can configure detailed settings for each
recognition target on the [ Auto Recog. Target] screen. Functions other than [Recognition Priority Set.] can only be set
in the still image shooting mode.
Tracking Shift Range
*1
*5
:
Sets the range for recognizing the subjects. Narrowing the range makes the camera shift the focus to a recognized
subject only when the subject is close to the tracking frame. Widening the range makes the camera shift the focus to a
recognized subject even when the subject is distant from the tracking frame. ([1(Narrow)] to [5(Wide)])
Tracking Persistence Lvl
*2
*5
:
MENU → (Focus) → [Subject Recognition] → [ Recognition Target] → desired setting.
1
165
Sets the sensitivity for whether to continue tracking around the subject or shift the focus to another subject that is closer
in shooting distance when a recognized subject is lost.
When set to [5(Locked On)], even under conditions where a recognized subject is lost, such as when the subject that you
want to shoot is temporarily hidden by another object, the camera continues to track the area around the subject.
When set to [1(Not Locked On)], under conditions where the camera cannot continue to track a recognized subject, such
as when the subject is moving fast, the camera cancels tracking and quickly shifts the focus to another subject that is
closer in shooting distance. ([1(Not Locked On)] to [5(Locked On)])
Recognition Sensitivity
*2
*5
:
Sets the sensitivity of subject recognition. The lower the setting, the easier it is to prevent false recognition. The higher
the setting, the easier it is to recognize subjects that are normally difficult. ([1(Low)] to [5(High)])
Recognition Priority Set.
*3
:
Sets which to prioritize when animals and birds are recognized at the same time. ([Auto]/[Priority on Animals]/[Priority on
Birds])
Recognition Part
*4
:
Sets the part to be recognized. ([Eye/Head/Body]/[Eye/Head]/[Eye]/[Follow Individ. Set.]
*3
)
Recog. Part Sel. Settings
*4
:
When [Recognition Part Select] is assigned to a custom key, this sets the recognized part that can be switched with the
custom key. ([Eye/Head/Body]/[Eye/Head]/[Eye]/[Follow Individ. Set.]
*3
)
Hint
To recognize animal or bird eyes, compose the shot so that the entire head is within the angle of view. Once you focus on the
animal’s or bird’s head, the eyes will be recognized more easily.
If you register [Recognition Part] in the function menu, you can change the setting while shooting a still image.
If the camera recognizes an unintended subject when set to [Auto], try one of the following methods:
Uncheck unnecessary subjects in [ Auto Recog. Target].
Set [ Recognition Target] to the target you want to recognize instead of [Auto].
Set [ Focus Area] to an item other than [Wide] and align the focus frame with the subject you want to recognize.
Touch the subject you want to recognize (when [Touch Func. in Shooting] is set to [Touch Tracking]).
If these methods do not improve the situation, you can temporarily disable [ Subject Recog in AF] by using the custom key to
which [Recognition Off on Hold] or [Recog. Off on Toggle] is assigned.
Note
When [ Recognition Target] is set to other than [Human], the following functions cannot be used.
Face Priority in Multi Metering
Regist. Face Priority
Some types of subjects cannot be recognized in line with the [ Recognition Target] setting. Also, subjects other than the target
you have set may be recognized as the subject in some cases. If this occurs, set [ Focus Area] to [Zone] or [Spot] and move
the focus frame closer to the subject to make it easier to recognize the subject.
Related Topic
Focusing using subject recognition functions
Subject Recog in AF (still image/movie)
TP1001663333
Available for [Human]/[Animal]/[Bird]/[Insect]/[Car/Train]/[Airplane]
*1
[Animal]/[Bird]/[Insect]/[Car/Train]/[Airplane] only
*2
[Animal/Bird] only
*3
[Animal/Bird]/[Animal]/[Bird] only
*4
When the recognition target is set to [Animal/Bird], these settings can be adjusted from the [Animal: Detailed Setting] or [Bird: Detailed Settings]
screen.
*5
166
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
167
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Recog Trgt Select Set (still image/movie)
Sets the types of recognition targets that are available when using the custom key to which [Recog. Target Select] is
assigned.
Hint
Assign [Recog. Target Select] to the desired key using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.].
You can select the types of targets to which you did not add a check mark in [ Recog Trgt Select Set] by selecting MENU →
(Focus) → [Subject Recognition] → [ Recognition Target].
Related Topic
Recognition Target (still image/movie)
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
TP1001663334
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Focus) → [Subject Recognition] → [ Recog Trgt Select Set] → Add check marks to the
recognition targets that you want to select, and then select [OK].
The types of targets marked with (check mark) will be available as settings.
1
168
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Right/Left Eye Select (still image/movie)
Sets whether to focus on the left or right eye when [ Recognition Target] is set to [Human] or [Animal].
Menu item details
Auto:
The camera automatically selects either the left eye or right eye.
Right Eye:
The right eye of the subject (the eye on the left side from the photographer’s perspective) is selected.
Left Eye:
The left eye of the subject (the eye on the right side from the photographer’s perspective) is selected.
[Switch Right/Left Eye] by custom key
You can also switch between focusing on the right eye and left eye with the custom key.
When [ Right/Left Eye Select] is set to [Right Eye] or [Left Eye], you can switch the eye on which the camera will focus
by pressing the custom key to which you have assigned the [Switch Right/Left Eye] function.
When [ Right/Left Eye Select] is set to [Auto], you can temporarily switch the eye to be focused by pressing the
custom key to which you have assigned the [Switch Right/Left Eye] function.
The temporary left/right selection is canceled when you perform the following operations, etc. The camera returns to
automatic eye selection.
Pressing the center of the control wheel
Pressing the center of the multi-selector
Stopping pressing the shutter button halfway down (only during still image shooting)
Stopping pressing the custom key to which [AF On] or [Subject Recognition AF] is assigned (only during still image
shooting)
Pressing the MENU button
Hint
When [ Sbj Recog Frm Disp.] is set to [On], the eye recognition frame appears around the eye you selected using the [
Right/Left Eye Select] menu or using the [Switch Right/Left Eye] function activated by the custom key.
Related Topic
Focusing using subject recognition functions
Subject Recog in AF (still image/movie)
Recognition Target (still image/movie)
Sbj Recog Frm Disp. (still image)
TP1001663335
MENU → (Focus) → [Subject Recognition] → [ Right/Left Eye Select] → desired setting.
1
169
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
170
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Sbj Recog Frm Disp. (still image)
Sets whether to display a subject recognition frame when a subject is recognized.
Menu item details
On:
Displays a recognition frame when a subject is recognized.
Off:
Does not display a recognition frame when a subject is recognized.
Subject recognition frame
When the camera recognizes a subject and determines that the subject is a target for auto-focusing, the white subject-
recognition frame appears.
The recognition frame is automatically prioritized and displayed where a more precise recognition target (such as eyes) is
recognized.
When [Human] is selected:
When the camera recognizes a subject, the white or gray subject-recognition frame appears around the eye, face, or
body.
When [Animal/Bird], [Animal], or [Bird] is selected:
When the camera recognizes a subject, the white subject-recognition frame appears around the eye, head, or body.
MENU → (Focus) → [Subject Recognition] → [ Sbj Recog Frm Disp.] → desired setting.
1
171
When [Insect] is selected:
When the camera recognizes a subject, the white subject-recognition frame appears around the head or the entire
subject.
When [Car/Train] or [Airplane] is selected:
When the camera recognizes a subject, the white subject-recognition frame appears around the front part of the train or
the nose of the airplane or around the entire subject.
Note
If the subject is not recognized, the subject recognition frame will not be displayed.
If the subject or the camera is moving too much, the recognition frame may not be displayed correctly over the subject.
Even if [ Sbj Recog Frm Disp.] is set to [Off], a green recognition frame will appear over the subject that is in focus when you
press the shutter button halfway down, etc.
Related Topic
Focusing using subject recognition functions
Subject Recog in AF (still image/movie)
Recognition Target (still image/movie)
Right/Left Eye Select (still image/movie)
Face Memory (still image/movie)
TP1001663336
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
172
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Sbj Recog Frm Disp. (movie)
Sets whether to display a subject recognition frame when a subject is recognized.
Menu item details
On:
Displays a recognition frame when a subject is recognized.
Off:
Does not display a recognition frame when a subject is recognized.
Subject recognition frame
When the camera recognizes a subject and determines that the subject is a target for auto-focusing, the white subject-
recognition frame appears.
The recognition frame is automatically prioritized and displayed where a more precise recognition target (such as eyes) is
recognized.
When [Human] is selected:
When the camera recognizes a subject, the white or gray subject-recognition frame appears around the eye, face, or
body.
When [Animal/Bird], [Animal], or [Bird] is selected:
When the camera recognizes a subject, the white subject-recognition frame appears around the eye, head, or body.
MENU → (Focus) → [Subject Recognition] → [ Sbj Recog Frm Disp.] → desired setting.
1
173
When [Insect] is selected:
When the camera recognizes a subject, the white subject-recognition frame appears around the head or the entire
subject.
When [Car/Train] or [Airplane] is selected:
When the camera recognizes a subject, the white subject-recognition frame appears around the front part of the train or
the nose of the airplane or around the entire subject.
Note
If the subject is not recognized, the subject recognition frame will not be displayed.
If the subject or the camera is moving too much, the recognition frame may not be displayed correctly over the subject.
Even if [ Sbj Recog Frm Disp.] is set to [Off], a green recognition frame will appear over the subject that is in focus when you
press the shutter button halfway down, etc.
Related Topic
Focusing using subject recognition functions
Subject Recog in AF (still image/movie)
Recognition Target (still image/movie)
Right/Left Eye Select (still image/movie)
Face Memory (still image/movie)
TP1001665239
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
174
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Face Memory (still image/movie)
This function registers and deletes face data and sets whether to identify registered faces. Up to seven faces can be
registered. If you set one of the registered faces as the identification target, the face will be prioritized when focusing.
To choose a face to identify
Select the face you want to identify on the [ Face Memory] list screen and press the center of the control wheel. The
radio button for the face set as the identification target will turn on.
To delete a registered face
Select the face you want to delete on the [ Face Memory] list screen and press the (Delete) button. Then, select
[Delete This Face]. If you select [Delete All Faces], all registered faces will be deleted.
Note
When performing [ Face Memory], do so in a bright place with the subject facing forward. It will be easier to register a face if
you position it inside the frame in the center of the monitor and position the neck and shoulders under the frame. If the face is
hidden by a hat, mask, sunglasses, etc. or the neck or shoulders are hidden, you may not be able to register it correctly.
Even if you perform [Delete This Face], the registered face data will remain in the camera. If you want to delete it from the camera
as well, perform [Delete All Faces].
Faces registered through the [ Face Memory] function are considered biometric information. Users are responsible for
collecting and using such data and for complying with the laws and regulations of the relevant country or region. For more
information, visit the following website.
https://www.sony.net/dics/privacy
Related Topic
Regist. Face Priority (still image/movie)
TP1001663289
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Focus) → [Subject Recognition] → [ Face Memory].
1
On the [ Face Memory] list screen, select the + icon frame and press the center of the control wheel.
2
Position the face you want to register in the frame in the center of the screen and press the center of the
control wheel.
The registered face will be displayed on the [ Face Memory] list screen.
3
175
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Regist. Face Priority (still image/movie)
Sets whether to focus with higher priority on a selected face using [ Face Memory].
Menu item details
On:
Focuses on a face identified in the [ Face Memory] menu with priority.
Off:
Focuses on faces without prioritizing the selected face.
Hint
To use the [ Regist. Face Priority] function, set as follows.
[ Subject Recog in AF] under [Subject Recognition]: [On]
[ Recognition Target] under [Subject Recognition]: [Human]
If you assign [ Regist. Face Priority] to a custom key, you can switch [ Regist. Face Priority] between [On] and [Off] each
time you press the key.
If you assign [Switch Ident. Target] to a custom key, you can switch the face to be identified each time you press the key.
Related Topic
Subject Recog in AF (still image/movie)
Recognition Target (still image/movie)
Face Memory (still image/movie)
TP1001663290
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Focus) → [Subject Recognition] → [ Regist. Face Priority] → desired setting.
1
176
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Selecting a person to track (Select Face to Track)
When the camera recognizes multiple people, you can choose which person to track.
Hint
Even when [ Focus Area] is set to an item other than [Wide] or [Center Fix], you can use a custom key for [Select Face to
Track]. Assign [Select Face to Track] to the desired key using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] in
advance. The [Select Face to Track] screen appears when you press the key to which [Select Face to Track] is assigned.
Note
MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Area] → [ Focus Area] → [Wide] or [Center Fix].
1
Press the top/bottom/left/right sides of the multi-selector while multiple people are recognized.
The [Select Face to Track] screen will appear, and an orange bar will be displayed below the face to be tracked.
2
Select a face to track using the multi-selector and press the center.
The orange bar will move to the selected face. Once the selection is confirmed, exit the [Select Face to Track]
screen and start tracking the selected face.
3
177
To use the [Select Face to Track] function, set as follows.
[ Subject Recog in AF] under [Subject Recognition]: [On]
[ Recognition Target] under [Subject Recognition]: [Human]
[Select Face to Track] is unavailable in the following situations:
When [ Focus Mode] is set to [Manual Focus] in still image shooting mode
When using the Smart Zoom, Clear Image Zoom and Digital Zoom in still image shooting mode
Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
TP1001663330
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
178
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Focus Standard
If you press the key to which [Focus Standard] is assigned, you can recall useful functions such as automatically focusing
on a subject in the center of the screen in accordance with the focus area settings.
Examples of [Focus Standard] key functions
When [ Focus Area] is set to any of the following parameters, pressing the key moves the focusing frame back to
the center of the monitor or to the subject you are tracking:
[Zone]
[Spot: XL]/[Spot: L]/[Spot: M]/[Spot: S]
[Expand Spot]
[Custom 1] - [Custom 3]
[Tracking: Zone]
[Tracking: Spot XL]/[Tracking: Spot L]/[Tracking: Spot M]/[Tracking: Spot S]
[Tracking: Expand Spot]
[Tracking: Custom 1] - [Tracking: Custom 3]
When [ Focus Area] is set to [Wide], [Center Fix], [Tracking: Wide], or [Tracking: Center Fix], pressing the key in
the autofocus mode makes the camera focus on the center of the screen. If you press the key while recording a
movie with manual focus, you can temporarily switch to autofocus and focus on the center of the screen.
Note
You cannot set the [Focus Standard] function to [Left Button], [Right Button] or [Down Button] of the control wheel.
Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)
TP1001651469
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.]
→ desired key, then assign the [Focus Standard] function to the key.
1
Press the key to which [Focus Standard] is assigned.
What you can do by pressing the key varies depending on the setting for [ Focus Area].
2
179
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Adjusting the focus area settings to the camera’s orientation (horizontal/vertical)
(Switch V/H AF Area)
You can set whether to switch the [ Focus Area] and the position of the focusing frame according to the orientation of
the camera (horizontal/vertical). This function is useful when shooting scenes for which you have to change the camera
position frequently, such as portraits or sports scenes.
Menu item details
Off:
Does not switch the [ Focus Area] and the position of the focusing frame according to the orientation of the camera
(horizontal/vertical).
AF Point Only:
Switches the position of the focusing frame according to the orientation of the camera (horizontal/vertical). The [
Focus Area] is fixed.
AF Point + AF Area:
Switches both the [ Focus Area] and the position of the focusing frame according to the orientation of the camera
(horizontal/vertical).
An example when [AF Point + AF Area] is selected
(A) Vertical: [Spot] (Upper left corner)
(B) Horizontal: [Spot] (Upper right corner)
(C) Vertical: [Zone] (Lower left corner)
Three camera orientations are detected: horizontal, vertical with the side of the shutter button facing up, and vertical
with the side of the shutter button facing down.
Note
If the setting for [Switch V/H AF Area] is changed, the focus settings for each camera orientation will not be retained.
The [ Focus Area] and the position of the focusing frame will not change even when [Switch V/H AF Area] is set to [AF Point +
AF Area] or [AF Point Only] in the following situations:
When the shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto]
During movie shooting
While using the digital zoom function
While the auto-focusing is activated
*
During continuous shooting
*
MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Area] → [Switch V/H AF Area] → desired setting.
1
180
During the countdown for the self-timer
When [Focus Magnifier] is activated
When you shoot images right after the power is turned on and the camera is vertical, the first shot is taken with the horizontal
focus setting or with the last focus setting.
The orientation of the camera cannot be detected when the lens is facing up or down.
Related Topic
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)
TP1001655966
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
[Switch V/H AF Area] can be performed only when [ Focus Mode] is set to AF-C.
*
181
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Registering the current focus area (AF Area Registration)
You can move the focusing frame to a preassigned position temporarily using a custom key. This function is useful when
shooting scenes in which the subject’s movements are predictable; for example, sports scenes. With this function, you
can switch the focus area quickly according to the situation.
How to register focus area
How to call up the registered focus area
Hint
When a focusing frame is registered using [AF Area Registration], the registered focusing frame flashes on the monitor.
If you assign [Regist AF Area tggle] to a custom key, you can use the registered focusing frame without holding down the key.
If [Reg. AF Area+AF On] is assigned to a custom key, auto focusing using the registered focusing frame is performed when the
key is pressed.
Note
A focus area cannot be registered in the following situations:
While [Touch Focus] is being performed
While using the digital zoom function
While [Touch Tracking] is being performed
While focusing
While performing focus lock
You cannot assign [Regist. AF Area hold] to [Left Button], [Right Button], or [Down Button].
You cannot call up the registered focus area in the following situations:
The Still/Movie switch is set to MOVIE (Movie)
The shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto]
If [AF Area Registration] is set to [On], the function to recall the shooting mode by pressing and holding the Fn button will not be
available.
When [AF Area Registration] is set to [On], the [Lock Operation Parts] setting is locked to [Off].
Related Topic
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)
Deleting a registered AF Area (Del. Regist. AF Area)
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Area] → [AF Area Registration] → [On].1.
Set the focus area to the desired position and then hold down the Fn (Function) button.2.
MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] → desired key, then select [Regist. AF
Area hold].
1.
Set the camera to the shooting mode, hold down the key to which [Regist. AF Area hold] has been assigned and then
press the shutter button to shoot images.
2.
182
TP1001655967
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
183
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Deleting a registered AF Area (Del. Regist. AF Area)
Deletes the focusing frame position that was registered using [AF Area Registration].
Related Topic
Registering the current focus area (AF Area Registration)
TP1001655968
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Area] → [Del. Regist. AF Area].
1
184
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Focus Area Limit (still image/movie)
By limiting the types of available focus area settings in advance, you can more quickly select settings for [ Focus
Area].
Hint
When you assign [Switch Focus Area] to a desired key using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.], the focus
area changes every time you press the assigned key. By limiting the types of selectable focus areas with [ Focus Area Limit] in
advance, you can more quickly select the focus area setting you want.
Note
Types of focus areas that do not have a check mark cannot be selected using MENU or the Fn (function) menu. To select one,
add a check mark using [ Focus Area Limit].
If you remove the check mark for a focus area registered with [Switch V/H AF Area] or [AF Area Registration], the registered
settings will change.
Related Topic
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
TP1001658272
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Area] → [ Focus Area Limit] → Add check marks to the focus areas that
you want to use, and then select [OK].
The types of focus areas marked with (check mark) will be available as settings.
1
185
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Circ. of Focus Point (still image/movie)
Sets whether to allow the focusing frame to jump from one end to the other when you move the focusing frame. This
function is useful when you want to move the focusing frame from one end to the other quickly.
The function can be used when the following settings are selected for [ Focus Area].
[Zone]
[Spot: XL]/[Spot: L]/[Spot: M]/[Spot: S]
[Expand Spot]
[Custom 1] - [Custom 3]
[Tracking: Zone]
[Tracking: Spot XL]/[Tracking: Spot L]/[Tracking: Spot M]/[Tracking: Spot S]
[Tracking: Expand Spot]
[Tracking: Custom 1] - [Tracking: Custom 3]
Menu item details
Does Not Circulate:
The cursor does not move when you try to move the focusing frame past the end.
Circulate:
The cursor jumps to the opposite end when you try to move the focusing frame past the end.
Note
Even if you set [ Circ. of Focus Point] to [Circulate], the focusing frame will not circulate diagonally.
Related Topic
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)
TP1001658254
MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Area] → [ Circ. of Focus Point] → desired setting.
When [Circulate] is selected:
1
186
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
187
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
AF Frame Move Amt (still image/movie)
Sets the distance by which the focusing frame is moved when [ Focus Area] is set to [Spot], etc. You can quickly move
the focusing frame by increasing the distance, such as in situations where the subject is moving a lot.
Menu item details
Standard:
The focusing frame moves by the standard distance.
Large:
The focusing frame moves over a greater distance at a time than with [Standard].
Hint
When [Swt. AF Frame Move hold] is assigned to the desired key using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.],
the [ AF Frame Move Amt] setting temporarily switches while the key is pressed.
If any of the following functions is assigned to the dials or control wheel using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial
Set.], you can move the focusing frame by the distance determined for each function, regardless of the setting for [ AF Frame
Move Amt].
[Move AF Frame : L]
[Move AF Frame : L]
[Move AF Frame : Std]
[Move AF Frame : Std]
If any of the following functions is assigned to the dials or control wheel using [My Dial Settings], you can move the focusing
frame by the distance determined for each function, regardless of the setting for [ AF Frame Move Amt].
[Move AF Frame : L]
[Move AF Frame : L]
[Move AF Frame : Std]
[Move AF Frame : Std]
Related Topic
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
TP1001659774
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Area] → [ AF Frame Move Amt] → desired setting.
1
188
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Focus Area Color (still image/movie)
You can specify the color of the frame indicating the focusing area. If the frame is difficult to see because of the subject,
make it more visible by changing its color.
Menu item details
White:
Displays the frame indicating the focusing area in white.
Red:
Displays the frame indicating the focusing area in red.
Related Topic
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)
TP1001658863
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Area] → [ Focus Area Color] → desired color.
1
189
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
AF Area Auto Clear
Sets whether the focus area is displayed all the time or disappears automatically shortly after focus is achieved.
Menu item details
On:
The focus area disappears automatically shortly after focus is achieved.
Off:
The focus area is displayed all the time.
Related Topic
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)
TP1001651457
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Area] → [AF Area Auto Clear] → desired setting.
1
190
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Area Disp. dur Tracking
Sets whether or not to display the frame for the focusing area when [ Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF] and [
Focus Area] is set to [Tracking].
Menu item details
On:
Displays the frame for the focusing area during tracking. Since the tracking start area is displayed while tracking the
subject, it is helpful when starting the next session of shooting.
Off:
Does not display the frame for the focusing area during tracking.
Related Topic
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)
TP1001661325
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Area] → [Area Disp. dur Tracking] → desired setting.
1
191
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
AF-C Area Display
You can set whether or not to display the area that is in focus when [ Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF] and [
Focus Area] is set to [Wide] or [Zone].
Menu item details
On:
Displays the focus area that is in focus.
Off:
Does not display the focus area that is in focus.
Note
When [ Focus Area] is set to one of the following, the focusing frames in the area that is in focus turn green:
[Center Fix]
[Spot]
[Expand Spot]
[Custom] (when the size of the focus frame does not exceed the size of the [Spot: XL] focus frame)
Related Topic
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)
TP1001642616
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Area] → [AF-C Area Display] → desired setting.
1
192
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Phase Detect. Area
Sets whether or not to display the Phase Detection AF area.
Menu item details
On:
Displays the Phase Detection AF area.
Off:
Does not display the Phase Detection AF area.
Note
Phase Detection AF is available only with compatible lenses. If an incompatible lens is attached, you will be unable to use Phase
Detection AF. Phase Detection AF may not operate even with some compatible lens, such as lenses purchased in the past that
have not been updated.
When shooting images using a full-frame-size-compatible lens, the Phase Detection AF area will not be displayed even if [Phase
Detect. Area] is set to [On].
When recording movies, the Phase Detection AF area will not be displayed.
TP1001619924
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Area] → [Phase Detect. Area] → desired setting.
1
193
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
AF Lvl for Crossing
You can select the AF tracking sensitivity (ease of re-targeting) when another subject crosses between the camera and
the subject or when the subject goes out of the focus area in the still image shooting mode.
Menu item details
5(Responsive)/4/3(Standard)/2/1(Locked on):
Select [5(Responsive)] when you want to quickly focus on the crossing subject if another subject crosses between the
camera and the subject, or when you want to quickly focus on another subject in the focus area if the subject goes out of
the focus area.
Select [1(Locked on)] when you want to keep focusing on the subject if another subject crosses between the camera and
the subject, or when you want to keep focusing on the distance where the subject previously was if the subject goes out
of the focus area.
TP1001651471
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [AF Lvl for Crossing] → desired setting.
1
194
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
AF Trk for Spd Chng
You can select the sensitivity of AF tracking relative to changes in the moving speed of the subject in the still image
shooting mode.
Menu item details
Stable/Standard/Responsive:
Select [Stable] if you want to keep stable focus on a motionless subject or a subject that moves at a nearly constant
speed.
Select [Responsive] if you want to keep the focus on a subject whose moving speed changes significantly, such as one
that suddenly starts or stops moving.
Normally, we recommend that you set it to [Standard]. If the autofocus is not stable with [Standard], try [Stable] or
[Responsive].
Hint
If the autofocus is not stable when shooting in dark environments, setting [AF Trk for Spd Chng] to [Stable] will make it easier to
focus on a stationary subject or a subject that moves at an almost constant speed.
TP1001667125
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [AF Trk for Spd Chng] → desired setting.
1
195
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
AF Transition Speed
Sets the focusing speed when the target of the auto focus is switched during movie shooting.
Menu item details
7 (Fast)/6/5/4/3/2/1 (Slow):
Select a faster value to focus on the subject more quickly.
Select a slower value to focus on the subject more smoothly.
Hint
You can use the touch focus function to intentionally transition the AF.
TP1001651498
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [AF Transition Speed] → desired setting.
1
196
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
AF Subj. Shift Sensitivity
Sets the sensitivity with which the focus switches to another subject when the original subject leaves the focus area or an
unfocused subject in the foreground approaches the center of the focus area during movie shooting.
Menu item details
5(Responsive)/4/3/2/1(Locked on):
Select a higher value when you want to shoot a quick-moving subject, or when you want to shoot multiple subjects while
switching the focus continually.
Select a lower value when you want the focus to remain steady, or when you want to keep the focus on a particular target
without being affected by other subjects.
TP1001651447
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [AF Subj. Shift Sensitivity] → desired setting.
1
197
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
AF Assist
While shooting a movie with auto focus, you can change the subject in focus by operating the focus ring of the lens.
Menu item details
On:
Uses the AF assist function.
Off:
Does not use the AF assist function.
Hint
It will be easier to see which region is in focus if you use the [ Peaking Display] or [Focus Map] function along with [AF Assist],
making it easier for you to focus on the intended subject.
Note
Only subjects within the focus area are targeted by auto focus.
The following lenses are not compatible with [AF Assist].
SELP1650 (sold separately)
SEL18200LE (sold separately)
Related Topic
Peaking Display
Focus Map
TP1001662558
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [AF Assist] → [On].
1
While shooting a movie with auto focus, turn the focus ring of the lens to focus on the intended subject.
When you stop operating the focus ring, the subject that is in focus with the focus ring becomes the autofocus
target.
2
198
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
AF/MF Selector
You can easily switch the focusing mode from auto to manual and vice versa while shooting without changing your
holding position.
Menu item details
AF/MF Selector Hold:
Switches the focusing mode while the button is held down.
AF/MF Selector Toggle:
Switches the focusing mode until the button is pressed again.
Note
You cannot set the [AF/MF Selector Hold] function to [Left Button], [Right Button] or [Down Button] of the control wheel.
If the lens is equipped with an AF/MF selector switch, the state of the switch on the lens will take priority.
Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
TP1001619147
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.]
→ desired button → [AF/MF Selector Hold] or [AF/MF Selector Toggle].
1
199
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Full Time DMF
Even if your camera or lens is set to autofocus, you can always switch to the manual focus mode simply by turning the
focus ring. This is convenient when you want to switch between auto focus and manual focus at any time.
Menu item details
On:
Focus ring operations during autofocus are enabled.
Off:
Focus ring operations during autofocus are disabled.
Note
The following functions cannot be used when [Full Time DMF] is set to [On], and [ Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF].
Auto Magnifier in MF
[Full Time DMF] cannot be used in the following cases.
When performing continuous shooting while [ Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF] or [Automatic AF] (However, in the case
of [Continuous Shooting: Lo], [Full Time DMF] can be used.)
When an SEL70200GM lens (sold separately) is attached while [ Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF]
The following lenses (sold separately) do not support [Full Time DMF].
SELP1650
SEL18200LE
A-mount lens
Related Topic
Direct manual focus (DMF)
Auto Magnifier in MF
Peaking Display
TP1001663291
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [Full Time DMF] → desired setting.
1
200
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
AF w/ Shutter
Selects whether to focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down. Select [Off] to adjust the focus
and the exposure separately.
Menu item details
On:
The auto focus operates when you press the shutter button halfway down.
Off:
The auto focus does not operate even if you press the shutter button halfway down.
Related Topic
AF On
TP1001619153
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [AF w/ Shutter] → desired setting.
1
201
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
AF On
You can focus without pressing the shutter button halfway down. The settings for [ Focus Mode] will be applied.
Hint
Set [AF w/ Shutter] to [Off] when you do not want to perform auto focusing using the shutter button.
Set [AF w/ Shutter] and [Pre-AF] to [Off] to focus at a specific shooting distance predicting the position of the subject.
Related Topic
AF w/ Shutter
Pre-AF
TP1001619154
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.]
→ desired key, then assign the [AF On] function to the key.
1
Press the key to which you have assigned the [AF On] function.
When shooting a movie, you can perform auto-focusing by holding down the custom key to which [AF On] is
assigned even in the manual focusing mode.
2
202
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Focus Hold
Locks the focus while the key to which the Focus Hold function has been assigned is pressed.
Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
TP1001651001
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.]
→ assign the [Focus Hold] function to the desired key.
1
Focus and press the key to which the [Focus Hold] function has been assigned.
2
203
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Pre-AF
The product automatically adjusts focus before you press the shutter button halfway down.
Menu item details
On:
Adjusts focus before you press the shutter button halfway down.
Off:
Does not adjust focus before you press the shutter button halfway down.
Note
[Pre-AF] is available only when an E-mount lens is mounted.
During focusing operations, the screen may shake.
TP1001642614
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [Pre-AF] → desired setting.
1
204
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Priority Set in AF-S
Sets whether to release the shutter even if the subject is not in focus when [ Focus Mode] is set to [Single-shot AF],
[DMF] or [Automatic AF] and the subject is remaining still.
Menu item details
AF:
Prioritizes focusing. The shutter will not be released until the subject is in focus.
Release:
Prioritizes the shutter's release. The shutter will be released even if the subject is out of focus.
Balanced Emphasis:
Shoots with a balanced emphasis on both focusing and shutter release.
Related Topic
Selecting the focus method (Focus Mode)
Priority Set in AF-C
TP1001642619
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [Priority Set in AF-S] → desired setting.
1
205
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Priority Set in AF-C
Sets whether to release the shutter even if the subject is not in focus when the continuous AF is activated and the subject
is in motion.
Menu item details
AF:
Prioritizes focusing.
Release:
Prioritizes the shutter's release. The shutter will be released even if the subject is out of focus.
Balanced Emphasis:
Shoots with a balanced emphasis on both focusing and shutter release.
Related Topic
Selecting the focus method (Focus Mode)
Priority Set in AF-S
TP1001642620
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [Priority Set in AF-C] → desired setting.
1
206
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Aperture Drive in AF
Changes the aperture drive system to prioritize the auto-focusing tracking performance or to prioritize silence.
Menu item details
Focus Priority:
Changes the aperture drive system to prioritize auto-focusing performance.
Standard:
Uses the standard aperture drive system.
Silent Priority:
Changes the aperture drive system to prioritize silence so that the sound from the aperture drive is quieter than in
[Standard].
Note
When [Focus Priority] is selected, sound from the aperture drive may be audible, or the aperture effect may not be visible on the
monitor. To avoid these phenomena, change the setting to [Standard].
When [Silent Priority] is selected, the focusing speed may become slower, and it may be more difficult to focus on a subject.
The effect may differ depending on the lens you use and the shooting conditions.
Related Topic
Silent Mode Settings (still image/movie)
TP1001658260
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] → [Aperture Drive in AF] → desired setting.
1
207
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Preset Focus/Zoom
You can move the focus position (the distance to the subject in focus) and zoom position (angle of view) to preregistered
positions using custom keys. You can register 5 focus position/zoom position combinations.
To register the focus position/zoom position
To recall the focus position/zoom position
Press the key to which you have assigned [Preset Focus/Zoom] on the shooting screen to recall the registered focus
position and zoom position.
To check the registered settings
You can check the registered focus position and zoom position by selecting MENU → (Focus) → [AF/MF] →
[Preset Focus/Zoom] → desired number.
If you add a check mark to [Recalls only zoom position.] on the [Preset Focus/Zoom] screen, only the zoom position
and not the focus position will be recalled when you recall the number.
Note
You can register zoom positions only within the range of the optical zoom.
The focus position and zoom position cannot be recalled while the shutter button is pressed half way down.
To use the [Preset Focus/Zoom] function in the movie mode, set [AF Assist] to [On].
If a prime lens is attached, only the focus position will be registered.
If a zoom lens without power zoom is attached, you cannot register or recall the focus position/zoom position.
The focus position and zoom position cannot be recalled if the attached lens is different from the lens that was attached when you
registered them.
Even if the model name is the same, if you attach a different individual lens, register the focus position/zoom position again.
MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] →
Assign [Preset Focus/Zoom 1] - [Preset Focus/Zoom 5] to the desired key.
To use the [Preset Focus/Zoom] function, you need to assign the [Preset Focus/Zoom] function to a custom key.
1.
On the shooting screen, press and hold the key to which you have assigned [Preset Focus/Zoom].
The focus position and zoom position at the time that the key was pressed and held will be registered to the assigned
number.
If you register information again to a number to which content has already been registered, the content will be
overwritten.
2.
208
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
AF in Focus Mag.
You can focus on the subject more accurately using auto-focus by magnifying the area where you want to focus. While
the magnified image is displayed, you can focus on a smaller area than [Spot] under [ Focus Area].
Hint
Use of a tripod is recommended to accurately identify the location you want to magnify.
You can check the auto-focusing result by magnifying the displayed image. If you want to readjust the focus position, adjust the
focus area on the magnified screen and then press the shutter button halfway down.
Note
If you enlarge an area at the edge of the screen, the camera may not be able to focus.
The exposure and white balance cannot be adjusted while the displayed image is being magnified.
[AF in Focus Mag.] is unavailable in the following situations:
During movie shooting
When [ Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF].
When [ Focus Mode] is set to [Automatic AF] and the shooting mode is set to other than P/A/S/M.
When [ Focus Mode] is set to [Automatic AF] and [Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Shooting].
When using a Mount Adaptor (sold separately).
While the displayed image is being magnified, the following functions are unavailable:
[Subject Recognition AF]
[Pre-AF]
[ Subject Recog in AF]
MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Assistant] → [AF in Focus Mag.] → [On].
1
MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Assistant] → [Focus Magnifier].
2
Magnify the image by pressing the center of the multi-selector, and then adjust the position by pressing the
multi-selector up/down/left/right.
The magnification scale changes each time you press the center.
3
Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.
The focus will be achieved at point of (plus mark) in the center of the screen.
4
Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot.
The camera exits the magnified display after shooting.
5
210
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Auto Magnifier in MF
Enlarges the image on the screen automatically to make manual focusing easier. This works in Manual Focus or Direct
Manual Focus shooting.
Hint
You can set how long the image is to be shown magnified by selecting MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Assistant] → [ Focus
Magnif. Time].
Note
You cannot use [Auto Magnifier in MF] when shooting movies. Use the [Focus Magnifier] function instead.
[Auto Magnifier in MF] is not available when a Mount Adaptor is attached. Use the [Focus Magnifier] function instead.
Related Topic
Manual Focus
Direct manual focus (DMF)
Focus Magnif. Time (still image/movie)
TP1001642613
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Assistant] → [Auto Magnifier in MF] → [On].
1
Turn the focus ring to adjust the focus.
The image is enlarged. You can magnify images further by pressing the center of the control wheel.
2
212
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Focus Magnifier
You can check the focus by enlarging the image before shooting.
Unlike with [Auto Magnifier in MF], you can magnify the image without operating the focus ring.
To use the focus magnifier function by touch operation
When [Touch Func. in Shooting] is set to [Touch Focus], you can magnify the image and adjust the focus by touching the
monitor. Set in advance as follows.
[Touch Operation]: [On]
[Shooting Screen] under [Touch Panel Settings]:
Set [Shooting Screen] to [On].
Set [Touch Func. in Shooting] to [Touch Focus].
[Touch Panel/Pad]: Set properly for your use.
When the focus mode is [Manual Focus], you can perform [Focus Magnifier] by double-tapping the area to focus on while
shooting with the monitor.
While shooting with the viewfinder, a frame is displayed in the center of the monitor by double-tapping and you can move
the frame by dragging it. The image is magnified by pressing the center of the multi-selector.
Hint
MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Assistant] → [Focus Magnifier].
1
Press the center of the multi-selector to enlarge the image and select the area you want to enlarge by
pressing the multi-selector up/down/left/right.
Each time you press the center, the magnification scale will change.
You can set the initial magnification by selecting MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Assistant] → [ Initial
Focus Mag.] or [ Initial Focus Mag.].
2
Confirm the focus.
Press the (Delete) button to bring the magnified position into the center of an image.
When the focus mode is [Manual Focus], you can adjust the focus while an image is magnified. If [AF in Focus
Mag.] is set to [Off], the [Focus Magnifier] function is canceled when the shutter button is pressed halfway down.
When the shutter button is pressed halfway down while an image is magnified during the auto-focusing, different
functions are performed depending on the [AF in Focus Mag.] setting.
When [AF in Focus Mag.] is set to [On]: Auto-focusing is performed again.
When [AF in Focus Mag.] is set to [Off]: The [Focus Magnifier] function is canceled.
You can set how long the image is to be shown magnified by selecting MENU → (Focus) → [Focus
Assistant] → [ Focus Magnif. Time].
3
213
While using the focus magnifier function, you can move the magnified area by dragging it on the touch panel.
To exit the focus magnifier function, double-tap the monitor again. When [AF in Focus Mag.] is set to [Off], the focus magnifier
function is ended by pressing the shutter button halfway down.
You can set whether to exit or continue the magnified display after shooting by pressing the Fn (Function) button while the
magnified image is displayed. This function is available when shooting with the following settings:
Focus mode: [Single-shot AF], [DMF] or [Manual Focus]
Drive mode: [Single Shooting] or [Cont. Shooting]
[AF in Focus Mag.]: [On]
[ Auto Review]: [Off]
Related Topic
Auto Magnifier in MF
Focus Magnif. Time (still image/movie)
Initial Focus Mag. (still image)
Initial Focus Mag. (movie)
AF in Focus Mag.
Touch Operation
Touch Panel Settings
TP1001619151
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
214
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Focus Magnif. Time (still image/movie)
Set the duration for which an image is to be magnified using the [Auto Magnifier in MF] or [Focus Magnifier] function.
Menu item details
2 Sec:
Magnifies the images for 2 seconds.
5 Sec:
Magnifies the images for 5 seconds.
No Limit:
Magnifies the images until you press the shutter button.
Related Topic
Auto Magnifier in MF
Focus Magnifier
TP1001619142
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Assistant] → [ Focus Magnif. Time] → desired setting.
1
215
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Initial Focus Mag. (movie)
Sets the initial magnification scale for [Focus Magnifier] in the movie shooting mode.
Menu item details
x1.0:
Displays the image with the same magnification as the shooting screen.
x4.0:
Displays a 4.0-times enlarged image.
Related Topic
Focus Magnifier
TP1001658263
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Assistant] →[ Initial Focus Mag.] → desired setting.
1
216
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Initial Focus Mag. (still image)
Sets the initial magnification scale when using [Focus Magnifier]. Select a setting that will help you frame your shot.
Menu item details
Full-frame shooting
x1.0:
Displays the image with the same magnification as the shooting screen.
x5.5:
Displays a 5.5-times enlarged image.
APS-C/Super 35mm size shooting
x1.0:
Displays the image with the same magnification as the shooting screen.
x3.6:
Displays a 3.6-times enlarged image.
Related Topic
Focus Magnifier
TP1001651421
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Assistant] → [ Initial Focus Mag.] → desired setting.
1
217
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Focus Map
When shooting a movie, areas that are in focus and areas that are out of focus are displayed so that you can visually
distinguish them. Areas behind the in-focus region are indicated by dots in a cool color (A) and those in front of the in-
focus region are indicated by dots in a warm color (B). Dots are not displayed in the in-focus range. Dots are not
recorded in the actual movie.
Menu item details
On:
Displays the focus map.
Off:
Does not display the focus map.
Hint
The focus map can also be output to an external monitor. To output the focus map to an external monitor, set [HDMI Info. Display]
to [On].
Note
[Focus Map] is unavailable in the following situations:
When [Focus Magnifier] is activated
While using the digital zoom function
While streaming
When using a lens that does not support phase detection AF
When a Mount Adaptor is attached
When the lens is not attached to the camera
Related Topic
HDMI Info. Display
TP1001662559
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Focus) → [Focus Assistant] → [Focus Map] → desired setting.
1
218
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Peaking Display
Sets the peaking function, which enhances the outline of in-focus areas during shooting with Manual Focus or Direct
Manual Focus. When shooting a movie, you can also use the peaking function with auto focus.
Menu item details
Peaking Display:
Sets whether to display peaking. ([On] / [Off])
Peaking Level:
Sets the level of enhancement of in-focus areas. ([High] / [Mid] / [Low])
Peaking Color:
Sets the color used to enhance in-focus areas. ([Red] / [Yellow] / [Blue] / [White])
Hint
[Peaking Display Select] is assigned to the right side of the control wheel in the default settings.
Note
Since the product recognizes sharp areas as in focus, the effect of peaking differs, depending on the subject and lens.
The outline of in-focus ranges is not enhanced on devices connected via HDMI.
Related Topic
Manual Focus
Direct manual focus (DMF)
TP1001657160
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Focus) → [Peaking Display] → Select a menu item and set the desired parameter.
1
219
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Exposure Comp. (still image/movie)
Normally, exposure is set automatically (auto exposure). Based on the exposure value set by auto exposure, you can
make the entire image brighter or darker if you adjust [ Exposure Comp.] to the plus side or minus side, respectively
(exposure compensation).
Hint
Only a value between -3.0 EV and +3.0 EV with the equivalent image brightness appears on the screen when shooting. If you set
an exposure compensation value outside this range, the image brightness on the screen will not be affected, but the value will be
reflected in the recorded image.
MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Exposure Comp.] → [ Exposure Comp.] → desired setting.
+ (over) side:
Images become brighter.
- (under) side:
Images become darker.
When [Touch Operation] is set to [On] and [Footer Icon Touch] is set to [On], you can change the exposure
compensation values using touch operations.
You can adjust the exposure compensation value within the range of -5.0 EV to +5.0 EV.
You can confirm the exposure compensation value that you set on the shooting screen.
Monitor
Viewfinder
1
220
You can adjust the exposure compensation value within the range of -2.0 EV to +2.0 EV for movies.
Note
You cannot perform the exposure compensation in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
When using [Manual Exposure], you can perform the exposure compensation only when [ ISO] is set to [ISO AUTO].
If you shoot a subject in extremely bright or dark conditions, or when you use the flash, you may not be able to get a satisfactory
effect.
Related Topic
Exposure step (still image/movie)
Exp.comp.set
Cont. Bracket
Single Bracket
Zebra Display
TP1001642621
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
221
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Histogram display
A histogram shows the luminance distribution, displaying how many pixels there are by luminance.
To display the histogram on the shooting screen or playback screen, press the DISP (Display Setting) button repeatedly.
How to read the histogram
The histogram indicates darker values toward the left and brighter values toward the right.
The histogram changes depending on the exposure compensation.
A peak at the right or left end of the histogram indicates that the image has an overexposed or underexposed area,
respectively. You cannot correct such defects using a computer after shooting. Perform exposure compensation before
shooting as necessary.
(A): Pixel count
(B): Brightness
Note
The information in the histogram display does not indicate the final photograph. It is information about image displayed on the
screen. The final result depends on the aperture value, etc.
The histogram display is extremely different between shooting and playback in the following cases:
When the flash is used
When shooting a low luminance subject such as a night scene
Related Topic
DISP (Display Setting) button
Exposure Comp. (still image/movie)
TP1001659775
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
222
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Exposure step (still image/movie)
You can adjust the setting increment for the shutter speed, aperture, and exposure compensation values.
Menu item details
0.5EV / 0.3EV
Related Topic
Exposure Comp. (still image/movie)
TP1001619163
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Exposure Comp.] → [ Exposure step] → desired setting.
1
223
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Exposure Std. Adjust (still image/movie)
Adjusts this camera's standard for the correct exposure value for each metering mode.
Metering Mode
The set standard value will be applied when you select the corresponding metering mode in MENU →
(Exposure/Color) → [Metering] → [ Metering Mode].
Multi/ Center/ Spot/ Entire Screen Average/ Highlight
Note
The exposure compensation will not be affected when [ Exposure Std. Adjust] is changed.
The exposure value will be locked according to the value set for [ Spot] during using spot AEL.
The standard value for M.M (Metered Manual) will be changed according to the value set in [ Exposure Std. Adjust].
The value set in [ Exposure Std. Adjust] is recorded in Exif data separately from the exposure compensation value. The
amount of exposure standard value will not be added to the exposure compensation value.
If you set [ Exposure Std. Adjust] during bracketing shooting, the number of shots for the bracketing will be reset.
Related Topic
Metering Mode (still image/movie)
TP1001651441
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Exposure Comp.] → [ Exposure Std. Adjust] → desired metering
mode.
1
Select the desired value as the metering standard.
You can set a value from -1 EV to +1 EV in 1/6 EV increments.
2
224
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
D-Range Optimizer (still image/movie)
By dividing the image into small areas, the product analyzes the contrast of light and shadow between the subject and
the background, and creates an image with the optimal brightness and gradation.
Menu item details
Off:
Does not adjust brightness and gradation.
D-Range Optimizer:
If you select [D-Range Optimizer: Auto], the camera will automatically adjust the brightness and gradation. To optimize
the gradation of a recorded image by individual areas, select an optimization level from [D-Range Optimizer: Lv1] (weak)
to [D-Range Optimizer: Lv5] (strong).
Note
In the following situations, [ D-Range Optimizer] is fixed to [Off]:
When [ Picture Profile] is set to other than [Off]
When [ Log Shooting]or [ Log Shooting] is set to other than [Off]
When shooting with [D-Range Optimizer], the image may be noisy. Select the proper level by checking the recorded image,
especially when you enhance the effect.
TP1001642635
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Color/Tone] → [ D-Range Optimizer] → desired setting.
1
225
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Metering Mode (still image/movie)
Selects the metering mode that sets which part of the screen to measure for determining the exposure.
Menu item details
Multi:
Measures light on each area after dividing the total area into multiple areas and determines the proper exposure of the
entire screen (Multi-pattern metering).
Center:
Measures the average brightness of the entire screen, while emphasizing the central area of the screen (Center-
weighted metering).
Spot:
Measures only inside the metering circle. This mode is suitable for measuring light on a specified part of the entire
screen. The size of the metering circle can be selected from [Spot: Standard] and [Spot: Large]. The position of the
metering circle depends on the setting for [ Spot Metering Point].
Entire Screen Avg.:
Measures the average brightness of the entire screen. The exposure will be stable even if the composition or the position
of the subject changes.
Highlight:
Measures the brightness while emphasizing the highlighted area on the screen. This mode is suitable for shooting the
subject while avoiding overexposure.
Hint
The spot metering point can be coordinated with the focus area by using [Focus Point Link].
When [Multi] is selected and [ Face Priority in Multi Metering] is set to [On], the camera measures brightness based on
detected faces.
When [ Metering Mode] is set to [Highlight] and the [D-Range Optimizer] function is activated, the brightness and the contrast
will be corrected automatically by dividing the image into small areas and analyzing the contrast of light and shadow. Make
settings based on the shooting circumstances.
Note
[ Metering Mode] is locked to [Multi] in the following shooting situations:
[Intelligent Auto]
When using a zoom function other than the optical zoom
In [Highlight] mode, the subject may be dark if a brighter part exists on the screen.
Related Topic
AE lock
Spot Metering Point (still image/movie)
MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Metering] → [ Metering Mode] → desired setting.
1
226
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Face Priority in Multi Metering (still image/movie)
Sets whether the camera measures brightness based on detected faces when [ Metering Mode] is set to [Multi].
Menu item details
On:
The camera measures brightness based on detected faces.
Off:
The camera measures brightness using the [Multi] setting, without detecting faces.
Note
When the shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto], [ Face Priority in Multi Metering] is locked to [On].
When [ Subject Recog in AF] under [Subject Recognition] is set to [On] and [ Recognition Target] is set to an item other
than [Human], [ Face Priority in Multi Metering] does not work.
Related Topic
Metering Mode (still image/movie)
TP1001657135
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Metering] → [ Face Priority in Multi Metering] → desired setting.
1
228
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Spot Metering Point (still image/movie)
Sets whether to coordinate the spot metering position with the focus area when [ Focus Area] is set to the following
parameters:
[Spot: XL]/[Spot: L]/[Spot: M]/[Spot: S]
[Expand Spot]
[Custom 1] – [Custom 3]
[Tracking: Spot XL]/[Tracking: Spot L]/[Tracking: Spot M]/[Tracking: Spot S]
[Tracking: Expand Spot]
[Tracking: Custom 1] – [Tracking: Custom 3]
Menu item details
Center:
The spot metering position does not coordinate with the focus area, but always meters brightness at the center.
Focus Point Link:
The spot metering position coordinates with the focus area.
Note
Even if the spot metering position is coordinated with the [Tracking] start position, it will not be coordinated with the tracking of the
subject.
When [ Focus Area] is set to the following parameters, the spot metering position is locked to the center.
[Wide]
[Zone]
[Center Fix]
[Tracking: Wide]/[Tracking: Zone]/[Tracking: Center Fix]
Related Topic
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)
Metering Mode (still image/movie)
TP1001651467
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Metering] → [ Spot Metering Point] → desired setting.
1
229
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
ND Filter
Registers the optical density of the ND filter attached to the lens. The registered value is displayed on the home screen.
Menu item details
-
*
/ 0.3 / 0.6 / 0.9 / 1.2 / 1.5 / 1.8 / 2.1 / 2.4
Relationship between optical density and transmittance
Hint
The [ND Filter] setting is configured manually, so it may not match the optical density of the ND filter actually attached.
The value registered in [ND Filter] can be used as metadata when editing movie clips in the desktop application Catalyst.
Related Topic
HOME (Home) button
Introduction to desktop application (Imaging Edge Desktop/Catalyst)
TP1002003329
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Exposure] → [ND Filter] → Register the appropriate value.
1
If no ND filter is attached, set it to [-].
*
Optical Density of ND Filters Transmittance
0.3 1/2
0.6 1/4
0.9 1/8
1.2 1/16
1.5 1/32
1.8 1/64
2.1 1/128
2.4 1/256
230
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
AE lock
When the contrast between the subject and background is high, such as when shooting a backlit subject or a subject
near a window, meter the light at a spot where the subject appears to have the appropriate brightness and lock the
exposure before shooting. To reduce the brightness of the subject, meter the light at a spot brighter than the subject and
lock the exposure of the entire screen. To make the subject brighter, meter the light at a spot darker than the subject and
lock the exposure of the entire screen.
Hint
If you select the [AEL hold] function in [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.], you can lock the exposure as
long as you are holding down the button. You cannot set the [AEL hold] function to [Left Button], [Right Button] or [Down Button].
Note
[ AEL hold] and [ AEL toggle] are not available when using zoom functions other than optical zoom.
Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
TP1001619158
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.]
→ desired key, then assign [AEL toggle] to the key.
1
Adjust the focus on the spot at which the exposure is adjusted.
2
Press the button to which [AEL toggle] is assigned.
The exposure is locked, and (AE lock) is displayed.
3
Focus on the subject again and press the shutter button.
To cancel the exposure lock, press the button to which the [AEL toggle] function is assigned.
4
231
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
AEL w/ Shutter
Sets whether to fix the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.
Select [Off] to adjust the focus and the exposure separately.
Menu item details
Auto:
Fixes the exposure after adjusting the focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down when [
Focus Mode] is set to [Single-shot AF]. When [ Focus Mode] is set to [Automatic AF], and the product determines that
the subject is moving, or you shoot burst images, the fixed exposure is canceled.
On:
Fixes the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.
Off:
Does not fix the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down. Use this mode when you want to adjust
focus and exposure separately.
The product keeps adjusting the exposure while shooting in [Cont. Shooting] mode.
Note
When [AEL toggle] is assigned to any key using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.], operation using the key
will be given priority over the [AEL toggle] settings.
TP1001619159
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Metering] → [AEL w/ Shutter] → desired setting.
1
232
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Auto Slow Shutter
Sets whether or not to adjust the shutter speed automatically when recording movies if the subject is dark. This function
cannot be used when [Fixed/Variable Select] is set to [Variable].
Menu item details
On:
Uses Auto Slow Shutter. The shutter speed automatically slows when recording in dark locations. You can reduce noise
in the movie by using a slow shutter speed when recording in dark locations.
Off:
Does not use Auto Slow Shutter. The recorded movie will be darker than when [On] is selected, but you can record
movies with smoother motion and less object blur.
Note
[Auto Slow Shutter] does not function in the following situations:
(Shutter Priority)
(Manual Exposure)
When [ ISO] is set to other than [ISO AUTO]
When [Exposure Ctrl Type] is set to [Flexible Exp. Mode] and the method for adjusting the shutter speed is set to [Manual]
When [ Log Shooting] under [ Log Shooting Setting] is set to [Cine EI Quick] or [Cine EI]
TP1001619215
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Exposure] → [Auto Slow Shutter] → desired setting.
1
233
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Zebra Display
Sets a zebra pattern, which appears over part of an image if the brightness level of that part meets the IRE level that you
have set. Use this zebra pattern as a guide to adjust the brightness.
Menu item details
Zebra Display:
Sets whether to display the zebra pattern. ([Off] / [On])
Zebra Level:
Adjusts the brightness level of the zebra pattern. ([70] / [75] / [80] / [85] / [90]/ [95] / [100] / [100+])
Hint
[Zebra Display Select] is assigned to the left side of the control wheel in the default settings.
You can register values to check the correct exposure or overexposure as well as the brightness level for [ Zebra Level]. The
settings for correct exposure confirmation and overexposure confirmation are registered to [Custom 1] and [Custom 2]
respectively in the default settings.
To check the correct exposure, set a standard value and the range for the brightness level. The zebra pattern will appear on areas
that fall within the range you set.
To check the overexposure, set a minimum value for the brightness level. The zebra pattern will appear over areas with a
brightness level equal to or higher than the value you set.
Note
The zebra pattern is not displayed on devices connected via HDMI.
TP1001657134
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Zebra Display] → Select a menu item and set the desired parameter.
1
234
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
ISO (still image/movie)
Sensitivity to light is expressed by the ISO number (recommended exposure index). The larger the number, the higher
the sensitivity.
Menu item details
ISO AUTO:
Sets the ISO sensitivity automatically.
ISO 50 – ISO 204800:
Sets the ISO sensitivity manually. Selecting a larger number increases the ISO sensitivity.
Hint
You can change the range of ISO sensitivity that is set automatically in [ISO AUTO] mode. Select [ISO AUTO] and press the right
side of the control wheel, and set the desired values for [ISO AUTO Maximum] and [ISO AUTO Minimum].
The higher the ISO value, the more noise will appear on the images.
When shooting movies, ISO values between 100 and 102400 are available.
The available ISO settings will differ depending on whether you are shooting still images or movies.
When shooting movies, ISO values between 100 and 102400 are available. If the ISO value is set to a value larger than 102400,
the setting is automatically switched to 102400. When you finish recording the movie, the ISO value returns to the original setting.
When [ SteadyShot] is set to [Dynamic active], the upper limit of the ISO is ISO25600.
When shooting movies, ISO values between 100 and 102400 are available. If the ISO value is set to a value smaller than 100, the
setting is automatically switched to 100. When you finish recording the movie, the ISO value returns to the original setting.
When [ SteadyShot] is set to [Dynamic active], the upper limit of the ISO is ISO25600.
The available range for ISO sensitivity varies depending on the setting for [Gamma] under [ Picture Profile].
The available ISO sensitivity range changes when outputting RAW movies to another device connected via HDMI.
Note
[ ISO] is set to [ISO AUTO] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
When the ISO sensitivity is set to a value lower than ISO 100, the range for recordable subject brightness (dynamic range) may
decrease.
When you select [ISO AUTO] with the shooting mode set to [P], [A], [S] or [M], the ISO sensitivity will be automatically adjusted
within the set range.
ISO (ISO sensitivity) button → desired setting.
You can also select MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Exposure] → [ ISO].
You can change the value by 1/3 EV steps by turning the front dial as well as by turning the control wheel. You
can change the value by 1 EV steps by turning the rear dial.
1
235
If you point the camera at an extremely strong light source while shooting images with a low ISO sensitivity, highlighted areas in
the images may be recorded as black areas.
TP1001642633
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
236
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
ISO Range Limit (still image/movie)
You can limit the range of ISO sensitivity when the ISO sensitivity is set manually.
To set the range for [ISO AUTO]
If you want to adjust the range of ISO sensitivity that is automatically set in the [ISO AUTO] mode, select MENU →
(Exposure/Color) → [Exposure] → [ ISO] → [ISO AUTO], and then press the right side of the control wheel to select
[ISO AUTO Maximum]/[ISO AUTO Minimum].
Note
ISO sensitivity values beyond the specified range become unavailable. To select ISO sensitivity values beyond the specified
range, reset [ ISO Range Limit].
Related Topic
ISO (still image/movie)
TP1001658261
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Exposure] → [ ISO Range Limit] → [Minimum] or [Maximum], and
select the desired values.
1
237
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
ISO AUTO Min. SS
If you select [ISO AUTO] when the shooting mode is P (Program Auto) or A (Aperture Priority), you can set the shutter
speed at which the ISO sensitivity starts changing.
This function is effective for shooting moving subjects. You can minimize subject blurring while also preventing camera
shake.
Menu item details
SLOWER (Slower)/SLOW (Slow):
The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds slower than [Standard], so you can shoot images with less
noise.
STD (Standard):
The camera automatically sets the shutter speed based on the focal length of the lens.
FAST (Fast)/FASTER (Faster):
The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds faster than [Standard], so you can prevent camera shake and
subject blurring.
1/8000 ― 30":
The ISO sensitivity starts to change at the shutter speed you have set.
Hint
The difference in shutter speed at which ISO sensitivity starts to change between [Slower], [Slow], [Standard], [Fast], and [Faster]
is 1 EV.
Note
If the exposure is insufficient even when the ISO sensitivity is set to [ISO AUTO Maximum] in [ISO AUTO], in order to shoot with
an appropriate exposure, the shutter speed will be slower than the speed set in [ISO AUTO Min. SS].
In the following situations, the shutter speed may not function as set:
When using the flash to shoot bright scenes. (The maximum shutter speed is limited to the flash-syncing speed of 1/160
second.)
When using the flash to shoot dark scenes with the [Flash Mode] set to [Fill-flash]. (The minimum shutter speed is limited to the
speed automatically determined by the camera.)
Related Topic
ISO (still image/movie)
TP1001642634
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Exposure] → [ISO AUTO Min. SS] → desired setting.
1
238
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
White Balance (still image/movie)
Corrects the tone effect of the ambient light condition to record a neutral white subject in white. Use this function when
the color tones of the image did not come out as you expected, or when you want to change the color tones on purpose
for photographic expression.
Menu item details
Auto / Auto: Ambience / Auto: White / Daylight / Shade / Cloudy /
Incandescent / Fluor.: Warm White / Fluor.: Cool White / Fluor.: Day White /
Fluor.: Daylight / Flash (only when shooting still images) / Underwater Auto :
When you select a light source that illuminates the subject, the product adjusts the color tones to suit to the selected light
source (preset white balance). When you select [Auto], the product automatically detects the light source and adjusts the
color tones.
C.Temp./Filter:
Adjusts the color tones depending on the light source. Achieves the effect of CC (Color Compensation) filters for
photography.
Custom 1/Custom 2/Custom 3:
Memorizes the basic white color under the light conditions for the shooting environment.
Hint
[ White Balance] is assigned to the 2 button (Custom button 2) in the default settings.
You can display the fine adjustment screen and perform fine adjustments of the color tones as required by pressing the right side
of the control wheel. When [C.Temp./Filter] is selected, you can change the color temperature by turning the rear dial instead of
pressing the right side of the control wheel.
If the color tones do not come out as you expected in the selected settings, perform [WB bracket] shooting.
(Auto: Ambience), (Auto: White) is displayed only when [ Priority Set in AWB] is set to [Ambience] or [White].
If you want to moderate abrupt white balance switching, such as when the recording environment switches during movie
recording, you can change the white balance switching speed with the [Shockless WB] function.
Note
[ White Balance] is fixed to [Auto] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
You cannot select [Auto] or [Underwater Auto] under [ White Balance] in the following situation:
When [ Log Shooting] is set to [Cine EI Quick] or [Cine EI]
If you use a mercury lamp or a sodium lamp as a light source, the accurate white balance will not be obtained because of the
characteristics of the light. It is recommended to shoot images using a flash or select [Custom 1] to [Custom 3].
Do not cover the visible light and IR sensor when [ White Balance] is set to [Auto]. If you do so, the light source may be
erroneously classified, and the white balance may be adjusted to an inappropriate color.
MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [White Balance] → [ White Balance] → desired setting.
1
239
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Capturing a standard white color to set the white balance (custom white balance)
In a scene where the ambient light consists of multiple types of light sources, it is recommended to use the custom white
balance in order to accurately reproduce the whiteness. You can register 3 settings.
Hint
You can also set the size of the white-balance capture frame in [ WB Capt. Frame Size].
Note
The message [Capturing of the custom WB failed.] indicates that the value is in the unexpected range, for example when the
subject is too vivid. You can register the setting at this point, but it is recommended that you set the white balance again. When an
error value is set, the indicator (custom white balance) turns orange on the recording information display. The indicator will
be displayed in white when the set value is in the expected range.
If you use a flash when capturing a basic white color, the custom white balance will be registered with the lighting from the flash.
Be sure to use a flash whenever you shoot with recalled settings that were registered with a flash.
MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [White Balance] → [ White Balance] → Select from among [Custom 1]
to [Custom 3], and then press the right side of the control wheel.
1
Select (custom white balance set), and then press the center of the control wheel.
2
Hold the product so that the white area fully covers the white-balance capture frame, and then press the
center of the control wheel.
After the shutter sound is heard and the message [Captured the custom WB data.] is displayed, the calibrated
values (Color Temperature and Color Filter) are displayed.
You can adjust the position of the white-balance capture frame by pressing the top/bottom/left/right side of the
control wheel.
You can change the size of the white-balance capture frame by pressing the Fn (function) button.
After capturing a standard white color, you can display the fine adjustment screen by pressing the right side of
the control wheel. You can finely adjust the color tones as needed.
You can bring the white-balance capture frame back to the center by pressing the (Delete) button.
No shutter sound is produced in the following cases.
In the movie recording mode
When [Silent Mode] is set to [On]
When [Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic Shutter]
3
Press the center of the control wheel.
The calibrated values will be registered. The monitor returns to the MENU display while retaining the memorized
custom white balance setting.
The registered custom white balance setting will remain memorized until overwritten by the another setting.
4
241
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
WB Capt. Frame Size (still image/movie)
You can change the size of the white-balance capture frame used when setting the custom white balance.
Menu item details
Large/Medium/Small
Hint
You can also change the size of the capture frame by pressing the Fn (function) button on the setting screen for the custom white
balance under [ White Balance].
Related Topic
Capturing a standard white color to set the white balance (custom white balance)
TP1001667071
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [White Balance] → [ WB Capt. Frame Size] → desired setting.
1
243
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Priority Set in AWB (still image/movie)
Selects which tone to prioritize when shooting under lighting conditions such as incandescent light when [ White
Balance] is set to [Auto].
Menu item details
Standard:
Shoots with standard auto white balance. The camera automatically adjusts the color tones.
Ambience:
Prioritizes the color tone of the light source. This is suitable when you want to produce a warm atmosphere.
White:
Prioritizes a reproduction of white color when the color temperature of the light source is low.
Related Topic
White Balance (still image/movie)
TP1001651434
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [White Balance] → [ Priority Set in AWB] → desired setting.
1
244
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Shutter AWB Lock
You can set whether or not to lock the white balance while the shutter button is pressed when [ White Balance] is set
to [Auto] or [Underwater Auto].
This function prevents unintentional changes to the white balance during continuous shooting or when shooting with the
shutter button pressed halfway down.
Menu item details
Shutter Half Press:
Locks the white balance while the shutter button is pressed halfway down, even in the auto white balance mode. The
white balance is also locked during continuous shooting.
Cont. Shooting:
Locks the white balance to the setting in the first shot during continuous shooting, even in the auto white balance mode.
Off:
Operates with the normal auto white balance.
About [AWB Lock Hold] and [AWB Lock Toggle]
You can also lock the white balance in the auto white balance mode by assigning [AWB Lock Hold] or [AWB Lock Toggle]
to the custom key. If you press the assigned key during shooting, the white balance will be locked.
The [AWB Lock Hold] function locks the white balance by stopping the automatic white balance adjustment while the
button is pressed.
The [AWB Lock Toggle] function locks the white balance by stopping the automatic white balance adjustment after the
button is pressed once. When you press the button again, the AWB lock is released.
If you want to lock the white balance while recording a movie in the auto white-balance mode, also assign [AWB Lock
Hold] or [AWB Lock Toggle] to the custom key.
Hint
When you shoot with the flash while the automatic white balance is locked, the resulting color tones may be unnatural because
the white balance was locked before the flash was emitted. In this case, set [Shutter AWB Lock] to [Off] or [Cont. Shooting], and
do not use the [AWB Lock Hold] function or [AWB Lock Toggle] function when shooting. Alternatively, set [ White Balance] to
[Flash].
Related Topic
White Balance (still image/movie)
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
TP1001658262
MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [White Balance] → [Shutter AWB Lock] → desired setting.
1
245
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
246
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Shockless WB
Sets the speed at which the white balance switches during movie recording, such as when the setting for [ White
Balance] or [ Priority Set in AWB] is changed.
Menu item details
Off:
The white balance will switch immediately if you change the white balance setting during movie recording.
1 (Fast)/2/3 (Slow):
You can select the speed at which the white balance switches during movie shooting in order to make the white balance
of the movie change more smoothly.
The speed settings in the order of fastest to slowest are [1 (Fast)], [2], and [3 (Slow)].
Note
This function does not affect the speed at which the white balance changes when [ White Balance] is set to [Auto] or
[Underwater Auto].
Even if a setting other than [Off] is selected, the following will be immediately applied to the movie regardless of the speed setting.
Fine adjustments to the color tones
Changes to the color temperature using [C.Temp./Filter]
Related Topic
White Balance (still image/movie)
TP1001659776
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [White Balance] → [Shockless WB] → desired setting.
1
247
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Log shooting
Log shooting for movies can be divided into three methods: “Flexible ISO,” “Cine EI,” and “Cine EI Quick.” The
differences between normal movie shooting and each Log shooting mode are as follows.
Even when shooting still images, you can use the [Flexible ISO] mode to shoot with the intention of color grading in post-
production.
For details on Log shooting, refer to the following website.
https://helpguide.sony.net/di/pp/v1/en/index.html
TP1001663292
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
Item
Normal movie
shooting
Log shooting:
Flexible ISO
Log shooting: Cine EI
Log shooting: Cine EI
Quick
Type of shooting ITU709/BT.2020 Log Log Log
ISO/EI (Exposure
Index)
ISO sensitivity can
be adjusted
ISO sensitivity
can be adjusted
Shooting with EI
(The ISO sensitivity for
recording is locked to
Base ISO)
Shooting with EI
(The ISO sensitivity for
recording is locked to
Base ISO)
Base ISO ― ― Setting is required
Set automatically
according to the EI
Amount of freedom of
color grading in post-
production
Low Middle High High
248
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Log Shooting Setting (movie)
Configure the settings for recording movies in Log mode.
Menu item details
Log Shooting:
Switches the recording mode during Log shooting. (Off / Flexible ISO / Cine EI Quick / Cine EI)
Color Gamut:
Sets the color gamut. ( / )
Embed LUT File:
Sets whether to embed LUT files in recorded data. (On / Off)
[ Log Shooting] mode details
Details of each Log shooting mode are as follows.
Flexible ISO:
A shooting mode that allows you to record S-Log material by adjusting the exposure settings including ISO sensitivity
according to the shooting scene.
Cine EI Quick:
A shooting mode in which movies are recorded using a Base ISO, as is the case with the Cine EI mode, but the Base
ISO switches automatically according to the adjusted EI value.
Cine EI:
A shooting mode that allows you to shoot with two Base ISO settings that can express clear images with the maximum
dynamic range and suppressed noise.
Confirming the Log shooting settings displayed on the screen
Depending on the [ Log Shooting] settings, the part marked with (A) indicating ISO sensitivity on the movie shooting
screen changes.
The displayed contents may differ from the actual display.
When [ Log Shooting] is set to [Off] or [Flexible ISO]:
ISO sensitivity is displayed.
Example: ISO 400, ISO 400
MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [ Log Shooting Setting] → desired setting.
1
249
When [ Log Shooting] is set to [Cine EI Quick] or [Cine EI]:
The EI value, latitude, Base ISO ([L] for low sensitivity and [H] for high sensitivity) are displayed.
Example: 800EI/6.0E/L
The second numerical value of the setting indicates how many steps of brightness information are assigned for bright
areas (brightness higher than 18% gray). Areas brighter than these are overexposed.
Example: In “800EI/6.0E,” 6.0 steps are assigned on the bright side.
Hint
To output RAW movies to another device connected via HDMI, set [ Log Shooting] to an item other than [Off]. The [ Color
Gamut] setting is also applied to RAW movies output via HDMI.
If [ Log Shooting] is set to [Flexible ISO] and you press the REC button in the still image shooting mode to start movie
shooting, the movie will be shot in the Log mode with [Flexible ISO] regardless of the [ Log Shooting] setting for movies. In this
case, [ Display LUT] and [Embed LUT File] will be locked to [Off].
Note
[Embed LUT File] is locked to [Off] when using SDHC cards.
When [ Log Shooting] is set to an item other than [Off], this may cause an error in the white balance custom setup. In such a
case, temporarily set [ Log Shooting] to [Off], perform the custom setup, and then reset [ Log Shooting] to the desired
setting.
Related Topic
Select LUT
Picture Profile (still image/movie)
HDMI Output Settings (movie)
TP1001663293
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
250
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Select LUT
Selects which LUT to apply to movies. You can choose the LUT from among three presets and 16 LUTs that you can
register.
Menu item details
S-Log3:
Emphasizes the expression of gradations from shadow to mid-tone. The tone of the images is similar to the
characteristics of images that have been scanned from film for shooting.
s709:
Selects the s709 LUT for color tones similar to the film color preferred in movie and drama productions.
709(800%):
Selects the R709 LUT for contrast in color tones with true-to-life color reproduction.
User1–User16:
Selects registered LUTs. LUTs can be edited and registered by selecting User1–User16, and pressing the right side of
the control wheel to open the setting detail screen.
Related Topic
Log Shooting Setting (movie)
Manage User LUTs
Display LUT
TP1001663294
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Color/Tone] → [Select LUT] → desired setting.
1
251
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Manage User LUTs
You can register LUTs as User1–User16 on the camera. Also, you can change the settings for the registered LUT files.
Registering a LUT
Editing a LUT
The following edits can be made to a user LUT area.
Input: Selects either [ ] or [ ].
AE Level Offset: Sets the compensation value for the AE tracking level when using this LUT. (0EV, 1/3EV, 2/3EV, 1EV,
4/3EV, 5/3EV, 2EV).
Import: Registers a LUT file to the selected User number.
Delete: Deletes the LUT file registered to the selected User number.
To delete LUTs in bulk
Note
When using SDHC cards, filenames for registering LUT files are displayed in the 8.3 format.
Related Topic
Select LUT
Display LUT
TP1001663295
Save the LUT file you want to register on a memory card.
Save the file to the following path.
For SD cards: /Private/Sony/PRO/LUT
For CFexpress Type A memory cards: /Sony/PRO/LUT
File format: CUBE file (.cube) for a 17-point or 33-point
File name: 63 alphanumeric characters (single-byte code) or less including “.cube”
1.
MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Color/Tone] → [Manage User LUTs] → [Import/Edit].2.
Select the user LUT area (User1–User16) in which to register the data.3.
Select the memory card on which the LUT file is stored.4.
Select the file you want to register and select [OK].5.
MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Color/Tone] → [Manage User LUTs] → [Delete All].
All of the LUTs registered to User1–User16 are deleted.
1.
252
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
253
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Base ISO
Sets the ISO sensitivity (Base ISO) on which Cine EI mode shooting is based. You can select from two Base ISO values,
one with a low sensitivity and one with a high sensitivity. By selecting the Base ISO according to the shooting
environment, you can shoot while maintaining a balance in latitude of highlights and shadows.
Menu item details
ISO 800:
Sets the base ISO sensitivity to ISO 800.
ISO 4000:
Sets the base ISO sensitivity to ISO 4000.
TP1001663296
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Exposure] → [Base ISO] → desired setting.
1
254
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Base ISO Switch EI
Sets the EI (Exposure Index) value at which the Base ISO switches between low sensitivity and high sensitivity when [
Log Shooting] is set to [Cine EI Quick].
Menu item details
1000EI to 4000EI
TP1001663297
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Exposure] → [Base ISO Switch EI] → desired value.
1
255
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Exposure Index
Sets the EI (Exposure Index) value that is reflected on the monitor when [ Display LUT] is set to [On].
In the Cine EI and Cine EI Quick modes, the brightness of the movie is adjusted according to the EI value, enabling you
to check the results of post-production exposure sensitivity adjustments while shooting. The EI value can be set within
the range of ±2EV from the value equal to the Base ISO.
Menu item details
When the Base ISO is ISO 800:
200EI–3200EI
When the Base ISO is ISO 4000:
1000EI–16000EI
TP1001663298
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → ( Exposure/Color) → [Exposure] → [Exposure Index] → desired setting.
1
256
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Display LUT
The monitor can display images with the LUT reflected during movie shooting and playback for a preview of the image
after color grading.
Menu item details
On:
Displays images with the LUT reflected during movie shooting and playback.
Off:
Does not display images with the LUT reflected during movie shooting and playback.
Hint
If you assign [Display LUT Switch] to [ Custom Key/Dial Set.], you can switch [ Display LUT] on and off simply by pressing
a button.
Related Topic
Select LUT
Manage User LUTs
TP1001663299
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Display Option] → [ Display LUT] → desired setting.
1
257
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Log Shooting Setting (still image)
Configures the settings for shooting still images in the Log mode.
Menu item details
Log Shooting:
Switches the recording mode during Log shooting. With [Flexible ISO], you can record S-Log material with the exposure
set by adjusting the ISO according to the shooting scene. (Off / Flexible ISO)
Color Gamut:
Sets the color gamut. ( / )
Hint
If [ Log Shooting] is set to [Flexible ISO] and you press the REC button in the still image shooting mode to start movie
shooting, the movie will be shot in the Log mode with [Flexible ISO] regardless of the [ Log Shooting] setting for movies. In this
case, [ Display LUT] and [Embed LUT File] will be locked to [Off].
[ Display LUT] cannot be used with Log shooting for still images. When monitoring, set [Gamma Disp. Assist Typ.] to [Auto] or
[S-Log3→709(800%)] and [Gamma Display Assist] to [On].
If you want more freedom in post-editing or want to match the colors of 4:2:2 10-bit movies, we recommend recording in the HEIF
(4:2:2) format by setting [JPEG/HEIF Switch].
Note
When the shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto], [ Log Shooting] is not available.
When [ Log Shooting] is set to [Flexible ISO], the following functions are not available:
HLG Still Image
Picture Profile
Creative Look
When [ Log Shooting] is set to [Flexible ISO], this may cause an error in the white balance custom setup. In such a case,
temporarily set [ Log Shooting] to [Off], perform the custom setup, and then reset [ Log Shooting] to [Flexible ISO].
Related Topic
JPEG/HEIF Switch
TP1002003331
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [ Log Shooting Setting] → desired setting.
1
258
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Creative Look (still image/movie)
“Look” is a term referring to the looks and impressions of images generated by various factors, such as color, sharpness,
brightness, etc. With [ Creative Look], you can choose the finish of an image by selecting a preferred look from among
preinstalled looks. In addition, you can fine-tune the contrast, highlights, shadows, fade, saturation, sharpness,
sharpness range, and clarity for each “Look.”
Menu item details
ST(Standard):
Standard finish for a wide range of subjects and scenes.
PT(Portrait):
For capturing skin in a soft tone, ideally suited for shooting portraits.
MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Color/Tone] → [ Creative Look].
1
Select the desired “Look” or [Custom Look] using the top/bottom of the control wheel.
2
To adjust (Contrast), (Highlights), (Shadows), (Fade), (Saturation), (Sharpness),
(Sharpness Range) and (Clarity), move to the right using the right side of the control wheel. Select the
desired item using the right/left sides, and then select the value using the top/bottom sides.
3
When selecting [Custom Look], move to the right using the right side of the control wheel, and then select
the desired “Look.”
Using [Custom Look], you can recall the same “Look” presets with slightly different settings.
4
259
NT(Neutral):
The saturation and sharpness are lowered for shooting images in subdued tones. This is also suitable for capturing
image material to be modified with a computer.
VV(Vivid):
The saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful scenes and subjects such as flowers,
spring greenery, blue sky, or ocean views.
VV2(Vivid 2):
Creates an image with bright and vivid colors with rich clarity.
FL(Film):
Creates an image with moody finish by applying sharp contrast to the calm coloring as well as the impressive sky and
colors of the greens.
FL2(Film 2)
Creates an image with a nostalgic look through high contrast calm coloring.
FL3(Film 3)
Creates an image with a lighthearted look through clear coloring by slightly suppressing the contrast.
IN(Instant):
Creates an image with matte textures by suppressing the contrast and saturation.
SH(Soft Highkey):
Creates an image with bright, transparent, soft, and vivid mood.
BW(Black & White):
For shooting images in black and white monotone.
SE(Sepia):
For shooting images in sepia monotone.
Registering preferred settings (Custom Look):
Select the six custom look (the boxes with numbers on the left side) to register preferred settings. Then select the desired
settings using the right button.
You can recall the same “Look” presets with slightly different settings.
To adjust in greater detail
Based on each “Look,” items such as contrast can be adjusted to your liking. You can adjust not only the preset “Looks,”
but also each [Custom Look], a function that allows you to register your favorite settings.
Select an item to be set by pressing the right/left sides of the control wheel, then set the value using the top/bottom sides
of the control wheel.
When a setting value is changed from the default value, (star mark) is added next to the “Look” icon displayed on the
shooting screen.
Contrast:
The higher the value selected, the more the difference of light and shadow is accentuated, and the bigger the effect on
the image. (-9 to +9)
Highlights:
Adjusts the brightness of the bright areas. When a higher value is selected, the image becomes brighter. (-9 to +9)
Shadows:
Adjusts the darkness of the dark areas. When a higher value is selected, the image becomes brighter. (-9 to +9)
Fade:
Adjusts the degree of fade. A larger value makes the effect greater. (0 to 9)
Saturation:
The higher the value selected, the more vivid the color. When a lower value is selected, the color of the image is
restrained and subdued. (-9 to +9)
Sharpness:
Adjusts the sharpness. The higher the value selected, the more the contours are accentuated, and the lower the value
selected, the more the contours are softened. (0 to 9)
Sharpness Range:
Adjust the range where the sharpness effect is applied. A larger value makes the sharpness effect apply to finer outlines.
(1 to 5)
260
Clarity:
Adjusts the degree of clarity. A larger value makes the effect greater. (0 to 9)
To reset adjusted values for each “Look”
Adjusted values such as contrast that you have changed as desired can be collectively reset for each “Look.” Press the
(delete) button on the adjustment screen for the “Look” that you want to reset. All adjusted values that have been
changed will return to their default values.
Hint
For [Sharpness], [Sharpness Range], and [Clarity], take a test shot and either enlarge and play it on the camera monitor, or output
it to a playback device to check the effect. Then, readjust the setting if needed.
Note
[ Creative Look] is fixed to [-] in the following situations:
[Intelligent Auto]
[ Picture Profile] is set to other than [Off].
[ Log Shooting] or [ Log Shooting] is set to other than [Off].
When this function is set to [BW(Black & White)] or [SE(Sepia)], [Saturation] cannot be adjusted.
In the movie mode, [Sharpness Range] cannot be adjusted.
TP1001642640
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
261
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Picture Profile (still image/movie)
Allows you to change the settings for the color, gradation, etc.
For details on “Picture Profile,” refer to
https://helpguide.sony.net/di/pp/v1/en/index.html
Although [ Picture Profile] can be used for both still images and movies, the function is designed mainly for movies.
Customizing the picture profile
You can customize the picture quality by adjusting picture profile items such as [Gamma] and [Detail]. When setting these
parameters, connect the camera to a TV or monitor, and adjust them while observing the picture on the screen.
Using the preset of the picture profile
The default settings [PP1] through [PP11] for movies have been set in advance in the camera based on various shooting
conditions.
MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Color/Tone] → [ Picture Profile] → desired setting.
PP1:
Example setting using [Movie] gamma.
PP2:
Example setting using [Still] gamma.
PP3:
Example setting of natural color tone using the [ITU709] gamma.
PP4:
Example setting of a color tone faithful to the ITU709 standard.
PP5:
Example setting using [Cine1] gamma.
PP6:
Example setting using [Cine2] gamma.
PP10:
Example setting for recording HDR movies using [HLG2] gamma.
PP11:
Example setting using [S-Cinetone] gamma.
PPLUT1–PPLUT4 (only when shooting movies):
Shoots and records movies with the user LUT applied.
MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Color/Tone] → [ Picture Profile] → the profile you want to change.
1
Move to the item index screen by pressing the right side of the control wheel.
2
Select the item to change using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel.
3
Select the desired value using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel and press in the center.
4
262
To register user LUTs (PPLUT1–PPLUT4)
You can apply the LUT of your choice to the recorded images by assigning user LUTs registered using [Manage User
LUTs] to PPLUT1–PPLUT4.
Setting procedure:
HDR movie recording
The camera can record HDR movies when a gamma from [HLG], [HLG1] to [HLG3] is selected in the picture profile.
Picture profile preset [PP10] provides an example setting for HDR recording. Movies recorded using [PP10] can be
viewed with a wider range of brightness than usual when played back on a TV supporting Hybrid Log-Gamma (HLG).
This way, even scenes with a wide range of brightness can be recorded and displayed faithfully, without looking under or
over-exposed. HLG is used in HDR TV program production, as defined in the international standard Recommendation
ITU-R BT.2100.
Items of the picture profile
Black Level
Sets the black level. (–15 to +15)
Gamma
Selects a gamma curve.
Movie: Standard gamma curve for movies
Still: Standard gamma curve for still images
S-Cinetone: Gamma curve designed to achieve cinematic gradations and color expressions. This setting enables
shooting with softer color reproduction ideal for portrait shooting.
Cine1: Softens the contrast in dark parts and emphasizes gradation in bright parts to produce a relaxed color movie.
(equivalent to HG4609G33)
Cine2: Similar to [Cine1] but optimized for editing with up to 100% video signal. (equivalent to HG4600G30)
Cine3: Intensifies the contrast in light and shade more than [Cine1] and strengthens gradation in black.
Cine4: Strengthens the contrast in dark parts more than [Cine3].
ITU709: Gamma curve that corresponds to ITU709.
S-Log3: Gamma curve for [S-Log3] with more similar features to film. This setting is based on the assumption that the
picture will be processed after shooting.
HLG: Gamma curve for HDR recording. Equivalent to the HDR standard Hybrid Log-Gamma, ITU-R BT.2100.
HLG1: Gamma curve for HDR recording. Emphasizes noise reduction. However, shooting is restricted to a narrower
dynamic range than with [HLG2] or [HLG3].
HLG2: Gamma curve for HDR recording. Provides a balance of dynamic range and noise reduction.
HLG3: Gamma curve for HDR recording. Wider dynamic range than [HLG2]. However, noise may increase.
[HLG1], [HLG2], and [HLG3] all apply a gamma curve with the same characteristics, but each offers a different
balance between dynamic range and noise reduction. Each has a different maximum video output level, as follows:
[HLG1]: approx. 87%, [HLG2]: approx. 95%, [HLG3]: approx. 100%.
Black Gamma
Corrects gamma in low intensity areas.
[Black Gamma] is fixed at “0” and cannot be adjusted when [Gamma] is set to [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3].
Range: Selects the correcting range. (Wide / Middle / Narrow)
Select PPLUT1–PPLUT4 on the selection screen for [ Picture Profile], and then press the right side of the control
wheel.
1.
Select [Basic Look] and press the center.2.
Select a LUT to use as [Basic Look] from the listed user LUTs.3.
263
Level: Sets the correcting level. (-7 (maximum black compression) to +7 (maximum black stretch))
Knee
Sets knee point and slope for video signal compression to prevent over-exposure by limiting signals in high intensity
areas of the subject to the dynamic range of your camera.
When [Gamma] is set to the following, and [Mode] is set to [Auto], [Knee] is unavailable. [Knee] can be used when
[Mode] is set to [Manual].
[Still]
[Cine1]
[Cine2]
[Cine3]
[Cine4]
[S-Log3]
[HLG]
[HLG1]
[HLG2]
[HLG3]
Mode: Selects auto/manual settings.
Auto: The knee point and slope are set automatically.
Manual: The knee point and slope are set manually.
Auto Set: Settings when [Auto] is selected for [Mode ].
Max Point: Sets the maximum point of the knee point. (90% to 100%)
Sensitivity: Sets the sensitivity. (High / Mid / Low)
Manual Set: Settings when [Manual] is selected for [Mode].
Point: Sets the knee point. (75% to 105%)
Slope: Sets the knee slope. (-5 (gentle) to +5 (steep))
Color Mode
Sets type and level of colors.
In [Color Mode], only [BT.2020] and [709] are available when [Gamma] is set to [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3].
Movie: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Movie].
Still: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Still].
S-Cinetone: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [S-Cinetone].
Cinema: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Cine1] or [Cine2].
709tone: Color comparable to the Sony professional cameras with Matrix off function.
ITU709 Matrix: Colors corresponding to ITU709 standard (when combined with ITU709 gamma)
Black & White: Sets the saturation to zero for shooting in black and white.
S-Gamut3.Cine: Setting based on the assumption that the pictures will be processed after shooting. Used when
[Gamma] is set to [S-Log3]. This setting allows you to shoot in a color space that can easily be converted for digital
cinema.
S-Gamut3: Setting based on the assumption that the pictures will be processed after shooting. Used when [Gamma] is
set to [S-Log3]. This setting allows you to shoot in a wide color space.
BT.2020: Standard color tone when [Gamma] is set to [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3].
709: Color tone when [Gamma] is set to [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3] and movies are recorded with HDTV color
(BT.709).
Saturation
Sets the color saturation. (-32 to +32)
Color Phase
Sets the color phase. (-7 to +7)
264
Color Depth
Sets the color depth for each color phase. This function is more effective for chromatic colors and less effective for
achromatic colors. The color looks deeper as you increase the setting value towards the positive side, and lighter as you
decrease the value towards the negative side. This function is effective even if you set [Color Mode] to [Black & White].
[R] -7 (light red) to +7 (deep red)
[G] -7 (light green) to +7 (deep green)
[B] -7 (light blue) to +7 (deep blue)
[C] -7 (light cyan) to +7 (deep cyan)
[M] -7 (light magenta) to +7 (deep magenta)
[Y] -7 (light yellow) to +7 (deep yellow)
Detail
Sets items for [Detail].
Level: Sets the [Detail] level. (-7 to +7)
Adjust: The following parameters can be selected manually.
Mode: Selects auto/manual setting. (Auto (automatic optimization) / Manual (The details are set manually.))
V/H Balance: Sets the vertical (V) and horizontal (H) balance of DETAIL. (-2 (off to the vertical (V) side) to +2 (off to
the horizontal (H) side))
B/W Balance: Selects the balance of the lower DETAIL (B) and the upper DETAIL (W). (Type1 (off to the lower
DETAIL (B) side) to Type5 (off to the upper DETAIL (W) side))
Limit: Sets the limit level of [Detail]. (0 (Low limit level: likely to be limited) to 7 (High limit level: unlikely to be limited))
Crispening: Sets the crispening level. (0 (shallow crispening level) to 7 (deep crispening level))
Hi-Light Detail: Sets the [Detail] level in the high intensity areas. (0 to 4)
To copy the settings to another picture profile number
You can copy the settings of the picture profile to another picture profile number.
MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Color/Tone] → [ Picture Profile] → desired setting → [Copy].
To reset the picture profile to the default setting
You can reset the picture profile to the default setting. You cannot reset all picture profile settings at once.
MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Color/Tone] → [ Picture Profile] → desired setting → [Reset].
Note
If you want to select different settings for movies and still images, add a check mark to [Picture Profile] under [Different Set for
Still/Mv].
If you develop RAW images with shooting settings, the following settings are not reflected:
Black Level
Black Gamma
Knee
Color Depth
If you change [Gamma], the available ISO value range changes.
There may be more noise in dark parts depending on the gamma settings. It may improve by setting the lens compensation to
[Off].
When using the S-Log3 gamma, noise becomes more noticeable compared to when using other gammas. If the noise is still
considerable even after processing the images, it may be improved by shooting with a brighter setting. However, the dynamic
range becomes narrower accordingly when you shoot with a brighter setting. We recommend checking the picture in advance by
test shooting when using S-Log3.
Setting [S-Log3] may cause an error in the white balance custom setup. In this case, perform custom setup with a gamma other
than [S-Log3] first, and then reselect the [S-Log3] gamma.
Setting PPLUT1–PPLUT4 may cause an error in the white balance custom setup. In this case, first perform the custom setup with
a setting other than PPLUT1–PPLUT4, and then reselect PPLUT1–PPLUT4.
265
If you set [Slope] to +5 in [Manual Set] under [Knee], [Knee] will be disabled.
S-Gamut3.Cine and S-Gamut3 are color spaces exclusive to Sony. However, this camera's S-Gamut setting does not support the
whole S-Gamut color space; it is a setting to achieve a color reproduction equivalent to S-Gamut.
[ Picture Profile] is fixed to [Off] in the following situation:
[ Log Shooting] or [ Log Shooting] is set to other than [Off]
Related Topic
Gamma Display Assist
Different Set for Still/Mv
TP1001651439
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
266
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Drive Mode
Select the appropriate mode for the subject, such as single shooting, continuous shooting or bracketing shooting.
Menu item details
Single Shooting:
Shoots one image when you press the shutter button.
Cont. Shooting:
Shoots images continuously while you press and hold down the shutter button.
Self-timer(Single) :
Shoots an image after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was pressed.
Self-timer(Cont):
Shoots a designated number of images after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was
pressed.
Cont. Bracket:
Shoots images while holding the shutter button down, each with different degrees of exposure.
Single Bracket:
Shoots a specified number of images, one by one, each with a different degrees of exposure.
Focus Bracket:
Shoots multiple images while shifting the focus position.
WB bracket:
Shoots a total of three images, each with different color tones according to the selected settings for white balance, color
temperature and color filter.
DRO Bracket:
Shoots a total of three images, each at a different degree of D-Range Optimizer.
Related Topic
Cont. Shooting
Self-timer(Single)
Self-timer(Cont)
Cont. Bracket
Single Bracket
Focus Bracket
WB bracket
DRO Bracket
TP1001642624
MENU → (Shooting) → [Drive Mode] → [Drive Mode] → desired setting.
1
267
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
268
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Cont. Shooting
Shoots images continuously while you press and hold down the shutter button.
Menu item details
Continuous Shooting: Hi+ / Continuous Shooting: Hi / Continuous Shooting: Mid/
Continuous Shooting: Lo
Number of still images recordable with continuous shooting
The following table shows estimated numbers of recordable still images with [Drive Mode] set to [Continuous Shooting:
Hi+]. The numbers may vary depending on the shooting conditions and the memory card.
Image Size:[L: 33M]
Hint
To continuously adjust the focus and exposure during continuous shooting, set as follows:
[ Focus Mode]: [Continuous AF]
[AEL w/ Shutter]: [Off] or [Auto]
Note
MENU → (Shooting) → [Drive Mode] → [Drive Mode] → [Cont. Shooting].
1
File Format
Number of images when JPEG
is selected
Number of images when HEIF
is selected
JPEG/HEIF (Fine) Approx. 1 000 images or more Approx. 1 000 images or more
RAW (Compressed RAW) Approx. 1 000 images or more Approx. 1 000 images or more
RAW & JPEG/RAW & HEIF (Compressed
RAW)*
Approx. 1 000 images or more Approx. 1 000 images or more
RAW (Uncompressed RAW) Approx. 1 000 images or more Approx. 1 000 images or more
RAW & JPEG/RAW & HEIF (Uncompressed
RAW)*
Approx. 1 000 images or more Approx. 1 000 images or more
RAW (Lossless compression RAW: L) Approx. 1 000 images or more Approx. 1 000 images or more
RAW & JPEG/RAW & HEIF (Lossless
compression RAW: L)*
Approx. 1 000 images or more Approx. 1 000 images or more
When [JPEG Quality]/[HEIF Quality] is set to [Fine].
*
269
When the aperture value is greater than F22, the focus becomes locked to the setting in the first shot during continuous shooting
in [Continuous Shooting: Hi+], [Continuous Shooting: Hi], or [Continuous Shooting: Mid].
The subject is not displayed in real-time on the monitor or viewfinder when shooting in [Continuous Shooting: Hi+] mode.
The speed of continuous shooting decreases when shooting in uncompressed RAW or lossless compressed RAW.
The speed of continuous shooting decreases when you shoot with a flash.
Related Topic
Remain Shoot Display (still image)
Selecting the focus method (Focus Mode)
AEL w/ Shutter
TP1001642625
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
270
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Selection/Memo Shot
When performing continuous shooting or interval shooting, you can automatically set a rating (ranking) for the first shot or
automatically insert a divider frame before the first shot.
Menu item details
Off
When taking continuous shots, divider frames are not inserted, and a rating is not set for the first image.
Divider Frame ( )
When taking continuous shots, a divider frame is inserted before the first image.
Rating ( ) - Rating ( )
When taking continuous shots, a rating is set for the first image automatically.
Related Topic
Rating
Setting the method for jumping between images (Image Jump Setting)
TP1001667075
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Option] → [Selection/Memo Shot] → [Top Image] → desired setting
item.
1
271
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Self-timer(Single)
Shoots an image using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was
pressed. Use the 5-second/10-second self-timer when you are going to be in the picture, and use the 2-second self-timer
to reduce camera-shake caused by pressing the shutter button.
Menu item details
The mode determines the number of seconds until a picture is taken after the shutter button is pressed.
Self-timer(Single): 10 sec
Self-timer(Single): 5 sec
Self-timer(Single): 2 sec
Hint
Press the shutter button again to stop the count of the self-timer.
Select MENU → (Shooting) → [Drive Mode] → [Drive Mode] → [Single Shooting] to cancel the self-timer.
Set [Audio Signal(Shooting)] to [Off] to turn off the beeping sound during the self-timer countdown.
To use the self-timer in the bracket mode, set the drive mode to bracket, then select MENU → (Shooting) → [Drive Mode] →
[Bracket Settings] → [Selftimer during Bracket].
Related Topic
Fn Menu Settings (still image/movie)
Audio Signal(Shooting)
TP1001619168
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [Drive Mode] → [Drive Mode] → [Self-timer(Single)].
1
Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.
2
Adjust the focus and shoot the image.
A beep will sound, and a picture will be taken after the designated number of seconds have elapsed.
3
272
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Self-timer(Cont)
Shoots a designated number of images using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since
the shutter button was pressed. You can choose the best from multiple shots.
Menu item details
For example, three images are shot when 10 seconds have elapsed after the shutter button is pressed when [Self-
timer(Cont.): 10 Sec. 3 Img.] is selected.
Self-timer(Cont.): 10 Sec. 3 Img.
Self-timer(Cont.): 10 Sec. 5 Img.
Self-timer(Cont.): 5 Sec. 3 Img.
Self-timer(Cont.): 5 Sec. 5 Img.
Self-timer(Cont.): 2 Sec. 3 Img.
Self-timer(Cont.): 2 Sec. 5 Img.
Hint
Press the shutter button again to stop the count of the self-timer.
Select MENU → (Shooting) → [Drive Mode] → [Drive Mode] → [Single Shooting] to cancel the self-timer.
Related Topic
Fn Menu Settings (still image/movie)
TP1001619169
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [Drive Mode] → [Drive Mode] → [Self-timer(Cont)].
1
Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.
2
Adjust the focus and shoot the image.
A beep sounds and pictures are taken after the designated number of seconds has elapsed. The designated
number of pictures are taken continuously.
3
273
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Cont. Bracket
Shoots multiple images while automatically shifting the exposure from base to darker and then to lighter. You can select
an image that suits your purpose after recording.
Menu item details
Exposure Value:
Sets the amount by which the exposure value is adjusted during bracketing shooting.
Number of Shots:
Sets the number of images to shoot during bracketing shooting.
Hint
The last shot is shown on the auto review.
Note
When [ISO AUTO] is selected in [Manual Exposure] mode, the exposure is changed by adjusting the ISO value. If a setting other
than [ISO AUTO] is selected, the exposure is changed by adjusting the shutter speed.
When the exposure is compensated, the exposure is shifted based on the compensated value.
Bracket shooting is unavailable in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
When [ Picture Profile] is set to other than [Off]
When the flash is used, the product performs flash bracket shooting, which shifts the amount of flash light even if [Cont. Bracket]
is selected. Press the shutter button for each image.
Related Topic
Bracket Settings
Indicator during bracket shooting
MENU → (Shooting) → [Drive Mode] → [Drive Mode] → [Cont. Bracket].
1
Using the control wheel, select the desired exposure value and the number of images you want to shoot.
When setting to record two images, you can select whether to adjust the exposure to the + (over) or - (under)
side.
The [Bracket Settings] menu can be displayed with the right side of the control wheel.
2
Adjust the focus and shoot the image.
Keep pressing and holding the shutter button until bracket shooting is finished.
3
274
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Single Bracket
Shoots multiple images while automatically shifting the exposure from base to darker and then to lighter. You can select
the image that suits your purpose after recording.
Since a single picture is taken each time you press the shutter button, you can adjust the focus or the composition for
each shot.
Menu item details
Exposure Value:
Sets the amount by which the exposure value is adjusted during bracketing shooting.
Number of Shots:
Sets the number of images to shoot during bracketing shooting.
Note
When [ISO AUTO] is selected in [Manual Exposure] mode, the exposure is changed by adjusting the ISO value. If a setting other
than [ISO AUTO] is selected, the exposure is changed by adjusting the shutter speed.
When the exposure is compensated, the exposure is shifted based on the compensated value.
Bracket shooting is unavailable in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
When [ Picture Profile] is set to other than [Off]
Related Topic
Bracket Settings
Indicator during bracket shooting
Fn Menu Settings (still image/movie)
TP1001642597
MENU → (Shooting) → [Drive Mode] → [Drive Mode] → [Single Bracket].
1
Using the control wheel, select the desired exposure value and the number of images you want to shoot.
When setting to record two images, you can select whether to adjust the exposure to the + (over) or - (under)
side.
The [Bracket Settings] menu can be displayed with the right side of the control wheel.
2
Adjust the focus and shoot the image.
Press the shutter button for each image.
3
276
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
277
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Indicator during bracket shooting
Viewfinder
Ambient light* bracketing
3 images shifted by 0.3 EV steps
Exposure compensation ±0.0 EV
Monitor (Display All Info. or Histogram)
Ambient light* bracketing
3 images shifted by 0.3 EV steps
Exposure compensation ±0.0 EV
Flash bracketing
3 images shifted by 0.7 EV steps
Flash compensation -1.0 EV
Monitor (For viewfinder)
Ambient light* bracketing (upper indicator)
3 images shifted by 0.3 EV steps
Exposure compensation ±0.0 EV
Flash bracketing (lower indicator)
3 images shifted by 0.7 EV steps
Flash compensation -1.0 EV
Hint
During bracket shooting, guides equal to the number of images to be shot are displayed over/under the bracket indicator.
When you start single bracket shooting, the guides will disappear one by one as the camera records images.
TP1001642632
Ambient light: A generic term for non-flash light including natural light, electric bulb and fluorescent lighting. Whereas the flash light blinks for a
moment, ambient light is constant, so this kind of light is called "ambient light."
*
278
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
279
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Focus Bracket
Performs continuous shooting automatically while shifting the focus position. This function can be used to shoot images
for depth-of-field composite images that are in focus at all points (focus stacking), or to select the optimum focus position
from among multiple images.
Hint
The [Step Width] value is a relative value, and the focus interval varies depending on shooting conditions such as the aperture of
the lens and the initial focus position. It is recommended that you take a test shot to find the appropriate focus width.
[Shooting Interval], [Exposure Smoothing], and [Focus Brckt Saving Dest] for the focus bracket can be set from [Bracket Settings].
Note
If the camera or lens moves while shooting with the focus bracket, focus stacking may not be successful. Use a tripod when
shooting for focus stacking.
Related Topic
Bracket Settings
TP1001663328
MENU → (Shooting) → [Drive Mode] → [Drive Mode] → [Focus Bracket].
1
Press the right side of the control wheel and set [Step Width] and [Number of Shots].
Step Width: Selects the degree to which the focus is shifted within the range of 1 to 10. The higher the number,
the more the focus will shift.
Number of Shots: Sets the number of shots taken with one release within the range of 2 to 299 for each
position.
2
Point the cursor at the ones place of the number of shots and press the right side of the control wheel to
open [Focus Bracket Settings]. Then select [Focus Bracket Order].
[0→+]: Shifts the focus from the current focus position toward infinity. When the focus reaches infinity, shooting
ends even if the set number of shots has not been reached.
[0→-→+]: Takes three images in the order of the current focus position, front focus, and rear focus. At this time,
the number of shots set in Step 2 becomes invalid.
You can also set [Focus Bracket Order] from [Drive Mode] → [Bracket Settings] → [Focus Bracket Settings] →
[Focus Bracket Order].
3
Press down the shutter button to shoot.
4
280
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
281
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
WB bracket
Shoots a total of three images, each with different color tones according to the selected settings for white balance, color
temperature and color filter.
Menu item details
White Balance Bracket: Lo:
Records a series of three images with small changes in the white balance (within the range of 10MK
-1*
).
White Balance Bracket: Hi:
Records a series of three images with large changes in the white balance (within the range of 20MK
-1*
).
*
MK
-1
is the unit that indicates the capability of color temperature conversion filters and indicates the same value as
"mired."
Hint
The last shot is shown on the auto review.
Related Topic
Bracket Settings
TP1001642627
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [Drive Mode] → [Drive Mode] → [WB bracket].
1
Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.
2
Adjust the focus and shoot the image.
3
282
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
DRO Bracket
You can record a total of three images, each at a different degree of D-Range Optimizer value.
Menu item details
DRO Bracket: Lo:
Records a series of three images with small changes in the D-Range Optimizer value (Lv 1, Lv 2, and Lv 3).
DRO Bracket: Hi:
Records a series of three images with large changes in the D-Range Optimizer value (Lv 1, Lv 3, and Lv 5).
Hint
The last shot is shown on the auto review.
Related Topic
Fn Menu Settings (still image/movie)
TP1001619172
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [Drive Mode] → [Drive Mode] → [DRO Bracket].
1
Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.
2
Adjust the focus and shoot the image.
3
283
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Bracket Settings
Sets self-timer shooting, the shooting order for the exposure bracket / white balance bracket, and the shooting method
for the focus bracket in the bracket shooting mode.
Menu item details
Selftimer during Bracket:
Sets whether to use the self-timer during bracket shooting. Also sets the number of seconds until the shutter is released if
using the self-timer.
(Off/2 Sec/5 Sec/10 Sec)
Bracket order:
Sets the order of exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing.
(0→-→+/-→0→+)
Focus Bracket Order:
Sets the shooting order for the focus bracket. ([0→+]/[0→-→+])
Exposure Smoothing:
Sets whether to automatically adjust the exposure while shooting with the focus bracket. ([On]/[Off])
Shooting Interval:
Sets the shooting interval when shooting with the focus bracket. ([Shortest]/[1 Sec]/[2 Sec]/[3 Sec]/[5 Sec]/[10 Sec]/[15
sec]/[30 Sec])
Focus Brckt Saving Dest:
Sets the save destination folder for still images taken with the focus bracket. ([Current Folder]/[New Folder])
Note
When [0→-→+] is selected for [Focus Bracket Order], the number of shots taken with the focus bracket is fixed at three.
Related Topic
Cont. Bracket
Single Bracket
WB bracket
Focus Bracket
TP1001643064
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [Drive Mode] → [Bracket Settings] → desired setting.
1
284
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Self-timer (movie)
You can start shooting with the self-timer when recording a movie.
Menu item details
On:
Uses the movie self-timer function.
Off:
Does not use the movie self-timer function.
Hint
To stop the self-timer countdown, press the REC button again or press the button to which the [ Self-timer] function is
assigned.
Note
If you press the REC button in the still image shooting mode to start movie recording, [ Self-timer] will not work.
TP1001663282
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Option] → [ Self-timer] → [On].
The [ Self-timer] setting screen will be displayed.
1
Select [On] using the control wheel and set the desired countdown time.
Rec Start delay: Sets the count time until the start of movie recording. (3 s/5 s/10 s)
Repetition: Sets whether to repeat the movie self-timer. (Repeat/Only Once)
If you select [Repeat], the movie self-timer will be activated repeatedly even after movie recording is completed.
If you select [Only Once], the movie self-timer will be canceled after movie recording is completed, and the
camera will return to the normal movie recording standby mode.
2
Adjust the focus and press the REC (Recording) button.
A countdown will appear on the recording standby screen, a beep will sound, and recording will start after the
designated number of seconds has elapsed.
Press the REC button again to end recording.
3
285
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Interval Shoot Func.
You can automatically shoot a series of still images with the shooting interval and number of shots that you set in
advance (Interval shooting). You can then create a time-lapse movie from the still images produced by interval shooting
using the computer software Imaging Edge Desktop (Viewer). You cannot create a movie from the still images on the
camera.
For details on time-lapse movies, refer to the support page for Imaging Edge Desktop.
https://www.sony.net/disoft/help/
Menu item details
Interval Shooting:
Sets whether to perform interval shooting. ([Off]/[On])
Shooting Start Time:
Sets the time from when you press the shutter button to when interval shooting starts. (1 second to 99 minutes 59
seconds)
Shooting Interval:
Sets the shooting interval (time from when one exposure starts to when the exposure for the next shot starts). (1 second
to 60 seconds)
Number of Shots:
Sets the number of shots for interval shooting. (1 shot to 9 999 shots)
AE Tracking Sensitivity:
Sets the tracking sensitivity of the auto exposure against the change in luminance during interval shooting. If you select
[Low], exposure changes during interval shooting will be smoother. ([High]/[Mid]/[Low])
Shutter Type in Interval:
Sets the shutter type during interval shooting. ([Mechanical Shutter]/[Electronic Shutter])
Shoot Interval Priority:
Sets whether or not to prioritize the shooting interval when the exposure mode is [Program Auto] or [Aperture Priority]
and the shutter speed becomes longer than the time set for [Shooting Interval]. ([Off]/[On])
Hint
MENU → (Shooting) → [Drive Mode] → [Interval Shoot Func.] → [Interval Shooting] → [On].
1
MENU → (Shooting) → [Drive Mode] → [Interval Shoot Func.] → Select an item to set, and then select
the desired setting.
2
Press the shutter button.
When the time set for [Shooting Start Time] has elapsed, shooting will start.
When the number of shots set for [Number of Shots] is completed, the camera will return to the standby screen
for interval shooting.
3
286
If you press the shutter button during interval shooting, interval shooting will end and the camera will return to the standby screen
for interval shooting.
To return to the normal shooting mode, set [Interval Shooting] to [Off].
If you press a key to which one of the following functions has been assigned at the moment when shooting starts, the function will
remain active during interval shooting even without you holding down the button.
[AEL hold]
[ AEL hold]
[AF/MF Selector Hold]
[Regist. AF Area hold]
[AWB Lock Hold]
FEL Lock hold
FEL Lock/AEL hold
If you set [Display as Group] to [On], still images shot with the interval shooting function will be displayed in groups.
Still images shot with interval shooting can be played back continuously on the camera. If you intend to create a movie using the
still images, you can preview the result.
Note
You may not be able to record the set number of images depending on the remaining battery level and the amount of free space
on the recording medium. Supply power via USB while shooting, and use a memory card with sufficient space.
When the shooting interval is short, the camera may get hot easily. Depending on the ambient temperature, you may not be able
to record the set number of images because the camera may stop recording to protect the equipment.
During interval shooting (including the time between pressing the shutter button and the start of shooting), you cannot operate the
dedicated shooting setting screen or MENU screen. However, you can adjust some settings such as the shutter speed with using
the customized dial or control wheel.
During interval shooting, auto review is not displayed.
[Shutter Type in Interval] is set to [Electronic Shutter] as a default, regardless of the setting for [Shutter Type].
Interval shooting is unavailable in the following situations:
The shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto]
Related Topic
Cont. Play for Interval
Supplying power from a wall outlet (wall socket)
TP1001658271
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
287
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
JPEG/HEIF Switch
Switches the file format (JPEG / HEIF) of the still image to be recorded.
The JPEG format has general compatibility. You can view and edit JPEG files in various environments. The HEIF format
has high compression efficiency. The camera can record with high image quality and small file sizes in the HEIF format.
Depending on the computer or software, you may not be able to view or edit HEIF files. In addition, a HEIF-compatible
environment is required to play back still images in the HEIF format. You can enjoy high-quality still images by connecting
the camera and the TV via HDMI.
Menu item details
JPEG:
Performs digital processing on the RAW file and records it in the JPEG format. This setting gives priority to compatibility.
HEIF(4:2:0):
Performs digital processing on the RAW file and records it in the HEIF (4:2:0) format. This setting gives priority to image
quality and compression efficiency.
HEIF(4:2:2):
Performs digital processing on the RAW file and records it in the HEIF (4:2:2) format. This setting gives priority to image
quality.
Hint
The HEIF format allows you to record images with rich 10-bit gradation expression. Also, by setting [HEIF(4:2:2)], you can record
with 4:2:2 color sampling, which has better color reproduction.
Depending on the setting for [JPEG/HEIF Switch], items related to the file format ([ File Format], etc.) will switch to JPEG or
HEIF.
Note
HEIF image files recorded with this camera cannot be displayed on other cameras that do not support the HEIF file format. Be
careful not to accidentally erase HEIF image files by formatting the memory card or deleting the files.
When recording in the HEIF format with [HLG Still Image] set to [Off], the color space is recorded in sRGB. When [HLG Still
Image] is set to [On], it is recorded in the BT.2100 color space (BT.2020 color gamut).
Related Topic
Image Quality Settings: File Format (still image)
HLG Still Image
TP1001659777
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [JPEG/HEIF Switch] → desired setting.
1
288
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Image Quality Settings: File Format (still image)
Sets the file format for still images.
Menu item details
RAW:
Digital processing is not performed on this file format. Select this format to process images on a computer for
professional purposes.
RAW & JPEG/RAW & HEIF:
A RAW image and a JPEG or HEIF image are created at the same time. This is suitable when you need two image files,
a JPEG or HEIF for viewing, and a RAW for editing.
JPEG/HEIF:
The image is recorded in the JPEG or HEIF format.
When [ Recording Media] is set to [Sort Recording], you can select the file format for each slot from among RAW
and JPEG, or RAW and HEIF.
About RAW images
To open a RAW image file recorded with this camera, the software Imaging Edge Desktop is needed. With Imaging
Edge Desktop, you can open a RAW image file, then convert it into a popular image format such as JPEG or TIFF, or
readjust the white balance, saturation or contrast of the image.
RAW images recorded with this camera have a resolution of 14 bits per pixel. However, resolution is limited to 12 bits
in the following shooting modes:
[Cont. Shooting] when [RAW File Type] is set to [Compressed]
You can set the compression method for RAW images using [RAW File Type].
Note
If you do not intend to edit the images on your computer, we recommend that you record in JPEG or HEIF format.
An environment supporting the HEIF format is required to play back HEIF images.
Related Topic
JPEG/HEIF Switch
Image Quality Settings: JPEG Quality/HEIF Quality
Image Quality Settings: JPEG Image Size/HEIF Image Size
Image Quality Settings: RAW File Type
MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [Image Quality Settings] → [ File Format] → desired
setting.
1
289
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Image Quality Settings: RAW File Type
Selects the file type for RAW images.
Menu item details
Uncompressed:
Records images in uncompressed RAW format. When [Uncompressed] is selected for [RAW File Type], the file size of
the image will be larger than if it were recorded in lossless compressed RAW format or compressed RAW format.
Lossless Comp (L)/Lossless Comp (M)/Lossless Comp (S):
Records images with a lossless compression method that causes no deterioration
*
in image quality and has a high
compression rate. The file size is smaller than when [Uncompressed] is selected.
You can select L/M/S as the image size. The number of pixels after development using a Sony application is the
same as the L/M/S size for JPEG/HEIF images.
The L size can be selected only when shooting in full frame. When shooting in the M or S size, the pixel number does
not change for full-frame shooting or APS-C-size shooting.
Compressed:
Records images in compressed RAW format. The file size of the image will be approximately half of that with
[Uncompressed].
Hint
The [RAW File Type] icons are displayed as shown below.
Uncompressed:
Lossless compression L/M/S:
Compressed:
The aspect ratio for RAW images is always 3:2. JPEG/HEIF images are recorded with the aspect ratio set in [Aspect Ratio] when
RAW images and JPEG/HEIF images are recorded at the same time.
Note
You cannot record RAW images with different formats to Slot 1 and Slot 2. Even when [ Recording Media] is set to [Sort
Recording], each slot has the same setting for [RAW File Type].
Related Topic
Image Quality Settings: File Format (still image)
MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [Image Quality Settings] → [RAW File Type] → desired
setting.
1
The M size and S size reduce the image size, so the image resolution will be lower than that of the L size.
*
291
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Image Quality Settings: JPEG Quality/HEIF Quality
Selects the image quality when recording JPEG or HEIF images.
Menu item details
Extra fine/Fine/Standard/Light:
Since the compression rate increases from [Extra fine] to [Fine] to [Standard] to [Light], the file size decreases in that
same order. This allows more files to be recorded on one memory card, but the image quality is lower.
When [ Recording Media] is set to [Sort Recording], you can select the image quality for each slot.
Related Topic
Image Quality Settings: File Format (still image)
Rec. Media Settings (still image/movie): Recording Media (still image)
TP1001661330
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [Image Quality Settings] → [JPEG Quality]/[HEIF Quality]
→ desired setting.
1
293
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Image Quality Settings: JPEG Image Size/HEIF Image Size
The larger the image size, the more detail will be reproduced when the image is printed on large-format paper. The
smaller the image size, the more images can be recorded.
Menu item details
When [Aspect Ratio] is set to 3:2
When [Aspect Ratio] is set to 4:3
When [Aspect Ratio] is set to 16:9
When [Aspect Ratio] is set to 1:1
MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [Image Quality Settings] → [JPEG Image Size]/[HEIF
Image Size] → desired setting.
1
Setting values Pixel number (horizontal×vertical)
L: 33M 7008×4672 pixels
M: 14M 4608×3072 pixels
S: 8.2M 3504×2336 pixels
Setting values Pixel number (horizontal×vertical)
L: 29M 6224×4672 pixels
M: 13M 4096×3072 pixels
S: 7.3M 3120×2336 pixels
Setting values Pixel number (horizontal×vertical)
L: 28M 7008×3944 pixels
M: 12M 4608×2592 pixels
S: 6.9M 3504×1968 pixels
294
Hint
When recording in the M or S size, the pixel number will not change even if you switch the angle of view between the full-frame
size and APS-C size.
Note
The L size cannot be selected when shooting in the APS-C size. If you shoot in the APS-C size while the L size is selected, the
image size will switch to the M size temporarily.
Related Topic
Image Quality Settings: File Format (still image)
Aspect Ratio
TP1001661331
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
Setting values Pixel number (horizontal×vertical)
L: 22M 4672×4672 pixels
M: 9.4M 3072×3072 pixels
S: 5.5M 2336×2336 pixels
295
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Aspect Ratio
Menu item details
3:2:
Same aspect ratio as 35 mm film
4:3:
The aspect ratio is 4:3.
16:9:
The aspect ratio is 16:9.
1:1:
The aspect ratio is 1:1.
Related Topic
Marker Display (still image)
TP1001642607
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [Aspect Ratio] → desired setting.
1
296
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
HLG Still Image
By using gamma characteristics equivalent to HLG (Hybrid Log-Gamma: standard for HDR images), you can shoot still
images with a wide dynamic range and a wide color gamut compatible with BT.2020.
[HLG Still Image] can only be set when shooting in the HEIF format. Set [JPEG/HEIF Switch] to [HEIF(4:2:0)] or
[HEIF(4:2:2)], and [ File Format] under [Image Quality Settings] to [HEIF] beforehand.
Menu item details
On:
Shoots HLG still images.
Off:
Shoots normal still images.
Hint
You can reproduce a wider range of brightness by playing back HLG still images on an HLG-compatible TV or monitor.
You can display HLG still images on the camera’s monitor in almost the same quality as when they are displayed on an HLG-
(BT.2020-) compatible monitor by setting as follows.
[Gamma Display Assist]: [On]
[Gamma Disp. Assist Typ.]: [Auto] or [HLG(BT.2020)]
Note
In the following situations, [HLG Still Image] is fixed to [Off]:
[JPEG/HEIF Switch] is set to [JPEG]
[ File Format] under [Image Quality Settings] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & HEIF]
When a shooting mode other than P / A / S / M is set during still image shooting
When the ISO sensitivity is temporarily activated by the [Reg. Custom Shoot Set] function
When the [DRO Bracket] function under [Drive Mode] is temporarily activated by the [Reg. Custom Shoot Set] function
[ Log Shooting] is set to [Flexible ISO]
When [HLG Still Image] is set to [On], the following functions are not available.
[D-Range Optimizer]
[ Creative Look]
[DRO Bracket] under [Drive Mode]
[ Picture Profile]
When [HLG Still Image] is set to [On], the available ISO range changes.
Related Topic
JPEG/HEIF Switch
HDMI Resolution
Gamma Display Assist
MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [HLG Still Image] → desired setting.
1
297
TP1001659779
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
298
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Color Space
The way colors are represented using combinations of numbers or the range of color reproduction is called “color space.”
You can change the color space depending on the purpose of the image.
Menu item details
sRGB:
This is the standard color space of the digital camera. Use [sRGB] in normal shooting, such as when you intend to print
out the images without any modification.
AdobeRGB:
This color space has a wide range of color reproduction. When a large part of the subject is vivid green or red, Adobe
RGB is effective. The file name of the recorded image starts with “_.”
Note
The [Color Space] setting is invalid when shooting images in the HEIF format. If [HLG Still Image] is set to [Off], images will be
recorded with the sRGB color space. When [HLG Still Image] is set to [On], it is recorded in the BT.2100 color space (BT.2020
color gamut).
When [ Log Shooting Setting] is set to [Flexible ISO], the [Color Space] setting is disabled. Set the color gamut in [ Color
Gamut] under [ Log Shooting Setting].
[AdobeRGB] is for applications or printers that support color management and DCF2.0 option color space. Images may not be
printed or viewed in the correct colors if you use applications or printers that do not support Adobe RGB.
When displaying images that were recorded with [AdobeRGB] on non-Adobe RGB-compliant devices, the images will be
displayed with low saturation.
Related Topic
JPEG/HEIF Switch
HLG Still Image
TP1001619212
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [Color Space] → desired setting.
1
299
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
File Format (movie)
Selects the movie file format.
Menu item details
Intra/Long GOP is a movie compression format. Intra compresses the movie by frame, and Long GOP compresses
multiple frames. Intra compression has better response and flexibility when editing, but Long GOP compression has
better compression efficiency.
Note
To play back XAVC HS 4K movies on a smartphone or computer, you need a device or software with high processing capability
that supports the HEVC codec.
If an APS-C size dedicated lens is attached, the edges of the screen may appear dark. When recording 4K movies with this
camera, we recommend using a lens compatible with the 35 mm full-frame format.
[ Shooting] is locked to [On] when shooting movies in 4K 59.94p/50p.
MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [ File Format] → desired setting.
1
File
Format
Characteristics
XAVC HS
4K
Records 4K movies in the XAVC HS format.
The XAVC HS format uses the HEVC codec, which has high compression efficiency. The camera can
record movies with higher image quality than XAVC S movies but the same data volume. Long GOP
compression is used for movies.
XAVC S 4K Records movies in 4K resolution (3840×2160). Long GOP compression is used for movies.
XAVC S
HD
Records movies in HD resolution (1920×1080). Long GOP compression is used for movies.
XAVC S-I
4K
Records movies in the XAVC S-I format.
The XAVC S-I format uses Intra compression for movies. This format is more suitable for editing than
Long GOP compression.
XAVC S-I
HD
Records movies in the XAVC S-I format.
The XAVC S-I format uses Intra compression for movies. This format is more suitable for editing than
Long GOP compression.
XAVC S-I
DCI 4K
Records movies in the XAVC S-I format with DCI 4K resolution (4096×2160).
The XAVC S-I format uses Intra compression for movies. This format is more suitable for editing than
Long GOP compression.
300
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Movie Settings (movie)
Sets the frame rate, bit rate, color information, etc.
Menu item details
When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC HS 4K]
MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [ Movie Settings] → [Rec Frame Rate] → desired
setting.
1
MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [ Movie Settings] → [Record Setting] → desired
setting.
Example of setting values
(A): Bit rate
(B): Color sampling
(C): Bit depth
The higher the bit rate, the higher the image quality.
Color sampling (4:2:2, 4:2:0) is the recording ratio of color information. The more uniform this ratio is, the better
the color reproducibility, and it is possible to remove colors neatly even when compositing using a green screen.
Bit depth represents the gradation of luminance information. When the bit depth is 8 bits, 256 levels of gradation
can be obtained. When the bit depth is 10 bits, 1024 levels of gradation can be obtained. A larger value enables
smoother expression from dark to bright areas.
[4:2:2 10 bit] is a setting that assumes that the recorded movie will be edited on a computer. The playback
environment for [4:2:2 10 bit] is limited.
2
Rec Frame Rate Record Setting Size Movie compression format
59.94p/50p 200M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
59.94p/50p 150M 4:2:0 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
59.94p/50p 100M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
59.94p/50p 75M 4:2:0 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
59.94p/50p 45M 4:2:0 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
23.98p* 100M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
23.98p* 100M 4:2:0 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
302
When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K]
When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S HD]
Rec Frame Rate Record Setting Size Movie compression format
23.98p* 50M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
23.98p* 50M 4:2:0 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
23.98p* 30M 4:2:0 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.
*
Rec Frame Rate Record Setting Size Movie compression format
59.94p/50p 200M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
59.94p/50p 150M 4:2:0 8bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
29.97p/25p 140M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
29.97p/25p 100M 4:2:0 8bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
29.97p/25p 60M 4:2:0 8bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
23.98p* 100M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
23.98p* 100M 4:2:0 8bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
23.98p* 60M 4:2:0 8bit 3840×2160 Long GOP
Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.
*
Rec Frame Rate Record Setting Size Movie compression format
59.94p/50p 50M 4:2:2 10bit 1920×1080 Long GOP
59.94p/50p 50M 4:2:0 8bit 1920×1080 Long GOP
59.94p/50p 25M 4:2:0 8bit 1920×1080 Long GOP
29.97p/25p 50M 4:2:2 10bit 1920×1080 Long GOP
29.97p/25p 50M 4:2:0 8bit 1920×1080 Long GOP
29.97p/25p 16M 4:2:0 8bit 1920×1080 Long GOP
23.98p* 50M 4:2:2 10bit 1920×1080 Long GOP
23.98p* 50M 4:2:0 8bit 1920×1080 Long GOP
119.88p/100p 100M 4:2:0 8bit 1920×1080 Long GOP
119.88p/100p 60M 4:2:0 8bit 1920×1080 Long GOP
Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.
*
303
When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S-I 4K]
When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S-I HD]
When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S-I DCI 4K]
Related Topic
File Format (movie)
TP1001642643
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
Rec Frame Rate Record Setting Size Movie compression format
59.94p/50p 600M 4:2:2 10bit/500M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Intra
29.97p/25p 300M 4:2:2 10bit/250M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Intra
23.98p* 240M 4:2:2 10bit 3840×2160 Intra
Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.
*
Rec Frame Rate Record Setting Size Movie compression format
59.94p/50p 222M 4:2:2 10bit/185M 4:2:2 10bit 1920×1080 Intra
29.97p/25p 111M 4:2:2 10bit/93M 4:2:2 10bit 1920×1080 Intra
23.98p* 89M 4:2:2 10bit 1920×1080 Intra
Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.
*
Rec Frame Rate Record Setting Size Movie compression format
59.94p/50p 600M 4:2:2 10bit/500M 4:2:2 10bit 4096×2160 Intra
29.97p/25p 300M 4:2:2 10bit/250M 4:2:2 10bit 4096×2160 Intra
23.98p* 240M 4:2:2 10bit 4096×2160 Intra
24.00p 240M 4:2:2 10bit 4096×2160 Intra
Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.
*
304
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
FPS
Sets whether to use different frame rates for shooting and recording.
You can record slow-motion/quick-motion movies by setting the shooting frame rate and the recording frame rate to
different rates.
The playback speed of slow-motion/quick-motion movies is determined by the shooting frame rate and recording frame
rate settings.
Menu item details
Fixed/Variable Select:
Selects whether to record normal-speed movies or slow-motion/quick-motion movies. (Fixed / Variable)
If you select [Variable], the movie will be in slow motion or quick motion, and no audio will be recorded.
FPS Select:
When [Fixed/Variable Select] is set to [Variable], use [FPS Select] to set the frame rate during shooting. This determines
the playback speed of slow-motion/quick-motion movies.
When the shooting frame rate is higher than the recording frame rate, the movie will be in slow motion, and when it is
lower, the movie will be in quick motion.
Slow-motion/quick-motion movie playback speed
When [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC
MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [FPS]→ desired settings.
1
Shooting frame
rate
Rec Frame Rate
23.98p
Rec Frame Rate
29.97p
Rec Frame Rate
59.94p
Rec Frame Rate
119.98p
120fps 5 times slower 4 times slower 2 times slower
Normal playback
speed
60fps 2.5 times slower 2 times slower
Normal playback
speed
2 times quick
30fps
1.25 times
slower
Normal playback
speed
2 times quick 4 times quick
15fps 1.6 times quick 2 times quick 4 times quick 8 times quick
8fps 3 times quick 3.75 times quick 7.5 times quick 15 times quick
4fps 6 times quick 7.5 times quick 15 times quick 30 times quick
2fps 12 times quick 15 times quick 30 times quick 60 times quick
1fps 24 times quick 30 times quick 60 times quick 120 times quick
305
When [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to PAL
[120fps]/[100fps] cannot be selected when [ File Format] is set to following items:
XAVC HS 4K
XAVC S 4K
XAVC S-I 4K
XAVC S-I DCI 4K
When [ File Format] is set to one of the following and the shooting frame rate is set to 60fps/50fps, the [
Shooting] setting is locked to [On].
XAVC HS 4K
XAVC S 4K
XAVC S-I 4K
XAVC S-I DCI 4K
You can select the frame rates listed below only when [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S-I DCI 4K].
When the shooting frame rate is set to 48fps, the [ Shooting] setting is locked to [On].
Hint
Shooting frame rate
Rec Frame Rate
25p
Rec Frame Rate
50p
Rec Frame Rate
100p
100fps 4 times slower 2 times slower Normal playback speed
50fps 2 times slower Normal playback speed 2 times quick
25fps Normal playback speed 2 times quick 4 times quick
12fps 2.08 times quick 4.16 times quick 8.33 times quick
6fps 4.16 times quick 8.33 times quick 16.66 times quick
3fps 8.33 times quick 16.66 times quick 33.33 times quick
2fps 12.5 times quick 25 times quick 50 times quick
1fps 25 times quick 50 times quick 100 times quick
Shooting frame rate
Rec Frame Rate
24.00p
48fps 2 times slower
24fps Normal playback speed
12fps 2 times quick
6fps 4 times quick
3fps 8 times quick
2fps 12 times quick
1fps 24 times quick
306
For an estimation of recordable time, refer to “Recordable movie times.”
Note
In slow-motion/quick-motion recording, the actual shooting time differs from the time recorded in the movie. The recordable time
displayed toward the top of the monitor shows the remaining recording time for the movie, not the remaining recording time on the
memory card.
In slow-motion recording, the shutter speed becomes faster and you may not be able to obtain the proper exposure. If this
happens, decrease the aperture value or set the ISO sensitivity to a higher value.
During slow-motion/quick-motion recording, the following functions are not available.
[Time Code Run]
[Time Code Output]
TP1002003332
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
307
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Proxy Settings
You can simultaneously record a low-bit-rate proxy movie when recording a movie.
Since proxy movies are small in file size, they are suitable for transferring to smartphones or uploading to websites.
Menu item details
Proxy Recording:
Selects whether to simultaneously record proxy movies. ([On] / [Off])
Proxy File Format:
Selects the recording format of the proxy movie. ([XAVC HS HD] / [XAVC S HD])
Proxy Rec. Settings:
Selects the bit rate, color sampling and bit depth of the proxy movie. ([16M 4:2:0 10bit] / [9M 4:2:0 10bit] / [6M 4:2:0 8bit])
Selectable proxy recording settings
Hint
Proxy movies are not displayed on the playback screen (single-image playback screen or image index screen). (proxy) is
displayed over movies for which a proxy movie was simultaneously recorded.
Note
Proxy movies cannot be played back on this camera.
Proxy recording is not available in the following situations.
[Rec Frame Rate] is set to [119.88p]/[100p] or [24.00p]
The frame rate is set to [120fps]/[100fps]
Deleting/protecting movies that have proxy movies removes/protects both the original and proxy movies. You cannot
delete/protect only original movies or proxy movies.
MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [ Proxy Settings] → Select an item to set, and then
select the desired setting.
1
Proxy File
Format
Recording
size
Recording frame
rate
Proxy Rec.
Settings
Compression codec
XAVC HS HD 1920×1080
Max. 59.94p/Max.
50p
16Mbps 4:2:0 10bit
9Mbps 4:2:0 10bit
MPEG-H
HEVC/H.265
XAVC S HD 1280×720
Max. 59.94p/Max.
50p
6Mbps 4:2:0 8bit MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
308
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
APS-C S35 (Super 35mm) Shooting (still image/movie)
Sets whether or not to record with the angle of view of APS-C for still images and with an angle of view equivalent to
Super 35mm for movies. If you select [On] or [Auto], you can use an APS-C size dedicated lens on this product.
Menu item details
On:
Records in either APS-C-equivalent size or Super 35mm-equivalent size.
When [On] is selected, the angle of view becomes approximately 1.5 times the focal length indicated on the lens.
Auto:
Automatically sets the capture range according to the lens.
Off:
Always captures 35mm full-frame image sensor pictures.
Note
When you attach an APS-C-compatible lens and set [ Shooting] to [Off], you may not achieve optimal shooting results.
For example, the edges of the image may become darker.
When [ Shooting] is set to [On], the angle of view is the same as when shooting with an APS-C-size image sensor.
[ Shooting] is locked to [On] when shooting movies in 4K 59.94p/50p.
Related Topic
Angle of view
TP1001619221
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [ Shooting] → desired setting.
1
310
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Angle of view
The angle of view switches to the equivalent of full frame or APS-C/Super 35mm, depending on the setting for [
Shooting] and the attached lens. The angle of view is also different for still image shooting and movie shooting.
Angle of view equivalent to full frame
(A) When shooting still images
(B) When recording movies (with [RAW Output] under [ HDMI Output Settings] set to [Off])
(C) When recording movies (with [RAW Output] under [ HDMI Output Settings] set to [On])
The camera shoots with an angle of view equivalent to full frame in the following situations.
[ Shooting] is set to [Auto], and a full frame shooting-compatible lens is attached.
[ Shooting] is set to [Off].
Angle of view equivalent to APS-C size/Super 35mm
(A) When shooting still images
(B) When recording movies
The camera shoots with an angle of view equivalent to the APS-C size or Super 35mm in the following situations. The
angle of view becomes approx. 1.5 times the focal length indicated on the lens.
[ Shooting] is set to [Auto], and an APS-C-format dedicated lens is attached.
[ Shooting] is set to [On].
311
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Touch Operation
Sets whether or not to activate touch operations on the monitor.
Menu item details
On:
Activates touch operations.
Off:
Deactivates touch operations.
Related Topic
Touch Panel Settings
Touch Panel/Pad
Touch panel
TP1001651490
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [Touch Operation] → desired setting.
1
313
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Touch Panel/Pad
Touch operations on the monitor are referred to as “touch panel operations,” and touch operations when shooting with
the viewfinder are referred to as “touch pad operations.” You can select whether to activate touch panel operations or
touch pad operations.
Menu item details
Both Valid:
Activates both touch panel operations on the monitor and touch pad operations when shooting with the viewfinder.
Touch Panel Only:
Activates only touch panel operations on the monitor.
Touch Pad Only:
Activates only touch pad operations when shooting with the viewfinder.
Related Topic
Touch Operation
TP1001657162
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [Touch Panel/Pad] → desired setting.
1
314
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Touch Panel Settings
You can adjust settings related to touch panel operations on the monitor.
Menu item details
Shooting Screen:
Shooting Screen: Sets whether to enable touch operations on the shooting screen. ([On] / [Off])
Footer Icon Touch: Sets whether to enable touch operations for the footer icons at the bottom of the shooting standby
screen. ([On] / [Off])
Swipe Right: Sets the operation when swiping right on the shooting standby screen. ([Icon Display: Left] / [Icon Display:
L&R] / [Off])
Swipe Left: Sets the operation when swiping left on the shooting standby screen. ([Icon Display: Right] / [Icon Display:
L&R] / [Off])
Swipe Up: Sets the operation when swiping up on the shooting standby screen. ([Open the Fn Menu] / [Off])
Swipe Down: Sets the operation when swiping down on the shooting standby screen. ([Open Home Screen] / [Off])
Touch Func. in Shooting: Sets the operation when touching on a subject on the shooting screen. ([Touch Focus] / [Touch
Tracking] / [Touch Shutter] / [Touch AE] / [Off])
Icon When Monitor Flipped: Sets whether to flip the positions of the touch function icons on the left and right in
accordance with the monitor when the monitor is flipped. ([Flip] / [Do Not Flip])
Playback Screen:
Sets whether to enable touch operations on the playback screen. ([On] / [Off])
Menu Screen:
Sets whether to enable touch operations on the menu screen. ([On] / [Off])
Hint
You can select whether to simultaneously perform [Touch AE] by pressing the left/right sides of the control wheel when [Touch
Func. in Shooting] is set to [Touch Focus] / [Touch Tracking] / [Touch Shutter]. When you perform [Touch AE], you can fine-tune
the brightness by sliding the brightness adjustment bar that appears after touching.
Note
Regardless of the settings for [Touch Panel Settings], the touch operations during shooting are disabled in the following situations:
when [Touch Operation] is set to [Off]
when [Touch Panel/Pad] is set to [Touch Pad Only]
You cannot fine-tune the brightness using the brightness adjustment bar when [Touch Func. in Shooting] is set to [Touch
Shutter+AE].
Related Topic
Touch function icons
Touch panel
MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [Touch Panel Settings] → desired setting.
1
315
Touch Operation
Touch Panel/Pad
Focusing using touch operations (Touch Focus)
Starting tracking with touch operations (Touch Tracking)
Shooting with touch operations (Touch Shutter)
Adjusting the exposure with touch operations (Touch AE)
Fn (function) button
HOME (Home) button
Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)
MENU button
Main menu (shooting setting list)
TP1001663303
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
316
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Touch Pad Settings
You can adjust settings related to touch pad operations during viewfinder shooting.
Menu item details
Operation in Vertical Orientation :
Sets whether to enable touch pad operations during vertically oriented viewfinder shooting. You can prevent erroneous
operations during vertically oriented shooting caused by your nose, etc. touching the monitor.
Touch Position Mode:
Sets whether to move the focusing frame to the position touched on the screen ([Absolute Position]), or move the
focusing frame to the desired position based on the direction of dragging and the amount of movement ([Relative
Position]).
Operation Area:
Sets the area to be used for touch pad operations. Restricting the operational area can prevent erroneous operations
caused by your nose, etc. touching the monitor.
About Touch Positioning Mode
Selecting [Absolute Position] lets you move the focusing frame to a distant position more quickly because you can
directly specify the position of the focusing frame with touch operations.
Selecting [Relative Position] lets you operate the touch pad from wherever is easiest, without having to move your finger
over a wide area.
Hint
MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [Touch Pad Settings] → desired setting.
1
317
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Focusing using touch operations (Touch Focus)
[Touch Focus] allows you to specify a position where you want to focus using touch operations.
Configure the settings as follows from MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] in advance:
[Touch Operation]: [On]
[Touch Panel Settings] → [Shooting Screen] → [Shooting Screen]: [On]
This function is available when [ Focus Area] is set to one of following parameters. However, the function may not be
available depending on the setting for [ Focus Area Limit].
[Wide]
[Zone]
[Center Fix]
[Tracking: Wide]
[Tracking: Zone]
[Tracking: Center Fix]
Specifying the position where you want to focus in the still image mode
When performing auto-focusing, you can specify the position where you want to focus using touch operations. After
touching the monitor and specifying a position, press the shutter button halfway down to focus.
Specifying the position where you want to focus in the movie recording mode
The camera will focus on the touched subject.
MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [Touch Panel Settings] → [Shooting Screen] → [Touch Func.
in Shooting] → [Touch Focus].
1
Touch the monitor.
When shooting with the monitor, touch the position where you want to focus.
When shooting with the viewfinder, you can move the position of the focus by touching and dragging on the
monitor while looking through the viewfinder.
To cancel focusing with touch operations, touch (Touch focus release) icon or press the center of the control
wheel if shooting with the monitor, and press the center of the control wheel if shooting with the viewfinder.
1.
Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.
Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot images.
2.
Touch the subject on which you want to focus before or during recording.1.
319
Hint
If you set [Touch Func. in Shooting] to [Touch Focus+AE], the brightness will be set according to the subject you touched. This will
also allow you to fine-tune the brightness by sliding the brightness adjustment bar that appears after touching.
In addition to the touch focus function, touch operations such as the following are also available.
The focusing frame for [Spot]/[Expand Spot]/[Custom] can be moved by dragging.
When shooting still images in the manual focusing mode, the focus magnifier can be used by double-tapping the monitor.
Note
The touch focus function is not available in the following situations:
When shooting still images in the manual focusing mode
When using the digital zoom in the still image shooting mode
When using the LA-EA4
Related Topic
Touch Operation
Touch Panel/Pad
Touch Panel Settings
Selecting the focus area (Focus Area)
TP1001651491
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
When [ Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF], the focus mode temporarily switches to manual focus, and the
focus can be adjusted using the focus ring (spot focus). Spot focus is not available when shooting with the
viewfinder.
To cancel spot focus, touch (Touch focus release) icon or press the center of the control wheel.
When [ Focus Mode] is set to [Manual Focus], the focus mode temporarily switches to [Continuous AF]. When
the touched area is in focus, the focus mode returns to manual focus.
320
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Starting tracking with touch operations (Touch Tracking)
You can use touch operations to select a subject you want to track in the still image shooting mode and movie recording
mode.
Configure the settings as follows from MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] in advance:
[Touch Operation]: [On]
[Touch Panel Settings] → [Shooting Screen] → [Shooting Screen]: [On]
Hint
To cancel tracking, touch (Tracking release) icon or press the center of the control wheel.
If you set [Touch Func. in Shooting] to [TouchTracking+AE], the brightness will be set according to the subject you touched. This
will also allow you to fine-tune the brightness by sliding the brightness adjustment bar that appears after touching.
Note
[Touch Tracking] is unavailable in the following situations:
When [ Focus Mode] is set to [Manual Focus] in still image shooting mode.
When using Smart Zoom, Clear Image Zoom, or Digital Zoom in the still image shooting mode
If the focus mode is switched to [Manual Focus] while [Touch Func. in Shooting] is set to [Touch Tracking] in still image shooting
mode, the setting value for [Touch Func. in Shooting] will be changed to [Touch Focus].
Related Topic
Touch Operation
Touch Panel/Pad
Touch Panel Settings
TP1001658283
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [Touch Panel Settings] → [Shooting Screen] → [Touch Func.
in Shooting] → [Touch Tracking].
1
Touch the subject that you want to track on the monitor.
Tracking will start.
When shooting with the viewfinder, you can use the touch pad to select a subject you want to track.
2
321
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Shooting with touch operations (Touch Shutter)
The camera automatically focuses on the point you touch and shoots a still image.
Configure the settings as follows from MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] in advance:
[Touch Operation]: [On]
[Touch Panel Settings] → [Shooting Screen] → [Shooting Screen]: [On]
Hint
If you set [Touch Func. in Shooting] to [Touch Shutter+AE], the brightness will be set according to the subject you touched.
You can operate the shooting functions below by touching the monitor:
Shooting burst images using the touch shutter
When [Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Shooting], you can record burst images while touching the monitor.
Shooting continuous bracket images using the touch shutter
The product shoots three images while automatically shifting the exposure from base, to darker, and then to lighter. When
[Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Bracket], keep touching the monitor until the shooting ends. After the recording you can select the
image you prefer.
Note
The [Touch Shutter] function is unavailable in the following situations:
During viewfinder shooting
When shooting movies
When [ Focus Mode] is set to [Manual Focus]
When [ Focus Area] is set to [Spot] / [Expand Spot] / [Custom] / [Tracking: Spot XL] / [Tracking: Spot L] / [Tracking: Spot M] /
[Tracking: Spot S] / [Tracking: Expand Spot] / [Tracking: Custom 1] / [Tracking: Custom 2] / [Tracking: Custom 3]
While using the digital zoom function
While using the Clear Image Zoom
While using the Smart Zoom
When a Mount Adaptor is attached
When using Clear Image Zoom or Digital Zoom while [Touch Func. in Shooting] is set to [Touch Shutter], the setting value
temporarily changes from [Touch Shutter] to [Off].
If the focus mode is switched to [Manual Focus] while [Touch Func. in Shooting] is set to [Touch Shutter], the setting value for
[Touch Func. in Shooting] will change to [Touch Focus].
Related Topic
Touch Operation
Touch Panel Settings
MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [Touch Panel Settings] → [Shooting Screen] → [Touch Func.
in Shooting] → [Touch Shutter].
1
Touch the subject on which you would like to focus.
The camera focuses on the subject you touched, and a still image is recorded.
2
322
TP1001662561
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
323
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Adjusting the exposure with touch operations (Touch AE)
You can automatically set the exposure based on the brightness of a point you touch.
Configure the settings as follows from MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] in advance:
[Touch Operation]: [On]
[Touch Panel Settings] → [Shooting Screen] → [Shooting Screen]: [On]
Hint
The adjustment using the brightness adjustment bar is reflected in the exposure compensation value.
When [Touch Func. in Shooting] is set to [Touch Focus]/[Touch Tracking]/[Touch Shutter], you can select whether or not to
perform [Touch AE] at the same time by pressing the left or right side of the control wheel.
Note
[Touch AE] is not available in the following situations:
When using digital zoom function
If the subject is extremely bright or dark, the adjustment bar may not be sufficiently effective.
Related Topic
Touch Operation
Touch Panel Settings
TP1001665537
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [Touch Panel Settings] → [Shooting Screen] → [Touch Func.
in Shooting] → select [Touch AE].
1
Touch the point that you want to set as the basis for the exposure.
The camera will set the exposure based on the brightness of the point you touched.
You can fine-tune the brightness with sliding the brightness adjustment bar that appears after touching.
2
324
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Silent Mode Settings (still image/movie)
You can configure settings related to the silent mode, which allows you to shoot without shutter sounds or electronic
sounds. You can also set whether or not to change the settings for other functions that emit sounds from the camera
when the camera is set to the silent mode.
Menu item details
Silent Mode:
Sets whether or not to shoot without shutter sounds or electronic sounds. ([On]/[Off])
When set to [On], [Shutter Type] and [Shutter Type in Interval] become locked to [Electronic Shutter], and [Audio
Signal(Shooting)] becomes locked to [Off].
Target Function Settings:
Sets whether or not to simultaneously change the settings for other functions that emit sounds from the camera when the
camera is set to the silent mode. ([Aperture Drive in AF]/[Shutter When Pwr OFF]/[Auto Pixel Mapping])
If you select [Not Target], the setting values for each function will be retained even in the silent mode.
Note
Use the [Silent Mode] function on your own responsibility, while taking sufficient consideration to the privacy and portrait rights of
the subject.
Even if [Silent Mode] is set to [On], it will not be completely silent.
Even if [Silent Mode] is set to [On], the operating sound of the aperture and focus will sound.
If [Auto Pixel Mapping] is set to [On], shutter sounds may occasionally be heard when the power is turned off. This is not a
malfunction.
If [Shutter When Pwr OFF] under [Anti-dust Function] is set to [On], a shutter sound will be heard when the camera is turned off.
Image distortion caused by the movement of the subject or the camera may occur.
If you shoot images under instantaneous lightning or flickering lights, such as the flash light from other cameras or fluorescent
lighting, a striping effect may occur on the image.
When [Silent Mode] is set to [On], the following functions are not available:
Flash shooting
Long Exposure NR
BULB shooting
Anti-flicker Shoot.
Related Topic
Interval Shoot Func.
Aperture Drive in AF
Anti-dust Function
Auto Pixel Mapping
MENU → (Shooting) → [Shutter/Silent] → [ Silent Mode Settings] → desired setting.
1
325
TP1001651452
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
326
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Shutter Type
You can set whether to shoot with a mechanical shutter or an electronic shutter.
Menu item details
Mechanical Shutter:
Shoot with the mechanical shutter only.
Electronic Shutter:
Shoot with the electronic shutter only.
Hint
In the following situations, set the [Shutter Type] to [Electronic Shutter].
When shooting with a high-speed shutter in a bright environment such as outside in bright sunlight, the beach, or snowy
mountains.
Note
In rare cases, the shutter sound may be produced when the power is turned off even if the [Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic
Shutter]. However, this is not a malfunction.
[Shutter Type] cannot be selected when the shooting mode is a mode other than P/A/S/M.
When [Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic Shutter], the following functions are not available:
Flash shooting
Long Exposure NR
BULB shooting
Anti-flicker Shoot.
TP1001655944
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [Shutter/Silent] → [Shutter Type] → desired setting.
1
327
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Release w/o Lens (still image/movie)
Sets whether or not the shutter can be released when no lens is attached.
Menu item details
Enable:
Releases the shutter when no lens is attached. Select [Enable] when attaching the product to an astronomical telescope,
etc.
Disable:
Does not release the shutter when a lens is not attached.
Note
Correct metering cannot be achieved when you use lenses that do not provide a lens contact, such as the lens of an astronomical
telescope. In such cases, adjust the exposure manually by checking it on the recorded image.
TP1001619246
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [Shutter/Silent] → [ Release w/o Lens] → desired setting.
1
328
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Release w/o Card
Sets whether the shutter can be released when no memory card has been inserted.
Menu item details
Enable:
Releases the shutter even if no memory card has been inserted.
Disable:
Does not release the shutter when no memory card has been inserted.
Note
When no memory card has been inserted, the images shot will not be saved.
The default setting is [Enable]. It is recommended that you select [Disable] prior to actual shooting.
TP1001642655
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [Shutter/Silent] → [Release w/o Card] → desired setting.
1
329
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Anti-flicker Set.
To reduce the impact of flickering from artificial light sources (such as fluorescent or LED light), the camera can time the
shooting of images to moments when flickering will have less of an impact, or you can set the shutter speed more finely
than usual.
This function reduces differences in exposure and color tone between the upper and lower area of an image during
continuous shooting under artificial light sources.
Menu item details
Anti-flicker Shoot. (only when shooting still images):
Detects flickering and reduces its impact when the frequency of the light source is 100 Hz or 120 Hz while shooting still
images. Flicker is detected by pressing the shutter button halfway down. ([On]/[Off])
When [Anti-flicker Shoot.] is set to [On], press the shutter button halfway down and shoot the image after confirming that
(flicker icon) is displayed.
Var. Shutter:
Reduces the differences in brightness between each image by finely adjusting the shutter speed according to the
flickering frequency. ([On]/[Off])
[ Var. Shutter] can only be selected when the camera is in an exposure mode that allows you to manually adjust the
shutter speed (both still images and movies).
When [ Var. Shutter] is set to [On], the shutter-speed denominator is displayed in the decimal format (high-resolution
shutter speed).
For example, if the normal shutter speed is set to 1/250 second, the value will be displayed as 250.6. (The numbers may
differ from the actual ones.)
Set [ Var. Shutter] to [Off] to return to the original display.
Var. Shutter Set.:
Sets the shutter speed when [ Var. Shutter] is set to [On].
Select a shutter speed that reduces the impact of flickering while checking the monitor. Press the center of the control
wheel to automatically set the shutter speed so that the impact of flickering is reduced. The faster you set the shutter
speed, the more likely there is to be a difference between the monitor display before shooting and the recorded image.
Make sure that the impact of flickering is reduced in the recorded image.
Hint
When [Anti-flicker Shoot.] is set to [On], the color tone of the resulting image may vary if you shoot the same scene using a
different shutter speed. In this case, we recommend that you shoot in the [Shutter Priority] or [Manual Exposure] mode with a
fixed shutter speed.
When [Anti-flicker Shoot.] is set to [On], you can also perform anti-flicker shooting by pressing the button to which the [AF On]
function is assigned.
MENU → (Shooting) → [Shutter/Silent] → [Anti-flicker Set.] → desired setting item.
1
330
When [Anti-flicker Shoot.] is set to [On], you can perform anti-flicker shooting by pressing the shutter button halfway down or
pressing the button to which the [AF On] function is assigned, even in the manual focus mode.
When [Anti-flicker Shoot Sel.] or [ Var. Shutter Select] is assigned to a custom key, you can switch the [Anti-flicker Shoot.] or [
Var. Shutter] function on and off by pressing the key.
When [Anti-flicker Tv Scan] is assigned to a custom key, you can make the camera automatically set the shutter speed to reduce
the impact of flickering by pressing the key while shooting.
On the [ Var. Shutter Set.] screen, you can finely adjust the high-resolution shutter speed using the rear dial or control wheel as
in the following example.
250.6 → 253.3 → 256.0 → 258.8*
You can change the high-resolution shutter speed to an integral multiple value using the front dial, as in the following example.
125.3 (2 times) ← 250.6 → 501.3 (1/2 times)
*
When [ Var. Shutter] is set to [On], the high-resolution shutter speed can be finely adjusted on the shooting standby screen. If
you want to change the high-resolution shutter speed to an integral multiple value even on the shooting standby screen, assign
[Shutter Speed(step)] to a custom key or the “My Dial” setting.
When you change the [ Var. Shutter] setting from [On] to [Off], the high-resolution shutter speed switches to the closest value
among normal shutter speeds.
Note
When you set [Anti-flicker Shoot.] to [On], the image quality of the live view is reduced.
When you set [Anti-flicker Shoot.] to [On], the shutter release lag may increase slightly. In the continuous shooting mode, the
shooting speed may slow down or the interval between shots may become irregular.
Even when [Anti-flicker Shoot.] is set to [On], the camera may be unable to detect flickering depending on the light source and
shooting conditions, such as a dark background. Also, even if the camera detects flickering, its impact may not be reduced
sufficiently depending on the light source and the shooting situation. We recommend that you take test shots beforehand.
[Anti-flicker Shoot.] is not available when shooting in the following situations:
While bulb shooting
[Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic Shutter]
Movie shooting mode
The color tone of the shot results may differ depending on the setting of [Anti-flicker Shoot.].
Setting [Anti-flicker Shoot.] to [On] may not decrease flicker on the live-view screen during continuous shooting.
When [ Var. Shutter] is set to [On], the release time lag may be longer.
Even when [ Var. Shutter] is set to [On], depending on the frequency of the light source, you may be unable to set the
appropriate shutter speed and eliminate the impact of flickering. In that case, try the following.
Setting a slower shutter speed
Switching to another shutter type
When you press the shutter button halfway down, flickering may appear temporarily.
High-resolution shutter speed setting values cannot be registered to [Reg. Custom Shoot Set]. The default shutter speed value
will be applied instead.
When [ Var. Shutter] is set to [On], the flash sync speed may be limited to the slower side.
Related Topic
Differences between the [Anti-flicker Shoot.] and [Var. Shutter] functions
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
Changing the function of the dial temporarily (My Dial Settings)
TP1001661332
The numbers may differ from the actual ones.
*
331
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
332
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Differences between the [Anti-flicker Shoot.] and [Var. Shutter] functions
This camera has two different functions to reduce the impact of flickering from artificial light sources (such as fluorescent
or LED light).
The features of each function and the corresponding shooting conditions are as follows.
Hint
The impact of flickering can be reduced by using [Anti-flicker Shoot.] and [ Var. Shutter] together even in a shooting
environment where both 100 Hz/120 Hz flickering and higher-frequency flickering occur. In this case, first set [Anti-flicker Shoot.]
and [ Var. Shutter] to [On], and then adjust the shutter speed with [ Var. Shutter Set.] before shooting images.
Related Topic
Anti-flicker Set.
TP1001661333
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
Features and
shooting
conditions
Anti-flicker Shoot. Var. Shutter
Features
The camera can time the shooting of
images to moments when flickering will
have less of an impact by detecting the
flickering frequency automatically.
You can manually or automatically adjust the
shutter speed while checking the impact of
flickering on the monitor.
When you press the center of the control wheel,
flickering is automatically detected and the
impact of flickering is removed.
Still
images/movies
Still images only Still images/movies
Shutter type Mechanical shutter only
Electronic shutter/mechanical shutter
*1
Exposure mode
Intelligent Auto / P (Program Auto) / A
(Aperture Priority) / S (Shutter Priority) / M
(Manual Exposure)
S (Shutter Priority) / M (Manual
Exposure)/[Flexible Exp. Mode] with the shutter
speed adjusted manually
Types of flickering
detectable
Flickering with a frequency of 100 Hz or
120 Hz (such as fluorescent light) only
*2
Flickering with a frequency of 100 Hz or 120 Hz
(such as fluorescent light) and flickering with a
frequency higher than 100 Hz or 120 Hz (such
as LED light)
The faster you set the shutter speed, the more likely there is to be a difference between the monitor display before shooting and the recorded
image. Make sure that the impact of flickering is reduced in the recorded image.
*1
Even when [Anti-flicker Shoot.] is set to [On], the camera cannot detect flickering frequencies other than 100 Hz or 120 Hz.
*2
333
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
The zoom features available with this product
The zoom feature of the product provides a higher magnification zoom by combining various zoom features. The icon
displayed on the screen changes, according to the selected zoom feature.
When a power zoom lens is mounted:
When a lens other than a power zoom lens is mounted:
Hint
The default setting for the [ Zoom Range] is [Optical zoom only].
The default setting for the [JPEG Image Size]/[HEIF Image Size] is [L]. To use the smart zoom, change [JPEG Image Size]/[HEIF
Image Size] to [M] or [S].
Note
The Smart Zoom, Clear Image Zoom and Digital Zoom functions are not available when shooting in the following situations:
[ File Format] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG]/[RAW & HEIF].
[Rec Frame Rate] is set to [119.88p]/[100p].
Optical zoom range
Zoom images in the zoom range of a lens.
When a power zoom lens is mounted, the zoom bar of the optical zoom range is displayed.
When a lens other than a power zoom lens is mounted, the zoom slider becomes locked at the left end of the zoom
bar while the zoom position is in the optical zoom range. The magnification is displayed as “×1.0.”
1.
Smart Zoom range ( )
Zoom images without causing the original quality to deteriorate by partially cropping an image (only when [JPEG
Image Size]/[HEIF Image Size] is set to [M] or [S]).
2.
Clear Image Zoom range ( )
Zoom images using an image process with less deterioration.
When you set [ Zoom Range] to [Clear Image Zoom] or [Digital Zoom], you can use this zoom function.
3.
Digital Zoom range ( )
You can magnify images using an image process.
When you set [ Zoom Range] to [Digital Zoom], you can use this zoom function.
4.
334
You cannot use the Smart Zoom function with movies.
When you use a zoom function other than the optical zoom in the still image shooting mode, the [ Focus Area] setting is
disabled and the AF operates with priority on and around the center area.
When you use the Smart Zoom, Clear Image Zoom or Digital Zoom function, [ Metering Mode] is locked to [Multi].
When using the Smart Zoom, Clear Image Zoom or Digital Zoom function in the still image shooting mode, the following functions
are not available:
Subject Recognition AF
Face Priority in Multi Metering
Tracking function
Related Topic
Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom
Zoom Range (still image/movie)
About zoom scale
TP1001642503
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
335
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom
When you use a zoom function other than the optical zoom, you can exceed the zoom range of the optical zoom.
Hint
When a power zoom lens is attached, you can use the zoom lever or zoom ring to magnify the image. If you exceed the optical
zoom magnification, you can switch to a zoom function other than the optical zoom with the same operation.
Even when you use [Clear Image Zoom] or [Digital Zoom] with a power zoom lens attached, the optical zoom is used up to the
telephoto end of the lens.
Related Topic
Zoom Range (still image/movie)
The zoom features available with this product
About zoom scale
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
TP1001651440
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [Zoom] → [ Zoom Range] → Select [Clear Image Zoom] or [Digital
Zoom].
1
Zoom using the W/T (zoom) lever.
If you assign [Zoom Operation (T)] or [Zoom Operation (W)] to the desired key in advance by selecting MENU
→ (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.], you can
zoom in and out simply by pressing that key.
2
336
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Zoom Range (still image/movie)
You can select the zoom setting of the product.
Menu item details
Optical zoom only:
Limits the zoom range to the optical zoom. You can use the Smart Zoom function if you set [JPEG Image Size]/[HEIF
Image Size] to [M] or [S].
Clear Image Zoom :
Select this setting to use Clear Image Zoom. Even if the zoom range exceeds the optical zoom, the product magnifies
images using an image process with less deterioration.
Digital Zoom :
When the zoom range of the Clear Image Zoom is exceeded, the product magnifies images to the largest scale.
However, the image quality will deteriorate.
Note
Set [Optical zoom only] if you want to magnify images within the range in which image quality does not deteriorate.
Related Topic
The zoom features available with this product
About zoom scale
TP1001618934
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [Zoom] → [ Zoom Range] → desired setting.
1
337
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Zoom Lever Speed (still image/movie)
Sets the zoom speed when using the W/T (zoom) lever of the camera. The zoom speed can be set in two increments. It
can also be set separately for shooting standby and movie recording.
Menu item details
1st Zoom Spd. :
Sets the zoom speed of the first increment for shooting standby. (1 (Slow) to 8 (Fast))
2nd Zoom Spd. :
Sets the zoom speed of the second increment for shooting standby. (1 (Slow) to 8 (Fast))
1st Zoom Spd. :
Sets the zoom speed of the first level increment for recording. (1 (Slow) to 8 (Fast))
2nd Zoom Spd. :
Sets the zoom speed of the second level increment for recording. (1 (Slow) to 8 (Fast))
Hint
If a high speed is set for shooting standby and a slow speed is set for movie recording, the angle of view can be changed quickly
during shooting standby and slowly during movie recording.
Note
The zoom speed does not change when you operate the zoom ring of the lens or the zoom lever of the power zoom lens.
If you increase the zoom speed, the sound of zoom operations may be recorded.
TP1001661334
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [Zoom] → [ Zoom Lever Speed] → desired setting item.
1
338
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Custom Key Z. Speed (still image/movie)
Sets the zoom speed when using the custom key to which [Zoom Operation (T)] / [Zoom Operation (W)] is assigned. This
can be set separately for shooting standby and movie recording.
Menu item details
Fixed Speed :
Sets the zoom speed during shooting standby. (1 (Slow) to 8 (Fast))
Fixed Speed :
Sets the zoom speed during movie recording. (1 (Slow) to 8 (Fast))
Hint
If a high speed is set for [Fixed Speed ] and a slow speed is set for [Fixed Speed ], the angle of view can be changed
quickly during shooting standby and slowly during movie recording.
Note
The zoom speed does not change when you operate the zoom ring of the lens or the zoom lever of the power zoom lens.
If you increase the zoom speed, the sound of zoom operations may be recorded.
Related Topic
Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom
TP1001639505
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [Zoom] → [ Custom Key Z. Speed] → desired setting item.
1
339
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Remote Zoom Speed (still image/movie)
Sets the zoom speed when performing zoom operations using the remote commander (sold separately) or the remote
shooting function via a smartphone. This can be set separately for shooting standby and movie recording.
Menu item details
Speed Type:
Sets whether or not to lock the zoom speed. ([Variable]/[Fix])
Fixed Speed :
Sets the zoom speed during shooting standby when [ Speed Type] is set to [Fix]. (1 (Slow) to 8 (Fast))
Fixed Speed :
Sets the zoom speed during movie recording when [ Speed Type] is set to [Fix]. (1 (Slow) to 8 (Fast))
Hint
When [ Speed Type] is set to [Variable], pressing the zoom lever on the remote commander will increase the zoom speed
(some remote commanders do not support variable zoom).
If [ Speed Type] is set to [Fix], a high speed is set for [ Fixed Speed ], and a slow speed is set for [ Fixed Speed
], the angle of view can be changed quickly during shooting standby and slowly during movie recording.
Note
If you increase the zoom speed, the sound of zoom operations may be recorded.
TP1001659752
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [Zoom] → [ Remote Zoom Speed] → desired setting item.
1
340
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
About zoom scale
The zoom scale that is used in combination with the zoom of the lens changes according to the selected image size.
When [Aspect Ratio] is [3:2]
Full frame
APS-C size
Related Topic
Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom
The zoom features available with this product
Zoom Range (still image/movie)
TP1001642567
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
JPEG Image Size/HEIF Image Size Optical zoom only (smart zoom) Clear Image Zoom Digital Zoom
L: 33M - Approx. 2× Approx. 4×
M: 14M Approx. 1.5× Approx. 3× Approx. 6.1×
S: 8.2M Approx. 2× Approx. 4× Approx. 8×
JPEG Image Size/HEIF Image Size Optical zoom only (smart zoom) Clear Image Zoom Digital Zoom
M: 14M - Approx. 2× Approx. 4×
S: 8.2M Approx. 1.3× Approx. 2.6× Approx. 5.3×
341
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Zoom Ring Rotate
Assigns zoom in (T) or zoom out (W) functions to the zoom ring rotation direction. Available only with power zoom lenses
that support this function.
Menu item details
Left(W)/Right(T):
Assigns zoom out (W) function to left-handed rotation and zoom-in (T) function to right-handed rotation.
Right(W)/Left(T):
Assigns zoom in (T) function to left-handed rotation and zoom-out (W) function to right-handed rotation.
TP1001651497
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [Zoom Ring Rotate] → desired setting.
1
342
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Using flash (sold separately)
In dark environments, use the flash to light up the subject while shooting. Also use the flash to prevent camera-shake.
For details on the flash, refer to the instruction manual for the flash.
Note
The light of the flash may be blocked if the lens hood is attached and the lower part of a recorded image may be shaded. Remove
the lens hood.
You cannot use the flash when recording movies. (You can use an LED light when using a flash (sold separately) with an LED
light.)
Before attaching/removing an accessory such as a flash to/from the Multi Interface Shoe, turn off the product first. When attaching
an accessory, make sure that the accessory is fixed securely to the product.
Do not use the Multi Interface Shoe with a commercially available flash that applies voltage of 250 V or more or has the reverse
polarity of the camera. Doing so may cause a malfunction.
When shooting with the flash and the zoom is set to W, the shadow of the lens may appear on the screen, depending on the
shooting conditions. If this happens, shoot away from the subject or set the zoom to T and shoot with the flash again.
The corners of a recorded image may be shaded, depending on the lens.
Related Topic
Flash Mode
Wireless Flash
Attach the flash (sold separately) to the product.
1
Shoot after you have turned on the flash and it is fully charged.
(Charging flash icon) blinking: Charging is in progress
(Charging flash icon) lit up: Charging is finished
The available flash modes depend on the shooting mode and function.
2
343
TP1001642599
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
344
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Flash Mode
You can set the flash mode.
Menu item details
Flash Off:
The flash does not operate.
Autoflash:
The flash works in dark environments or when shooting towards bright light.
Fill-flash:
The flash works every time you trigger the shutter.
Slow Sync.:
The flash works every time you trigger the shutter. Slow sync shooting allows you to shoot a clear image of both the
subject and the background by slowing the shutter speed.
Rear Sync.:
The flash works right before the exposure is completed every time you trigger the shutter. Rear sync shooting allows you
to shoot a natural image of the trail of a moving subject such as a moving car or a walking person.
Note
The default setting depends on the shooting mode.
Some [Flash Mode] settings are not available, depending on the shooting mode.
Related Topic
Using flash (sold separately)
TP1001642600
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Flash] → [Flash Mode] → desired setting.
1
345
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Flash Comp.
Adjusts the amount of flash light in a range of –3.0 EV to +3.0 EV. Flash compensation changes the amount of flash light
only. Exposure compensation changes the amount of flash light along with the change of the shutter speed and aperture.
Hint
By assigning [Flash Comp.] to the desired dial in [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [My Dial Settings], you can easily adjust the flash
output when shooting with TTL exposure.
Note
[Flash Comp.] does not work when the shooting mode is set to the following modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
The higher flash effect (+ side) may not be visible due to the limited amount of flash light available, if the subject is outside the
maximum range of the flash. If the subject is very close, the lower flash effect (- side) may not be visible.
If you attach an ND filter to the lens or attach a diffuser or a color filter to the flash, the appropriate exposure may not be achieved
and images may turn out dark. In this case, adjust [Flash Comp.] to the desired value.
Related Topic
Using flash (sold separately)
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
TP1001642601
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Flash] → [Flash Comp.] → desired setting.
Selecting higher values (+ side) makes the flash level higher, and lower values (- side) makes the flash level
lower.
1
346
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Exp.comp.set
Sets whether to apply the exposure compensation value to control both flash light and ambient light, or just ambient light.
Menu item details
Ambient&flash:
Applies the exposure compensation value to control both flash light and ambient light.
Ambient only:
Applies the exposure compensation value to control ambient light only.
Related Topic
Flash Comp.
TP1001619160
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Flash] → [Exp.comp.set] → desired setting.
1
347
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Wireless Flash
There are two methods for wireless flash shooting: light-signal flash shooting that uses the light of the flash attached to
the camera as a signal light, and radio-signal flash shooting that uses wireless communication. To perform radio-signal
flash shooting, use a compatible flash or the Wireless Radio Commander (sold separately). For details on how to set
each method, refer to the instruction manual of the flash or the Wireless Radio Commander.
Menu item details
Off:
Does not use the wireless flash function.
On:
Uses the wireless flash function to make an external flash or flashes emit light at a distance from the camera.
Note
The off-camera flash may emit light after receiving a light signal from a flash used as the controller of another camera. If this
occurs, change the channel of your flash. For details on how to change the channel, refer to the instruction manual for the flash.
Related Topic
External Flash Set.
TP1001651414
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Flash] → [Wireless Flash] → [On].
1
Remove the shoe cap from the camera, and then attach the flash or the Wireless Radio Commander.
When performing light-signal wireless flash shooting, set the attached flash as the controller.
When performing radio-signal wireless flash shooting with a flash attached to the camera, set the attached flash
as the commander.
2
Set up an off-camera flash that is set to wireless mode, or that is attached to the Wireless Radio Receiver
(sold separately).
You can perform a test flashing by assigning the [Wireless Test Flash] function to a custom key using [
Custom Key/Dial Set.], and then pressing that key.
3
348
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Red Eye Reduction
When using the flash, it is fired two or more times before shooting to reduce the red-eye phenomenon.
Menu item details
On:
The flash is always fired to reduce the red-eye phenomenon.
Off:
Does not use Red Eye Reduction.
Note
Red Eye Reduction may not produce the desired effects. It depends on individual differences and conditions, such as distance to
the subject, or whether the subject looks at the pre-strobe or not.
TP1001619206
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Flash] → [Red Eye Reduction] → desired setting.
1
349
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
FEL lock
The flash level is automatically adjusted so that the subject gets the optimum exposure during normal flash shooting. You
can also set the flash level in advance.
FEL: Flash Exposure Level
Hint
By setting [FEL Lock hold], you can hold the setting while the button is pressed down. Also, by setting [FEL Lock/AEL hold] and
[FEL Lock/AEL tggle.], you can shoot images with the AE locked in the following situations.
When [Flash Mode] is set to [Flash Off] or [Autoflash].
When the flash cannot go off.
MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] → desired button, then assign
the [FEL Lock toggle] function to the button.
1
Center the subject on which FEL is to be locked, and adjust the focus.
2
Press the button to which [FEL Lock toggle] is registered, and set the flash amount.
A pre-flash flashes.
The (FEL lock) lights up.
3
Adjust the composition and shoot the image.
When you want to release the FEL lock, press the button to which the [FEL Lock toggle] is registered again.
4
350
When using an external flash that is set to manual flash mode.
Note
The FEL lock cannot be set when a flash is not attached.
If a flash that does not support the FEL lock is attached, an error message is displayed.
When both AE and FEL lock are fixed, (AE Lock/FEL Lock) icon lights up.
Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
TP1001651474
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
351
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
External Flash Set.
You can configure the settings of a flash (sold separately) attached to the camera using the monitor and control wheel of
the camera.
Update the software of your flash to the latest version before using this function.
For details on flash functions, refer to the instruction manual for the flash.
Menu item details
Ext. Flash Firing Set.:
Allows you to configure settings related to the firing of the flash, such as the flash mode, flash level, etc.
Ext. Flash Cust. Set.:
Allows you to configure other flash settings, wireless settings, and flash unit settings.
Hint
If you assign [Ext. Flash Firing Set.] to a desired key using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.], you can open the [Ext. Flash Firing Set.]
screen simply by pressing that key.
You can adjust settings by operating the flash even while you are using [External Flash Set.].
You can also configure the settings for a Wireless Radio Commander (sold separately) attached to the camera.
Note
You can only use [External Flash Set.] to configure the settings of a flash (sold separately) or Wireless Radio Commander (sold
separately) manufactured by Sony and attached to the Multi Interface Shoe of the camera.
You can only use [External Flash Set.] when the flash is attached directly to the camera. You cannot use this function when
shooting with an off-camera flash that is connected using a cable.
Only some of the functions of the attached flash are configurable using [External Flash Set.]. You cannot perform pairing with
other flashes, reset the flash, initialize the flash, etc. via [External Flash Set.].
[External Flash Set.] is unavailable under the following conditions:
When the flash is not attached to the camera
When a flash that does not support [External Flash Set.] is attached
When the Still/Movie switch is set to MOVIE (Movie) or during movie shooting
Also, [External Flash Set.] may be unavailable depending on the state of the flash.
Attach the flash (sold separately) to the Multi Interface Shoe of the camera, and then turn on the camera
and the flash.
1
MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Flash] → [External Flash Set.] → desired setting item.
2
Configure the setting using the control wheel of the camera.
3
352
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Reg. Flash Shooting Set
The shutter speed and ISO sensitivity when shooting with the flash are kept separately from the settings when the flash
is not used. The camera determines whether or not the flash is turned on and automatically switches between settings.
Menu item details
Shutter Speed Range:
Sets [Min] and [Max] for the shutter speed during flash shooting. If you select [Sync Speed], the maximum shutter speed
that can be synced will be automatically set.
This setting is available when the shooting mode is set to P or A.
ISO:
Sets the ISO sensitivity for flash shooting.
This setting is available when the shooting mode is set to P, A, S, or M.
Hint
You can change these settings even when a flash is not attached.
Related Topic
ISO (still image/movie)
TP1001663308
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Exposure/Color) → [Flash] → [Reg. Flash Shooting Set].
1
Select an item to set for flash shooting, and then press the center of the control wheel to select the desired
setting.
2
Add checkmarks to the items that you want to recall when shooting with the flash, and then select [OK].
The setting will be saved.
3
354
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
SteadyShot (still image)
Sets whether or not to use the SteadyShot function.
Menu item details
On:
Uses [ SteadyShot].
Off:
Does not use [ SteadyShot].
Hint
When using a tripod, etc., make sure to turn off the SteadyShot function because this can cause any malfunction when shooting.
If you assign [ SteadyShot Select] to a desired key using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.], you can switch the [ SteadyShot]
function on or off by pressing the key.
When shooting in a dark place, the (SteadyShot) icon may blink. We recommend that you set a faster shutter speed by
decreasing the aperture value or adjusting the ISO sensitivity to a higher value.
Note
If a lens equipped with a SteadyShot switch is attached, the settings can only be changed using that switch on the lens. You
cannot switch the settings using the camera.
Related Topic
SteadyShot (movie)
SteadyShot Adjust. (still image/movie)
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
TP1001619208
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Stabilization] → [ SteadyShot] → desired setting.
1
355
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
SteadyShot (movie)
Sets [ SteadyShot] effect when shooting movies.
Menu item details
Dynamic active:
Provides a more powerful SteadyShot effect than [Active].
Active:
Provides a more powerful SteadyShot effect.
Standard:
Reduces camera shake under stable movie shooting conditions.
Off:
Does not use [ SteadyShot].
Note
When using a tripod, etc., make sure to turn off the SteadyShot function because this can cause any malfunction when shooting.
Slow pan/tilt movements may cause the image to become distorted when shooting handheld. If distortion occurs, try turning off
the SteadyShot function.
If you change the setting for [ SteadyShot], the angle of view will change. [Dynamic active] performs cropping and pixel
enlargement for a SteadyShot effect with less of an impact on the image quality. Therefore, the angle of view becomes even
narrower than with [Active].
The range of ISO sensitivity settings varies depending on the [ SteadyShot] setting.
In the following situations, [Active] or [Dynamic active] cannot be selected:
When [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [119.88p]/[100p]
When you set [ SteadyShot] to [Dynamic active], Clear Image Zoom becomes unavailable.
Related Topic
SteadyShot (still image)
SteadyShot Adjust. (still image/movie)
TP1001629178
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Stabilization] → [ SteadyShot] → desired setting.
1
356
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
SteadyShot Adjust. (still image/movie)
You can shoot with an appropriate SteadyShot setting for the attached lens.
Menu item details
Auto:
Performs the SteadyShot function automatically according to the information obtained from the attached lens.
Manual:
Performs the SteadyShot function according to the focal-length set using [ Focal Length]. (8mm-1000mm)
Note
When the camera cannot obtain focal length information from the lens, the SteadyShot function does not work correctly. Set [
SteadyShot Adjust.] to [Manual] and set [ Focal Length] to match the lens you are using. The currently set SteadyShot
focal length will be displayed along with the (SteadyShot) icon.
When using an SEL16F28 lens (sold separately) with a teleconverter, etc., set [ SteadyShot Adjust.] to [Manual] and set the
focal length.
Related Topic
SteadyShot focal length (still image/movie)
TP1001651463
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Stabilization] → [ SteadyShot Adjust.] → desired setting.
1
357
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
SteadyShot focal length (still image/movie)
Sets the focal length information to be used for the built-in SteadyShot function when [ SteadyShot Adjust.] is set to
[Manual].
Menu item details
8mm - 1000mm:
The SteadyShot function uses the focal length that you set.
Check the focal-length index on the lens and set the focal-length.
Related Topic
SteadyShot Adjust. (still image/movie)
TP1001659778
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Stabilization] → [ Focal Length] → desired setting.
1
358
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Framing Stabilizer
The camera automatically corrects the composition so that the subject being tracked is kept at the same position in the
composition, allowing you to record movies with the position of the subject stable.
Menu item details
On:
[Framing Stabilizer] is enabled.
Selects [On: Center], which locks the composition so that the subject being tracked is in the center, or [On: Manual],
which requires you to manually set the position to which the subject being tracked is locked.
When [On: Manual] is selected, you can lock/unlock the position of the subject by touching (composition lock
icon) on the screen or pressing the center of the control wheel.
Off:
[Framing Stabilizer] is disabled.
Hint
When the subject is moving, keeping the camera aimed at the subject while shooting will make it easier to correct the
composition.
With [Framing Stabilizer], the angle of view becomes narrower because cropping is performed using images in 4K resolution.
To avoid deterioration of the image quality, it is recommended that you set [ File Format] to HD image quality when using
[Framing Stabilizer].
Note
The camera may focus on a subject outside the area cropped with [Framing Stabilizer].
It may not be possible to correct the composition depending on the movement of the subject.
TP1001665615
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Stabilization] → [Framing Stabilizer] → desired setting.
1
359
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Lens Compensation (still image/movie)
Compensates for shading in the corners of the screen or distortion of the screen, or reduces color deviation at the
corners of the screen caused by certain lens characteristics.
Menu item details
Shading Comp.:
Sets whether to automatically compensate for darkness in the corners of the screen. ([Auto]/[Low]/[Off])
Chromatic Aberration Comp.:
Sets whether to automatically reduce color deviation at the corners of the screen. ([Auto]/[Off])
Distortion Comp.:
Sets whether to automatically compensate for distortion of the screen. ([Auto]/[Off])
Breathing Comp. (only when shooting movies):
Sets whether to automatically compensate for the phenomenon in which the angle of view changes according to the
focusing distance during movie recording. ([On]/[Off])
Note
This function is only available when using an automatic compensation compliant lens.
Depending on the lens type, darkness in the corners of the screen may not be corrected with [Shading Comp.], or there may be
no difference in the correction effect between [Auto] and [Low].
Depending on the attached lens, [Distortion Comp.] is fixed to [Auto], and you cannot select [Off].
If [ SteadyShot] is set to [Active] or [Dynamic active] in the movie recording mode, [Distortion Comp.] will become locked to
[Auto].
When [Breathing Comp.] is set to [On], the angle of view and the image quality change slightly.
Depending on the lens, changes in the angle of view may not be fully compensated for even when [Breathing Comp.] is set to
[On].
TP1001657183
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [ Lens Compensation] → desired setting.
1
360
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Long Exposure NR
When you set the shutter speed to 1 second(s) or longer (long exposure shooting), noise reduction is turned on for the
duration that the shutter is open. With the function turned on, the grainy noise typical of long exposures is reduced.
Menu item details
On:
Activates noise reduction for the same duration as the exposure. When noise reduction is in progress, a message
appears and you cannot take another picture. Select this to prioritize the image quality.
Off:
Does not activate noise reduction. Select this to prioritize the timing of shooting.
Hint
The noise reduction process can be canceled by pressing the shutter button during the process. In this case, processing up to the
point of cancellation is applied.
Note
[Long Exposure NR] is unavailable in the following situations:
[Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic Shutter].
[Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Shooting] or [Cont. Bracket].
[Long Exposure NR] cannot be set to [Off] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
TP1001658885
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [Long Exposure NR] → desired setting.
1
361
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
High ISO NR
When shooting with high ISO sensitivity, the product reduces noise that becomes more noticeable when the product
sensitivity is high.
Menu item details
Normal:
Activates high ISO noise reduction normally.
Low:
Activates high ISO noise reduction moderately.
Off:
Does not activate high ISO noise reduction.
Note
[High ISO NR] is fixed to [Normal] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
TP1001642652
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [High ISO NR] → desired setting.
1
362
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Auto Review (still image)
You can check the recorded image on the screen right after the shooting. You can also set the display time for Auto
Review.
Menu item details
10 Sec/5 Sec/2 Sec:
Displays the recorded image on the screen right after shooting for the selected duration of time. If you perform a
magnifying operation during Auto Review, you can check that image using the magnified scale.
Off:
Does not display the Auto Review.
Note
When you use a function that performs image processing, the image before processing may be displayed temporarily, followed by
the image after processing.
Auto Review is displayed in the mode that you have set using DISP (Display Setting) for playback.
Related Topic
Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)
TP1001619214
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Display Option] → [ Auto Review] → desired setting.
1
363
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Remain Shoot Display (still image)
Sets whether or not to display an indicator of the remaining number of still images that can be continuously shot at the
same shooting speed.
Menu item details
Always Display:
Always displays the indicator when shooting still images.
Shoot-Only Display:
While shooting still images, an indicator of the remaining number of still images is displayed. When you press the shutter
button halfway down, an indicator of the remaining number of still images is displayed.
Not Displayed:
Does not display the indicator.
Hint
When the internal camera memory for buffering is full, “SLOW” will be displayed and the continuous shooting speed will decrease.
Related Topic
Cont. Shooting
TP1001655969
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Display Option] → [ Remain Shoot Display] → desired setting.
1
364
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Grid Line Display (still image/movie)
Sets whether the grid line is displayed or not during shooting. The grid line will help you to adjust the composition of
images.
Menu item details
On:
Displays the grid line.
Off:
Does not display the grid line.
Hint
If you assign [Grid Line Display Select] to a desired key using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.], you can
show or hide the grid lines by pressing the assigned key.
Related Topic
Grid Line Type (still image/movie)
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
TP1001642653
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Display] → [ Grid Line Display] → desired setting.
1
365
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Grid Line Type (still image/movie)
Sets the displayed type of grid line. The grid line will help you to adjust the composition of images.
Menu item details
Rule of 3rds Grid:
Place main subjects close to one of the grid lines that divide the image into thirds for a well-balanced composition.
Golden Ratio Grid:
Place main subjects close to one of the grid lines that divide the image in the golden ratio for a well-balanced
composition.
Square Grid:
Square grids make it easier to confirm the horizontal level of your composition. This is useful for assessing the
composition when shooting landscapes, closeups, or when performing camera scanning.
Diag. + Square Grid:
Place a subject on the diagonal line to express an uplifting and powerful feeling.
Hint
If you assign [ Grid Line Type] to the desired key using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.], you can set
the type of grid line by pressing the assigned key.
Related Topic
Grid Line Display (still image/movie)
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
TP1001659780
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Display] → [ Grid Line Type] → desired setting.
1
366
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Live View Display Set.
Sets whether or not to show images altered with effects of the exposure compensation, white balance, [ Creative
Look], etc. on the screen.
Menu item details
Live View Display:
Sets whether to reflect all the shooting settings on the monitor and display the Live View in conditions close to what your
picture will look like once the settings are applied, or to display the Live View without reflecting the settings. ([Setting
Effect ON] / [Setting Effect OFF])
If you select [Setting Effect OFF], you can easily check the composition even when shooting with the image composition
on the Live View display.
Exposure Effect:
Sets whether or not to display the Live View with automatic correction by reflecting the exposure from the flash when
[Live View Display] is set to [Setting Effect ON]. ([Exposure Set. & flash] / [Exposure Setting Only])
When using the flash for shooting a portrait, select [Exposure Setting Only] to manually set the exposure based on the
ambient lighting.
Frame Rate Low Limit:
Sets whether or not to keep the frame rate of the Live View from becoming too slow. ([On] / [Off])
If you select [On], the frame rate of the Live View will not become slow even when shooting in a dark place, but the Live
View display may become dark.
Hint
When you use a third-party flash, such as a studio flash, Live View Display may be dark for some shutter speed settings. When
[Live View Display] is set to [Setting Effect OFF], Live View Display will be displayed brightly, so that you can easily check the
composition.
If you select [Setting Effect OFF], Live View is always displayed with the appropriate brightness even in [Manual Exposure] mode.
When [Setting Effect OFF] is selected, the (VIEW) icon is displayed on the Live View screen.
Note
[Exposure Effect] is effective only when using a flash manufactured by Sony.
[Live View Display] cannot be set to [Setting Effect OFF] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
If you shoot movies in the still image shooting mode, the shooting settings will be reflected in Live View even when [Live View
Display] is set to [Setting Effect OFF].
When [Live View Display] is set to [Setting Effect OFF], the brightness of the shot image will not be the same as that of the
displayed Live View.
TP1001619216
MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Display] → [Live View Display Set.] → desired setting item.
1
367
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
368
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Aperture Preview
While you press and hold the key to which you assigned the [Aperture Preview] function, the aperture is stepped down to
the set aperture value and you can check the blurriness prior to shooting.
Hint
Although you can change the aperture value during the preview, the subject may be defocused if you select a brighter aperture.
We recommend that you adjust the focus again.
Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
Shot. Result Preview
TP1001619227
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] → set the [Aperture Preview]
function to the desired key.
1
When shooting still images, confirm the images by pressing the key to which [Aperture Preview] is
assigned.
2
369
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Shot. Result Preview
While pressing down the key to which [Shot. Result Preview] is assigned, you can check the image preview with the
DRO, shutter speed, aperture and ISO sensitivity settings applied. Check the shooting result preview before shooting.
Hint
The DRO settings, shutter speed, aperture and ISO sensitivity settings you have set are reflected on the image for [Shot. Result
Preview], but some effects cannot be previewed depending on the shooting settings. Even in that case, the settings you have
selected will be applied to the images you shoot.
Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
Aperture Preview
TP1001619228
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] → set the [Shot. Result
Preview] function to the desired key.
1
When shooting still images, confirm the images by pressing the key to which [Shot. Result Preview] is
assigned.
2
370
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Bright Monitoring
Allows you to adjust the composition when shooting in dark environments. By extending the exposure time, you can
check the composition on the viewfinder/monitor even in dark locations such as under the night sky.
Note
During [Bright Monitoring], [Live View Display] will automatically switch to [Setting Effect OFF], and setting values such as
exposure compensation will not be reflected in the live view display. It is recommended that you use [Bright Monitoring] only in
dark locations.
[Bright Monitoring] will be automatically canceled in the following situations.
When the camera is turned off.
When the shooting mode is changed from P/A/S/M to a mode that is not P/A/S/M.
When the focus mode is set to other than manual focus.
While the following functions are being executed, you cannot turn [Bright Monitoring] on/off by pressing the custom key to which
you have assigned [Bright Monitoring].
[Auto Magnifier in MF]
[Focus Magnifier]
When using [Bright Monitoring] in dark locations, the shutter speed may be slower than during normal shooting, and the updating
speed of the monitor display may be slower. Also, because the measured brightness range is expanded, the exposure may
change.
Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
Live View Display Set.
TP1001642654
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] → assign the [Bright
Monitoring] function to the desired key.
1
In a still image shooting mode, press the key to which you assigned the [Bright Monitoring] function, and
then shoot an image.
The brightness due to [Bright Monitoring] will continue after shooting.
To return the monitor brightness to normal, press the key to which you assigned the [Bright Monitoring] function
once again.
2
371
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Emphasized REC Display
Sets whether or not to display a red frame around the edges of the camera’s monitor while recording a movie. You can
easily check whether the camera is in standby or recording, even when you are looking at the camera monitor from an
angle or at a distance.
Menu item details
On:
Displays a red frame to indicate that recording is in progress.
Off:
Does not display a frame to indicate that recording is in progress.
Hint
The frame displayed by this function can also be output to an external monitor connected via HDMI. Set [HDMI Info. Display] to
[On].
Related Topic
HDMI Info. Display
TP1001659783
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Display] → [Emphasized REC Display] → desired setting.
1
372
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Marker Display (still image)
Displays a marker for the specified aspect ratio on the shooting screen when shooting still images.
If you intend to crop the image to the specified aspect ratio after shooting, the aspect marker will allow you to shoot
images along with checking the angle of view after trimming.
Menu item details
Aspect Marker:
Sets whether or not to display the aspect marker. ([On]/[Off])
Aspect Marker Type:
Sets the aspect ratio of the displayed aspect marker. ([1:1]/[5:4]/[4:3]/[16:9]/[1.91:1]/[2.35:1])
Aspect Marker Level:
Sets the color density for the displayed aspect marker. (0 to 15)
Hint
The aspect marker can be displayed simultaneously with grid lines. In this case, the grid lines are displayed according to the
angle of view of the aspect marker.
The aspect marker that was displayed during shooting can be displayed over the played-back image by setting [ Aspect
Marker Disp.] to [On].
With [Crop], you can also trim images according to the aspect marker that was displayed at the time of shooting.
If you want to display the aspect marker vertically, hold the camera vertically when shooting.
Note
The aspect marker can be displayed when shooting still images with an aspect ratio of [3:2].
When the aspect ratio for [ Aspect Marker] is set to [1:1]/[5:4]/[4:3], the position of the aspect marker will be different from that
of [ Aspect Marker] for movie recording even if the same aspect ratio is selected.
The aspect marker is not displayed on devices connected via HDMI.
Related Topic
Aspect Marker Disp. (still image)
Grid Line Display (still image/movie)
Crop
TP1001667080
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [Marker Display] → Select a menu item and set the desired parameter.
1
373
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Marker Display (movie)
While shooting movies, you can set whether or not to display markers on the monitor or the viewfinder, and select the
types of marker.
Menu item details
Marker Display:
Sets whether or not to display markers. ([On] / [Off])
Center Marker:
Sets whether or not to display the center marker in the middle of the shooting screen. ([Off] / [On])
Aspect Marker:
Sets the aspect marker display. ([Off] / [9:16] / [4:5] / [1:1] / [4:3] / [13:9] / [14:9] / [15:9] / [16:9] / [17:9] / [1.66:1] / [1.85:1] /
[1.91:1] / [2:1] / [2.35:1] / [2.39:1])
Safety Zone:
Sets the safety zone display. This becomes the standard range that can be received by a general household TV. ([Off] /
[80%] / [90%])
Guideframe:
Sets whether or not to display the guide frame. You can verify whether the subject is level or perpendicular to the ground.
([Off] / [On])
Hint
You can display several markers at the same time.
Position the subject at the cross point of [Guideframe] to ensure a balanced composition.
Note
The markers are displayed when the Still/Movie switch is set to MOVIE (Movie) or when shooting movies.
You cannot display markers when using [Focus Magnifier].
The markers are displayed on the monitor or viewfinder. (You cannot output the markers.)
TP1001642645
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [Marker Display] → Select a menu item and set the desired parameter.
1
374
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Gamma Display Assist
Movies with S-Log3 gamma are assumed to be processed after shooting in order to make use of the wide dynamic
range. Images with the HLG gamma are assumed to be displayed on HDR-compatible monitors. They are therefore
displayed in low contrast during shooting, and may be difficult to monitor. However, you can use the [Gamma Display
Assist] function to reproduce contrast equivalent to that of normal gamma. In addition, [Gamma Display Assist] can also
be applied when playing back movies on the camera's monitor/viewfinder.
Menu item details
On:
Uses the gamma display assist function.
Off:
Does not use the gamma display assist function.
Hint
If you assign [Gamma Disp. Assist Sel.] to a desired key using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.], [ Custom Key/Dial Set.], or [
Custom Key Setting], you can turn the gamma display assist function on or off by pressing the assigned key.
Note
[Gamma Display Assist] is not applied to movies when displayed on a TV or monitor connected to the camera.
[Gamma Display Assist] is locked to [Off] in the following situations:
When [ Log Shooting] is set to other than [Off]
Related Topic
Picture Profile (still image/movie)
Gamma Disp. Assist Typ.
HLG Still Image
TP1001651475
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Display Option] → [Gamma Display Assist] → desired setting.
1
375
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Gamma Disp. Assist Typ.
Selects the conversion type for [Gamma Display Assist].
Menu item details
Auto:
Displays images with effects as follows according to the gamma or color mode set in [ Picture Profile].
When the gamma is set to [S-Log3]: [S-Log3→709(800%)]
When the gamma is set to [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3], and the color mode is set to [BT.2020]:
[HLG(BT.2020)]
When the gamma is set to [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3], and the color mode is set to [709]: [HLG(709)]
Displays images with an [HLG(BT.2020)] effect when shooting HLG still images with [HLG Still Image] set to [On].
S-Log3→709(800%):
Displays images with an S-Log3 gamma reproducing contrast equivalent to ITU709 (800%).
HLG(BT.2020):
Displays images after adjusting the image quality of the monitor or viewfinder to a quality that is almost the same as
when images are displayed on an [HLG(BT.2020)] compatible monitor.
HLG(709):
Displays images after adjusting the image quality of the monitor or viewfinder to a quality that is almost the same as
when images are displayed on an [HLG(709)] compatible monitor.
Hint
If you assign [Gamma Disp. Assist Typ.] to a desired key using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.], you can
switch the [Gamma Disp. Assist Typ.] setting.
Note
When [Gamma Display Assist] is set to [Auto] during playback, an effect is applied to the image as follows:
When playing back a movie recorded with [HLG], [HLG1], [HLG2], or [HLG3]: Displays the image with an [HLG(BT.2020)] or
[HLG(709)] effect depending on the color mode.
When playing back an HLG still image shot with [HLG Still Image] set to [On]: Displays the image with an [HLG(BT.2020)]
effect.
In other situations, movies are displayed according to the gamma setting and color mode setting in [ Picture Profile].
Related Topic
Gamma Display Assist
Picture Profile (still image/movie)
HDMI Output Settings (movie)
MENU → (Setup) → [Display Option] → [Gamma Disp. Assist Typ.] → desired setting.
1
376
TP1001659784
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
377
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
De-Squeeze Display
During movie recording and playback, movies compressed using an anamorphic lens are displayed on the monitor with
correction (de-squeezing) to the CinemaScope aspect ratio (2.39:1) according to the ratio of the anamorphic lens.
Menu item details
Off:
Does not de-squeeze the displayed image.
1.3x:
Compressed movies are displayed with 1.3-fold horizontal correction.
2.0x:
Compressed movies are displayed with 2.0-fold horizontal correction.
Hint
When [ De-Squeeze Display] is set to [1.3x] or [2.0x], the following settings are locked.
[ Focus Mode]: [Manual Focus]
[Focus Area]: [Wide]
[ SteadyShot]: [Off]
[ Face Priority in Multi Metering]: [Off]
In this case, [ Aspect Marker] under [Marker Display] can only be set to [Off] or [2.39:1].
Note
[ De-Squeeze Display] is only available in the movie recording mode.
Even if [ De-Squeeze Display] is set to [1.3x] or [2.0x], the displayed image will not be de-squeezed in the following cases.
Recording movies by pressing the REC button in the still image shooting mode
Monitoring images when remote shooting
Outputting images to a device connected via HDMI when [RAW Output] under [ HDMI Output Settings] is set to [On]
When [ Log Shooting] under [ Log Shooting Setting] is set to [Off]
Outputting HDMI images when [Rec. Media dur HDMI Output] is set to [Off(HDMI Only)]
Still images that were extracted using [Photo Capture] from movies shot with an anamorphic lens will not be de-squeezed.
TP1002003333
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Display Option] → [ De-Squeeze Display] → desired setting.
Select a setting according to the magnification of the anamorphic lens that you are using.
1
378
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Audio Recording
Sets whether to record sounds when shooting movies. Select [Off] to avoid recording the sounds of the lens and the
camera operating.
This function is not available when [Fixed/Variable Select] is set to [Variable].
Menu item details
On:
Records sound.
Off:
Does not record sound.
Related Topic
Audio Rec Level
TP1001619184
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [Audio Recording] → [Audio Recording] → desired setting.
1
379
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Audio Rec Level
You can adjust the audio recording level of the built-in microphone and input from the microphone terminal while
checking the level meter.
This function is not available when [Fixed/Variable Select] is set to [Variable].
Menu item details
+:
Turns up the audio recording level.
-:
Turns down the audio recording level.
Hint
When you record audio movies with loud volumes, set [Audio Rec Level] to a lower sound level. Doing so enables you to record
more realistic audio. When you record audio movies with lower volumes, set [Audio Rec Level] to a greater sound level to make
the sound easier to hear. Check that the volume is at the appropriate level by monitoring the audio recording volume with the
connected headphones or the volume level meter on the camera.
To reset the audio recording level to the default setting, press the (Delete) button.
Note
Regardless of the [Audio Rec Level] settings, the limiter always operates.
[Audio Rec Level] is available only when the shooting mode is set to movie mode.
The [Audio Rec Level] settings are applied to the internal microphone, the (microphone) terminal input, and the analog audio
input
*
from the Multi Interface Shoe.
TP1001619185
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [Audio Recording] → [Audio Rec Level].
1
Select the desired level using the right/left sides of the control wheel.
2
For some external microphones, [Audio Rec Level] cannot be set even when the audio input is set to analog transfer. In this case, use the function to adjust
the audio recording level of the external microphone.
*
When the audio input to the external microphone is set to digital transfer, [Audio Rec Level] cannot be set.
*
380
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Audio Out Timing
You can set echo cancellation during audio monitoring and prevent undesirable deviations between video and audio.
This function is not available when [Fixed/Variable Select] is set to [Variable].
Menu item details
Live:
Outputs audio without delay. Select this setting when audio deviation is a problem during audio monitoring.
Lip Sync:
Outputs audio and video in sync. Select this setting to prevent undesirable deviations between video and audio.
Note
Using an external microphone may result in a slight delay. For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the
microphone.
Audio is output with the setting for [Lip Sync] during HDMI output.
TP1001619186
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [Audio Recording] → [Audio Out Timing] → desired setting.
1
381
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Wind Noise Reduct.
Sets whether or not to reduce wind noise by cutting the low-range sound of the input audio from the built-in microphone.
This function is not available when [Fixed/Variable Select] is set to [Variable].
Menu item details
Auto:
The camera automatically detects and reduces wind noise.
On:
Always reduces wind noise.
Off:
Does not reduce wind noise.
Note
The sound quality may vary from the normal recording settings when [Wind Noise Reduct.] is set to [On].
When an external microphone (sold separately) is used, [Wind Noise Reduct.] does not function.
When [Wind Noise Reduct.] is set to [Auto] while [Audio Out Timing] is set to [Live], the wind noise reduction effect cannot be
confirmed by audio monitoring during recording. Audio with reduced wind noise is recorded in the movie. Also, when live-
streaming audio using the streaming function, audio with reduced wind noise is streamed.
If you change the [Wind Noise Reduct.] setting while recording a movie, noise may be produced when the setting is changed and
become recorded in the movie.
Related Topic
Audio Out Timing
TP1001619187
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [Audio Recording] → [Wind Noise Reduct.] → desired setting.
1
382
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Shoe Audio Set.
Sets the digital audio transmitted from the XLR handle unit (supplied or sold separately) or a microphone (sold
separately) that supports the digital audio interface, etc. attached to the multi-interface shoe of the camera. You can set
the sampling frequency, the number of quantization bits, and the number of channels.
This function is not available when [Fixed/Variable Select] is set to [Variable].
Menu item details
:
Sets the sampling frequency of audio input to 48 kHz, the number of quantization bits to 24 bits, and the number of
channels to 4.
:
Sets the sampling frequency of audio input to 48 kHz, the number of quantization bits to 24 bits, and the number of
channels to 2.
:
Sets the sampling frequency of audio input to 48 kHz, the number of quantization bits to 16 bits, and the number of
channels to 2.
Hint
The audio level display on the monitor is for 4 channels during 4-channel audio recording.
Note
When an external microphone (sold separately) is connected to the (microphone) terminal of the camera, the audio is
recorded from the external microphone attached to the (microphone) terminal. You cannot set [ Shoe Audio Set.].
If the attached microphone is set to analog transmission, you cannot set [ Shoe Audio Set.].
When the attached microphone does not support 4-channel audio recording, you cannot select [ ] (48khz/24bit
4ch).
When the attached microphone does not support 24-bit audio recording, [ Shoe Audio Set.] becomes locked to [
] (48khz/16bit 2ch).
Audio cannot be recorded correctly in the following situations during movie recording:
When you attach or remove the microphone
When digital transmission is switched to analog transmission or vice versa on the microphone side
Related Topic
4ch Audio Monitoring (movie)
TP1001659785
MENU → (Shooting) → [Audio Recording] → [ Shoe Audio Set.] → desired setting.
1
383
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
384
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Recording audio using the XLR handle unit
The XLR handle unit supplied with this product or sold separately combines a handle and XLR adapter into one unit. By
attaching the handle, you can connect multiple external audio devices to record sound.
The camera is compatible with the digital audio interface of the Multi Interface Shoe. This allows the camera and the XLR
adaptor to communicate with each other through digital signals and provide audio recording with minimum noise
interference.
Switching the audio input to the handle
By switching the audio input from the built-in microphone of the camera to the handle, you can record with the
microphone connected to the handle.
Connecting an external audio device
You can use a microphone (sold separately) or an external audio device, such as an audio mixer, for recording.
Set the HANDLE AUDIO switch to ON.
The built-in microphone of the camera is activated when the HANDLE AUDIO switch is set to OFF.
1.
Connect your desired device to the INPUT1, INPUT2, or INPUT3 jack.
When using either the INPUT1 or INPUT2 jack, connect the device to the INPUT1 jack.
When connecting the device to the INPUT3 jack, proceed to Step 3.
1.
Select an audio source to input.
Depending on the device connected to the INPUT1 or INPUT2 jack, set the INPUT1 (LINE/MIC/MIC+48V) or
INPUT2 (LINE/MIC/MIC+48V) switch as follows:
LINE (standard input level of +4 dBu (0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms)): for an external audio device (e.g. an audio mixer)
MIC: for a dynamic microphone or a microphone with the built-in battery
MIC+48V: for a microphone compatible with +48V power (phantom power)
2.
With the INPUT SELECT switch, select the audio input for recording audio to the channels on the camera.
Select the audio input jack on the XLR adaptor (INPUT1, INPUT2, or INPUT3) through which audio is recorded to
the channels on the camera.
3.
When the device is connected to the INPUT1 or INPUT2 jack, set the standard input level of the microphone.
When the INPUT1 (LINE/MIC/MIC+48V) or INPUT2 (LINE/MIC/MIC+48V) switch is set to either “MIC” or
“MIC+48V,” you can set the standard input level with the ATT (INPUT1) or ATT (INPUT2) switch. Select the level
suitable for the sensitivity of the connected microphone or for the volume level of the input audio.
0dB: Standard input level of -60 dBu
This is suitable for recording with a low-sensitivity microphone while amplifying sounds.
10dB: Standard input level of -50 dBu
This is the recommended input level for an ordinary microphone.
20dB: Standard input level of -40 dBu
This is suitable for recording with a high-sensitivity microphone while keeping the sound volume low.
4.
Adjust the recording volume level.5.
385
Minimizing noise with the low-cut function
Minimize unwanted noises, such as wind noise, air-conditioning noise, and vibration noise, by attenuating low-frequency
components of the audio input from the INPUT1 or INPUT2 jack.
Adjusting the recording volume level
You can adjust the recording volume level of the audio input from the INPUT1, INPUT2, or INPUT3 jack.
Hint
To automatically adjust the recording volume level, set the AUTO/MAN(/LINK) switch to “AUTO.” If the input audio is loud, the
recording volume level will be lowered automatically to avoid audio distortion.
To automatically synchronize the adjustment of the recording volume level of the audio input from the INPUT2 jack to the INPUT1
jack, set the AUTO/MAN/LINK (INPUT2) switch to “LINK.” This synchronization comes in handy for receiving audio through the
INPUT1 and INPUT2 jacks and recording the audio in stereo. Setting the AUTO/MAN (INPUT1) switch to “MAN” and the
AUTO/MAN/LINK (INPUT2) switch to “LINK” disables the AUDIO LEVEL dial for the INPUT2 jack. This allows you to adjust the
recording volume levels of the audio input from both the INPUT1 and INPUT2 jacks simultaneously with the AUDIO LEVEL dial
for the INPUT1 jack.
Selecting the audio input for recording audio to the channels on the camera
With the INPUT SELECT switch, select the audio input jack on the XLR adaptor (INPUT1, INPUT2, or INPUT3) through
which audio is recorded to the channels on the camera.
When only the INPUT1 jack has an external device connected:
Set the switch to “IN1.” Audio input from the INPUT1 jack will be recorded to both the CH1 and CH2 channels on the
camera.
When both the INPUT1 and INPUT2 jacks have an external device connected:
Set the switch to “IN1·IN2.” Audio input from the INPUT1 jack will be recorded to the CH1 channel on the camera, while
audio input from the INPUT2 jack will be recorded to the CH2 channel.
Hint
Change the LOW CUT (INPUT1) or LOW CUT (INPUT2) switch setting.
Select either “300Hz” or “100Hz” depending on the noise to minimize.
1.
Set the AUTO/MAN(/LINK) switch for the audio input jack (INPUT1/INPUT2/INPUT3) to “MAN.”1.
Rotate the AUDIO LEVEL dial to adjust the volume to the appropriate level.
Make sure that the volume is at the appropriate level by monitoring the audio recording volume with the
connected headphones or the volume level meter on the camera.
2.
Audio input jack Recording channel
INPUT1 CH1 and CH2
Audio input jack Recording channel
INPUT1 CH1
INPUT2 CH2
386
When using a stereo microphone with two XLR (3-pin, female-type) plugs, connect the left-channel plug to the INPUT1 jack and
the right-channel plug to the INPUT2 jack, and then set the INPUT SELECT switch to “IN1·IN2.”
In addition, setting the AUTO/MAN/LINK (INPUT2) switch to “LINK” comes in handy during stereo recording, as you can
simultaneously adjust the recording volume levels of the audio input from both the INPUT1 and INPUT2 jacks.
When the INPUT3 jack has an external device connected:
Set the switch to “IN3.” Stereo audio will be received through the INPUT3 jack, and left-channel audio will be recorded to
the CH1 channel on the camera, while right-channel audio will be recorded to the CH2 channel.
When the INPUT1, INPUT2, and INPUT3 jacks all have an external device connected for simultaneous recording
to 4 channels
To record audio input from the INPUT1 jack to the CH1 channel, audio input from the INPUT2 jack to the CH2 channel,
and audio input from the INPUT3 jack to the CH3 and CH4 channels on the camera, set the switch to “IN1·IN2.”
To record audio input from the INPUT3 jack to the CH1 and CH2 channels, audio input from the INPUT1 jack to the CH3
channel, and audio input from the INPUT2 jack to the CH4 channel on the camera, set the switch to “IN3.”
Note
If dust or water droplets are present on the surface of the microphone, successful recording may not be possible. Be sure to clean
the microphone surface before using the handle.
While recording is in progress, operating and handling noises from the camera or lens may be recorded. Touching the handle
while recording is in progress will cause noise to the recording.
If the microphone on the handle is in proximity to a speaker, acoustic feedback may occur. In this case, move the handle away
from the speaker to allow the maximum distance between the microphone and the speaker, or lower the speaker volume.
When a micro USB cable is connected to the handle, using the XLR adaptor may affect its performance.
Use of the XLR adaptor in the vicinity of a radio tower may cause static noise in recordings. Before camera shooting, make sure
that there is no radio tower nearby.
Audio input jack Recording channel
INPUT3 (L) CH1
INPUT3 (R) CH2
Audio input jack Recording channel
INPUT1 CH1
INPUT2 CH2
INPUT3 (L) CH3
INPUT3 (R) CH4
Audio input jack Recording channel
INPUT1 CH3
INPUT2 CH4
INPUT3 (L) CH1
INPUT3 (R) CH2
387
Even when the HANDLE AUDIO switch is set to ON, audio from the XLR adaptor cannot be recorded while an external
microphone is connected to the camera.
You cannot adjust the recording volume level for external audio devices connected to the XLR adaptor.
While recording is in progress, do not change the INPUT1 or INPUT2 switch settings.
Before connecting/disconnecting an external microphone or device to/from the INPUT1 or INPUT2 jack, be sure to set the
INPUT1 (LINE/MIC/MIC+48V) or INPUT2 (LINE/MIC/MIC+48V) switch to a position other than “MIC+48V.” Plugging/unplugging
the cable into/from the external microphone or device while the switch is set to “MIC+48V” may cause loud noise or a malfunction
of the device.
Before attaching/removing a microphone (sold separately) to/from the adaptor, be sure to set the INPUT1 (LINE/MIC/MIC+48V)
switch to a position other than “MIC+48V.” While the switch is set to “MIC+48V,” plugging/unplugging the cable into/from the
microphone may cause a loud noise or a malfunction of the microphone.
If there is noticeable noise coming from the jacks with no device connected to them, set the INPUT1 (LINE/MIC/MIC+48V) or
INPUT2 (LINE/MIC/MIC+48V) switch to “LINE.”
When the INPUT1 (LINE/MIC/MIC+48V) or INPUT2 (LINE/MIC/MIC+48V) switch is set to “LINE,” the standard input level is
locked to +4 dBu. The standard input level will not change according to the ATT switch setting.
TP1001661336
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
388
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Automatic creation of still images from Shot Marks
If you add Shot Marks using a custom key while recording a movie, you can automatically create still images from the
movie frames with Shot Marks after recording. Shot Marks can also be added using the shutter button or touch function
icon.
If you want to create still images while checking the images with Shot Marks after recording a movie, use [ Create Still
Image].
Menu item details
On:
Creates still images from frames with Shot Marks after recording a movie. A message appears while still image creation
is in progress, and you cannot shoot new images during this time.
Off:
Does not create still images from frames with Shot Marks after recording a movie.
About the still images created
You can select either the JPEG or HEIF format for the still images to be created. You can switch the format by
selecting MENU → (Shooting) → [Image Quality/Rec] → [JPEG/HEIF Switch].
The size of the still images created will be the same size as the movie being recorded, according to the [ File
Format] setting.
Created still images are recorded on the memory card in the same slot as the movie, regardless of the [ Recording
Media] setting.
Note
When [ Recording Media] is set to [Simult. Recording], automatically created still images are recorded only on the memory
card in the slot selected for [Play Set of Multi. Media].
When recording a movie across two memory card slots, still images are only created for Shot Marks added to the movie after
switching slots.
Related Topic
Adding Shot Marks with the shutter button (movies)
Touch function icons
Creating still images from Shot Marks
JPEG/HEIF Switch
File Format (movie)
Play Set of Multi. Media
TP1001668879
MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Option] → [ AutoCreateStillImage] → desired setting.
1
389
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
390
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Shot Marks after still image creation (shooting)
Sets whether to automatically delete Shot Marks after automatically creating still images while recording a movie using
the [ AutoCreateStillImage] function.
Menu item details
Auto Delete:
Deletes Shot Marks automatically after creating still images.
Maintain:
Does not delete Shot Marks automatically after creating still images.
Related Topic
Automatic creation of still images from Shot Marks
TP1001668880
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Option]→[ after still img crt] → desired setting.
1
391
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
TC/UB
The time code (TC) and the user bit (UB) information can be recorded as data attached to movies.
Menu item details
Time Code Preset:
Sets the time code.
User Bit Preset:
Sets the user bit.
Time Code Format:
Sets the recording method for the time code. (Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.)
Time Code Run:
Sets the count up format for the time code.
Time Code Make:
Sets the recording format for the time code on the recording medium.
User Bit Time Rec:
Sets whether or not to record the time as a user bit.
How to set the time code (Time Code Preset)
How to reset the time code
How to set the user bit (User Bit Preset)
MENU → (Shooting) → [TC/UB] → Select a menu item and set the desired parameter.
1
MENU → (Shooting) → [TC/UB] → [Time Code Preset].1.
Turn the control wheel and select the first two digits.
The time code can be set between the following range.
When [59.94p] is selected: 00:00:00.00 to 23:59:59.29
2.
When the setting is [23.98p], the last two digits can be set from 00 to 23 in increments of four frames. When the setting is [24.00p], the
last two digits can be set from 00 to 23 in increments of one frame.
When [50p] is selected: 00:00:00.00 to 23:59:59.24
*
Set the other digits following the same procedure as in step 2, then press in the center of the control wheel.3.
MENU → (Shooting) → [TC/UB] → [Time Code Preset].1.
Press the (Delete) button to reset the time code (00:00:00.00).2.
MENU → (Shooting) → [TC/UB] → [User Bit Preset].1.
Turn the control wheel and select the first two digits.2.
Set the other digits following the same procedure as in step 2, then press in the center of the control wheel.3.
392
How to reset the user bit
How to select the recording method for the time code (Time Code Format
*1
)
DF:
Records the time code in Drop Frame
*2
format.
NDF:
Records the time code in Non-Drop Frame format.
The setting is fixed to [-] when recording in 23.98p/24p.
How to select the count up format for the time code (Time Code Run)
Rec Run:
Sets the stepping mode for the time code to advance only while recording. The time code is recorded sequentially from
the last time code of the previous recording.
Free Run:
Sets the stepping mode for the time code to advance anytime, regardless of the camera operation.
The time code may not be recorded sequentially in the following situations even when the time code advances in
[Rec Run] mode.
When the recording format is changed.
When the recording medium is removed.
How to select how the time code is recorded (Time Code Make)
Preset:
Records the newly set time code on the recording medium.
Regenerate:
Reads the last time code for the previous recording from the recording medium and records the new time code
consecutively from the last time code. The time code advances in the [Rec Run] mode regardless of the [Time Code Run]
setting.
The time code is read from the memory card in the slot designated by [ Recording Media] under [ Rec. Media
Settings]. When [ Recording Media] is set to [Simult. Recording], the time code is read from the memory card in Slot
1.
How to match the time code with other devices
Connect to another device such as a camcorder using an adapter cable (sold separately), and then set [Time Code
Make] to [Preset] and [Time Code Run] to [Free Run]. For details, refer to “Matching the time code with other devices.”
Note
MENU → (Shooting) → [TC/UB] → [User Bit Preset].1.
Press the (Delete) button to reset the user bit (00 00 00 00).2.
MENU → (Shooting) → [TC/UB] → [Time Code Format].1.
Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.
*1
The time code is based on 30 frames per second. However, a gap between the actual time and the time code will occur during extended periods
of recording as the frame frequency of the NTSC image signal is approximately 29.97 frames per second. Drop frame corrects this gap to make
the time code and actual time equal. In drop frame, the first 2 frame numbers are removed every minute except for every tenth minute. The time
code without this correction is called non-drop frame.
*2
MENU → (Shooting) → [TC/UB] → [Time Code Run].1.
MENU → (Shooting) → [TC/UB] → [Time Code Make].1.
393
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
TC/UB Disp. Setting
Sets the movie duration, time code (TC), and user bit (UB) display.
Menu item details
Duration:
Displays the duration of the movie.
TC:
Displays the time code.
U-Bit:
Displays the user bit.
Related Topic
TC/UB
TP1001651460
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Display Option] → [TC/UB Disp. Setting] → desired setting.
1
395
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Matching the time code with other devices
You can match the time code with devices equipped with a time code output terminal, such as camcorders, by connecting
the camera and the device. A dedicated adapter cable (sold separately) is required to connect the Multi/Micro USB
terminal of the camera to the BNC output terminal of a commercially available BNC cable.
About the dedicated adapter cable (sold separately)
You can convert the BNC terminal to a Multi Terminal with an adapter cable (sold separately). The availability of the
adapter cable may vary depending on the country or region. Refer to the following support site for inventory confirmation
and purchase. When purchasing, please let us know the product name and product number.
Sony service facility for professional products
https://www.sony.net/SonyInfo/Support/
Product name: Adapter cable VMC-BNCM1 (sold separately)
Product number: A-5051-506-A
Length: 0.2 m (0.6 ft)
Preparation in advance
Set the time code output device (camcorder, etc.) to the mode in which the time code always advances (Free Run or
Clock).
To match the time code
The time code of the camera will synchronize with the time code of the connected device (external lock state), and
“EXT-LK” will appear on the screen.
Once the external lock state has been set for approximately 10 seconds, it will be maintained even after the device on
the time code output side is disconnected.
Hint
Set the Still/Movie switch on the camera to MOVIE (Movie) to set the camera to the movie shooting mode.1.
MENU → (Shooting) → [TC/UB] → Set [Time Code Make] to [Preset] and [Time Code Run] to [Free Run].2.
Connect the BNC output terminal of the BNC cable (A) to the Multi/Micro USB terminal of the camera with the
adapter cable (B).
3.
396
The external lock state of the time code is released when you perform the following operations on the camera.
When you change the setting for [Time Code Make] or [Time Code Run]
When you change the time code with [Time Code Preset]
Note
The adapter cable VMC-BNCM1 (sold separately) can only be used with this camera body. Do not connect it to the Multi Terminal
of other devices.
You cannot use the adapter cable by connecting it to the Micro USB terminal of the XLR handle unit (supplied or sold separately).
When connecting the adapter cable to the camera, be careful not to apply excessive force to the Multi Terminal of the adapter
cable.
When you set the camera to the external lock status, the time code is instantly locked to the external time code, and the same
value as the external time code appears on the time data display. However, do not start recording for a few seconds until the time
code generator stabilizes.
If the frequency of the reference time code and the frame frequency of the camera are not the same, the time code cannot be
locked correctly and the camera will not operate normally. In this case, the time code also cannot be properly locked to the
external time code.
When you match the time code of the camera with that of another device, movies may be off by one frame. If you use the camera
for a long time, the deviation from the reference time code may increase.
Related Topic
TC/UB
TP1001663337
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
397
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Network Streaming (movie)
You can connect the camera to a network, via either a wired or wireless connection, and livestream video and audio from
the camera.
Menu item details
Streaming:
Sets whether to perform network streaming. ([On]/[Off])
Stream Connect Error Display:
Displays error information when the camera is unable to connect to the network or distribution server for network
streaming.
Output Img. Quality Set:
Sets the image quality of video output for network streaming. ([Quality]/[Resolution]/[Frame Rate]/[Bit Rate])
Output Information Display:
Displays information for network streaming.
Movie Rec During Streaming:
Sets whether to enable recording to recording media during network streaming. ([Enable]/[Disable])
Emphasized Output Display:
Sets whether to display a blue frame around the entire monitor during network streaming. ([On]/[Off])
Root Certificate Error:
Normally it is recommended to set [Does Not Connect]. If a certificate error is displayed, update the root certificate and
connect with the correct authentication.
Output image quality settings
Connect the camera and smartphone via Bluetooth.
1
Register information such as the connection destination server and stream key for the distribution service
to be used in Creators' App.
2
On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [Streaming] → [ Network Streaming] → Set [Streaming]
to [On].
[Streaming:Standby] will appear on the camera screen. Then, the camera will switch to the streaming standby state.
You can also select image quality settings, etc. from Creators' App
3
Press the center of the control wheel to start streaming.
[Streaming:Output] will appear on the camera screen.
You can also start streaming from Creators' App.
Press the center again to exit streaming.
4
398
To configure detailed settings for streaming image quality, set [Quality] to [Custom], and set [Resolution], [Frame Rate],
and [Bit Rate], respectively.
The setting range of [Bit Rate] varies depending on the combination of [Resolution] and [Frame Rate].
Hint
If you assign the zoom, network streaming, etc. to the dial or control wheel or register them to the function menu, you can adjust
these values even during network streaming.
The format of the streaming data is as follows.
Video format: MPEG-H HEVC/H.265 or MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
*
Audio format: 48 kHz, 16 bit, 2ch
When using an external microphone, you can minimize deviations between your voice and the movements of your mouth by
connecting the microphone to the (microphone) terminal of the camera.
Note
While network streaming is in progress, the camera is always set to the movie recording mode regardless of the shooting mode
before the start of streaming.
You cannot do the following during network streaming.
Transition to the menu screen
Transition to the playback screen
FTP transfer
Remote shooting
Cloud Connection
Smartphone transfer
The following functions are disabled while network streaming is running.
Power Save Start Time
Monitor Off
When [Resolution] is set to [4K (2160p)] or [2K (1440p)] and [Frame Rate] is set to [59.94p]/[50p], [ Shooting] is locked
to [On] during network streaming, and the output image has an angle of view equivalent to Super 35mm.
When recording to recording media during network streaming, the following restrictions apply to the movie file format and
recording frame rate.
If [Resolution] is set to [4K (2160p)] or [2K (1440p)] and [Frame Rate] is set to [59.94p]/[50p], [ File Format] cannot be set to
4K.
[Rec Frame Rate] is the same as [Frame Rate] for the movie when outputting.
You cannot change the [Movie Rec During Streaming] setting during network streaming.
Resolution Frame Rate Bit rate setting range Bit rate default setting
4K (2160p)
59.94p/50p 38Mbps 38Mbps
29.97p/25p 38Mbps - 13Mbps 34Mbps
2K (1440p)
59.94p/50p 38Mbps - 9Mbps 18Mbps
29.97p/25p 38Mbps - 6Mbps 13Mbps
HD (1080p)
59.94p/50p 27Mbps - 4.5Mbps 9Mbps
29.97p/25p 18Mbps - 3Mbps 6Mbps
HD (720p)
59.94p/50p 13.5Mbps - 2.3Mbps 6Mbps
29.97p/25p 9Mbps - 1.5Mbps 4Mbps
While streaming using RTMP/RTMPS, the video format is MPEG-4 AVC/H.264.
*
399
Depending on the temperature environment, output image quality setting for streaming, setting for movie recording during
streaming, Wi-Fi connection environment, and usage conditions before the start of streaming, the internal temperature of the
camera may rise, and the time available for streaming may become shorter.
Depending on your network environment, the distributed video/audio may be disrupted. In that case, switch to a faster and more
stable network or lower the setting for [Bit Rate].
Depending on your internet connection or network conditions, streaming may be interrupted. In this case, restart streaming.
To ensure secure streaming, the streaming URL must contain “rtmps://”.
RTMP is used for general streaming but does not provide sufficient security, whereas RTMPS uses SSL/TLS to encrypt data and
provide secure streaming.
In SRT, you can select AES-128 or AES-256 as the encryption setting. This will encrypt streaming data and ensure secure
delivery. It is possible to set [Security] to [None] in the wireless LAN settings, but in this case, data will not be encrypted, and
communications will not be secure. When selecting this setting, take into consideration the security requirements of the network
environment and the delivery destination.
The encryption settings of the SRT must match those of the destination. Setting the same encryption method as that used by the
destination ensures proper communication.
When using SRT, the passphrase and shared key are set in Creators' App. The types of characters that can be entered at this
time are letters of the alphabet, numbers, and symbols. It is strongly recommended that the length be at least 16 characters.
About the RTMPS function
The RTMPS function supports a variety of encryption algorithms for secure RTMPS streaming. To ensure compatibility
with a wide range of destination servers, several encryption algorithms are supported, including some that may not
comply with current security best practices. For details, refer to the following website.
https://helpguide.sony.net/di/sftp/v1/h_zz/index.html
TP1001665610
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
400
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
USB Streaming (movie)
You can connect a computer, etc. to the camera and use the camera video and audio for livestreaming or web-
conferencing services. Select MENU → (Setup) → [USB] → [USB Connection Mode] → [Sel. When Connect] or
[USB Streaming] beforehand.
Menu item details
Output Res/Frame Rate:
Sets the resolution and the frame rate of the video. ([4K(2160p) 29.97p]/[4K(2160p)
25p]/[4K(2160p)14.99p]/[4K(2160p)12.5p]/[HD(1080p)59.94p]/[HD(1080p) 50p]/[HD(1080p)29.97p]/[HD(1080p)
25p]/[HD(720p)29.97p]/[HD(720p) 25p])
Movie Rec During Streaming:
Sets whether or not to enable recording of the video to the recording media during streaming. ([Enable]/[Disable])
Hint
If you assign the shutter speed, ISO sensitivity, etc. to the dial or control wheel or register them to the function menu, you can
adjust these values even during USB streaming.
The format of the streaming data is as follows.
Video format: MJPEG
*
or YUV420
Audio format: PCM, 48 kHz, 16 bit, 2 ch
During USB streaming, power is supplied to the camera from the computer. If you want to consume as little computer power as
possible, set [USB Power Supply] to [Off].
When using an external microphone, you can minimize deviations between your voice and the movements of your mouth by
connecting the microphone to the (microphone) terminal of the camera.
MENU → (Network) → [Streaming] → [ USB Streaming] → Set [Output Res/Frame Rate] and [Movie
Rec During Streaming].
1
Connect the camera to a computer or other device with a USB cable (commercially available).
[Streaming:Standby] will appear on the camera screen, and the camera will switch to the streaming standby state.
If [USB Connection Mode] is set to [Sel. When Connect], select [Live Stream(USB Streaming)] on the selection
screen for the USB connection mode.
Use a cable or adapter that matches the terminal on the device to be connected.
2
Start streaming from your livestreaming/web-conferencing service.
[Streaming:Output] will appear on the camera screen.
To exit USB Streaming, disconnect the USB cable.
3
When the resolution is set to HD (720p), only MJPEG is available.
*
401
Note
While USB streaming is in progress, the camera is always set to the movie recording mode regardless of the position of the
Still/Movie switch.
You cannot do the following while USB Streaming is running.
Transition to the playback screen
Network functions (Remote Shooting, FTP transfer, remote operation from a smartphone, Bluetooth function, etc.)
The following functions are disabled while USB Streaming is running.
Picture Profile
Power Save Start Time
Monitor Off
When performing USB streaming with a resolution of 4K (2160p) or HD (1080p), use a computer that is compatible with
SuperSpeed USB 5 Gbps (USB 3.2) and a USB cable (commercially available). Even if the resolution is set to 4K (2160p) or HD
(1080p), the actual output resolution will be HD (720p) when connected via the USB 2.0 standard.
If you change the settings for the following items during USB streaming, the streaming screen may pause temporarily. You may
also need to resume streaming from an application depending on the livestreaming service.
[Output Res/Frame Rate] or [Movie Rec During Streaming] under [ USB Streaming]
[ File Format]
[Auto Framing Settings]
Depending on the temperature environment, streaming output image-quality settings, video recording settings during streaming,
Wi-Fi connection environment, and usage conditions before starting streaming, the internal temperature of the camera may rise,
and the streaming time may be shortened.
Related Topic
USB Connection Mode
TP1001663311
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
402
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Contents of this chapter
The following table of contents lists the features described in this chapter (“Customizing the camera”). From each item
name, you can jump to the page describing the respective functions.
Customization features of the camera
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
Changing the function of the dial temporarily (My Dial Settings)
Registering and recalling camera settings
Camera Set. Memory
Recalling registered shooting settings (Memory recall)
Memory/Recall Media
Registering shooting settings to a custom key (Reg. Custom Shoot Set)
Registering frequently used functions to the function menu
Fn Menu Settings (still image/movie)
Fn Menu Settings (playback)
Registering frequently used functions to My Menu
Add Item
Sort Item
Delete Item
Delete Page
Delete All
Display From My Menu
Separately adjusting the camera settings for still images and movies
Different Set for Still/Mv
Customizing the functions of the ring/dial
Av/Tv Rotate
Function Ring(Lens)
Lock Operation Parts
Using the shutter button when shooting movies
REC w/ Shutter (movie)
Adding Shot Marks with the shutter button (movies)
Monitor/viewfinder settings
Select Finder/Monitor
Monitor Flip Direction
Vertical Display
403
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Customization features of the camera
The camera has various customization features such as registration of functions and shooting settings to custom keys.
You can combine your preferred settings to customize the camera for easier operation.
For details on how to configure the settings and use them, refer to the page for each function.
To assign frequently used functions to buttons ( Custom Key/Dial Set., Custom
Key/Dial Set., and Custom Key Setting)
You can change the functions of the buttons including the Custom Buttons (1 to 7) according to your preferences. It is
recommended that you assign frequently used functions to easily operable buttons so that you can call up the assigned
functions simply by pressing the corresponding button.
To register frequently used functions to the Fn button (Function menu)
If you register functions frequently used in the shooting mode or in the playback mode to the Function menu, you can
display the registered functions on the screen simply by pressing the Fn (Function) button. On the Function menu screen,
you can recall the function you want to use by selecting the icons.
To combine frequently used functions on the menu screen ( My Menu)
If you combine the frequently used items from menus such as the shooting and network menu on the “My Menu” screen,
you can quickly access the desired menu items.
405
To assign different functions to the dial and switch the function of the dial (My Dial
Settings)
You can assign the desired functions to the front/rear dial and the control wheel, and register up to three combinations of
settings to the camera as “My Dial 1 - 3” settings.
Example: [My Dial Settings] screen for models with a control dial
To change the shooting settings quickly according to the scene ( Camera Set.
Memory)
You can register the appropriate shooting settings* for scene to the camera or a memory card, and call up the settings
easily by using the function menu, etc.
To switch shooting settings temporarily while a button is pressed (Reg. Custom Shoot
Set)
You can register shooting settings to buttons in advance and recall them temporarily while the button is pressed.
The setting can be changed instantly, and the original setting is restored when the button is released. This is convenient
when shooting scenes where conditions change easily.
To save the customized camera settings to a memory card (Save/Load Settings)
You can save camera settings* to a memory card using [Save/Load Settings]. This function is useful when you want to
back up the settings, or to import the settings to another camera of the same model, etc.
Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
Fn (function) button
Add Item
Changing the function of the dial temporarily (My Dial Settings)
Camera Set. Memory
Registering shooting settings to a custom key (Reg. Custom Shoot Set)
Save/Load Settings
TP1001658887
You cannot register custom key settings.
*
Some settings cannot be saved on a memory card.
*
406
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
407
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
You can use the custom key function to assign the functions you use most frequently to easily operable buttons and dials.
This lets you skip the process of selecting items from MENU, so you can recall the functions more quickly.
You can separately assign functions to custom keys for the still image shooting mode, movie shooting mode, and
playback mode.
Assignable functions vary depending on the buttons or dials.
You can assign functions to the following buttons and dials.
The following is the procedure for assigning the [Subject Recognition AF] function to the center button.
Custom Button 21.
Custom Button 32.
Custom Button 13.
Front dial4.
Custom Button 75.
Custom Button 66.
MOVIE Button7.
Multi-Slc Center Btn8.
Rear dial9.
Custom Button 510.
Fn Button11.
Control Wheel/Left Button/Right Button/Down Button12.
Center Button13.
Custom Button 414.
MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key/Dial Set.].
If you want to assign a function to recall while shooting movies, select [ Custom Key/Dial Set.]. If you want to
assign a function to recall while playing back images, select [ Custom Key Setting].
You can also select [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] and [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] from MENU → (Setup) →
[Dial Customize].
1
408
To use different functions for the dials/wheel depending on the shooting mode
If you add a check mark to [Separate M mode and other modes.] when assigning functions to the dials/wheel, you can
assign different functions for [Manual Exposure] and the other exposure modes ([Intelligent Auto]/[Program
Auto]/[Aperture Priority]/[Shutter Priority]).
If you add a check mark to [Separate Flexible Exp. and Intelligent Auto.] when assigning functions with [ Custom
Key/Dial Set.], you can assign different functions for [Flexible Exp. Mode] and [Intelligent Auto].
Hint
By pressing a button to which a function can be assigned on the custom key setting screen, you can go to the setting screen for
the pressed button (except for some buttons).
You can also assign shooting functions to the focus hold button on the lens. However, some lenses do not have a focus hold
button.
Related Topic
Changing the function of the dial temporarily (My Dial Settings)
TP1001657173
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
Move to the [Rear] screen using the top/bottom side of the control wheel. Then, select [Center Button] and
press the center of the control wheel.
2
Select [Subject Recognition AF] using the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel, and then press the
center.
If you press the center button while shooting and eyes are detected, [Subject Recognition AF] will activate and
the camera will focus on the eyes. Shoot images while holding down the center button.
3
409
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Changing the function of the dial temporarily (My Dial Settings)
You can assign the desired functions to the front dial, rear dial, and control wheel, and register up to three combinations
of settings as “My Dial” settings. You can quickly recall or switch registered “My Dial” settings by pressing the custom key
you assigned in advance.
Registering functions to “My Dial”
Register the functions that you want to assign to the front dial, the rear dial, and the control wheel as [My Dial 1] through
[My Dial 3].
Assigning a key to recall “My Dial”
Assign a custom key to recall the registered “My Dial” settings.
Menu item details
My Dial 1 during Hold /My Dial 2 during Hold/My Dial 3 during Hold:
While you hold down the key, the functions that you registered in [My Dial Settings] are assigned to the dial/wheel.
My Dial 1→2→3 :
Each time you press the key, the function changes in the following sequence: “Normal function → Function of My Dial 1
→ Function of My Dial 2 → Function of My Dial 3 → Normal function.”
Toggle My Dial 1 /Toggle My Dial 2/Toggle My Dial 3:
The function registered using [My Dial Settings] is maintained even if you do not hold down the key. Press the key again
to return to the normal function.
Shooting while switching “My Dial”
During shooting, you can recall “My Dial” using the custom key, and shoot as you change the shooting setting by turning
the front dial, the rear dial, and the control wheel.
MENU → (Setup) → [Dial Customize] → [My Dial Settings].1.
Select a dial or wheel for (My Dial 1), and press the center of the control wheel.2.
Select the desired function to assign using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel, and then press the
center of the control wheel.
Select “--” (Not set) for a dial or wheel to which you do not want to assign any function.
3.
After you select functions for all of the dials and the wheel in (My Dial 1) by repeating Steps 2 and 3, select [OK].
The settings for (My Dial 1) will be registered.
If you want to register (My Dial 2) and (My Dial 3) as well, follow the same procedure as described above.
4.
MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] →
Select the key that you want to use to recall “My Dial.”
1.
Select the number of the “My Dial” setting that you want to recall or the pattern for switching “My Dial.”2.
410
In the following example, the functions listed below are registered to “My Dial,” and [My Dial 1→2→3] is assigned to the 1
button (Custom button 1).
Note
“My Dial” settings in which every dial/wheel is set to [Not set] are not recalled when you press the custom key. They are also
skipped in [My Dial 1→2→3].
Even if a dial/wheel has been locked using the [Lock Operation Parts] function, it will be unlocked temporarily when “My Dial” is
recalled.
Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
TP1001658266
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
Operation part My Dial 1 My Dial 2 My Dial 3
Control wheel ISO White Balance Not set
Front dial Aperture Creative Look Move AF Frame : Std
Rear dial Shutter Speed Exposure Comp. Move AF Frame : Std
Press the 1 button (Custom button 1).
The functions registered to [My Dial 1] will be assigned to the control wheel, the front dial, and the rear dial.
The icons for the functions registered to [My Dial 1] are displayed in the lower part of the screen.
1.
Turn the control wheel to set the ISO value, turn the front dial to set the aperture value, and turn the rear dial to set
the shutter speed.
2.
Press the 1 button (Custom button 1) again. The functions registered to [My Dial 2] will be assigned to the control
wheel, the front dial, and the rear dial.
3.
Turn the control wheel to set [ White Balance], turn the front dial to set [ Creative Look], and turn the rear dial to
set [ Exposure Comp.].
4.
Press the 1 button (Custom button 1) again, and change the setting values for the functions registered to [My Dial 3].5.
411
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Camera Set. Memory
Allows you to register up to 3 often-used modes or product settings per shooting mode (Still/Movie) to the product and up
to 4 (M1 through M4) to the memory card. You can recall the settings during shooting.
Items that can be registered
You can register various functions for shooting. The items that can actually be registered are displayed on the menu
of the camera.
Aperture (F number)
Shutter speed
To change registered settings
Change the setting to the desired one and re-register the setting to the same mode number.
Note
M1 through M4 can be selected only when a memory card is inserted into the product.
When registering the settings on a memory card, only a memory card that has been selected using [ Memory/Recall Media]
can be used.
Program Shift cannot be registered.
Related Topic
Recalling registered shooting settings (Memory recall)
Memory/Recall Media
TP1001619190
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
Set the product to the setting you want to register.
1
MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Mode] → [ Camera Set. Memory] → desired number.
2
Press the center of the control wheel to confirm.
3
412
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Recalling registered shooting settings (Memory recall)
Allows you to shoot an image after recalling your preferred shooting settings registered with [ Camera Set. Memory].
Hint
If you recall settings registered to the memory card, the settings are recalled from the memory card in the slot specified in [
Memory/Recall Media]. You can confirm the memory card slot by selecting MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Mode] → [
Memory/Recall Media].
Settings registered to a memory card using another camera of the same model name can be recalled with this camera.
Note
If you set [Memory recall] after completing the shooting settings, the registered settings are given priority and the original settings
may become invalid. Check the indicators on the screen before shooting.
Related Topic
Camera Set. Memory
Memory/Recall Media
TP1001619118
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
Set the camera to the desired shooting mode using the Still/Movie switch.
1
Press and hold the Fn (Function) button, select MR1, MR2, or MR3 (Memory recall) using the control wheel,
and then press the center.
You can also select settings (M1 to M4) registered on the memory card.
2
413
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Memory/Recall Media
Selects the memory card slot from which settings are recalled or to which settings are registered for M1 through M4.
Menu item details
Slot 1:
Selects the slot 1.
Slot 2:
Selects the slot 2.
Related Topic
Camera Set. Memory
Recalling registered shooting settings (Memory recall)
TP1001657172
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Mode] → [ Memory/Recall Media] → desired slot.
1
414
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Registering shooting settings to a custom key (Reg. Custom Shoot Set)
You can register shooting settings (such as exposure, focus setting, drive mode, etc.) to a custom key in advance and
temporarily recall them while holding down the key. Simply press the custom key to switch the settings quickly and
release the key to go back to the original settings. This function is useful when recording active scenes such as sports.
Items that can be registered
You can register various functions for shooting. The items that can actually be registered are displayed on the menu
of the camera.
Exposure
Focus setting
Drive mode (other than self-timer)
To recall registered settings
Hint
You can change the settings for [Reg. Custom Shoot Set] after assigning one of the registration numbers to the custom key using
[ Custom Key/Dial Set.].
Note
MENU → (Shooting) → [Shooting Mode] → [Reg. Custom Shoot Set] → Select a registration number
from [Recall Custom hold 1] to [Recall Custom hold 3].
The setting screen for the selected number will be displayed.
1
Using the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel, select the check boxes for the functions that you
want to recall with one of the registration numbers and press the center to check each box.
A (check) mark will be displayed in the boxes for the functions.
To cancel a selection, press the center again.
2
Select the function that you want to adjust using the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel, and
press the center to adjust the function to the desired setting.
Select [Import Current Setting] to register the current settings of the camera to the registration number that you
chose.
3
Select [Register].
4
MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] → Select the desired key and then
select one of the registration numbers from [Recall Custom hold 1] to [Recall Custom hold 3].
1.
On the shooting screen, press the shutter button while holding down the key to which you assigned one of the
registration numbers.
The registered settings are activated while you are holding down the custom key.
2.
415
The registration numbers [Recall Custom hold 1] through [Recall Custom hold 3] are available only when the shooting mode is set
to P/A/S/M.
Depending on the attached lens and the status of the camera when the registered setting recall is executed, the registered
settings may not take effect.
Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
TP1001655978
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
416
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Fn Menu Settings (still image/movie)
The Function menu is a menu of 12 functions that is displayed at the bottom of the screen when you press the Fn
(Function) button.
You can register 12 functions to the Function menus for still image shooting and movie shooting, respectively.
The following is the procedure for changing [Drive Mode] in the still image function menu to [ Grid Line Display].
To change the movie function menu, select a movie function menu item in Step 2.
Hint
When [Touch Operation] is set to [On] and [Shooting Screen] in [Shooting Screen] under [Touch Panel Settings] is set to [On], you
can also open [ Fn Menu Settings] by holding down the icon in the function menu.
Related Topic
Fn (function) button
TP1001659787
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → select [ Fn Menu Settings].
1
Select (Drive Mode) from among the 12 still image function menu items using the top/bottom/left/right
side of the control wheel, and then press the center.
2
Move to the screen showing [ Grid Line Display] using the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel.
Then, select [ Grid Line Display] and press the center of the control wheel.
( Grid Line Display) will be displayed in the former location of (Drive Mode) in the Function menu.
3
417
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Fn Menu Settings (playback)
Sets the function menu for the playback mode. The Function menu is a menu of 12 functions that is displayed at the
bottom of the screen when you press the Fn (Function) button.
The following is the procedure for changing [Send to Smartphone] to [Photo Capture].
Hint
When [Touch Operation] is set to [On] and [Playback Screen] under [Touch Panel Settings] is set to [On], you can also open [
Fn Menu Settings] by holding down the icon in the function menu.
You can also assign the function to display the function menu during playback to a custom key. Assign [ Function Menu] to the
desired key in [ Custom Key Setting]. You can also assign other functions to be activated when you press the Fn button in the
playback mode.
Related Topic
Fn (function) button
TP1001667084
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Fn Menu Settings].
1
Select (Send to Smartphone) from among the 12 function menu items using the top/bottom/left/right
side of the control wheel, and then press the center.
2
Move to the screen showing [Photo Capture] using the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel. Then,
select [Photo Capture] and press the center of the control wheel.
(Photo Capture) will be displayed in the former location of (Send to Smartphone) in the Function
menu.
3
418
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Add Item
You can register the desired menu items to (My Menu) under MENU.
To add menu items from the menu screen
You can add the menu item currently selected on the menu screen to (My Menu).
Hint
You can add up to 42 items to (My Menu).
Note
You cannot add the following items to (My Menu).
Any item under MENU → (Playback)
Related Topic
Sort Item
Delete Item
MENU button
TP1001655980
MENU → (My Menu) → [My Menu Setting] → [Add Item].
1
Select an item that you want to add to (My Menu) using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control
wheel.
2
Select a destination using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel.
3
Press the (Delete) button while the cursor is over the menu item that you want to add to (My Menu).
The context menu will appear.
When [Touch Operation] is set to [On], you can display the context menu by touching and holding the menu item.
1.
Select [Add to My Menu].2.
Select a destination using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel.3.
419
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
420
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Sort Item
You can rearrange the menu items added to (My Menu) under MENU.
Related Topic
Add Item
TP1001655981
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (My Menu) → [My Menu Setting] → [Sort Item].
1
Select an item that you want to move using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel.
2
Select a destination using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel.
3
421
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Delete Item
You can delete menu items added to (My Menu) of MENU.
Hint
To delete all the items on a page, select MENU → (My Menu) → [My Menu Setting] → [Delete Page].
You can delete all the items added to (My Menu) by selecting MENU → (My Menu) → [My Menu Setting] → [Delete All].
Related Topic
Delete Page
Delete All
Add Item
TP1001655982
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (My Menu) → [My Menu Setting] → [Delete Item].
1
Select an item that you want to delete using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel, and then
press the center to delete the selected item.
2
422
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Delete Page
You can delete all the menu items added to a page under (My Menu) in MENU.
Related Topic
Delete All
Add Item
TP1001655983
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (My Menu) → [My Menu Setting] → [Delete Page].
1
Select a page that you want to delete using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel, and then press the
center of the control wheel to delete the items.
2
423
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Display From My Menu
You can set My Menu to appear first when you press the MENU button.
Menu item details
On:
My Menu appears first when you press the MENU button.
Off:
The most recently displayed menu appears when you press the MENU button.
Related Topic
Add Item
MENU button
TP1001658868
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (My Menu) → [My Menu Setting] → [Display From My Menu] → desired setting.
1
425
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Different Set for Still/Mv
For each item in still image shooting and movie recording, you can select whether to use a common setting or separate
settings.
Hint
When you switch from a common setting to separate settings with [Different Set for Still/Mv], the current settings are applied to
both still image shooting and movie recording. However, the custom white balance setting is only applied to still image shooting.
When you switch from separate settings to a common setting with [Different Set for Still/Mv], the setting values of items return to
their initial values. As an exception, the setting values for still image shooting are applied to the aperture value, shutter speed, and
custom white balance settings.
Note
When [Shutter Mode] is set to [Angle], even if [Shutter Speed] is set to a common setting in [Different Set for Still/Mv], the shutter
speeds for still images and movies will operate as different settings.
TP1001659788
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → Select [Different Set for Still/Mv].
The operation guide screen will appear. Select [OK] to display the setting screen.
1
Add check marks to the items that you want to set separately for still image shooting and movie recording,
and then select [OK].
You can set the following items separately for still image shooting and movie recording.
Aperture
Shutter Speed
ISO
Exposure Comp.
Metering Mode
White Balance
Picture Profile
Focus Mode
2
426
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Av/Tv Rotate
Sets the direction of rotation for the front dial, rear dial, or control wheel when changing the aperture value or shutter
speed.
Menu item details
Normal:
Does not change the direction of rotation for the front dial, rear dial, or control wheel.
Reverse:
Reverses the direction of rotation for the front dial, rear dial, or control wheel.
TP1001657174
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Dial Customize] → [Av/Tv Rotate] → desired setting.
1
427
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Function Ring(Lens)
You can choose which of the following functions to assign to the function ring on the lens: power-assisted focusing
(power focus), or switching the angle of view between full frame and APS-C/Super 35 mm (available only with lenses
equipped with a function ring).
For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the lens.
Menu item details
Power Focus:
The focusing position moves toward infinity when you turn the function ring to the right. The focusing position moves to
the closer range when you turn the function ring to the left.
/Full Frame:
The angle of view switches between full frame and APS-C/Super 35 mm when the function ring is turned.
The angle of view switches regardless of the direction in which you turn the function ring.
Related Topic
APS-C S35 (Super 35mm) Shooting (still image/movie)
TP1001658267
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Dial Customize] → [Function Ring(Lens)]→ desired setting.
1
428
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Lock Operation Parts
You can set whether the multi-selector, dials, and wheel can be locked by pressing and holding down the Fn (Function)
button.
Menu item details
Off:
Does not lock the multi-selector, front dial, rear dial, or control wheel even if you press and hold down the Fn (Function)
button.
Multi-Selector Only:
Locks the multi-selector.
Dial + Wheel:
Locks the front dial, rear dial, and control wheel.
All:
Locks the multi-selector, front dial, rear dial, and control wheel.
Hint
You can release the lock by holding the Fn (Function) button down again.
You can lock all buttons, dials, and wheels except the shutter button by pressing and holding the MENU button and the Fn
(Function) button simultaneously for 5 seconds. Press and hold the MENU button and the Fn button simultaneously for 5 seconds
again to release the lock.
Note
If you set [AF Area Registration] to [On], [Lock Operation Parts] will be fixed to [Off].
If [Lock Operation Parts] is set to an item other than [Off], the function to recall the shooting mode by pressing and holding the Fn
button cannot be used.
Related Topic
Registering the current focus area (AF Area Registration)
TP1001655979
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Dial Customize] → [Lock Operation Parts] → desired setting.
To lock the operating parts, hold down the Fn (Function) button until the message “Locked.” appears on the
monitor.
1
429
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
REC w/ Shutter (movie)
You can start or stop recording movies by pressing the shutter button instead of the REC (recording) button.
Menu item details
On:
Enables movie recording using the shutter button when the shooting mode is set to [Movie].
Off:
Disables movie recording using the shutter button.
Hint
When [ REC w/ Shutter] is set to [On], you can use the shutter button to start or stop recording movies on an external
recording/playback device using [REC Control].
Note
When [ REC w/ Shutter] is set to [On], you cannot focus by pressing the shutter button halfway down during movie recording.
Related Topic
Shooting movies
TP1001655973
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ REC w/ Shutter] → desired setting.
1
430
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Adding Shot Marks with the shutter button (movies)
By pressing the shutter button deeply down while recording a movie, you can add a Shot Mark to the movie frame at the
time the shutter button was pressed. The Shot Mark can be used to automatically create a still image from a scene in a
movie.
Menu item details
Add Shot Mark1:
While recording a movie, press the shutter button to add Shot Mark 1 to the movie frame.
Add Shot Mark2:
While recording a movie, press the shutter button to add Shot Mark 2 to the movie frame.
Do not add:
Does not add a Shot Mark by pressing the shutter button.
Note
If [ with Shutter Button] is set to add Shot Marks by pressing the shutter button, focusing will not be performed by
pressing the shutter button halfway down.
When [ REC w/ Shutter] is set to [On], [ with Shutter Button] becomes locked to [Do not add].
Related Topic
Automatic creation of still images from Shot Marks
REC w/ Shutter (movie)
TP1001668881
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ with Shutter Button] → desired setting.
1
431
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Select Finder/Monitor
Sets the method for switching the display between the viewfinder and the monitor.
Menu item details
Auto: 1:
When you look into the viewfinder, the display is switched to the viewfinder automatically.
The eye sensor is deactivated and the display does not switch to the viewfinder depending on whether the monitor is
open or closed and the angle of the monitor. However, when the viewfinder is open, the eye sensor is always activated,
and when you look through the viewfinder, the display automatically switches to the viewfinder screen.
Auto: 2:
When you look into the viewfinder, the display is switched to the viewfinder automatically.
The eye sensor is always activated and the display switches to the viewfinder screen, regardless of whether the monitor
or viewfinder is open or closed or at which angle.
VF(Manual):
The monitor is turned off and the image is displayed only in the viewfinder.
Monitor(Manual):
The viewfinder is turned off and the image is always displayed on the monitor.
Hint
You can assign the [Select Finder/Monitor] function to your preferred key.
[ Custom Key/Dial Set.], [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key Setting] → set [Finder/Monitor Sel.] to the preferred
key. [Finder/Monitor Sel.] is assigned to the 7 button (Custom button 7) in the default settings.
If you want to retain the viewfinder display or the monitor display, set [Select Finder/Monitor] to [VF(Manual)] or [Monitor(Manual)]
beforehand.
You can keep the monitor off when you take your eyes off the viewfinder during recording by setting the monitor display to
[Monitor Off] using the DISP button. Select [DISP (Screen Disp) Set] → [Monitor] and add a check mark to [Monitor Off]
beforehand.
When [Enlarge Menu Scrn] under [Enlarge Screen] is set to anything other than [Off], a message is displayed confirming whether
to set [Select Finder/Monitor] to [Monitor(Manual)]. When using the [Enlarge Screen] function, it is recommended that you set
[Select Finder/Monitor] to [Monitor(Manual)]. This will prevent the eye sensor from activating and switching to the viewfinder
display when you bring your face close to the monitor.
Note
Under strong light sources such as sunlight, the eye sensor may not detect your eye approaching and the display may not switch
to the viewfinder even when [Select Finder/Monitor] is set to [Auto: 1] or [Auto: 2]. In such cases, keep the eye sensor from being
exposed to the light source.
When [Auto: 2] is selected, the eye sensor may be activated and the monitor turned off unintentionally by covering the eye sensor
with the monitor or your hands. In this case, select [Auto: 1] or [Monitor(Manual)].
If you cover the eye sensor with your body or hand while the viewfinder is open and [Select Finder/Monitor] is set to [Auto: 1], the
eye sensor may become activated, and the monitor may be turned off unintentionally. In this case, set [Select Finder/Monitor] to
[Monitor(Manual)].
MENU → (Setup) → [Finder/Monitor] → [Select Finder/Monitor] → desired setting.
1
432
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Monitor Flip Direction
The direction of image and menu screen displays can be inverted according to how the monitor is opened and the
orientation of the monitor.
Menu item details
Auto:
Inverts the direction of the display of the monitor by detecting how the monitor is opened and the orientation of the
monitor.
Mirror Flip:
Flips the monitor display around the shorter edge.
180 Degree Flip:
Rotates the monitor display 180 degrees.
No Flip:
Does not invert the display of the monitor.
Hint
By repeatedly pressing the key to which the [Switch Monitor Flip Disp] function is assigned, you can switch the setting in the order
of [Mirror Flip] → [180 Degree Flip] → [No Flip] → [Mirror Flip]. When [Monitor Flip Direction] is set to [Auto], the display method is
temporarily switched while the setting value remains [Auto].
Note
Even if [Monitor Flip Direction] is set to [Mirror Flip], the direction of the monitor display during playback will not be inverted.
The setting for [Monitor Flip Direction] is not applied to the viewfinder display.
TP1001663312
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Finder/Monitor] → [Monitor Flip Direction] → desired setting.
1
434
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Vertical Display
Sets whether or not to automatically rotate the information display when you hold the camera vertically. This setting
applies to both the monitor and the viewfinder.
Menu item details
On:
Rotates the information display according to the camera orientation.
Off:
Does not rotate the information display regardless of the camera orientation.
About the vertical information display
During vertical display, the same information is provided as on the horizontal shooting screen, and it is arranged to match
the orientation of the monitor.
Monitor
Viewfinder
About the controls during vertical display
During vertical display, the direction of the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel and the touch operations are also
rotated to match the orientation of the monitor so that intuitive operation is possible.
The functions assigned to the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] or [
Custom Key/Dial Set.] will not rotate during vertical display.
Hint
MENU → (Setup) → [Finder/Monitor] → [Vertical Display] → desired setting.
1
435
You can set the information to be displayed on the screen by selecting MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [DISP
(Screen Disp) Set], and the display mode can be switched by pressing the DISP (Display Setting) button.
During vertical display in the movie recording mode, information other than the movie recording status and recording time will be
hidden after a certain period of time if the screen display mode is set to the following and [Exposure: TimeOut] is set.
[Monitor]: [No Disp. Info.]
[Finder]: [No Disp. Info.] / [Histogram]/[Level]
During vertical display, the touch function icons displayed on the left and right sides of the screen will also be arranged to match
the screen orientation.
Note
The orientation of the camera cannot be detected when the lens is facing up or down.
Related Topic
DISP (Screen Disp) Set (Monitor/Finder)
DISP (Display Setting) button
TP1002003334
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
436
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
DISP (Screen Disp) Set (Monitor/Finder)
Allows you to set the screen display modes that can be selected using DISP (Display Setting) in shooting mode.
Menu item details
Display All Info. :
Shows recording information.
No Disp. Info. :
Does not show recording information.
You can set whether to always display the exposure information or to hide exposure information after a certain period of
time has elapsed from operation of the shutter button, etc. ([Exposure: On]/[Exposure: TimeOut])
Histogram :
Displays the luminance distribution graphically.
In the [Finder] settings, you can set whether to always display exposure information or to hide exposure information after
a certain period of time has elapsed from the last operation of the shutter button, etc. ([Exposure: On] / [Exposure:
TimeOut])
Level :
Indicates whether the product is level in both the front-back (A) and horizontal (B) directions. When the product is level in
either direction, the indicator turns to green. (The level does not work when the lens is facing right up or right down.)
In the [Finder] settings, you can set whether to always display exposure information or to hide exposure information after
a certain period of time has elapsed from the last operation of the shutter button, etc. ([Exposure: On] / [Exposure:
TimeOut])
For viewfinder*:
Displays only shooting information on the monitor, not the subject. This setting is a display setting for shooting with the
viewfinder.
Monitor Off*:
MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [DISP (Screen Disp) Set] → [Monitor] or [Finder] →
desired setting → [Enter].
The items marked with (check) are available.
1
437
Always turns the monitor off when shooting images. You can use the monitor when playing back images or operating
MENU. This setting is a display setting for shooting with the viewfinder.
Note
If you tilt the product forward or backward by a large degree, the level error will be great.
The product may have a margin of error of almost ±1° even when the inclination is corrected by the level.
Related Topic
DISP (Display Setting) button
TP1001642604
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
These screen modes are available only in the setting for [Monitor].
*
438
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Home (Lower Left)
Select the setting item you want to display in the bottom left of the home screen.
Menu item details
ND Filter:
The setting value for [ND Filter] is displayed in the bottom left of the home screen.
Aperture:
The aperture setting value is displayed in the bottom left of the home screen.
Related Topic
HOME (Home) button
TP1002003335
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [Home (Lower Left)] → desired setting.
1
439
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Contents of this chapter
The following table of contents lists the features described in this chapter (“Viewing”). From each item name, you can
jump to the page describing the respective functions.
Viewing images
Play Set of Multi. Media
Disp Set of Multi Media
Playing back still images
Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)
Enlarge Initial Mag.
Enlarge Initial Position
Rotating recorded images automatically (Display Rotation)
Playing back movies
Playback/Monitor. Vol.
4ch Audio Monitoring (movie)
Playing back images using slideshow (Slide Show)
Cont. Play for Interval
Play Speed for Interval
Changing how images are displayed
Playing back images on the image index screen (Image Index)
Playback Filter Condition
Image Order
Display as Group
Focus Frame Display (playback)
Aspect Marker Disp. (still image)
Disp Specified Time Img.
Setting the method for jumping between images (Image Jump Setting)
Protecting recorded images (Protect)
Adding information to images
Rating
Rating Set(Custom Key)
Clip Flag
Rotating an image (Rotate)
Crop
Extracting still images from a movie
Photo Capture
Creating still images from Shot Marks
Shot Marks after still image creation (playback)
JPEG/HEIF Switch (Photo Capture / Creating still images from Shot Marks)
440
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Play Set of Multi. Media
Sets the memory card slot to play back when memory cards are inserted into both Slot 1 and Slot 2.
Menu item details
Slot 1:
Selects Slot 1.
Slot 2:
Selects Slot 2.
Hint
When only one memory card is inserted into the camera, the playback target is automatically set to the slot into which the
memory card is inserted.
If [Disp Set of Multi Media] is set to [All Slots], the playback target will be the memory cards in all slots. To play back only the
memory card in the slot set in [Play Set of Multi. Media], set [Disp Set of Multi Media ] to [Follow PB Settings].
Related Topic
Disp Set of Multi Media
TP1001667088
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Playback) → [Playback Target] → [Play Set of Multi. Media] → desired setting.
1
442
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Disp Set of Multi Media
Sets whether to display images from all memory card slots or from the slot selected in [Play Set of Multi. Media] when
memory cards are inserted into both Slot 1 and Slot 2.
Menu item details
All Slots:
Displays images on memory cards in all slots.
Follow PB Settings:
Displays images on the memory card in the slot selected in [Play Set of Multi. Media].
Related Topic
Play Set of Multi. Media
TP1001668885
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Playback) → [Playback Target] → [Disp Set of Multi Media] → desired setting.
1
443
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Playing back still images
Plays back the recorded images.
Hint
The product creates an image database file on a memory card to record and play back images. An image that is not registered in
the image database file may not be played back correctly. To play back images shot using other devices, register those images to
the image database file using MENU → (Shooting) → [Media] → [ Recover Image DB].
If you play back the images right after continuous shooting, the monitor may display an icon indicating that data is being
written/the number of images left to write. During writing, some functions are not available.
You can move to the previous/next image or group by pressing the left/right side of the control wheel even while an image in the
group is being played back. In this case, the icon that indicates moving across a group is displayed.
When [ Focus Frame Display] is set to [On], the focus frame at the time of shooting is displayed over played-back images.
The focus frame that the camera used to focus during shooting is displayed in green. Even if multiple focus frames are displayed
during shooting, only the one on which the camera actually tried to focus will be displayed during playback.
When [ Aspect Marker Disp.] is set to [On], the aspect marker that was displayed during shooting can also be displayed over
the played-back image.
Note
If the camera is connected to a TV or monitor, etc. via an HDMI cable, the playback screen will not be displayed in the viewfinder.
Related Topic
Play Set of Multi. Media
Disp Set of Multi Media
Recover Image DB (still image/movie)
Display as Group
Select MENU → (Playback) → [Playback Target] → [Play Set of Multi. Media] to choose which memory
card slot to play back.
When only one memory card is inserted into the camera, it is not necessary to set [Play Set of Multi. Media].
If [Disp Set of Multi Media] is set to [All Slots], the playback target will be the memory cards in all slots.
1
Press the (Playback) button to switch to the playback mode.
You can touch (Playback) on the screen to switch to the playback mode.
If the touch function icons are not displayed, swipe left or right on the monitor to display them.
For details, refer to “Touch function icons.”
2
Select the image with the control wheel.
When [Display as Group] is set to [On], images shot with continuous shooting or interval shooting are displayed
as one group. To play back the images in the group, press the center of the control wheel.
3
444
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)
Enlarges the still image being played back. Use this function to check the focus of the image, etc.
Hint
You can also enlarge an image being played back using MENU.
You can change the initial magnification and initial position of enlarged images by selecting MENU → (Playback) →
[Magnification] → [ Enlarge Initial Mag.] or [ Enlarge Initial Position].
You can also enlarge the image by touching the monitor. Drag the monitor to move the enlarged position. Set [Touch Operation] to
[On] and [Playback Screen] under [Touch Panel Settings] to [On] beforehand.
Related Topic
Enlarge Initial Mag.
Enlarge Initial Position
Touch Operation
Touch Panel Settings
TP1001642688
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
Display the image you want to enlarge, and slide the W/T (zoom) lever to the T side.
Slide the W/T (zoom) lever to the W side to adjust the zoom scale.
By rotating the front/rear dial, you can switch to the previous or next image while keeping the same zoom scale.
The view will zoom in on the part of the image where the camera focused during shooting. If the focus location
information cannot be obtained, the camera will zoom in on the center of the image.
1
Select the portion you want to enlarge by pressing the top/bottom/right/left sides of the control wheel.
2
Press the MENU button or the center of the control wheel to exit the playback zoom.
3
446
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Enlarge Initial Mag.
Sets the initial magnification scale when playing back enlarged images.
Menu item details
Standard. Mag.:
Displays an image with the standard magnification.
Previous Mag.:
Displays an image with the previous magnification. The previous magnification is stored even after the enlarged display
screen is closed.
Related Topic
Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)
Enlarge Initial Position
TP1001651420
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Playback) → [Magnification] → [ Enlarge Initial Mag.] → desired setting.
1
447
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Enlarge Initial Position
Sets the initial position when enlarging an image in playback.
Menu item details
Focused Position:
Enlarges the image from the point of focus during shooting.
Center:
Enlarges the image from the center of the screen.
Related Topic
Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)
Enlarge Initial Mag.
TP1001651409
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Playback) → [Magnification] → [ Enlarge Initial Position] → desired setting.
1
448
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Rotating recorded images automatically (Display Rotation)
Selects the orientation when playing back recorded images.
Menu item details
Auto:
When you rotate the camera, the camera detects the vertical and horizontal directions, and displays the image being
played back according to the orientation.
Manual:
Images shot vertically are displayed vertically. If you have set the image orientation using the [Rotate] function, the image
will be displayed accordingly.
Off:
Images are always displayed horizontally.
Note
Movies shot vertically are played back horizontally during movie playback.
Related Topic
Rotating an image (Rotate)
TP1001619239
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Playback) → [Playback Option] → [Display Rotation] → desired setting.
1
449
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Playing back movies
Plays back the recorded movies.
Available operations during movie playback
You can perform slow playback and sound volume adjustment, etc. by pressing the down side of the control wheel.
: Playback
: Pause
: Fast-forward
: Fast-rewind
: Forward slow playback
: Reverse slow playback
: Next movie file
: Previous movie file
: Displays the next frame
: Displays the previous frame
: Photo Capture
: Sound volume adjustment
: Closes the operation panel
Hint
The product creates an image database file on a memory card to record and play back images. An image that is not registered in
the image database file may not be played back correctly. To play back images shot using other devices, register those images to
the image database file using MENU → (Shooting) → [Media] → [ Recover Image DB].
“Forward slow playback,” “Reverse slow playback,” “Displays the next frame” and “Displays the previous frame” are available
during pause.
Movie files recorded using other products may not be playable on this camera.
For movies with Shot Marks, the positions of the Shot Marks are displayed on the playback bar during movie playback. In
addition, the Shot Mark icon is displayed on the screen when a scene to which a Shot Mark was added is played back.
You can jump to the positions of Shot Marks by turning the rear dial while paused.
Note
Even if you shoot the movie vertically, the movie will be displayed horizontally on the screen or the finder of the camera.
Select the slot of the memory card to be played back from MENU → (Playback) → [Playback Target] →
[Play Set of Multi. Media].
When only one memory card is inserted into the camera, it is not necessary to set [Play Set of Multi. Media].
If [Disp Set of Multi Media] is set to [All Slots], the playback target will be the memory cards in all slots.
1
Press the (playback) button to switch to playback mode.
2
Select the movie to be played back using the control wheel and press the center of the control wheel to
start playback.
3
450
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Playback/Monitor. Vol.
Sets the sound volume for movie playback.
Adjusting the volume during playback
Press the bottom side of the control wheel while playing back movies to display the operation panel, then adjust the
volume. You can adjust the volume while listening to the actual sound.
TP1001619249
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Sound Option] → [Playback/Monitor. Vol.] → desired setting.
1
452
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
4ch Audio Monitoring (movie)
Sets the audio to be monitored by the device connected to the (headphone) terminal of the camera when you record
movie audio in 4 channels or when playing back a movie recorded in 4 channels.
Menu item details
CH1/CH2:
Outputs audio from channel 1 to the L (left) side and from channel 2 to the R (right) side.
CH3/CH4:
Outputs audio from channel 3 to the L (left) side and from channel 4 to the R (right) side.
CH1+3/CH2+4:
Outputs the mixed audio of channel 1 and channel 3 to the L (left) side and the mixed audio of channel 2 and channel 4
to the R (right) side.
CH1/CH1:
Outputs audio from channel 1 to the L (left) side and R (right) side.
CH2/CH2:
Outputs audio from channel 2 to the L (left) side and R (right) side.
Note
The [ 4ch Audio Monitoring] settings are enabled during movie recording when the XLR handle unit (supplied or sold
separately) or an accessory for 4-channel audio recording is attached to the Multi Interface Shoe of the camera and the camera is
set to record 4-channel audio.
The camera cannot output audio in 4 channels to the device connected to the (headphone) terminal of the camera.
When outputting audio through the speakers of the camera, the channels will also change depending on the [ 4ch Audio
Monitoring] setting.
Related Topic
Shoe Audio Set.
TP1001659790
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Sound Option] → [ 4ch Audio Monitoring] → desired setting.
1
453
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Playing back images using slideshow (Slide Show)
Automatically plays back images continuously.
Menu item details
Repeat:
Select [On], in which images are played back in a continuous loop, or [Off], in which the product exits the slideshow when
all the images are played back once.
Interval:
Select the display interval for images from among [1 Sec], [3 Sec], [5 Sec], [10 Sec] or [30 Sec].
To quit the slideshow in the middle of playback
Press the MENU button to quit the slideshow. You cannot pause the slideshow.
Hint
During playback, you can display the next/previous image by pressing the right/left side of the control wheel.
TP1001619240
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Playback) → [Viewing] → [Slide Show] → desired setting.
1
Select [Enter].
2
454
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Cont. Play for Interval
Continuously plays back images shot using interval shooting.
You can create movies from still images produced by interval shooting using the computer software Imaging Edge
Desktop(Viewer). You cannot create movies from the still images on the camera.
Hint
On the playback screen, you can start continuous playback by pressing the down button while displaying an image in the group.
You can resume play or pause by pressing the down button during playback.
You can change the playback speed by turning the front/rear dial or the control wheel during playback. You can also change the
playback speed by selecting MENU → (Playback) → [Viewing] → [Play Speed for Interval].
You can continuously play back images shot with continuous shooting as well.
Related Topic
Interval Shoot Func.
Play Speed for Interval
Introduction to desktop application (Imaging Edge Desktop/Catalyst)
TP1001658264
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Playback) → [Viewing] → [Cont. Play for Interval].
1
Select the image group that you want to play back, and then press the center of the control wheel.
2
455
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Play Speed for Interval
Sets the playback speed for still images during [Cont. Play for Interval].
Hint
You can also change the playback speed by turning the front/rear dial or the control wheel during [Cont. Play for Interval].
Related Topic
Cont. Play for Interval
TP1001658265
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Playback) → [Viewing] → [Play Speed for Interval] → desired setting.
1
456
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Playing back images on the image index screen (Image Index)
You can display multiple images at the same time in playback mode.
To change the number of images to be displayed
MENU → (Playback) → [Playback Option] → [Image Index] → desired setting.
Menu item details
9 Images/30 Images
To return to single-image playback
Select the desired image and press the center of the control wheel.
To display a desired image quickly
Select the bar on the left of the image index screen using the control wheel, then press the top/bottom sides of the
control wheel. While the bar is being selected, you can display the calendar screen or folder selection screen by pressing
the center.
TP1001619231
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
Slide the W/T (zoom) lever to the W side while the image is being played back.
1
Select the image by pressing the top/bottom/right/left sides of the control wheel or turning the control
wheel.
2
457
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Playback Filter Condition
You can narrow down the images to be played back using multiple filtering conditions.
Menu item details
Date:
Filters the playback target by date.
Folder :
Filters the playback target by folder.
Still Images/Movies :
Sets the playback target to still images only or to movies only. ([Still Image]/[Movie])
Rating:
Filters the playback target by rating. ([ ] - [ ]/[ ])
Protect:
Filters the playback target by the presence of protection. ([Yes]/[No])
Shot Mark:
Filters the playback target by the presence of shot marks. ([Yes]/[Shot Mark1 Only]/[Shot Mark2 Only]/[No])
FTP Transfer Status:
Filters the playback target by transferring status to an FTP server. ([Non-transferred]/[Failed Transfer Img.]/[Success.
Trans. Img.])
Smartphone Trans State :
Filters the playback target by transferring status to a smartphone. ([Non-transferred]/[Success. Trans. Img.])
File Format :
Filters the playback target by the file format when [Still Images/Movies] is set to [Still Image].
([RAW]/[JPEG]/[HEIF]/[RAW & JPEG]/[RAW & HEIF]/[RAW/RAW & JPEG]/[RAW/RAW & HEIF]/[Images Incl RAW])
File Format:
Filters the playback target by the recorded format when [Still Images/Movies] is set to [Movie]. ([XAVC HS 4K]/[XAVC S
4K]/[XAVC S HD]/[XAVC S-I 4K]/[XAVC S-I HD]/[XAVC S-I DCI 4K])
Hint
The white lines at the top and bottom of the playback screen indicate that the playback target is being filtered.
When you use the filtering condition [Date] or [Folder], add check marks to the dates/folders to set as the playback target. You
can also specify the range using the Fn (Function) button.
When you perform the following functions while the playback target is filtered, the function is applied only to the filtered images.
Delete
Protect
Rating
Copy
Transferring to a smartphone
FTP Transfer
Note
Filtering of the playback target is canceled by the following operations.
MENU → (Playback) → [Playback Target] → [Playback Filter Condition] → Set the desired conditions,
and then select [Execute Filter].
1
458
Shooting a still image or movie
Crop
Photo Capture
Create Still Image
Turning the camera off
Inserting/removing a memory card
TP1001667089
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
459
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Image Order
Sets the order in which to display images on the playback screen.
Menu item details
Date Order:
Displays images in order of date.
Folder Order:
Displays images in order of folder.
Hint
When [Folder Order] is selected, the folder for movies is displayed on top.
TP1001667090
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Playback) → [Playback Target] → [Image Order] → desired setting.
1
460
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Display as Group
Sets whether or not to display continuously shot images or images shot using interval shooting, etc. as a group.
Menu item details
On:
Displays images as a group.
To play back the images in a group, select the group and press the center of the control wheel.
Off:
Does not display images as a group.
Hint
The following images are grouped.
Images shot with [Drive Mode] set to [Cont. Shooting] (One sequence of images shot continuously by holding down the shutter
button during continuous shooting becomes one group.)
Images shot with [Drive Mode] set to [Self-timer(Cont)]/[WB bracket]/[DRO Bracket] (Multiple images recorded in one shot
become one group.)
Images shot with [Interval Shoot Func.] (Images shot during one session of interval shooting become one group.)
On the image index screen, (Display as Group) icon is displayed over the group.
Note
If you delete the group, all the images in the group will be deleted.
Related Topic
Cont. Shooting
Self-timer(Cont)
WB bracket
DRO Bracket
Interval Shoot Func.
TP1001656912
MENU → (Playback) → [Playback Option] → [Display as Group] → desired setting.
1
461
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
462
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Focus Frame Display (playback)
Sets whether or not to display a focus frame around the area where the camera focused when you play back a still
image.
Menu item details
Off:
Does not display a focus frame during playback.
On:
Displays a focus frame in green during playback. If the subject is out of focus, the focus frame will be displayed in white.
Hint
Even if multiple focus frames are displayed at the time of shooting, only the one indicating where the camera actually focused will
be displayed during playback.
Even if a focus frame is displayed around the face of the subject at the time of shooting, the focus frame will be displayed around
the eye during playback when an eye is recognized.
Note
A focus frame will not be displayed over the following images.
Still images shot with manual focus
Movies
Still images created with [Photo Capture]
The focus frame is displayed only on the single-image playback screen. The focus frame is not displayed on the image index
screen or over enlarged images.
The focus frame is not displayed during auto reviewing.
If you shoot an image with a different composition after performing auto-focusing, the focus frame will appear offset from the
subject.
Even if the focus frame is displayed in green, the subject may not be in focus.
Even if you turn off the focusing frame display while shooting using the [AF Area Auto Clear] or [AF-C Area Display] function,
when [ Focus Frame Display] is set to [On], the focusing frame will be displayed during playback.
TP1001659791
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Playback) → [Playback Option] → [ Focus Frame Display] → desired setting.
1
463
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Aspect Marker Disp. (still image)
The aspect marker that was displayed during shooting can be displayed over the still image being played back.
Menu item details
Aspect Marker Disp.:
Sets whether or not to display the aspect marker. ([On]/[Off])
Aspect Marker Level:
Sets the color density for the displayed marker. (0 to 15)
Note
Although the color density selected on the setting screen for [Aspect Marker Level] may not be applied to the setting screen, the
marker will be displayed with the selected color density on the playback screen.
When the display setting is [Histogram], the aspect marker is not displayed.
Related Topic
Marker Display (still image)
TP1001667091
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Playback) → [Playback Option] → [ Aspect Marker Disp.] → desired setting item.
1
464
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Disp Specified Time Img.
You can play back images by specifying the shooting date and time.
Note
For movies, the date and time when the recording was started are treated as the shooting date and time.
TP1001662534
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Playback) → [Playback Option] → [Disp Specified Time Img.].
1
Set the date and time of the image to be played back using the control wheel, and then press the center.
The image shot on the specified date and time will be played back.
If there are no images shot on the specified date and time, the image shot on the closest date and time will be
played back.
2
465
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Setting the method for jumping between images (Image Jump Setting)
Sets the method of jumping between playback images for the front dial and rear dial, respectively.
Menu item details
One by one / By 10 images / By 100 images:
Jumps in units of the specified number of images.
Top Image:
Plays back the first images of scenes (images shot with single shooting and the first shot of continuous shooting, etc.).
By 3 minutes/By 5 minutes/By 10 minutes/By 30 minutes/By 1 hour/By 3 hours/By 6 hours/By 12
hours/By 24 hours:
Jumps between images by the specified time unit based on the shooting date and time of the images.
Protect Only:
Plays back only protected images.
Rating Only:
Plays back all rated images.
Rating Only ( ) - Rating Only ( ):
Plays back only images for which a rating ( to ) has been specified.
W/O Rating Only:
Plays back only images that are not rated.
Shot Mark Only:
Sets the image jump target only to images with Shot Marks.
Shot Mark1 Only/Shot Mark2 Only:
Sets the image jump target only to images with the specified Shot Mark.
No Shot Mark:
Sets the image jump target only to images without Shot Marks.
Divider Frame Only:
Sets the image jump target only to divider frames.
Image After Divider:
Sets the image jump target only to images next to divider frames.
To add a Shot Mark to a movie
If you add a Shot Mark to a movie, you can use it as a mark for selecting, transferring, or editing the movie. To add a
Shot Mark during recording, swipe left or right on the screen to display the touch function icons, and then touch (Add
Shot Mark1). You can also add a Shot Mark during playback by touching (Add Shot Mark1) on the screen.
To create a divider frame
By creating a divider frame between sessions of shooting, you can use it as a mark when selecting images.
Assign [Create Divider Frame] to the desired key using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] in advance and press the custom key
when you want to create a divider frame.
MENU → (Playback) → [Playback Option] → [Image Jump Setting] → Select the dial for which you
would like to change the setting, and then select the desired setting.
1
466
Hint
To use the touch function icons, enable touch operations during shooting or playback in MENU → (Setup) → [Touch
Operation] → [Touch Panel Settings].
Use a custom key or the shutter button to add a second Shot Mark (Shot Mark 2). Shot Mark 1 can also be added using a custom
key or the shutter button.
When adding a Shot Mark with a custom key: assign [Add Shot Mark1] or [Add Shot Mark2] in [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] and
press the assigned button while shooting.
When adding a Shot Mark with the shutter button: set [ with Shutter Button] to [Add Shot Mark1] or [Add Shot Mark2]
and press the shutter button while shooting.
When adding a Shot Mark while playing back a movie: assign [Add/Delete Shot Mark1] or [Add/Delete Shot Mark2] in [
Custom Key Setting] and press the assigned button during playback.
Related Topic
Protecting recorded images (Protect)
Rating
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
Selection/Memo Shot
TP1001662533
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
467
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Protecting recorded images (Protect)
Protects recorded images against accidental erasure. The (protect) mark is displayed on protected images.
Menu item details
Multiple Img.:
Applies the protection of the selected multiple images.
(1) Select the image to be protected, then press the center of the control wheel. The (check) mark is displayed in the
check box. To cancel the selection, press the center again to remove the (check) mark.
(2) To protect other images, repeat step (1).
You can also specify the range using the Fn (Function) button.
(3) MENU → [OK].
All in this Folder:
Protects all images in the selected folder.
Cancel All in this Folder:
Cancels the protection of all images in the selected folder.
All with this date:
Protects all images taken on the selected date.
Cancel All with this date:
Cancels the protection of all images taken on the selected date.
All Images in This Group:
Protects all the images in the selected group.
Cancel All in This Group:
Cancels the protection of all the images in the selected group.
All Filtered:
Protects all the images filtered using the playback filter function.
Cancel All Filtered:
Cancels the protection of all the images filtered using the playback filter function.
Hint
If you assign [Protect] to the key of your choice using MENU → (Setup) → [Operation Customize] → [ Custom Key
Setting], you can protect images or cancel protection by simply pressing the key.
If you select a group in [Multiple Img.], all the images in the group will be protected. To select and protect particular images within
the group, execute [Multiple Img.] while displaying the images within the group.
Note
The menu items that can be selected vary according to the setting for [Playback Filter Condition] and [Image Order] and the
selected content.
Related Topic
Display as Group
MENU → (Playback) → [Selection/Memo] → [Protect] → desired setting.
1
468
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Rating
You can assign ratings to recorded images on a scale of the number of stars ( - ) to make it easier to find images.
To set ratings to multiple images at a time using the playback filter function
By using the playback filter function, you can set ratings to multiple images at a time. Perform [Rating] after narrowing
down the images using [Playback Filter Condition], and then select [All Filtered].
When you select [Multiple Img.], you can rate images one by one from among the narrowed down images only.
To set ratings when shooting still images
Assign [Add Rating ( )] through [Add Rating ( )] to the desired keys using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] in advance
and press the custom keys after shooting a still image. You can set the rating for the last shot still image.
Ratings cannot be set when shooting movies.
Hint
You can also assign ratings when playing back images by using the custom key. Assign [Rating] to the desired key using [
Custom Key Setting] beforehand, and then press the custom key while playing back an image to which you want to assign a
rating. The level of (Rating) changes each time you press the custom key.
By specifying ratings with the [Image Jump Setting] function, you can quickly find the desired image.
Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
Rating Set(Custom Key)
Setting the method for jumping between images (Image Jump Setting)
Playback Filter Condition
Selection/Memo Shot
MENU → (Playback) → [Selection/Memo] → [Rating].
The image rating selection screen will appear.
1
Press the left/right sides of the control wheel to display an image to which you want to assign a rating, and
then press the center.
2
Select the level of (Rating) by pressing the left/right side of the control wheel, and then press the
center.
3
Press the MENU button to exit the rating setting screen.
4
470
TP1001657170
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
471
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Rating Set(Custom Key)
Sets the available number of (rating) when rating (ranking) images with the key to which you have assigned [Rating]
using [ Custom Key Setting].
Related Topic
Rating
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
TP1001657171
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Playback) → [Selection/Memo] → [Rating Set(Custom Key)].
1
Add a (check) mark to the number of (rating) that you want to activate.
You can select the checked number when setting [Rating] using the custom key.
2
472
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Clip Flag
During or after movie recording, you can mark clips with three types of flags: OK/NG/KEEP. The flags serve as markers
for selection and editing during the post-production process.
To set a clip flag with a custom key
You can assign [Clip Flag OK], [Clip Flag NG], or [Clip Flag KEEP] to the desired key in advance using [ Custom
Key/Dial Set.] or [ Custom Key Setting]. Then, you can add a clip flag by pressing that key during movie recording or
playback.
To remove a clip flag that you have added, press the key to which the clip flag setting is assigned twice.
Clip flags can be overwritten. If you want to change the type of clip flag, press the key assigned the clip flag type to
which you want to change.
To set a clip flag from the Fn menu (Playback)
You can also set a clip flag from the Fn menu when playing back movies. In advance, assign [Clip Flag OK], [Clip Flag
NG], or [Clip Flag KEEP] in [ Fn Menu Settings], and then press the icon for the assigned function during playback to
set a clip flag.
If you want to delete the clip flag you added, touch the same icon again from the Fn menu.
TP1002003336
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Playback) → [Selection/Memo] → [Clip Flag].
The clip flag image selection screen will appear.
1
Press the left/right side of the control wheel to display an image to which you want to add a clip flag, and
then press the center of the control wheel.
2
Select a clip flag type by pressing the left/right side of the control wheel, and then press the center of the
control wheel.
The clip flag settings cycle through the following: OK → NG → KP (KEEP) → No flag → OK.
3
Press the MENU button to exit the clip flag setting screen.
4
473
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Rotating an image (Rotate)
Rotates a recorded image counter-clockwise.
Note
Even if you rotate a movie file, it will be played back horizontally on the monitor or viewfinder of the camera.
You may not be able to rotate images shot using other products.
When viewing rotated images on a computer, the images may be displayed in their original orientation depending on the software.
TP1001619241
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
Display the image to be rotated, then select MENU → (Playback) → [Edit] → [Rotate].
1
Press the center of the control wheel.
The image is rotated counter-clockwise. The image rotates as you press the center.
If you rotate the image once, the image remains rotated even after the product is turned off.
2
474
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Crop
Crops recorded images.
Hint
The cropped image is saved as a separate image file. The original image remains as is.
The file format and image quality setting of the cropped image will be the same as those of the original image.
On the playback screen, the (Crop) icon is displayed with cropped images.
Note
You cannot crop RAW images or movies.
Related Topic
Disp Set of Multi Media
TP1001661338
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Playback) → [Edit] → [Crop].
The image selection screen will appear.
1
Select the still image that you want to crop, and then press the center of the control wheel.
2
Adjust the size and position of the cropping frame.
You can change the aspect ratio of the cropping frame using the rear dial. You can also change the orientation.
You can change the size of the cropping frame using the front dial or the control wheel.
You can move the position of the cropping frame using the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel.
You can preview the cropped image by pressing the Fn button.
3
Press the center of the control wheel.
The cropped image will be saved.
4
475
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Photo Capture
Captures a chosen scene in a movie to save as a still image. First shoot a movie, then pause the movie during playback
to capture decisive moments that tend to be missed when shooting still images, and save them as still images.
Hint
With [ JPEG/HEIF Switch], you can select either JPEG or HEIF as the recording file format for still images.
Related Topic
Shooting movies
Playing back movies
JPEG/HEIF Switch (Photo Capture / Creating still images from Shot Marks)
TP1001651416
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
Display the movie that you want to capture as a still image.
1
MENU → (Playback) → [Edit] → [Photo Capture].
2
Play back the movie and pause it.
3
Find the desired scene using forward slow playback, reverse slow playback, displays the next frame, and
displays the previous frame, and then stop the movie.
4
Press (Photo Capture) to capture the chosen scene.
The scene is saved as a still image.
5
476
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Creating still images from Shot Marks
While playing back a movie, you can create still images from movie frames with Shot Marks.
About the still images created
You can select either the JPEG or HEIF format for the still images to be created. You can switch the format by
selecting MENU → (Playback) → [Edit] → [ JPEG/HEIF Switch].
The size of the still images created will be the same size as the movie being played back (i.e., the size depends on
the recording format of the movie).
Created still images are recorded on the memory card in the same slot as the movie, regardless of the [ Recording
Media] setting.
Related Topic
JPEG/HEIF Switch (Photo Capture / Creating still images from Shot Marks)
File Format (movie)
TP1001668882
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
Play back a movie with Shot Mark(s).
1
MENU → (Playback) → [Edit] → [ Create Still Image].
By registering [ Create Still Image] to [ Custom Key Setting] or [ Fn Menu Settings], you can easily call
up [ Create Still Image].
2
477
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Shot Marks after still image creation (playback)
Sets whether to automatically delete Shot Marks after creating still images when playing back a movie using the [
Create Still Image] function.
Menu item details
Auto Delete:
Deletes Shot Marks automatically after creating still images.
Maintain:
Does not delete Shot Marks automatically after creating still images.
Related Topic
Creating still images from Shot Marks
TP1001668883
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Playback) → [Edit] → [ after still img crt] → desired setting.
1
478
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
JPEG/HEIF Switch (Photo Capture / Creating still images from Shot Marks)
Switches the file format (JPEG / HEIF) for still images captured with [Photo Capture] or [ Create Still Image].
You can view and edit JPEG files in various environments. The HEIF format has high compression efficiency and can
record high-quality images with rich 10-bit gradation expression in small files. In addition, by setting [HEIF(4:2:2)], you
can record with 4:2:2 color sampling, which has better color reproduction. Depending on the computer or software, you
may not be able to view or edit HEIF files. In addition, a HEIF-compatible environment is required to play back still
images in the HEIF format. You can enjoy high-quality still images by connecting the camera and the TV via HDMI.
Menu item details
JPEG:
Switches the file format for still images captured to JPEG. This setting gives priority to compatibility.
HEIF(4:2:0):
Switches the file format for still images captured to HEIF 4:2:0 10bit. This setting gives priority to image quality and
compression efficiency.
HEIF(4:2:2):
Switches the file format for still images captured to HEIF 4:2:2 10bit. This setting gives priority to image quality.
Note
HEIF image files recorded with this camera cannot be displayed on other cameras that do not support the HEIF file format. Be
careful not to accidentally erase HEIF image files by formatting the memory card or deleting the files.
Related Topic
Photo Capture
Creating still images from Shot Marks
TP1001659793
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Playback) → [Edit] → [ JPEG/HEIF Switch] → desired setting.
1
479
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Copying images from one memory card to another (Copy)
You can copy images from a memory card in a slot that is selected using [Play Set of Multi. Media] to a memory card in
another slot. If you want to use this function, set [Disp Set of Multi Media] to [Follow PB Settings] in advance.
Menu item details
Target Group :
Specifies the target range for the images to be copied. ([This Date]/[This Folder]/[This Media]/[All Filtered])
The options displayed may differ depending on the settings for [Image Order] or [Playback Filter Condition].
Still Images/Movies :
Specifies the images to be copied by the type of image. ([All]/[Only Still Images]/[Only Movies])
Target Img (Rating) :
Specifies the images to be copied by rating. ([ ] - [ ]/[ ])
Target Movie ( ) :
Specifies the images to be copied by the presence of shot marks. ([All]/[Only Shot Mark Mov.])
Target Img (Protect) :
Specifies the images to be copied by the presence of protection. ([All]/[Only Protected Img.])
Note
If images in a group are copied, the copied images will not be displayed as a group on the destination memory card.
If protected images are copied, the protection will be canceled on the destination memory card.
It may take a long time when many images are to be copied. Use a sufficiently charged battery pack.
To copy a movie, the destination memory card must support the recording format of the movie. If the movie cannot be copied, a
message will be displayed on the monitor of the camera.
Related Topic
Play Set of Multi. Media
Disp Set of Multi Media
Image Order
Playback Filter Condition
MENU → (Playback) → [Edit] → [Copy].
1
Set the conditions for the images to be copied, and then select [OK].
You can select images to be copied by pressing the Fn (function) button. Add check marks to the images you
want to copy.
You can also specify the range using the Fn (Function) button.
2
Select [OK], and press the center of the control wheel.
Copying will begin.
3
480
TP1001651431
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
481
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Deleting multiple selected images (Delete)
You can delete multiple selected images. Once you have deleted an image, you cannot restore it. Confirm the image to
be deleted beforehand.
Menu item details
All Other Than This Img.:
Deletes all images in the group except the selection.
All Images in This Group:
Deletes all images in the selected group.
Multiple Img.:
Deletes the selected images.
(1) Select the images to be deleted, then press the center of the control wheel. The (check) mark is displayed in the
check box. To cancel the selection, press the center again to remove the (check) mark.
(2) To delete other images, repeat step (1).
You can also specify the range using the Fn (Function) button.
(3) MENU → [OK].
All in this Folder:
Deletes all images in the selected folder.
All with this date:
Deletes all images taken on the selected date.
All Filtered:
Deletes all the images filtered using the playback filter function.
Hint
Perform [Format] to delete all images, including protected images.
To display the desired folder or date, select the desired folder or date during playback by performing the following procedure:
Move the W/T (zoom) lever to W side → select the bar on the left using the control wheel → select the desired folder or date
using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel.
If you select a group in [Multiple Img.], all the images in the group will be deleted. To select and delete particular images within the
group, execute [Multiple Img.] while displaying the images within the group.
Note
The protected images cannot be deleted.
The menu items that can be selected vary according to the settings for [Playback Filter Condition] and [Image Order] and the
selected content.
Related Topic
Display as Group
Image Order
Playback Filter Condition
MENU → (Playback) → [Delete] → [Delete] → desired setting.
1
482
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Delete pressing twice
Sets whether or not you can delete the image currently being played back by pressing the (Delete) button twice in
sequence.
Menu item details
On:
Enables you to delete the image currently being played back by pressing the (Delete) button twice.
Off:
Does not enable you to delete the image currently being played back by pressing the (Delete) button twice.
TP1001661339
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Playback) → [Delete] → [ Delete pressing twice] → desired setting.
1
484
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Delete confirm.
You can set whether [Delete] or [Cancel] is selected as a default on the delete confirmation screen.
Menu item details
"Delete" first:
[Delete] is selected as the default setting.
"Cancel" first:
[Cancel] is selected as the default setting.
TP1001619254
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Playback) → [Delete] → [Delete confirm.] → desired setting.
1
485
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Viewing images on a TV using an HDMI cable
To view images stored on this product using a TV, an HDMI cable (sold separately) and a TV equipped with an HDMI jack
are required. For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the compatible TV.
Note
Do not connect this product and another device using the output terminals of both. Doing so may cause a malfunction.
Some devices may not work properly when connected to this product. For example, they may not output video or audio.
Use an HDMI cable with the HDMI logo or a genuine Sony cable.
When [Time Code Output] is set to [On], the image may not be output properly to the TV or recording device. In such cases, set
[Time Code Output] to [Off].
Turn off both this product and the TV.
1
Connect the HDMI terminal of this product to the HDMI jack of the TV using an HDMI cable (sold separately).
Use an HDMI cable that is compatible with the HDMI Type-A terminal of the product and the HDMI jack of the TV.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the input.
3
Turn on this product.
Images shot with the product appear on the TV screen.
4
Select an image using the right/left sides of the control wheel.
The monitor of this camera is not lit up on the playback screen.
If the playback screen is not displayed, press the (Playback) button.
5
486
If images do not appear on the TV screen properly, select MENU → (Setup) → [External Output] → [ HDMI Resolution]
→ [2160p], [1080p] or [1080i] according to the TV to be connected.
During HDMI output, when you switch the movie from 4K to HD image quality or vice-versa, or change the movie to a different
frame rate or different color mode, the screen may become dark. This is not a malfunction.
If the product performs unwanted operations in response to the TV remote control, select MENU → (Setup) → [External
Output] → [CTRL FOR HDMI] → [Off].
TP1001642630
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
487
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Format
When you use a memory card with this camera for the first time, we recommend that you format the card using the
camera for stable performance of the memory card. Note that formatting permanently erases all data on the memory
card, and is unrecoverable. Save valuable data on a computer, etc.
The difference between quick formatting and full formatting
Perform full formatting when you feel like the speed of recording to the memory card or read-out from the memory card
has become slow, or when you want to erase data completely, etc.
Full formatting takes longer than quick formatting, because all areas of the memory card are initialized.
Hint
You can also display the screen for formatting the memory card by pressing and holding the MENU button and then the
(Delete) button on the shooting screen for approximately two seconds.
You can cancel full formatting before it is completed. Even if you cancel full formatting in the middle of the process, the data will
be erased, so you can use the memory card as is.
Note
Formatting permanently erases all data including protected images and registered settings (from M1 to M4).
The access lamp lights up during formatting. Do not remove the memory card while the access lamp is lit up.
Format the memory card on this camera. If you format the memory card on the computer, the memory card may not be usable
depending on the format type.
It may take a few minutes to complete formatting, depending on the memory card.
You cannot format the memory card if the remaining battery charge is less than 1%.
Related Topic
Memory cards that can be used
Notes on memory card
TP1001619266
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [Media] → [Format] → desired memory card slot.
1
Select [Enter]. (Quick formatting)
If you press the (Delete) button, a message to perform full formatting will be displayed. You can launch full
formatting by selecting [Enter].
2
488
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Rec. Media Settings (still image/movie): Recording Media (still image)
Selects the memory card slot to record still images. In the default settings, [Slot 1] is selected. If you want to use one
memory card without changing the setting, use Slot 1.
Menu item details
Slot 1:
Records still images on the memory card in Slot 1.
Slot 2:
Records still images on the memory card in Slot 2.
Simult. Recording:
Simultaneously records still images on the memory cards in Slot 1 and Slot 2.
Sort Recording:
Records still images with different file formats and image sizes by sorting them to different slots.
Set the file format and image size of still images for each slot.
Related Topic
Rec. Media Settings (still image/movie): Recording Media (movie)
Rec. Media Settings (still image/movie): Auto Switch Media Card
Play Set of Multi. Media
TP1001661340
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [Media] → [ Rec. Media Settings] → [ Recording Media] → desired
setting.
1
489
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Rec. Media Settings (still image/movie): Recording Media (movie)
Selects the memory card slot to record movies. In the default settings, [Slot 1] is selected. If you want to use one memory
card without changing the setting, use Slot 1.
Menu item details
Slot 1:
Records movies on the memory card in Slot 1.
Slot 2:
Records movies on the memory card in Slot 2.
Simult. Recording:
Simultaneously records movies on the memory cards in Slot 1 and Slot 2.
Related Topic
Rec. Media Settings (still image/movie): Recording Media (still image)
Rec. Media Settings (still image/movie): Auto Switch Media Card
Play Set of Multi. Media
TP1001661341
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [Media] → [ Rec. Media Settings] →[ Recording Media] → desired
setting.
1
490
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Rec. Media Settings (still image/movie): Auto Switch Media Card
If a memory card in use becomes full or you have forgotten to insert a memory card into a slot, you can record images to
the other memory card.
Menu item details
On:
The camera automatically starts recording on the other memory card when a memory card in use becomes full or if you
have forgotten to insert a memory card.
Off:
The camera does not perform [Auto Switch Media Card].
How the camera switches the memory card slot in use
This section explains how the recording slot changes when memory cards are inserted into both slot 1 and slot 2 and
[Auto Switch Media Card] is set to [On] during shooting.
When recording both still images and movies on a single memory card
When images cannot be recorded to the memory card in use, the settings for [ Recording Media] and [ Recording
Media] change automatically and images are recorded to the other memory card.
When the other memory card becomes full after switching, the camera starts recording in the former slot again.
Example: When [ Recording Media] and [ Recording Media] under [ Rec. Media Settings] are both set to [Slot 1]
: Recording images
(A): Recording is no longer possible on the memory card in slot 1 (due to lack of capacity, etc.).
(B): The memory card is replaced with a recordable one.
(C): Recording is no longer possible on the memory card in slot 2 (due to lack of capacity, etc.).
When recording the same image simultaneously to two memory cards
After either of the memory cards becomes full, images are recorded to the other card.
When you replace the full memory card with a recordable memory card, the camera is once again able to simultaneously
MENU → (Shooting) → [Media] → [ Rec. Media Settings] → [Auto Switch Media Card] → desired
setting.
1
491
record images with the selected setting.
Example: [ Recording Media] and [ Recording Media] under [ Rec. Media Settings] are both set to [Simult.
Recording]
: Images are recorded simultaneously to memory cards in slots 1 and 2.
: Images are recorded only to the memory card in slot 2.
(A): Recording is no longer possible on the memory card in slot 1 (due to lack of capacity, etc.).
(B): Replace slot 1 with a recordable memory card.
When images are sorted and recorded onto two memory cards
When either of the memory cards becomes full, the camera starts recording to the other memory card in both the RAW
and JPEG/HEIF formats.
When you replace the full memory card with a recordable memory card, the camera is once again able to record the two
types of images separately with the selected setting.
Example:
When [ Recording Media] under [ Rec. Media Settings] is set to [Sort Recording]
When [ File Format] is set to [RAW] for slot 1 and [JPEG] for slot 2
: Images are sorted and recorded in slots 1 and 2.
: All images are recorded to slot 2.
(A): Recording is no longer possible on the memory card in slot 1 (due to lack of capacity, etc.).
(B): Replace slot 1 with a recordable memory card.
Hint
Images are recorded to the memory card in the slot displayed on the monitor with an arrow symbol. After the camera switches the
slot using [Auto Switch Media Card], replace the memory card in the former slot with a recordable memory card.
When recording both still images and movies on a single memory card, the settings for [ Recording Media] and [ Recording
Media] change automatically as the slot switches. If you want to record on the slot in use before switching, select the desired slot
with [ Recording Media]/[ Recording Media].
492
If you want to record with the settings with [ Recording Media] and [ Recording Media], set [Auto Switch Media Card] to
[Off].
When [Auto Switch Media Card] is set to [On], the setting for [Disp Set of Multi Media] will be [All Slots], and the playback target
will be the memory cards in all slots.
When [Auto Switch Media Card] is set to [On] and the recording medium automatically switches from slot 1 to slot 2 while
shooting still images, a folder is created in slot 2 with a number that is a continuation of the number last recorded in slot 1.
Related Topic
Memory cards that can be used
Recordable movie times
Rec. Media Settings (still image/movie): Recording Media (still image)
Rec. Media Settings (still image/movie): Recording Media (movie)
TP1001657177
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
493
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Recover Image DB (still image/movie)
If image files were processed on a computer, problems may occur in the image database file. In such cases, the images
on the memory card will not be played back on this product. Also, if you use a memory card in the camera after using it in
another device, the images on the memory card may not be played back correctly. For example, the images may not be
displayed as a group. If these problems happen, repair the file using [ Recover Image DB].
Images recorded on the memory card are not deleted by [ Recover Image DB].
Note
If the battery pack is extremely depleted, image database files cannot be repaired. Use a sufficiently charged battery pack.
TP1001619271
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [Media] → [ Recover Image DB] → desired memory card slot → [Enter].
1
494
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Display Media Info. (still image/movie)
Displays the recordable number of still images and the remaining recording time for movies on the memory card.
TP1001619272
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [Media] → [ Display Media Info.] → desired memory card slot.
1
495
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
File/Folder Settings
Configure settings related to the folder and file name of the still image to be shot.
Menu item details
File Number:
You can set how to assign file numbers to still images.
[Series]: Does not reset file numbers for each folder.
[Reset]: Resets file numbers for each folder.
Forced File Number Reset:
Resets the still image file number and creates a new folder.
Set File Name:
You can specify the first three characters of the file name.
Folder Name:
You can set how folder names are assigned.
[Standard Form]: Folders are named as “folder number + any 5 characters”. Example: 100MSDCF
[Date Form]: Folders are named as “folder number + Y (the last digit of the year)/MM/DD”.
Example: 10050405 (Folder number: 100; date: 04/05/2025)
Hint
The settings for [File Number] and [Set File Name] are applied to both Slot 1 and Slot 2.
When [File Number] is set to [Series], file numbers will be assigned sequentially across the memory cards in the slots even if you
switch the setting for [ Rec. Media Settings] → [ Recording Media] between Slot 1 and 2.
When [Folder Name] is set to [Standard Form], the last 5 characters of the folder name can be set using [Create New Folder].
(Only uppercase letters, numbers, and underscores can be entered.)
You can also change the last five characters of the folder name by using [Forced File Number Reset].
Note
Only capital letters, numbers, and underscores can be used for [Set File Name]. Underscores cannot be used for the first
character.
The three characters specified using [Set File Name] are only applied to files recorded after the setting is made.
Related Topic
Create New Folder
File Settings
TP1001658869
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [File] → [File/Folder Settings] → desired setting.
1
496
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Select REC Folder
If [Folder Name] under [File/Folder Settings] is set to [Standard Form] and there are 2 folders or more, you can select the
folder on the memory card to which images are to be recorded.
Note
You cannot select the folder when [Folder Name] under [File/Folder Settings] is set to [Date Form].
If the camera is set to record images to memory cards in both slots, you may only select a common folder on both memory cards.
If there is no common folder, you can make one using [Create New Folder].
Related Topic
File/Folder Settings
Create New Folder
TP1001619268
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [File] → [Select REC Folder] → desired folder.
1
497
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Create New Folder
Creates a new folder on the memory card for recording still images. A new folder is created with a folder number one
greater than the largest folder number currently used. Images are recorded in the newly created folder.
Up to 9 999 images in total can be stored in one folder. When the folder capacity is exceeded, a new folder may be
automatically created.
Hint
The name of the folder that is created will vary depending on the [Folder Name] setting.
[Standard Form]: In the folder name “Folder number + any 5 characters”, +1 will be added to the folder number.
Example: 100MSDCF → 101MSDCF
[Date Form]: In the folder name “Folder number + year/month/day (last digit of the year and 4 digits representing the month/day)”,
+1 will be added to the folder number.
Example: 10050405 → 10150405
When [Folder Name] is set to [Standard Form], the last 5 characters of the folder name can be set using [Create New Folder].
(Only uppercase letters, numbers, and underscores can be entered.)
You can also set the last 5 characters of the folder name by using [Forced File Number Reset].
Note
When you insert a memory card that was used with other equipment into this product and shoot images, a new folder may be
automatically created.
If the camera is set to record images to memory cards in both slots, a new folder will be created on both memory cards. A new
folder number will be one greater than the largest existing folder number on the two memory cards.
If the camera is set to record images to memory cards in both slots and an image is shot, a new folder may be automatically
created.
You cannot change the folder name when [Folder Name] under [File/Folder Settings] is set to [Date Form].
Related Topic
File/Folder Settings
TP1001619269
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [File] → [Create New Folder].
1
498
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
File Settings
Configure settings for the file names of recorded movies.
Menu item details
File Number:
You can set how to assign file numbers to movies.
[Series]: Does not reset file numbers even if the memory card is changed.
[Reset]: Resets the file number when the memory card is changed.
Series Counter Reset:
Resets the series counter used when [File Number] is set to [Series].
File Name Format:
You can set the format for movie file names. You can change the beginning of the file name to your desired character
string or set the file name to the [Cam ID + Reel#] format.
[Standard]: The file name of the recorded movie starts with “C.” Example: C0001
[Cam ID + Reel#]: The file name of the recorded movie becomes “Camera ID+Reel number+Camera position+File
number+Date+Random string.” Example: A001C001_230101AB
[Title]: The file name of the recorded movie becomes “Title+File number.”
[Date + Title]: The file name of the recorded movie becomes “Date+Title+File number.”
[Title + Date]: The file name of the recorded movie becomes “Title+Date+ File number.”
Cam ID + Reel# Settings:
Sets the various parts of the file name when [File Name Format] is set to [Cam ID + Reel#].
[Camera ID]: The ID of the camera for shooting (A to Z)
[Reel Number]: The reel number of the movie (001-999)
[Camera Position]: The camera position when shooting (C/L/R). When the file number reaches 999, the recorded camera
position changes, but the setting value (C/L/R) does not change. Example: C999→D001
Title Name Settings:
You can set the title when [File Name Format] is set to [Title], [Date + Title], or [Title + Date].
Hint
The settings for [File Number] and [File Name Format] are applied to both Slot 1 and Slot 2.
When [File Number] is set to [Series], file numbers will be assigned sequentially across the memory cards in the slots even if you
switch the setting for [ Rec. Media Settings] → [ Recording Media] between Slot 1 and 2.
Note
When entering [Title Name Settings], the number/types of characters that can be entered are as follows.
The maximum length is 37 characters. The types of characters that can be entered are letters of the alphabet, numbers, and
symbols ( . - _ @ ! # $ % + = ^ ~ ( ) , ; [ ] ).
Titles specified using [Title Name Settings] or [Cam ID + Reel# Settings] are only applied to movies recorded after the setting is
made.
[Reel Number] is reset when the [Camera ID] setting has changed. [Reel Number] will not be reset even if you execute [Reset]
under [File Number].
You cannot set how folder names are assigned for movies.
MENU → (Shooting) → [File] → [File Settings] → desired setting item.
1
499
If you are using an SDHC memory card, [File Name Format] is locked to [Standard].
If you insert a memory card used with [File Name Format] set to one of the following into another device, the memory card may
not function properly.
[Cam ID + Reel#]
[Title]
[Date + Title]
[Title + Date]
If there are unused numbers due to file deletion, etc., these numbers will be reused when the movie file number reaches “9999.”
When you set [File Name Format] to [Cam ID + Reel#], use a CFexpress Type A memory card or SDXC memory card.
Related Topic
File/Folder Settings
TP1001658870
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
500
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Display File Name (movie)
Sets whether to display the file name of the movie while shooting. The file name of a movie to be shot will be displayed in
the shooting standby mode.
Menu item details
On:
Displays the file name on the movie recording screen.
Off:
Does not display the file name on the movie recording screen.
Related Topic
File Settings
TP1001667092
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Display Option] → [ Display File Name] → desired setting.
1
501
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
IPTC Information
You can write IPTC information* when recording still images. Create and edit IPTC information using the IPTC Metadata
Preset (https://www.sony.net/iptc/help/) and write the information to a memory card beforehand.
Menu item details
Write IPTC Info:
Sets IPTC information to be written to still images. ([Off]/[IPTC1] - [IPTC20])
If you select anything other than [Off], the IPTC number will appear on the shooting screen and IPTC information will
be written to still images.
Import/Delete:
Imports IPTC information to the camera. Deletes IPTC information registered to the camera.
Delete All:
Deletes all IPTC information registered to the camera.
To import or delete IPTC information
You can register up to 20 presets of IPTC information to the camera.
To import IPTC information, select [Import/Delete], select the destination ([IPTC1] - [IPTC20]), and then press the center
of the control wheel. Then, select the memory card slot containing the memory card to which the IPTC metadata files are
saved and select the file that you want to register to the camera.
To delete IPTC information, select the IPTC information that you want to delete from the camera on the [Import/Delete]
screen, and then press the (delete) button.
Hint
When you play back images that have IPTC information, the (IPTC) icon appears on the screen.
For details on how to use the IPTC Metadata Preset, refer to the following support page.
https://www.sony.net/iptc/help/
Note
You cannot edit or check IPTC information on the camera.
Before lending out or handing over the camera, initialize the camera or perform [Delete All] to delete IPTC information.
Related Topic
Setting Reset
TP1001658268
IPTC information consists of digital image metadata attributes, as standardized by the International Press Telecommunications Council.
*
MENU → (Shooting) → [File] → [IPTC Information] → desired setting item.
1
502
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
503
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Copyright Info
Writes copyright information onto the still images.
Menu item details
Write Copyright Info:
Sets whether to write copyright information. ([On]/[Off])
If you select [On], a (Copyright) icon will appear on the shooting screen.
Set Photographer:
Sets the photographer name.
Set Copyright:
Sets the copyright holder name.
Disp. Copyright Info:
Displays the current copyright information.
Note
A (Copyright) icon appears during the playback of images with copyright information.
When entering [Set Photographer] and [Set Copyright], the numbers/types of characters that can be entered are as follows.
The maximum length is 46 characters. The types of characters that can be entered are letters of the alphabet, numbers, and
symbols.
In order to prevent unauthorized use of [Copyright Info], be sure to clear the [Set Photographer] and [Set Copyright] columns
before lending out or handing over your camera.
Sony is not liable for problems or damages resulting from use of [Copyright Info].
Related Topic
Keyboard screen
TP1001642666
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [File] → [Copyright Info] → desired setting.
1
When you select [Set Photographer] or [Set Copyright], a keyboard appears on the screen. Enter your
desired name.
You can only enter alphanumeric characters and symbols for [Set Photographer] and [Set Copyright]. You can enter
up to 46 letters.
2
504
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Write Serial Number (still image/movie)
Writes the camera's serial number when shooting.
Menu item details
On:
Writes the camera's serial number to the image.
Off:
Does not write the camera's serial number to the image.
TP1001658269
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Shooting) → [File] → [ Write Serial Number] → desired setting.
1
505
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Wi-Fi Connect
Sets whether to use the Wi-Fi function of the camera.
Menu item details
On:
Uses the Wi-Fi function.
Off:
Does not use the Wi-Fi function.
Note
The wireless access point or wireless router that relays the LAN connection is referred to as the “access point” in this manual.
This camera can connect to an access point with WPA3-SAE or WPA2-PSK security settings or without security settings. To
ensure a secure wireless LAN connection, we strongly recommend using an access point with WPA3 or WPA2 security settings.
Connecting to an access point without security settings may result in hacking, access from malicious third parties, or attacks on
vulnerabilities. Unless there is a specific reason, we do not recommend using an access point without security settings.
It is important that you set the security settings when using a wireless LAN. If a security problem arises because no security
precautions are in place or due to any inevitable circumstances when using a wireless LAN, Sony bears no responsibility for the
loss or damage.
Related Topic
WPS Push
Access Point Set.
TP1001665607
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Network) → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Connect] → desired setting.
Set this function to [On] to search for connectable access points. If connectable access points are not found,
use [WPS Push] or [Access Point Set.] to configure the settings.
1
506
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
WPS Push
If your access point has a Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button, you can register the access point to this product easily.
For details about the available functions and settings of your access point, see the access point operating instructions or
contact the administrator of the access point.
Set [Wi-Fi Connect] to [On] in advance.
Note
[WPS Push] works only if the security setting of your access point is set to WPA2 and your access point supports the Wi-Fi
Protected Setup (WPS) button method. If the security setting is WPA3 only or your access point does not support the Wi-Fi
Protected Setup (WPS) button method, perform [Access Point Set.].
To ensure a secure wireless LAN connection, we strongly recommend using an access point with WPA3 or WPA2 security
settings.
Connecting to an access point without security settings may result in hacking, access from malicious third parties, or attacks on
vulnerabilities. Unless there is a specific reason, we do not recommend using an access point without security settings.
It is important that you set the security settings when using a wireless LAN. If a security problem arises because no security
precautions are in place or due to any inevitable circumstances when using a wireless LAN, Sony bears no responsibility for the
loss or damage.
A connection may not be possible or the communication distance may be shorter depending on the surrounding conditions, such
as the type of wall material and the presence of obstructions or radio waves between the product and access point. In this case,
change the location of the product or move the product closer to the access point.
Related Topic
Access Point Set.
TP1001619286
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Network) → [Wi-Fi] → [WPS Push].
1
Push the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button on the access point to connect.
2
507
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Access Point Set.
You can register your access point manually. Before starting the procedure, check the SSID name of the access point,
security system, and password. The password may be preset in some devices. For details, see the access point
operating instructions, or consult the access point administrator.
Set [Wi-Fi Connect] to [On] in advance.
Other setting items
MENU → (Network) → [Wi-Fi] → [Access Point Set.].
1
Select the access point you want to register.
When the desired access point is displayed on the screen: Select the desired access point.
When the desired access point is not displayed on the screen: Select [Manual Setting] and set the access
point.
If you select [Manual Registration], input the SSID name of the access point, then select the security system.
The default security method is [WPA2].
If you select [WPS PIN], you can register the access point by entering the PIN code displayed on the camera
into the connected device.
2
Input the password, and select [OK].
Access points without (Lock mark) do not require a password.
Note that unmasking your password risks revealing your password to a third party. Make sure that no one is
around before unmasking.
3
Select [OK].
4
508
Depending on the status or the setting method of your access point, you may want to set more items.
For an unregistered access point, select the [Detail] button on the password entry screen.
For a registered access point, press the right side of the control wheel on the access point selection screen.
Priority Connection:
Select [On] or [Off].
IP Address Setting:
Select [Auto] or [Manual].
IP Address:
If you are entering the IP address manually, enter the set address.
Subnet Mask/Default Gateway/Primary DNS Server/Second DNS Server:
If you have set [IP Address Setting] to [Manual], enter each address according to your network environment.
Hint
When you select a registered access point, [Priority Connection] for that access point becomes set to [On], prioritizing
connections to that access point.
The prioritized access point is marked with a (crown) icon.
Note
When manually setting an access point or IP address, the number and types of characters that can be entered are as follows.
SSID : The maximum length is 32 characters. The types of characters that can be entered are letters of the alphabet (both
uppercase and lowercase), numbers, and symbols.
Password : The length must be between 8 and 64 characters. The types of characters that can be entered are letters of the
alphabet (both uppercase and lowercase), numbers, and symbols.
IP Address / Subnet Mask / Default Gateway / Primary DNS Server / Second DNS Server: The maximum length is 15
characters. The types of characters that can be entered are numbers and “.” only.
Once an access point is registered, [Priority Connection] for that access point is set to [On]. If you want to stop preferentially
connecting to a certain access point, set [Priority Connection] for the access point to [Off].
If there are both 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz access points with the same SSID and encryption format, the access point with the stronger
radio field will be displayed.
Related Topic
WPS Push
Keyboard screen
TP1001619287
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
509
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Wi-Fi Frequency Band (models supporting 5 GHz)
Sets the frequency band for Wi-Fi communications. [5GHz] has faster communication speeds and more stable data
transfers than [2.4GHz].
The [Wi-Fi Frequency Band] setting applies to a Wi-Fi Direct connection with a smartphone or computer, which is a direct
connection to the camera not via an access point.
Menu item details
2.4GHz/5GHz
TP1001658874
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Network) → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Frequency Band] → desired setting.
1
510
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Display Wi-Fi Info.
Displays Wi-Fi information for the camera such as the MAC address, IP address, etc.
Hint
Information other than the MAC address is displayed when [Wi-Fi Connect] is set to [On].
TP1001659031
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Network) → [Wi-Fi] → [Display Wi-Fi Info.].
1
511
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
SSID/PW Reset
This product shares connection information with devices that have permission to connect when establishing a Wi-Fi
Direct connection with a smartphone or a computer. If you want to change which devices have permission to connect,
reset the connection information.
Note
If you connect this product to a smartphone after resetting the connection information, you must make the settings for the
smartphone again.
If you connect this product to a computer with Wi-Fi Direct after resetting the connection information, you must reconfigure the
settings on the computer.
Related Topic
Operating the camera from a computer (Remote Shoot Function)
TP1001619290
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Network) → [Wi-Fi] → [SSID/PW Reset] → [OK].
1
512
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Bluetooth Settings
Controls the settings for connecting the camera to a smartphone or Bluetooth remote commander or shooting grip via a
Bluetooth connection.
Menu item details
Bluetooth Function:
Sets whether to activate or not the Bluetooth function of the camera. ([On]/[Off])
Pairing:
Displays the screen for pairing the camera and smartphone or Bluetooth remote commander.
Manage Paired Device:
Enables you to check or delete the pairing information for devices paired with the camera.
Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl:
Sets whether or not to use a Bluetooth compatible remote commander (sold separately). ([On]/[Off])
Disp Device Address:
Displays the BD address of the camera.
Note
When establishing a Bluetooth connection, only pair with trusted devices. Avoid unsolicited pairing requests or connections to
unknown devices.
Turn off the Bluetooth function when not in use.
Check your paired devices regularly and delete any unnecessary ones.
After you delete the pairing information for the camera from your smartphone, delete pairing information for the smartphone from
the camera using [Manage Paired Device].
Related Topic
Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl
Cnct. while Power OFF (smartphone)
Pairing the camera with a smartphone (Smartphone Connection)
TP1001651465
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth] → Select a menu item and set the desired parameter.
1
513
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl
You can operate the camera using a Bluetooth compatible remote commander (sold separately) or shooting grip (sold
separately).
Menu item details
On:
Enables Bluetooth remote commander operation.
Off:
Disables Bluetooth remote commander operation.
Icons for Bluetooth connection
(Bluetooth connection available): Bluetooth connection with the Bluetooth remote commander is established.
(Bluetooth connection unavailable): Bluetooth connection with the Bluetooth remote commander is not established.
Icons displayed when connecting to a Bluetooth remote commander
(remote commander mark): A Bluetooth remote commander can be used.
Hint
The Bluetooth connection is only active while you are operating the camera using the Bluetooth remote commander.
The Bluetooth icon is not displayed when the touch function icons are displayed in the movie recording mode. To see the
Bluetooth icon, swipe the touch function icons left or right to hide the touch function icons.
On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth] → [Bluetooth Function] → [On].
1
On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth] → [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] → [On].
If there is no Bluetooth device currently paired with the camera, the screen for pairing as described in Step 3 will
appear.
2
On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth] → [Pairing] to display the screen for pairing.
3
On the Bluetooth remote commander, perform pairing.
For details, refer to the instruction manual for the Bluetooth remote commander.
4
On the camera, select [OK] on the confirmation screen for the Bluetooth connection.
Pairing is complete, and you can now operate the camera from the Bluetooth remote commander. After pairing
the device once, you can connect the camera and the Bluetooth remote commander again in the future by
setting [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] to [On].
5
514
If the (Bluetooth connection available) icon is displayed on the screen but (remote commander mark) is not displayed, set
[Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] to [On] and follow the on-screen instructions.
Note
When you initialize the camera, the pairing information is also deleted. To use the Bluetooth remote commander, perform pairing
again.
If the Bluetooth connection is unstable, remove any obstacles, such as people or metal objects from between the camera and the
paired Bluetooth remote commander.
The following functions cannot be used when [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] is set to [On].
Power-saving mode
Only one Bluetooth remote commander can be connected to the camera at a time.
If the function does not work properly, check the following notes and then try pairing again.
Confirm that [Airplane Mode] for the camera is set to [Off].
If the function does not work properly even after you have performed the above operations, delete the pairing information for
the device that you want to connect using [Manage Paired Device] on the camera.
When establishing a Bluetooth connection, only pair with trusted devices. Avoid unsolicited pairing requests or connections to
unknown devices.
Turn off the Bluetooth function when not in use.
Check your paired devices regularly and delete any unnecessary ones.
After you delete the pairing information for the camera from your smartphone, delete pairing information for the smartphone from
the camera using [Manage Paired Device].
Related Topic
Bluetooth Settings
TP1001658873
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
515
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Wired LAN (USB-LAN)
Configures a wired LAN. You can connect this product to a network via wired LAN by connecting a commercially
available USB-LAN conversion adaptor to the USB Type-C terminal on the product.
Menu item details
IP Address Setting:
Sets whether to configure the IP address for the wired LAN automatically or manually. ([Auto]/[Manual])
Display Wired LAN Info.:
Displays wired LAN information for this product such as the MAC address or IP address.
IP Address:
If you are entering the IP address manually, enter the fixed address.
Subnet Mask/Default Gateway/Primary DNS Server/Second DNS Server:
If you have set [ IP Address Setting] to [Manual], enter each address according to your network environment.
Hint
We recommend that you use a gigabit ethernet adaptor for USB Type-C connections.
Note
When connecting via a wired LAN, use a trusted network. We do not recommend using public networks that are not secure or
networks with unknown origins.
When using a network other than a trusted one, there is a risk of DoS (Denial of Service) attacks and loss of functionality. If you
notice anything unusual, immediately disconnect the camera from the network.
When entering an IP address in [ IP Address Setting], the number/types of characters that can be entered are as follows.
IP Address / Subnet Mask / Default Gateway / Primary DNS Server / Second DNS Server: The maximum length is 15
characters. The types of characters that can be entered are numbers and “.” only.
Not all types of USB-LAN conversion adaptors are guaranteed to operate properly.
Related Topic
Keyboard screen
TP1001655989
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Network) → [Wired LAN] → desired setting.
1
516
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
USB-LAN/Tethering
Connects to the network by connecting a USB-LAN conversion adaptor to the camera or uses a tethering connection on
your smartphone to connect to the network.
Menu item details
USB-LAN Connection:
Connects to the network using a USB-LAN conversion adaptor.
Tethering Connection:
Connects to the network using your smartphone’s tethering connection.
Note
When connecting via USB-LAN, use a trusted network. We do not recommend using public networks that are not secure or
networks with unknown origins.
When using a network other than a trusted one, there is a risk of DoS (Denial of Service) attacks and loss of functionality. If you
notice anything unusual, immediately disconnect the camera from the network.
Only use trusted smartphones for tethering. We do not recommend connecting to devices of unknown origin that are not secure.
TP1001665531
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Network) → [USB-LAN/Tethering] → desired connection method.
To disconnect from the network, select [USB-LAN Disconnection] or [Tethering Disconnection].
1
517
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Airplane Mode
When you board an airplane, etc., you can temporarily disable all the wireless-related functions including Wi-Fi.
TP1001619285
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Network) → [Network Option] → [Airplane Mode] → desired setting.
If you set [Airplane Mode] to [On], an airplane mark will be displayed on the screen.
1
518
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Edit Device Name
You can change the device name for Wi-Fi, [Remote Shooting], or Bluetooth connections.
Note
When entering the device name, the number/types of characters that can be entered are as follows.
The maximum length is 20 characters. The types of characters that can be entered are letters of the alphabet (both uppercase
and lowercase), numbers, and symbols.
Related Topic
WPS Push
Access Point Set.
Operating the camera from a computer (Remote Shoot Function)
Keyboard screen
TP1001619288
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Network) → [Network Option] → [Edit Device Name].
1
Select the input box, then input the device name → [OK].
2
519
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Importing root certification to the camera (Import Root Certificate)
Imports a root certificate needed to verify a server from a memory card.
The root certificate is used when executing encrypted communication during FTP transfers and network streaming, etc.
The root certificate is saved to the camera and can be updated.
Menu item details
FTP Function:
Reads a root certificate to verify the FTP server.
Streaming:
Reads a root certificate to verify the distribution server for network streaming.
Cloud Connection and other functions
*
:
Reads a root certificate to verify the server for the cloud connection or other functions.
Sony will provide “sonycert” used for [Cloud Connection and other functions] as needed. The certificate used in this
function is encrypted, so normal PEM-format certificates cannot be read.
Note
Do not remove the memory card from the camera during read operations.
When the network settings are reset, the root certificate on the camera is reset as well.
The maximum size of a root certificate that can be loaded is 1 MB per certificate.
TP1001656003
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
Save a root certificate to a memory card.
Save the certificate to the root directory of the memory card. Name the file as follows according to the function
you will use.
[FTP Function]: cacert.pem (PEM format)
[Streaming]: RTMPcert.pem (PEM format)
[Cloud Connection and other functions]: sonycert
1
Insert the memory card to which the root certificate has been saved into Slot 1 on the camera.
2
MENU → (Network) → [Network Option] → [Import Root Certificate] → Select a function that uses the
root certificate, and then select [OK].
The root certificate saved to the memory card is read by the camera, and then the root certificate on the camera is
updated.
3
The cloud connection may only be available in certain countries and regions.
*
520
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Access Authen. Settings
Encrypts communications between the camera and device during remote shooting or image transfer.
Menu item details
Access Authen.:
Sets whether to encrypt communication with access authentication. ([On] / [Off])
User:
Sets the username for access authentication.
Password:
Sets the password for access authentication.
Generate Password:
Automatically generates a password for access authentication.
Note
When [Access Authen.] is set to [Off], communication is performed without SSH connection authentication or encryption, so the
content may be intercepted, or the camera may be accessed by an unintended third party.
If unauthorized access is detected, the camera may stop accepting communication. In such cases, reconnect from the beginning.
Before connecting the camera to a smartphone or computer, make sure that [Access Authen.] is not unintentionally set to [Off].
The username and password for [Access Authen. Settings] are automatically generated and set when the camera is purchased.
When setting your own username and password, be careful not to be intercepted by others.
For the password in [Access Authen. Settings], set a character string that is long enough that it is difficult for others to guess, and
keep it securely.
If you unmask your password when entering it, there is a risk that it will be revealed to a third party. Make sure that no one is
around before unmasking.
Initialize the camera before lending or giving it to others.
The numbers/types of characters that can be entered for the following items are as follows.
[User]: The maximum length is 16 characters. The types of characters that can be entered are letters of the alphabet (both
uppercase and lowercase), numbers, and symbols ( ! % . = _ ).
[Password]: The number must be between 8 and 16 characters. The types of characters that can be entered are letters of the
alphabet (both uppercase and lowercase), numbers, and symbols ( ! % . = _ - + , ).
Related Topic
Access Authen. Info
Keyboard screen
TP1001665606
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Network) → [Network Option] → [Access Authen. Settings] → desired setting item.
1
521
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Access Authen. Info
Displays the information required when connecting the camera to a computer or smartphone using access
authentication.
Note
When displaying [Access Authen. Info] on the screen, make sure that no one is around to avoid the information on the screen
being seen by others and to prevent unauthorized use of usernames, passwords, and fingerprints.
Initialize the camera before lending or giving it to others.
Related Topic
Access Authen. Settings
TP1001665605
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Network) → [Network Option] → [Access Authen. Info].
The information required to connect such as the username, password, MAC address, and fingerprint of this camera
are displayed.
1
522
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Wi-Fi Direct Settings
Changes the Wi-Fi Direct setting to improve connection compatibility.
Menu item details
Type1 (Standard):
Connects via Wi-Fi Direct in a standard format.
It is recommended that you normally set [Wi-Fi Direct Settings] to [Type1 (Standard)].
Type2:
Set to [Type2] only if you cannot connect via Wi-Fi Direct with the [Type1 (Standard)] setting.
This may improve the Wi-Fi Direct connection.
Note
If you change the setting when the Wi-Fi connection is normal, it may affect connections with external devices.
TP1001691230
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Network) → [Network Option] → [Wi-Fi Direct Settings]→ desired setting.
1
523
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Reset Network Set.
Resets all the network settings to default settings.
[Airplane Mode] will not be reset to [Off] even if you perform [Reset Network Set.] when [Airplane Mode] is set to [On].
Note
Even if you execute [Reset Network Set.], your Creators' Cloud account information will not be deleted. Your Creators' Cloud
account information can be deleted in [Cloud Information].
Related Topic
Displaying cloud connection information (Cloud Information)
TP1001651501
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Network) → [Network Option] → [Reset Network Set.] → [Enter].
1
524
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
FTP Transfer Func.
You can set up image transferring using an FTP server or transfer images to the FTP server. Basic knowledge of FTP
servers is required.
For details, refer to the “FTP Help Guide.”
https://rd1.sony.net/help/di/ftp_2530/h_zz/
Related Topic
Importing root certification to the camera (Import Root Certificate)
TP1001655986
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Network) → [FTP Transfer] → [FTP Transfer Func.] → desired setting.
1
525
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Monitor Brightness
Adjust the brightness of the screen.
Menu item details
Manual:
Adjusts the brightness within the range of –2 to +2.
Sunny Weather:
Sets the brightness appropriately for shooting outdoors.
Note
The [Sunny Weather] setting is too bright for shooting indoors. Set [Monitor Brightness] to [Manual] for indoor shooting.
TP1001642629
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Finder/Monitor] → [Monitor Brightness] → desired setting.
1
526
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Viewfinder Bright.
When using the viewfinder, this product adjusts the brightness of the viewfinder according to the surrounding
environment.
Menu item details
Auto:
Adjusts the brightness automatically.
Manual:
Selects the desired brightness from the setting values.
Note
When the temperature of the camera rises, the viewfinder may become dark.
TP1001642656
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Finder/Monitor] → [Viewfinder Bright.] → desired setting.
1
527
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Finder Color Temp.
Adjusts the color temperature of the viewfinder.
Menu item details
-2 to +2:
When you select “-,” the viewfinder screen changes to a warmer color, and when you select “+,” it changes to a colder
color.
TP1001651424
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Finder/Monitor] → [Finder Color Temp.] → desired setting.
1
528
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Finder Frame Rate (still image)
Display the subject’s movements more smoothly by adjusting the frame rate of the viewfinder during still image shooting.
This function is convenient when shooting a fast-moving subject.
Menu item details
Standard:
Displays the subject at a normal frame rate on the viewfinder.
High:
Displays the movements of the subject more smoothly on the viewfinder.
Note
When [ Finder Frame Rate] is set to [High], [ Display Quality] is locked to [Standard].
Even when [ Finder Frame Rate] is set to [High], the setting may switch to [Standard] automatically depending on the
temperature of the shooting environment and the shooting conditions.
The frame rate is restricted in the following situations:
During playback
During HDMI connection
When the temperature inside the camera’s body is high
Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
TP1001651500
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Finder/Monitor] → [ Finder Frame Rate] → desired setting.
This function can be assigned to key of your choice using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.].
1
529
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Monitor Off (still image)
Sets whether or not to turn the monitor off automatically in shooting modes for still images.
Menu item details
Does not turn OFF:
Does not turn the monitor off.
2 Sec/5 Sec/10 Sec/1 Min:
Turns the monitor off after the designated time has been elapsed without any operation performed.
You can resume shooting by performing an operation, such as pressing the shutter button halfway down.
Note
If you will not be using the camera for a long period of time, turn the camera off.
TP1001661315
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Power Setting Option] → [ Monitor Off] → desired setting.
1
530
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Power Save Start Time
Sets the amount of time that the camera will wait before going into the power save mode if it is not in use (except when
powered from a computer or smartphone). You can resume shooting by pressing the shutter button halfway down or
performing other operations.
Menu item details
Off/30 Min/5 Min/2 Min/1 Min/10 Sec
Note
Turn off the product when you do not use it for a long time.
When [Power Save Start Time] is set to [Off] or [30 Min], power consumption becomes higher than usual.
The power save function is deactivated in the following situations:
When powered via USB from a computer or other device
While playing back slideshows
During FTP transfer
While recording movies
While connected to a computer or TV
When [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] is set to [On]
While streaming
While uploading images to Creators' Cloud
TP1001642663
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Power Setting Option] → [Power Save Start Time] → desired setting.
1
531
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Power Save by Monitor
Sets whether or not to enable power save linkage when the monitor is opened or closed facing inward.
Menu item details
Both Linked :
Enables power save linkage with the monitor. The camera returns from power saving mode when the monitor is opened,
and enters power saving mode when the monitor is closed facing inward.
Open: Return :
The camera returns from power saving mode when the monitor is opened.
Close: Power Save :
The camera enters power saving mode when the monitor is closed facing inward.
Does Not Link :
Disables power save linkage with the monitor.
TP1001662611
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Power Setting Option] → [Power Save by Monitor] → desired setting.
1
532
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Auto Power OFF Temp.
Sets the temperature of the camera at which the camera turns off automatically during shooting. When it is set to [High],
you can continue shooting even when the temperature of the camera gets hotter than normal.
Menu item details
Standard:
Sets the standard temperature for the camera to turn off.
High:
Sets the temperature at which the camera turns off to higher than [Standard].
Notes when [Auto Power OFF Temp.] is set to [High]
Do not shoot while holding the camera in your hand. Use a tripod.
Using the camera while holding it in your hand for a long period of time may cause low-temperature burns.
Continuous recording time for movies when [Auto Power OFF Temp.] is set to [High]
The duration of time available for continuous movie recording is as follows when the camera starts recording with the
default settings after the power has been turned off for a while. The following values indicate the continuous time from
when the camera starts recording until the camera stops recording.
Ambient temperature: 25°C (77°F)
Continuous recording time for movies (HD): Approx. 90 minutes
Continuous recording time for movies (4K): Approx. 60 minutes
Ambient temperature: 40°C (104°F)
Continuous recording time for movies (HD): Approx. 90 minutes
Continuous recording time for movies (4K): Approx. 60 minutes
HD: XAVC S HD (59.94p 50M/50p 50M 4:2:0 8bit; when the camera is not connected via Wi-Fi; when using a CFexpress
Type A memory card; when the monitor is open)
4K: XAVC S 4K (59.94p 150M/50p 150M 4:2:0 8bit; when the camera is not connected via Wi-Fi; when using a
CFexpress Type A memory card; when the monitor is open)
Note
Even if [Auto Power OFF Temp.] is set to [High], depending on the conditions or the temperature of the camera, the recordable
time for movies may not change.
Related Topic
Recordable movie times
TP1001655985
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Power Setting Option] → [Auto Power OFF Temp.] → desired setting.
1
533
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Fan Control (movie)
Sets the control method for the cooling fan, which keeps the temperature of the camera from rising.
Menu item details
Auto:
Operates the cooling fan automatically based on the internal temperature of the camera.
Minimum:
Operates the cooling fan while suppressing operating sounds, unless the internal temperature of the camera exceeds a
certain temperature.
Off in Rec:
Does not operate the cooling fan while recording movies, unless the internal temperature of the camera exceeds a
certain temperature. The fan rotates at the maximum speed when not recording.
TP1001661342
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Setup Option] → [ Fan Control] → desired setting.
1
534
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Display Quality (still image)
You can change the display quality.
Menu item details
High:
Displays in high quality.
Standard:
Displays in standard quality.
Hint
If the viewfinder displays flickering (moiré patterns or jaggies) in fine lines, etc., this may be improved by selecting [High].
Note
When [High] is set, battery consumption will be higher than when [Standard] is set.
When the temperature of the camera rises, the setting may become locked to [Standard].
When [ Finder Frame Rate] is set to [High], [ Display Quality] becomes locked to [Standard].
When “-” is displayed as the setting value for [ Display Quality], you cannot view or change the setting. Set [ Finder Frame
Rate] to [Standard] to change the setting for [ Display Quality].
TP1001619255
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Finder/Monitor] → [ Display Quality] → desired setting.
1
535
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
USB Connection Mode
Selects the USB connection method when the camera is connected to a computer, etc.
Menu item details
Sel. When Connect:
Each time you connect the USB cable to the camera, select the mode you want to use from the following. ([Live
Stream(USB Streaming)], [Image Transfer (MSC)], [Image Transfer (MTP)], or [Remote Shoot/Trn.])
USB Streaming:
Performs USB streaming via the connected computer or smartphone.
MassStorage(MSC):
Establishes a Mass Storage connection when connecting the camera to a computer, etc.
When you connect the camera to a computer or other USB device, the camera is recognized as a removable disk, and
you can transfer files on the camera.
MTP:
Establishes an MTP connection between the camera, a computer, and other USB devices.
When you connect the camera to a computer or other USB device, the camera is recognized as a media device, and you
can transfer still images/movies on the camera.
The memory card in memory card slot 1 is the connection target.
Remote Shoot/Trn.:
Uses Imaging Edge Desktop (Remote) to control the product from a computer, including such functions as shooting and
storing images on the computer. You can also use Creators' App to shoot images remotely and transfer images to your
smartphone via a USB connection.
Related Topic
USB Streaming (movie)
Importing images to the computer
Operating the camera from a computer (Remote Shoot Function)
TP1001619261
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [USB] → [USB Connection Mode] → desired setting.
1
536
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
USB LUN Setting
Enhances compatibility by limiting of USB connection functions.
Menu item details
Multi:
Normally, use [Multi].
Single:
Set [USB LUN Setting] to [Single] only if you cannot make a connection.
TP1001619262
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [USB] → [USB LUN Setting] → desired setting.
1
537
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
USB Power Supply
Sets whether to supply power via the USB cable when the product is connected to a computer or an USB device.
Menu item details
On:
Power is supplied to the product via a USB cable when the product is connected to a computer, etc.
Off:
Power is not supplied to the product via a USB cable when the product is connected to a computer, etc.
Operations available while supplying power via a USB cable
The following table shows you which operations are available/unavailable while supplying power via a USB cable.
Note
Insert the battery pack into the product to supply power via USB cable.
This product cannot be powered via the Multi/Micro USB terminal. Use the USB Type-C terminal.
TP1001642665
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [USB] → [USB Power Supply] → desired setting.
1
Operation Available / Unavailable
Shooting images Available
Playing back images Available
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connections Available
Charging a battery pack Unavailable
Turning the camera on without a battery pack inserted Unavailable
538
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
HDMI Resolution
When you connect the camera to a TV or monitor device using an HDMI cable (sold separately), you can select the
resolution to be output from the HDMI terminal of the camera during still image shooting or playback.
Menu item details
Auto:
The camera automatically recognizes the resolution of the connected TV or output device and sets the output resolution
accordingly.
2160p:
Outputs signals in 2160p.
1080p:
Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080p).
1080i:
Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080i).
Note
If images are not displayed properly using the [Auto] setting, select [1080i], [1080p], or [2160p] based on the connected TV.
TP1001619259
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [External Output] → [ HDMI Resolution] → desired setting.
1
539
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
HDMI Output Settings (movie)
Sets the video and audio to be output to an external recorder/player connected via HDMI when shooting a movie.
Use a Premium High Speed HDMI Cable (sold separately) to output 4K movies or RAW movies.
Menu item details
Rec. Media dur HDMI Output:
Sets whether or not to record movies on the memory card of the camera during HDMI output.
[On]: Records movies on the memory card of the camera, and outputs the movies to the HDMI-connected device at the
same time. The color depth for the output movie is based on [Record Setting] under [ Movie Settings].
[Off(HDMI Only)]: Does not record movies on the memory card of the camera, and outputs movies only to devices
connected via HDMI.
Output Resolution:
Sets the resolution of the image that will be output to another device connected via HDMI when [Rec. Media dur HDMI
Output] is set to [On] and [RAW Output] is set to [Off]. ([Auto] / [2160p] / [1080p] / [1080i])
4K Output Set.(HDMI Only):
Sets the frame rate and color depth of 4K movie output to another device connected via HDMI when [Rec. Media dur
HDMI Output] is set to [Off(HDMI Only)] and [RAW Output] is set to [Off]. ([59.94p 10bit] / [50p 10bit] / [29.97p 10bit] /
[25p 10bit] / [23.98p 10bit] / [24.00p 10bit])
RAW Output:
Sets whether or not to output RAW movies to another RAW-compatible device connected via HDMI. ([On] / [Off])
RAW Output Setting:
Sets the frame rate when outputting RAW movies to another RAW-compatible device connected via HDMI. ([59.94p] /
[50p] / [29.97p] / [25p] / [23.98p] / [24.00p])
Time Code Output:
Sets whether or not to output the time code and user bit to another device connected via HDMI. ([On] / [Off])
Time code information is transmitted as digital data, not as an image displayed on the screen. The connected device can
then refer to the digital data in order to recognize the time data.
REC Control:
Sets whether to start or stop recording on the external recorder/player remotely by operating the camera when the
camera is connected to an external recorder/player. ([On] / [Off])
4ch Audio Output:
When recording audio in 4 channels, set the combination of audio channels that will be output to other devices connected
via HDMI.
[CH1/CH2]: Outputs audio from channel 1 to the L (left) side and from channel 2 to the R (right) side.
[CH3/CH4]: Outputs audio from channel 3 to the L (left) side and from channel 4 to the R (right) side.
Hint
With [REC Control] set to [On], (STBY) is displayed when a recording command is ready to be sent to the external
recorder/player, and (REC) is displayed when a recording command is being sent to the external recorder/player.
Even when playing back a movie with 4 channels on a device connected to the HDMI terminal of the camera, the audio is output
with the [4ch Audio Output] setting.
MENU → (Setup) → [External Output] → [ HDMI Output Settings] → desired setting item.
1
540
When outputting RAW movies to another device connected via HDMI, set [ Log Shooting] under [ Log Shooting Setting] to
a setting other than [Off]. The setting for [ Color Gamut] under [ Log Shooting Setting] is applied to RAW movies output via
HDMI.
Note
RAW movies cannot be recorded on the memory card of the camera.
When [Fixed/Variable Select] is set to [Variable], [Rec. Media dur HDMI Output] is locked to [On] and [RAW Output] is locked to
[Off]. It is not possible to only output 4K movies to a device connected via HDMI without recording the movies on a memory card.
It is also not possible to output RAW movies.
When [Rec. Media dur HDMI Output] is set to [Off(HDMI Only)] or the camera outputs RAW movies, [HDMI Info. Display]
becomes temporarily set to [Off].
When [Rec. Media dur HDMI Output] is set to [Off(HDMI Only)], the counter does not move forward (the actual recording time is
not counted) while the movie is being recorded on an external recorder/player.
When [RAW Output] is set to [On], the output image will be in the APS-C size/Super-35mm-equivalent angle of view.
When [ Log Shooting] under [ Log Shooting Setting] is set to [Off], [RAW Output] is locked to [Off].
Regardless of the [Output Resolution] setting, the HDMI output resolution will be 1080 in the following cases.*
When [ Log Shooting] under [ Log Shooting Setting] is set to an item other than [Off]
When [ Picture Profile] is set to PPLUT1-PPLUT4
[REC Control] can be used with external recorders/players that support the [REC Control] function.
When [Time Code Output] is set to [Off], you cannot set [REC Control].
Even when (REC) is displayed, the external recorder/player may not work properly depending on the settings or status of
the recorder/player. Check if the external recorder/player works properly before use.
When [Time Code Output] is set to [On], images may not be output properly to the TV or recording device. In this case, set [Time
Code Output] to [Off].
It is not possible to output audio in 4 channels to other devices connected via HDMI.
The gamma is locked to S-Log3 during RAW output.
While outputting RAW movies, you cannot use [Active] and [Dynamic active] for [ SteadyShot].
TP1001659795
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
However, when [Rec. Media dur HDMI Output] is set to [Off(HDMI Only)] or [RAW Output] is set to [On], the video is output in 4K.
*
541
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
HDMI Info. Display
Selects whether or not to display shooting information on a TV or a monitor device when the camera and TV, etc. are
connected via an HDMI cable (sold separately).
Menu item details
On:
Displays the shooting information on the TV.
The recorded image and shooting information are displayed on the TV, while nothing is displayed on the camera’s
monitor.
Off:
Does not display the shooting information on the TV.
Only the recorded image is displayed on the TV, while the recorded image and shooting information are displayed on the
camera’s monitor.
Note
If the camera is connected to a TV or monitor, etc. via an HDMI cable, the playback screen will not be displayed in the viewfinder.
TP1001619263
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [External Output] → [HDMI Info. Display] → desired setting.
1
542
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
CTRL FOR HDMI
When connecting this product to a TV using an HDMI cable (sold separately), you can operate this product by aiming the
TV remote control at the TV.
Menu item details
On:
You can operate this product with a TV’s remote control.
Off:
You cannot operate this product with a TV’s remote control.
Note
If you connect this product to a TV using an HDMI cable, available menu items are limited.
If the product performs unwanted operations in response to the TV remote control, set [CTRL FOR HDMI] to [Off].
TP1001619260
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [External Output] → [CTRL FOR HDMI] → desired setting.
1
Connect this product to a TV.
The input of the TV is switched automatically and images on this product are displayed on the TV screen.
The operation method differs depending on the TV you are using. For details, refer to the operating instructions
supplied with the TV.
2
543
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Area/Date/Time Setting
You can set the area (where you are using the camera), daylight savings ([On]/[Off]), the date display format, and the
date and time.
The Area/Date/Time setting screen will be displayed automatically if you did not register your smartphone in the initial
setup or when the internal rechargeable backup battery has fully discharged. Select this menu to set the date and time
after the first time.
Menu item details
Area Setting:
Sets the area where you are using the camera.
Daylight Savings:
Selects Daylight Savings [On] / [Off].
Date/Time:
Sets the date and time.
You can switch the time display format (24-hour or 12-hour format) by pressing the (Delete) button.
Date Format:
Selects the date display format.
Hint
To charge the internal rechargeable backup battery, insert a charged battery pack, and leave the product for 24 hours or more
with the power off.
If the clock resets every time the battery is charged, the internal rechargeable backup battery may be worn out. Consult your
service facility.
Related Topic
Performing initial setup for the camera
TP1001619265
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Area/Date] → [Area/Date/Time Setting] → desired setting.
1
545
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Audio Signal(Shooting)
Selects whether or not the camera produces a sound when it focuses and during self-timer shooting.
Menu item details
On:all:
The shutter produces sounds, and sounds are produced for example when the focus is achieved by pressing the shutter
button halfway down.
On:w/o shutter:
Sounds are produced when focusing by pressing the shutter button halfway down, etc. The electronic shutter does not
produce any sounds.
On:shutter only:
Only the electronic shutter produces sounds. Sounds are not produced when focusing by pressing the shutter button
halfway down, etc.
Off:
Sounds are not produced.
Hint
When [Silent Mode] is set to [On], [Audio Signal(Shooting)] becomes locked to [Off].
Note
If the focus mode is set to [Continuous AF], the camera will not beep when it focuses on a subject.
Related Topic
Silent Mode Settings (still image/movie)
TP1001651550
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Sound Option] → [Audio Signal(Shooting)] → desired setting.
1
547
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Audio Signal(Start/End)
Sets whether or not the camera produces an electronic sound when it starts up and shuts down.
Menu item details
On:
An electronic sound is produced when the camera starts up and shuts down.
Off:
An electronic sound is not produced when the camera starts up and shuts down.
Note
When [Silent Mode] is set to [On], [Audio Signal(Start/End)] is locked to [Off].
Related Topic
Silent Mode Settings (still image/movie)
TP1001663313
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Sound Option] → [Audio Signal(Start/End)] → desired setting.
1
548
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Audio Signal Volume
Sets the volume of audio signals from the camera, such as the shutter sound and the sound when the focus is achieved.
Hint
The camera does not output audio signals when [Audio Signal Volume] is set to [0].
Note
You cannot check the sound volume while setting the sound volume level in the following situations.
When [Audio signals] is set to [Off]
When [Silent Mode] under [ Silent Mode Settings] is set to [On]
During movie recording
TP1001667093
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Sound Option] → [Audio Signal Volume].
1
Select the desired level using the left/right side of the control wheel.
You can check the sound volume by pressing the (Delete) button while setting the sound volume level.
2
549
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
REC Lamp
Sets whether to turn on the recording lamps during movie recording.
Menu item details
All On:
Turns on all recording lamps.
Only Front Off:
Does not turn on the recording lamp on the front side, but turns on the recording lamp on the rear side and the REC
(recording) button.
All Off:
Does not turn on any of the recording lamps.
Hint
Change the recording lamp settings when there is an object that reflects light, such as glass, in the direction of shooting.
The REC (recording) button on the top lights up along with the recording lamp on the rear side.
TP1001661343
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Setup Option] → [REC Lamp] → desired setting.
1
550
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Video Light Mode
Sets the illumination setting for the HVL-LBPC LED light (sold separately).
Menu item details
Power Link:
The video light turns on/off in sync with the ON/OFF operation of this camera.
REC Link:
The video light turns on/off in sync with movie recording start/stop.
REC Link&STBY:
The video light turns on when movie recording starts and dims when not recording (STBY).
Auto:
The video light automatically turns on when it is dark.
TP1001651461
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Setup Option] → [Video Light Mode] → desired setting.
1
551
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Anti-dust Function
If dust or debris gets inside the camera and adheres to the surface of the image sensor, clean the image sensor using
[Sensor Cleaning]. You can also set whether or not to close the shutter when you turn off the camera so that dust or
debris is prevented from adhering to the image sensor.
Menu item details
Sensor Cleaning:
The image sensor vibrates a little to shake off the dust. Use a commercially available blower to clean the image sensor
surface if necessary.
Shutter When Pwr OFF:
Sets whether to close the shutter when you turn off the camera. ([On]/[Off])
If you select [On], the shutter will close when you turn the camera off with the power switch. Note that it may take
some time for the shutter to close after the power is turned off.
Also, a shutter sound is heard when the camera is turned on/off.
Hint
To clean the image sensor by yourself, execute [Sensor Cleaning] or set [Shutter When Pwr OFF] to [Off].
Note
When [Shutter When Pwr OFF] is set to [On], attach the lens cap before storing the camera. Otherwise, a strong light source
(such as sunlight) may become focused inside the camera, causing smoke or fire. Even if the light source is slightly away from
the angle of view, it may still cause smoke or fire when the lens cap is not attached.
Do not touch the closed shutter with your fingers or clean it with a blower. The shutter may become damaged.
If there is a risk of water droplets adhering to the shutter, set [Shutter When Pwr OFF] to [Off]. If [Shutter When Pwr OFF] is set to
[On], water droplets may adhere to the shutter and cause a malfunction.
Make sure that the remaining battery level is 51% or more before performing [Sensor Cleaning].
Even if [Shutter When Pwr OFF] is set to [On], the shutter will not close when the power turns off due to activation of the power-
saving mode or battery exhaustion. In this case, you can close the shutter by turning the camera on and off again.
Related Topic
Cleaning the image sensor (Sensor Cleaning)
TP1001661348
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Setup Option] → [Anti-dust Function] → desired setting item.
1
552
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Auto Pixel Mapping
Sets whether or not to automatically optimize the image sensor (pixel mapping). Normally, set this function to [On].
Menu item details
On:
Performs pixel mapping automatically at regular intervals when you turn off the camera.
During this time, shutter sounds will be produced.
Off:
Does not perform pixel mapping automatically.
Hint
If [Auto Pixel Mapping] is set to [Off], perform [Pixel Mapping] regularly. We recommend that you perform the operation once
every three days.
Note
If [Pixel Mapping] is not performed regularly, bright spots may appear in recorded images.
Related Topic
Silent Mode Settings (still image/movie)
TP1001659782
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Setup Option] → [Auto Pixel Mapping] → desired setting.
1
553
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Pixel Mapping
You can manually optimize the image sensor (pixel mapping). If [Auto Pixel Mapping] is set to [Off], perform [Pixel
Mapping] regularly according to the following procedure. We recommend that you perform the operation once every three
days.
Hint
If you see bright spots in a recorded image on the camera monitor, immediately perform [Pixel Mapping].
Note
Pixel mapping cannot be performed when the battery is low.
If [Pixel Mapping] is not performed regularly, bright spots may appear in recorded images.
Related Topic
Auto Pixel Mapping
TP1001659796
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Setup Option] → select [Pixel Mapping].
1
Select [OK] on the confirmation screen.
Pixel mapping will be performed.
The camera cannot be operated during pixel mapping.
The camera will restart when pixel mapping is complete.
2
554
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Version
Displays the version of this product’s software. Check the version when updates for this product’s software are released,
etc.
Also displays the version of the lens if a lens compatible with firmware updates is attached.
The version of the Mount Adaptor is displayed in the lens area if a Mount Adaptor compatible with firmware updates is
attached.
Menu item details
Body:
Displays the firmware version of the camera body.
Lens:
Displays the firmware version of the lens when a lens that supports firmware updates is attached.
Hint
You can also save the downloaded firmware data to a memory card and use the memory card to update the firmware of the
camera.
Note
Updating can be performed only when the remaining battery level is 51% or more. Use a sufficiently charged battery pack.
TP1001662566
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Setup Option] → [Version].
When the camera is connected to the Internet, software information is obtained. If new software is available,
information about it will be displayed.
1
555
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Screen Reader
Sets the function for reading aloud information such as text on the screen.
Only some languages may be supported for this function depending on the model. This function is available only when
the language set in the menu is supported by this function.
Menu item details
Screen Reader:
Sets whether to use the function to read aloud. ([On]/[Off])
Speed:
Sets the speed when reading aloud.
Volume:
Sets the volume when reading aloud.
Long Press to Switch:
Sets whether to enable the function to switch the screen reader function on and off by pressing and holding the MENU
button. ([On]/[Off])
Screen Reader Language:
Selects the language to use when reading aloud.
You can also remove any additional language that you have installed for the screen reader.
To update the screen reader data
When you update the camera’s system software, you may need to update the screen reader data accordingly.
If the screen reader data needs updating, a red notification badge will appear over [Screen Reader Language] on the
menu screen. In that case, update your screen reader data via the following procedure.
To add a language for the screen reader
In addition to the pre-installed language, you can install one additional language as a screen reader language (this may
vary depending on the country or region).
Before installing the additional language for the screen reader, be sure to update the camera′s system software to the
latest version.
MENU → (Setup) → [ Accessibility] → [Screen Reader] → desired setting item.
1
Download the audio data file “SCREADER.DAT” from the website below.
https://www.sony.net/di-screen_reader
1.
Save the audio data file “SCREADER.DAT” in the root directory of your memory card.2.
Insert the memory card containing the audio data file into the memory card slot of the camera and turn the camera
on.
A confirmation screen for updating the audio data will be displayed.
3.
Select [OK].
The update will begin.
Do not remove the memory card during the update.
4.
Download the audio data file “SCREADER.DAT” from the website below.
https://www.sony.net/di-screen_reader
1.
558
Hint
[ Long Press to Switch] is set to [On] in the default settings. Therefore, you can use the screen reader function by pressing
and holding the MENU button on the initial setup screen of the camera. Additionally, you can switch the screen reader function on
and off by pressing and holding the MENU button after the initial setup.
You can set the camera to make a sound when it is turned on or off by setting [Audio Signal(Start/End)] to [On].
Once the installation is complete, the audio data file on the memory card will be deleted. If you want to reinstall the audio data,
save the audio data file to the memory card again.
The screen reader data will not be deleted even if you perform [Camera Settings Reset] or [Initialize] using [Setting Reset].
Note
If the camera’s system software is not updated, the screen reader data cannot be updated. Update the camera’s system software
first.
If the audio data file is saved anywhere other than the root directory of the memory card, the update cannot be performed.
Do not change the file name of the audio data file.
Updating the screen reader data will not delete the audio data file saved on the memory card. If audio data file remains saved on
the memory card, the screen for updating the screen reader data will be displayed every time the camera is turned on. Once the
screen reader data update is complete, delete the audio data file saved on the memory card using a computer or other device.
TP1001662598
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
Save the audio data file “SCREADER.DAT” in the root directory of your memory card.2.
Insert the memory card containing the audio data file into the memory card slot of the camera and turn the camera
on.
A confirmation screen for updating the audio data will be displayed.
3.
Press the (Delete) button to display a list of languages that can be installed.4.
Select the language you want to add and follow the on-screen instructions to install it.
A confirmation screen for changing the language setting will be displayed.
5.
If you want to change the language immediately, select [OK].
The language for the screen reader and the on-screen display will be changed simultaneously.
Once the audio data has been installed, you will be able to change the language for the screen reader from
MENU → (Setup) → [ Accessibility] → [Screen Reader] → [Screen Reader Language].
6.
559
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Enlarge Screen
You can enlarge the menu screen display. (Some menu screens do not support the enlarging function.)
Menu item details
Enlarge Menu Scrn:
Sets whether or not to use the function to enlarge the screen display. ([Off]/[On (Custom Btn 2)])
When you select [On (Custom Btn 2)], the screen display is enlarged by pressing the 2 button (Custom button 2).
Magnification:
Sets the magnification to use for the function to enlarge the screen display. ([x1.5]/[x2.0]/[x2.5])
To magnify the menu screen display
On the menu screen, press the button specified in [Enlarge Menu Scrn] to magnify the screen display.
You can move the displayed position using the multi-selector, front dial, or rear dial or by turning the control wheel.
Each time you press the button, the magnification scale changes.
To cancel the magnified display, press the button repeatedly until the screen display is back to normal.
Hint
You can move between items using the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel even when the screen display is magnified.
You can also confirm items using the center button.
You can move the displayed position using touch operations while the screen display is magnified when [Touch Operation] is set
to [On] and [Menu Screen] under [Touch Panel Settings] is set to [On].
You can also assign [Enlarge Menu Scrn] to some buttons using [ Custom Key/Dial Set.]/[ Custom Key/Dial Set.].
A message confirming whether to set [Select Finder/Monitor] to [Monitor(Manual)] appears when [Enlarge Menu Scrn] is set to
anything other than [Off]. It is recommended that you set [Select Finder/Monitor] to [Monitor(Manual)] while using the [Enlarge
Screen] function to prevent the eye sensor from activating and switching to the viewfinder display when you bring your face close
to the monitor.
To restore the setting for [Select Finder/Monitor], select [Select Finder/Monitor] and change the setting.
Related Topic
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons and dials (Custom Key/Dial Set.)
Select Finder/Monitor
TP1001667094
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [ Accessibility] → [Enlarge Screen] → Select an item to set, and then select the
desired setting.
1
560
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Save/Load Settings
You can save/load camera settings to/from a memory card. You can also load settings from another camera of the same
model.
Menu item details
Load:
Loads the settings from a memory card to this camera.
Save:
Saves the current settings of this camera to a memory card.
Delete:
Deletes the settings saved on a memory card.
Settings that cannot be saved
The following setting parameters cannot be saved using the [Save/Load Settings] function. (Menu items without setting
parameters, such as, [Focus Magnifier], are not listed.)
(Shooting)
IPTC Information
Copyright Info
(Exposure/Color)
External Flash Set.
White Balance: Custom 1/Custom 2/Custom 3
(Focus)
Face Memory
(Network)
FTP Transfer Func.*
Network Streaming
Cloud Connection
WPS Push
Access Point Set.
Wi-Fi Frequency Band
IP Address Setting
Edit Device Name
Import Root Certificate
Access Authen. Settings
MENU → (Setup) → [Reset/Save Settings] → [Save/Load Settings] → desired item.
1
You can save or load settings under [FTP Transfer Func.] by selecting MENU → (Network) → [FTP Transfer] → [FTP Transfer Func.] →
[Save/Load FTP Settings]. For details, refer to the “FTP Help Guide.”
https://rd1.sony.net/help/di/ftp_2530/h_zz/
*
561
(Setup)
Language
Area/Date/Time Setting
Note
You can save up to 10 settings per memory card. When 10 settings have been already saved, you cannot perform [Save New].
Delete the existing settings using [Delete], or overwrite them.
Only Slot 1 is used for saving or loading data. You cannot change the saving/loading destination slot.
You cannot load settings from a camera of a different model.
Even if the model name is the same, settings from a camera with a different system software version may fail to load.
You can use this function to save settings registered to [ Camera Set. Memory]. However, [Save/Load Settings] is unavailable
when the shooting mode is set to [Memory recall]. Set the shooting mode to a mode other than MR (Memory recall) before using
this function.
TP1001658842
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
562
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Setting Reset
Resets the product to the default settings. Even if you perform [Setting Reset], the recorded images are retained.
Menu item details
Camera Settings Reset:
Initializes the main shooting settings to the default settings. The setting values for both still image shooting and movie
recording are initialized.
Initialize:
Initializes all the settings to the default settings.
Note
Be sure not to eject the battery pack while resetting.
If you perform [Initialize], the privacy notice agreement will also be initialized, so agree to the privacy notice again before using the
camera.
The settings for [ Picture Profile] are not reset even when [Camera Settings Reset] or [Initialize] is performed, except the
settings for PPLUT 1 - 4.
The check mark for [Picture Profile] in [Different Set for Still/Mv] is not reset when you perform either [Camera Settings Reset] or
[Initialize].
The security and network settings are not deleted when you perform [Camera Settings Reset].
To reset the security and network settings to the default settings, perform either [Reset Network Set.] or [Initialize]. However, even
if you perform [Reset Network Set.] when [Airplane Mode] is set to [On], [Airplane Mode] will not be reset to [Off].
TP1001619275
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Setup) → [Reset/Save Settings] → [Setting Reset] → desired setting.
1
563
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Functions available with a smartphone (Creators' App)
Using the smartphone application Creators' App, you can shoot an image while controlling the camera using a
smartphone or transfer the images recorded on the camera to the smartphone.
Download and install the application Creators' App from your smartphone’s application store. If Creators' App is already
installed on your smartphone, be sure to update it to the latest version.
For details on Creators' App, refer to the following website.
https://www.sony.net/ca/
Hint
You can also install Creators' App by scanning the QR Code displayed on the screen of the camera using your smartphone.
Note
Depending on future version upgrades, the operational procedures or screen displays are subject to change without notice.
Supported smartphones
Refer to the support page for the latest information.
https://www.sony.net/ca/help/mobile/
For details on Bluetooth versions compatible with your smartphone, check the product website for your smartphone.
TP1001642667
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
564
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Monitor & Control
Monitor & Control is a smartphone application that supports monitoring and remote shooting functions required for movie
shooting.
Monitor & Control provides detailed live view and remote shooting controls by using the screen of your smartphone as a
monitor for movie shooting.
Download and install the application Monitor & Control from your smartphone's application store. If Monitor & Control is
already installed on your smartphone, be sure to update it to the latest version.
For details on Monitor & Control, refer to the following website.
https://www.sony.net/ccmc/
TP1001667133
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
565
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Pairing the camera with a smartphone (Smartphone Connection)
Connects the camera to your smartphone (pairing) to use the smartphone application Creators' App.
If you did not connect the camera with your smartphone when you turned on the camera for the first time, perform the
following procedure.
The following is the procedure for connecting the camera to your smartphone when you install Creators' App on your
smartphone for the first time.
: Operations performed on the smartphone
: Operations performed on the camera
Connecting to a smartphone via a Wi-Fi access point
After pairing in steps 1 to 4, connect the camera and smartphone to the same Wi-Fi access point by selecting MENU on
the camera → (Network) → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Connect] → [On]. After that, follow the instructions on the smartphone
screen to connect the camera and smartphone.
If you have used Creators' App with other cameras
Launch Creators' App after Step 2, open the [Cameras] screen, select the (Add Camera) button, and follow the
instructions on the screen to continue the operation.
About the icons when connecting to a smartphone
Bluetooth connection available / Bluetooth connection unavailable
Connected to Wi-Fi (via a Wi-Fi access point)
: On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [ Cnct./Remote Sht.] → [Smartphone Connection].
1
: Follow the instructions on the screen and set [Bluetooth Function] to [On].
A screen for waiting for a connection from the app will appear.
If [Bluetooth Function] is already set to [On], the screen for waiting for a connection from the app will appear
immediately.
2
: Launch Creators' App on your smartphone.
3
: Follow the instructions on the screen to pair the camera with your smartphone.
When the connection is completed, a menu to select a function for the camera appears on the smartphone.
4
: On the smartphone screen, select the desired function.
5
566
Disconnected from Wi-Fi (via a Wi-Fi access point)
Connected to Wi-Fi/Disconnected from Wi-Fi (Wi-Fi Direct)
Connecting the camera and smartphone without pairing
If you want to connect without pairing, you need to perform the Wi-Fi connection operation every time. In addition, some
functions are limited when only using a Wi-Fi connection.
Note
To ensure a secure wireless LAN connection, we strongly recommend using an access point with WPA3 or WPA2 security
settings. Connecting to an access point without security settings may result in hacking, access from malicious third parties, or
attacks on vulnerabilities. Unless there is a specific reason, we do not recommend using an access point without security settings.
When establishing a Bluetooth connection, only pair with trusted devices. Avoid unsolicited pairing requests or connections to
unknown devices.
Turn off the Bluetooth function when not in use.
Check your paired devices regularly and delete any unnecessary ones.
[Smartphone Connection] cannot be executed when [Airplane Mode] is set to [On].
Up to 2 devices can be connected to the camera at the same time using Bluetooth communication.
Radio wave interference may occur as Bluetooth communications and Wi-Fi (2.4 GHz) communications use the same frequency
band. If your Wi-Fi connection is unstable, it may be improved by turning off the Bluetooth function of the smartphone.
The Bluetooth icon is not displayed when the touch function icons are displayed in the movie recording mode. To see the
Bluetooth icon, swipe the touch function icons left or right to hide the touch function icons.
Related Topic
Functions available with a smartphone (Creators' App)
Using a smartphone as a remote commander
Select on Cam & Send (transferring to a smartphone)
Cnct. while Power OFF (smartphone)
Reading location information from a smartphone
TP1001662594
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [ Cnct./Remote Sht.] → [Smartphone Connection].1.
Press the (Delete) button on the camera to switch to the screen for Wi-Fi connections.
The SSID and password will be displayed.
2.
Open the Wi-Fi setting screen on your smartphone.3.
On the Wi-Fi setting screen on your smartphone, select the SSID displayed on the camera and enter the password.4.
Launch Creators' App on your smartphone and open the [Cameras] screen.5.
Select the (Setup) button in the upper right corner of the [Cameras] screen, and then select [Connect only via Wi-
Fi].
6.
On the screen of Creators' App on your smartphone, select the product name of the camera (ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B).
The smartphone will connect to the camera.
7.
567
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Using a smartphone as a remote commander
With Creators' App, you can shoot images while checking the shooting range of the camera on the screen of the
smartphone. Connect the camera and smartphone by referring to "Related Topic" at the bottom of this page. For details
on functions that can be operated from a smartphone, refer to the following website.
https://www.sony.net/ca/help/opr/
Related Topic
Pairing the camera with a smartphone (Smartphone Connection)
Remote Shoot Setting
TP1001659798
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
568
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Remote Shoot Setting
Configures settings for images saved when performing remote shooting using a smartphone or computer.
Menu item details
Still Img. Save Dest.:
Sets the save destination. ([Destination Only]/[Dest.+Camera]/[Camera Only])
Save Image Size:
Selects the file size for images to be transferred to the smartphone or the computer when [Still Img. Save Dest.] is set to
[Dest.+Camera]. The original-sized JPEG/HEIF file or a 2M-equivalent JPEG/HEIF file can be transferred.
([Original]/[2M])
RAW+J Save Image:
Selects the file type for images to be transferred to the smartphone or the computer when [Still Img. Save Dest.] is set to
[Dest.+Camera] and [ File Format] is set to [RAW & JPEG]. ([RAW & JPEG]/[JPEG Only]/[RAW Only])
RAW+H Save Image:
Selects the file type for images to be transferred to the smartphone or the computer when [Still Img. Save Dest.] is set to
[Dest.+Camera] and [ File Format] is set to [ RAW & HEIF]. ([RAW & HEIF]/[HEIF Only]/[RAW Only])
Save JPEG Size/Save HEIF Size:
Use this item when sorting and saving JPEG/HEIF images with different image quality and image sizes to Slot 1 and Slot
2 by setting [ Recording Media] to [Sort Recording]. Among the different sizes of image to be saved to Slot 1 and Slot
2, selects whether the larger or smaller size will be transferred to the smartphone or the computer when [Still Img. Save
Dest.] is set to [Destination Only] or [Dest.+Camera]. ([Large Size]/[Small Size])
Note
When an unrecordable memory card is inserted into the camera, you cannot record still images even if [Still Img. Save Dest.] is
set to [Camera Only] or [Dest.+Camera].
When [Camera Only] or [Dest.+Camera] is selected for [Still Img. Save Dest.] and no memory card is inserted into the camera,
the shutter will not be released even if [Release w/o Card] is set to [Enable].
While a still image is being played back on the camera, you cannot perform remote shooting using a smartphone or a computer.
[RAW+J Save Image] and [RAW+H Save Image] can be set only when [ File Format] is set to [RAW & JPEG] or [RAW &
HEIF].
Related Topic
Using a smartphone as a remote commander
Rec. Media Settings (still image/movie): Recording Media (still image)
TP1001661349
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Network) → [ Cnct./Remote Sht.] → [Remote Shoot Setting] → desired setting item.
1
569
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Select on Cam & Send (transferring to a smartphone)
You can transfer images to a smartphone by selecting images on the camera.
Refer to “Pairing the camera with a smartphone (Smartphone Connection) ” to pair the camera and smartphone in
advance.
The following is the procedure for transferring the image currently displayed on the camera.
Menu item details
Send:
Selects images and transfers them to a smartphone. ([This Image]/[All Images in This Group]/[All with this date]/[All
Filtered]/[Add filter condition]/[Manual selection])
The options displayed may differ depending on the setting for [Playback Filter Condition] and the selected content.
If you select [Manual selection], select the desired images using the center of the control wheel, then press MENU →
[Enter]. You can also specify the range using the Fn (Function) button.
When [Disp Set of Multi Media] is set to [All Slots ], only [This Image] can be selected.
Size of Sending Image:
Selects the file size for images to be transferred to the smartphone. The original-sized JPEG/HEIF file or a 2M-equivalent
JPEG/HEIF file can be transferred. ([Original]/[2M])
RAW+J/H Send Target:
MENU → (Network) → [ Cnct./Remote Sht.] → [ Select on Cam & Send] → [Size of Sending Image],
[RAW+J/H Send Target], [ Sending Target] and [Movie with Shot Mark] → desired setting.
1
Display the image to be transferred on the playback screen.
2
MENU → (Network) → [ Cnct./Remote Sht.] → [ Select on Cam & Send] → [ Send] → [This
Image].
3
Launch Creators' App on your smartphone.
A message indicating that the transfer has started will appear.
4
Select [OK] on the smartphone.
The image will be transferred to the smartphone.
Even while a transfer is in progress, you can perform the following operations:
Shooting
Menu Operations
Pausing an ongoing transfer
Resuming or canceling a paused transfer
Scheduling additional transfers
The (transferred) icon will be displayed on images that have been transferred.
You can transfer multiple images at once by selecting a setting other than [This Image] under [ Send].
5
570
Selects the file type for images to be transferred to a smartphone when the images are shot with [ File Format] set to
[RAW & JPEG] or [RAW & HEIF]. ([JPEG & HEIF]/[RAW]/[RAW+J & RAW+H])
Sending Target:
Sets whether to transfer the low-bit-rate proxy movie or the high-bit-rate original movie when transferring a movie to a
smartphone. ([Proxy Only]/[Original Only]/[Proxy & Original])
When you select [Proxy Only], movies can be transferred faster than when transferring the original movies.
Movie with Shot Mark:
Cuts and transfers a specified number of seconds from a movie with the position of a Shot Mark set as the center. ([Cut
to 60 seconds]/[Cut to 30 seconds]/[Cut to 15 seconds]/[Don't Cut])
To filter the images to be transferred (Add filter condition)
Images to be transferred can be filtered by the following conditions:
Target Group: [This Date]/[This Media]
Still Images/Movies: [All]/[Only Still Images]/[Only Movies]
Target Img (Rating): [ ]-[ ], [ ]
Target Movie ( ): [All]/[Only Shot Mark Mov.]
Target Img (Protect): [All]/[Only Protected Img.]
Transfer Status
*
: [All]/[Only Non-transfer]
To add a Shot Mark to a movie
If you add a Shot Mark while recording a movie, you can use it as a mark for selecting, transferring, or editing the movie.
To add a Shot Mark during recording, swipe left or right on the screen to display the touch function icons, and then touch
(Add Shot Mark1). You can also add a Shot Mark during playback by touching (Add Shot Mark1) on the
screen.
About the transfer icons
Current transfer status icons
(Transferring): Images are being transferred to your smartphone.
(Transfer error)
*
: The connection was lost while transferring images to the smartphone by operating the
camera. You can check the details of the error by opening the [ Select on Cam & Send] menu.
Transfer status icons on played-back images
(Transferring): The image currently being played back is being transferred to your smartphone.
(Transferred)
*
: The image currently being played back has been transferred to the smartphone.
Hint
Even if a transfer stops due to a network failure, you can simply resume the transfer from the camera once the connection is
restored, and the remaining images will then be transferred.
To use the touch function icons, enable touch operations during shooting or playback by configuring each setting in MENU →
(Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [Touch Panel Settings].
While the playback filter function is used, you can set the filtered images as the target to transfer by selecting [All Filtered] in [
Send].
Use a custom key or the shutter button to add a second Shot Mark (Shot Mark 2). Shot Mark 1 can also be added using a custom
key or the shutter button.
When adding a Shot Mark with a custom key: assign [Add Shot Mark1] or [Add Shot Mark2] in [ Custom Key/Dial Set.] and
press the assigned button while shooting.
Images transferred by selecting them on the smartphone are treated as not yet transferred.
*
When [Movie with Shot Mark] is set to an item other than [Don't Cut], even if you have already transferred a clip by using a Shot Mark and
then set another Shot Mark to the movie, all of the Shot Marks will create clips which will be retransferred as not-yet transferred images.
*
If a transfer error occurs while transferring images by operating the smartphone, this icon will not be displayed.
*
For images transferred by selecting them on the smartphone, this icon will not be displayed.
*
571
When adding a Shot Mark with the shutter button: set [ with Shutter Button] to [Add Shot Mark1] or [Add Shot Mark2]
and press the shutter button while shooting.
When adding a Shot Mark while playing back a movie: assign [Add/Delete Shot Mark1] or [Add/Delete Shot Mark2] in [
Custom Key Setting] and press the assigned button during playback.
For movies with a Shot Mark, you can jump to the position with the Shot Mark by touching the touch function icon while paused.
Note
Transfers initiated from the smartphone cannot be paused or canceled on the camera.
While transferring images by operating your smartphone, you can schedule additional transfers from the camera, but it may take
some time before the transfer begins.
Even if you cancel the transfer midway, the images that have already been transferred will remain.
If the camera is turned off, restarted, or disconnected during a transfer, the transfer will be paused.
Depending on the smartphone, the transferred movie may not be played back correctly. For example, the movie may not play
smoothly, or there may be no sound.
Depending on the format of the still image or movie, it may not be possible to play it back on a smartphone.
When [Airplane Mode] is set to [On], you cannot connect this product and the smartphone. Set [Airplane Mode] to [Off].
When establishing a Bluetooth connection, only pair with trusted devices. Avoid unsolicited pairing requests or connections to
unknown devices.
Turn off the Bluetooth function when not in use.
Check your paired devices regularly and delete any unnecessary ones.
After you delete the pairing information for the camera from your smartphone, delete pairing information for the smartphone from
the camera using [Manage Paired Device].
Related Topic
Functions available with a smartphone (Creators' App)
Pairing the camera with a smartphone (Smartphone Connection)
Playback Filter Condition
Airplane Mode
TP1001661350
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
572
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Reset Transfer Status (transferring to a smartphone)
You can reset the transfer status of images that have been transferred to your smartphone. Use this function if you want
to retransfer images that have previously been transferred. The transferred images will not be deleted even if you reset
the transfer status.
Hint
If there are images being transferred or scheduled to be transferred, you cannot execute [ Reset Transfer Status]. Wait until all
transfers are complete before resetting.
Related Topic
Select on Cam & Send (transferring to a smartphone)
TP1001662575
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Network) → [ Cnct./Remote Sht.] → [ Reset Transfer Status].
If you press [OK] on the confirmation screen, all images that have been transferred to your smartphone will
become untransferred images.
1
573
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Cnct. while Power OFF (smartphone)
Sets whether or not to accept Bluetooth connections from a smartphone while the camera is turned off. When [ Cnct.
while Power OFF] is set to [On], you can browse images on the camera's memory card and transfer images from the
camera to a smartphone by operating the smartphone.
Menu Item Details
On :
Accepts Bluetooth connections from a smartphone while the camera is turned off.
The battery level is depleted gradually while the camera is turned off. If you do not want to use [ Cnct. while Power
OFF], turn it off.
Off :
Does not accept Bluetooth connections from a smartphone while the camera is turned off.
How to browse/transfer images on the smartphone
Refer to “Pairing the camera with a smartphone (Smartphone Connection) ” to pair the camera and smartphone in
advance.
Note
If the smartphone is not operated for a certain period of time, the Bluetooth connection will become deactivated. Select [View and
Import] again on the smartphone.
When the camera is turned on, the camera will switch to the shooting screen, and the connection with the smartphone will be
terminated.
[ Cnct. while Power OFF] will be set to [Off] if you cancel pairing between the camera and the smartphone or pairing fails.
If the function does not work properly, check the following notes and then try pairing again.
Ensure that the camera is either not connected to any other device or connected to only one device using Bluetooth
communication. (Up to 2 devices can be connected to the camera at the same time.)
Confirm that [Airplane Mode] for the camera is set to [Off].
Delete the pairing information for the camera registered in the Bluetooth settings on your smartphone.
If the function does not work properly even after you have performed the above operations, delete the pairing information for
the device that you want to connect using [Manage Paired Device] on the camera.
When establishing a Bluetooth connection, only pair with trusted devices. Avoid unsolicited pairing requests or connections to
unknown devices.
Turn off the Bluetooth function when not in use.
Check your paired devices regularly and delete any unnecessary ones.
MENU → (Network) → [ Cnct./Remote Sht.] → [ Cnct. while Power OFF] → desired setting.
1
Set [ Cnct. while Power OFF] to [On].1.
Turn off the camera.2.
Launch Creators' App on the smartphone.3.
Select [View and Import] on the smartphone.
The images saved on the memory card of the camera can be viewed and are ready to be transferred.
4.
574
After you delete the pairing information for the camera from your smartphone, delete pairing information for the smartphone from
the camera using [Manage Paired Device].
Related Topic
Functions available with a smartphone (Creators' App)
Pairing the camera with a smartphone (Smartphone Connection)
Select on Cam & Send (transferring to a smartphone)
Bluetooth Settings
TP1001658841
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
575
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Reading location information from a smartphone
You can use the application Creators' App to obtain location information from a smartphone that is connected with your
camera using Bluetooth communication. You can record the obtained location information when shooting images.
Refer to “Pairing the camera with a smartphone (Smartphone Connection) ” to pair the camera and smartphone in
advance.
Icons displayed when obtaining the location information
(Obtaining location information): The camera is obtaining the location information.
(Location information cannot be obtained): The camera cannot obtain the location information.
Hint
Location information can be linked when Creators' App is running on your smartphone even if the smartphone monitor is off.
However, if the camera has been turned off for a while, location information may not be linked immediately when you turn the
camera back on. In this case, location information will be linked immediately if you open the Creators' App screen on the
smartphone.
When Creators' App is not operating, such as when the smartphone is restarted, launch Creators' App to resume location
information linking.
If the location information linking function does not work properly, see the following notes and perform pairing again.
Confirm that the Bluetooth function of your smartphone is activated.
Ensure that the camera is either not connected to any other device or connected to only one device using Bluetooth
communication. (Up to 2 devices can be connected to the camera at the same time.)
Confirm that [Airplane Mode] for the camera is set to [Off].
Delete the pairing information for the camera registered in Creators' App.
Delete the pairing information for the camera registered in the Bluetooth settings on your smartphone.
Delete the pairing information for your smartphone registered in [Manage Paired Device] on the camera.
The Bluetooth icon is not displayed when the touch function icons are displayed in the movie recording mode. To see the
Bluetooth icon, swipe the touch function icons left or right to hide the touch function icons.
Note
If you publish or share still images or movies taken with this camera on the internet while location information is linked using
Creators' App, the shooting location may be unintentionally made known to third parties. In this case, turn off [Location
Information Linkage] in Creators' App before shooting the images.
When you initialize the camera, the pairing information is also deleted. Before performing pairing again, first delete the pairing
information for the camera registered in the smartphone's Bluetooth settings and Creators' App.
Launch Creators' App on your smartphone, open the [Cameras] screen, and tap [Setup] → [Location
Information Linkage].
1
Activate [Location Information Linkage] on the [Location Information Linkage] setting screen of Creators'
App.
(obtaining location information icon) will be displayed on the monitor of the camera. Location information
obtained by your smartphone using GPS, etc., will be recorded when shooting images.
When you activate [Auto Time Correction] or [Auto Area Adjustment] on a linked smartphone, the camera
automatically corrects the date setting or area setting using information from the smartphone.
2
576
The location information will not be recorded when it cannot be obtained, such as when the Bluetooth connection is disconnected.
The camera can be paired with up to 15 Bluetooth devices, but can link the location information with that of only one smartphone.
If you want to link the location information with that of another smartphone, turn off the [Location Information Linkage] function
under [Setup] in Creators' App on the smartphone that is already linked.
If the Bluetooth connection is unstable, remove any obstacles, such as people or metal objects from between the camera and the
paired smartphone.
The communication distance for the Bluetooth connection or Wi-Fi may vary depending on the conditions of use.
Related Topic
Functions available with a smartphone (Creators' App)
Pairing the camera with a smartphone (Smartphone Connection)
Bluetooth Settings
TP1001662569
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
577
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Connecting the camera to a computer
Note
Do not turn on/off or restart the computer, or wake the computer from sleep mode when a USB connection has been established
between the computer and the camera. Doing so may cause a malfunction. Before turning on/off or restarting the computer, or
waking the computer from sleep mode, disconnect the camera from the computer.
Related Topic
USB Connection Mode
USB LUN Setting
TP1001619308
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
Insert a sufficiently charged battery pack into the camera.
1
Turn on the camera and the computer.
2
(Setup) → [USB] → Set [USB Connection Mode] to [MassStorage(MSC)].
3
Connect the USB Type-C terminal on the camera to the computer with a USB cable (commercially available).
When you connect the camera to the computer for the first time, the procedure for recognizing the camera may
start automatically on the computer. Wait until the procedure is finished.
If you connect the camera to your computer using the USB cable when [USB Power Supply] is set to [On],
power is supplied from your computer. (Default setting: [On])
Use a cable that complies with the USB standard.
Use a SuperSpeed USB 10Gbps (USB 3.2)-compatible computer and a USB cable (commercially available) for
higher-speed communications.
4
579
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Disconnecting the camera from the computer
Perform the following operations on the computer before disconnecting the camera from the computer.
Note
On Mac computers, drag and drop the memory card icon or the drive icon into the “Trash” icon. The camera will be disconnected
from the computer.
On some computers, the disconnection icon may not appear. In this case, you can skip the steps above.
Do not remove the USB cable from the camera while the access lamp is lit. The data may be damaged.
TP1001619310
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
Click (Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media ) in the taskbar.
1
Click the displayed message.
The following operations are available after you have completed the steps above.
Disconnecting the USB cable.
Removing a memory card.
Turning off the camera.
2
580
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Introduction to desktop application (Imaging Edge Desktop/Catalyst)
Imaging Edge Desktop
Imaging Edge Desktop is a desktop application that integrates the three functions of the Imaging Edge series: “Remote,”
“Viewer,” and “Edit.”
It allows you to view and develop RAW images taken by the camera on your computer and control the camera remotely
from your computer to shoot images.
For details on how to use Imaging Edge Desktop, refer to the support page.
https://www.sony.net/disoft/help/
Installing Imaging Edge Desktop on your computer
Download and install the application by accessing the following URL:
https://www.sony.net/disoft/d/
Catalyst Browse (free software)/Catalyst Prepare (paid software)
Catalyst Browse is application for previewing clips. You can preview recorded XAVC S/XAVC HS clips, view and edit
media metadata, apply image stabilization
*
using metadata, apply color calibration, copy to the local hard drive, or
transcode to a variety of formats and so on with Catalyst Browse.
Catalyst Prepare adds to the functions of Catalyst Browse allowing you to organize clips using bins, perform basic
timeline editing with storyboards, and so on.
Installing Catalyst Browse/Catalyst Prepare on your computer
Download and install the application by accessing the following URL:
https://www.sony.net/catalyst/
TP1001659799
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
For the conditions of use of the image stabilization function, refer to the support page.
*
581
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Importing images to the computer
You can import images from the camera to a computer by connecting the camera to the computer with a USB cable
(commercially available), or by inserting the memory card of the camera into the computer.
Open the folder in which the images you want to import are stored on the computer, and then copy the images to the
computer.
Example: Folder tree during USB Mass Storage connection
SD card
CFexpress Type A memory card
DCIM: still images
CLIP: movies
SUB: proxy movies
Note
Do not edit or otherwise process movie files/folders from the connected computer. Movie files may be damaged or become
unplayable. Do not delete movies on the memory card from the computer. Sony is not held liable for consequences resulting from
such operations via the computer.
If you delete images or perform other operations from the connected computer, the image database file may become inconsistent.
In this case, repair the image database file.
The folder tree is different during MTP connection.
TP1001642683
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
582
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Operating the camera from a computer (Remote Shoot Function)
Uses a Wi-Fi or USB connection, etc. to control the camera from a computer, including such functions as shooting and
storing images on the computer.
When the camera and a smartphone are connected, you cannot control the camera from a computer. Make sure that the
camera is not connected to a smartphone beforehand.
For details on [Remote Shoot Function], refer to the following URL:
https://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/app/imagingedge/l/instruction/4_1_connection/index.php
The following is the procedure for connecting the camera to your computer using a Wi-Fi connection via a Wi-Fi access
point. If you will use another connection method, refer to “How to connect the camera and the computer using a method
other than a Wi-Fi access point.”
Menu item details
Remote Shooting:
Sets whether or not to use the Remote Shooting function. ([On] / [Off])
Pairing:
When connecting via a Wi-Fi access point without using the [Access Authen.] function, pair the camera with the
computer.
Wi-Fi Direct Info.:
Displays information for connecting the computer and the camera via Wi-Fi Direct.
How to connect the camera and the computer using a method other than a Wi-Fi
access point
When connecting with Wi-Fi Direct
Use the camera as an access point, and connect the computer to the camera directly via Wi-Fi.
Select MENU → (Network) → [ Cnct./Remote Sht.] → [Remote Shoot Function] → [Wi-Fi Direct Info.] to display the
Wi-Fi connection information (SSID and password) for the camera. Connect the computer and the camera using the Wi-
Fi connection information displayed on the camera.
Select MENU → (Network) → [Wi-Fi] → [Wi-Fi Connect] → [On] to connect the camera to the Wi-Fi
access point.
Connect the computer to the same Wi-Fi access point.
1
Select MENU → (Network) → [ Cnct./Remote Sht.] → [Remote Shoot Function] → [Remote Shooting]
→ [On].
2
Select [Access Authen. Info] to display the information such as the username, password, and fingerprint.
You can check the information by selecting MENU → (Network) → [Network Option] → [Access Authen.
Info].
3
Launch Imaging Edge Desktop (Remote) on the computer, and then enter and confirm the access
authentication information.
You can now operate the camera using Imaging Edge Desktop (Remote).
4
583
When connecting with a USB cable
Connect the USB Type-C terminal on the camera to the computer with a USB cable (commercially available).
Next, select [Remote Shoot/Trn.] on the screen displayed on the camera.
Hint
In [Remote Shoot Setting] under [ Cnct./Remote Sht.], you can set the save destination and saved format of still images for
remote shooting.
When [Access Authen.] is set to [Off] and you are connecting via a Wi-Fi access point, you need to pair the camera with the
computer. Select MENU → (Network) → [ Cnct./Remote Sht.] → [Remote Shoot Function] → [Pairing] after Step 1, and
then pair the camera and the computer using Imaging Edge Desktop (Remote) on the computer. Pairing information is deleted
when you initialize the camera.
Note
When shooting continuously using [Remote Shoot Function], the update interval of the live view display on the computer may
become longer.
To ensure a secure wireless LAN connection, we strongly recommend using an access point with WPA3 or WPA2 security
settings. Connecting to an access point without security settings may result in hacking, access from malicious third parties, or
attacks on vulnerabilities. Unless there is a specific reason, we do not recommend using an access point without security settings.
If you set [Access Authen.] to [Off], communication will be performed without authentication or encryption via SSH connection.
This may result in the content being intercepted or the camera being accessed by an unintended third party. If you use the remote
shooting function, we recommend setting [Access Authen.] to [On].
Related Topic
Introduction to desktop application (Imaging Edge Desktop/Catalyst)
Remote Shoot Setting
TP1001658877
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
584
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Remote Shoot Setting
Configures settings for images saved when performing remote shooting using a smartphone or computer.
Menu item details
Still Img. Save Dest.:
Sets the save destination. ([Destination Only]/[Dest.+Camera]/[Camera Only])
Save Image Size:
Selects the file size for images to be transferred to the smartphone or the computer when [Still Img. Save Dest.] is set to
[Dest.+Camera]. The original-sized JPEG/HEIF file or a 2M-equivalent JPEG/HEIF file can be transferred.
([Original]/[2M])
RAW+J Save Image:
Selects the file type for images to be transferred to the smartphone or the computer when [Still Img. Save Dest.] is set to
[Dest.+Camera] and [ File Format] is set to [RAW & JPEG]. ([RAW & JPEG]/[JPEG Only]/[RAW Only])
RAW+H Save Image:
Selects the file type for images to be transferred to the smartphone or the computer when [Still Img. Save Dest.] is set to
[Dest.+Camera] and [ File Format] is set to [ RAW & HEIF]. ([RAW & HEIF]/[HEIF Only]/[RAW Only])
Save JPEG Size/Save HEIF Size:
Use this item when sorting and saving JPEG/HEIF images with different image quality and image sizes to Slot 1 and Slot
2 by setting [ Recording Media] to [Sort Recording]. Among the different sizes of image to be saved to Slot 1 and Slot
2, selects whether the larger or smaller size will be transferred to the smartphone or the computer when [Still Img. Save
Dest.] is set to [Destination Only] or [Dest.+Camera]. ([Large Size]/[Small Size])
Note
When an unrecordable memory card is inserted into the camera, you cannot record still images even if [Still Img. Save Dest.] is
set to [Camera Only] or [Dest.+Camera].
When [Camera Only] or [Dest.+Camera] is selected for [Still Img. Save Dest.] and no memory card is inserted into the camera,
the shutter will not be released even if [Release w/o Card] is set to [Enable].
While a still image is being played back on the camera, you cannot perform remote shooting using a smartphone or a computer.
[RAW+J Save Image] and [RAW+H Save Image] can be set only when [ File Format] is set to [RAW & JPEG] or [RAW &
HEIF].
Related Topic
Using a smartphone as a remote commander
Rec. Media Settings (still image/movie): Recording Media (still image)
TP1001661349
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Network) → [ Cnct./Remote Sht.] → [Remote Shoot Setting] → desired setting item.
1
585
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
USB Streaming (movie)
You can connect a computer, etc. to the camera and use the camera video and audio for livestreaming or web-
conferencing services. Select MENU → (Setup) → [USB] → [USB Connection Mode] → [Sel. When Connect] or
[USB Streaming] beforehand.
Menu item details
Output Res/Frame Rate:
Sets the resolution and the frame rate of the video. ([4K(2160p) 29.97p]/[4K(2160p)
25p]/[4K(2160p)14.99p]/[4K(2160p)12.5p]/[HD(1080p)59.94p]/[HD(1080p) 50p]/[HD(1080p)29.97p]/[HD(1080p)
25p]/[HD(720p)29.97p]/[HD(720p) 25p])
Movie Rec During Streaming:
Sets whether or not to enable recording of the video to the recording media during streaming. ([Enable]/[Disable])
Hint
If you assign the shutter speed, ISO sensitivity, etc. to the dial or control wheel or register them to the function menu, you can
adjust these values even during USB streaming.
The format of the streaming data is as follows.
Video format: MJPEG
*
or YUV420
Audio format: PCM, 48 kHz, 16 bit, 2 ch
During USB streaming, power is supplied to the camera from the computer. If you want to consume as little computer power as
possible, set [USB Power Supply] to [Off].
When using an external microphone, you can minimize deviations between your voice and the movements of your mouth by
connecting the microphone to the (microphone) terminal of the camera.
MENU → (Network) → [Streaming] → [ USB Streaming] → Set [Output Res/Frame Rate] and [Movie
Rec During Streaming].
1
Connect the camera to a computer or other device with a USB cable (commercially available).
[Streaming:Standby] will appear on the camera screen, and the camera will switch to the streaming standby state.
If [USB Connection Mode] is set to [Sel. When Connect], select [Live Stream(USB Streaming)] on the selection
screen for the USB connection mode.
Use a cable or adapter that matches the terminal on the device to be connected.
2
Start streaming from your livestreaming/web-conferencing service.
[Streaming:Output] will appear on the camera screen.
To exit USB Streaming, disconnect the USB cable.
3
When the resolution is set to HD (720p), only MJPEG is available.
*
586
Note
While USB streaming is in progress, the camera is always set to the movie recording mode regardless of the position of the
Still/Movie switch.
You cannot do the following while USB Streaming is running.
Transition to the playback screen
Network functions (Remote Shooting, FTP transfer, remote operation from a smartphone, Bluetooth function, etc.)
The following functions are disabled while USB Streaming is running.
Picture Profile
Power Save Start Time
Monitor Off
When performing USB streaming with a resolution of 4K (2160p) or HD (1080p), use a computer that is compatible with
SuperSpeed USB 5 Gbps (USB 3.2) and a USB cable (commercially available). Even if the resolution is set to 4K (2160p) or HD
(1080p), the actual output resolution will be HD (720p) when connected via the USB 2.0 standard.
If you change the settings for the following items during USB streaming, the streaming screen may pause temporarily. You may
also need to resume streaming from an application depending on the livestreaming service.
[Output Res/Frame Rate] or [Movie Rec During Streaming] under [ USB Streaming]
[ File Format]
[Auto Framing Settings]
Depending on the temperature environment, streaming output image-quality settings, video recording settings during streaming,
Wi-Fi connection environment, and usage conditions before starting streaming, the internal temperature of the camera may rise,
and the streaming time may be shortened.
Related Topic
USB Connection Mode
TP1001663311
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
587
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Creators' Cloud
Creators' Cloud is a cloud solution that integrates production applications and services.
Creators' Cloud provides services and applications to creators of various productions.
The availability of Creators' Cloud and the supported services differ depending on the country/region.
For details on Creators' Cloud and the support status of each service, refer to the following website.
https://www.sony.net/cc/
TP1001665528
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
588
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Creating an account for Creators' Cloud and linking your camera to the account
(Cloud Connection)
Create an account for the cloud service Creators' Cloud and link your camera to the account using Creators' App on your
smartphone.
Note
This function may only be available in certain countries and regions.
For information about countries/regions where the service is supported, refer to the following website.
https://creatorscloud.sony.net/catalog/servicearea.html
: Operations performed on the smartphone
: Operations performed on the camera
Preparing in advance
Create an account for Creators' Cloud.
Follow the instructions in the smartphone application Creators' App to create an account for Creators' Cloud.
Pair the camera and smartphone.
For detailed instructions, see “Pairing the camera with a smartphone (Smartphone Connection) .”
Confirm that [Wi-Fi Connect] and [Bluetooth Function] are set to [On] on the camera.
Linking the camera to the account
Note
The camera may not be linked to the account properly if the procedure is canceled, the camera is powered off, or a network error,
etc. occurs during the procedure. In this case, make sure that the account information on the camera or the camera information in
Creators' Cloud is correct. If the information is not correct, remove the information and link the camera to the account again.
Set the camera to shooting mode.1.
Launch Creators' App on your smartphone, and then open the [Cameras] screen.2.
Select [Cloud Function], and then follow the instructions on the screen to start setup.3.
When you register the access point, select the access point you use and enter the password, and then select
[OK].
The settings for the access point (the SSID and the password) are loaded to the camera.
If the access point to be used is already registered on the camera, select [Skip] and proceed to step 5.
4.
Select [Start linking] on the smartphone screen.
The camera and the account will be linked. Then, follow the instructions on the screen to configure the image
upload settings.
The camera may not be linked to the account if there is already account information on the camera or there is
already camera information in Creators' Cloud. Remove the account and camera information before linking the
camera to the account.
5.
589
Linking the camera to the account or connecting to Creators' Cloud may fail if the time setting on the camera is not correct. Make
sure that the time setting is correct.
Connecting the camera to Creators' Cloud
To upload images on the camera to Creators' Cloud
Once the camera has been linked to the account for Creators' Cloud and [Cloud Upload] is turned on in Creators' App,
you can connect to the server and upload images by simply setting [Cloud Connection] to [On].
Newly recorded images will be uploaded the next time you turn on the camera and connect to Creators' Cloud. Turn on
the camera at the timing you want to upload.
For details, refer to the following website.
https://www.sony.net/ca/help/opr/
To cancel the linkage of the camera with Creators' Cloud
You need to cancel the linkage of the camera with the account both on the camera and in Creators' Cloud.
Operations on the camera:
Operations on the Creators' Cloud:
Hint
You can also perform the following operations in Creators’ Cloud Web (https://www.sony.net/capp/).
Creating an account for Creators' Cloud
Removing information of the camera from Creators' Cloud
Note
To ensure a secure wireless LAN connection, we strongly recommend using an access point with WPA3 or WPA2 security
settings. Connecting to an access point without security settings may result in hacking, access from malicious third parties, or
attacks on vulnerabilities. Unless there is a specific reason, we do not recommend using an access point without security settings.
Related Topic
Pairing the camera with a smartphone (Smartphone Connection)
Displaying cloud connection information (Cloud Information)
Notes on using the cloud service (Creators' Cloud)
TP1001665527
MENU → (Network) → [Creators' Cloud] → [Cloud Connection] → [On].1.
MENU → (Network) → [Creators' Cloud] → [Cloud Information].1.
Select [Detail] in [Account Info.].2.
Select [Delete account info.].3.
Check the message displayed on the screen and select [OK].
The information for the account will be removed from the camera.
4.
Open [Cameras] screen on Creators' App.1.
Select [Cloud Function] → [Disconnect the Link].
The information for the camera will be removed from the account.
2.
590
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
591
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Displaying cloud connection information (Cloud Information)
Displays information about the camera and Creators' Cloud linkage account and the cloud connection.
Note
This function may only be available in certain countries and regions.
For information about countries/regions where the service is supported, refer to the following website.
https://creatorscloud.sony.net/catalog/servicearea.html
Displayed item details
Account Info.:
Displays detailed information about the linked account when [Detail] is selected. Selecting [Delete account info.] on the
displayed screen removes the account information from the camera.
If you delete the Creators' Cloud account information from the camera, be sure to delete the camera information from
Creators' Cloud as well.
Error Info.:
Displays error details when a network connection error occurs.
SSID:
The SSID of the connected access point is displayed.
TP1001665608
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU → (Network) → [Creators' Cloud] → [Cloud Information].
1
592
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Notes on using the cloud service (Creators' Cloud)
Before lending or transferring the camera, make sure that the camera linkage information and upload settings are
appropriate to prevent damage such as the content on the camera being uploaded to an unintended third party’s
Creators' Cloud. If the settings are not appropriate, be sure to perform the following operations.
If you will transfer or lend the camera: initialize the camera or cancel the linkage with Creators' Cloud on the camera.
Also, cancel the camera linkage in Creators' Cloud.
If the camera is transferred to you or you borrow the camera: initialize the camera or cancel the linkage with Creators'
Cloud on the camera.
Note that Creators' Cloud may only be available in certain countries and regions.
Notes on the network environment
The following network environments may interfere with the use of Creators' Cloud.
Connecting to a network via a proxy server
Configuring a firewall to your network
If a firewall is configured, open the following outbound ports in the firewall settings.
TCP Source Port 32768-60999 Destination Port 443
TCP Source Port 32768-60999 Destination Port 80
UDP Source Port 32768-60999 Destination Port 53
UDP Source Port 32768-60999 Destination Port 443
UDP Source Port 32768-60999 Destination Port 32768-60999
TCP destination port 80 is used unencrypted to obtain revocation information needed for destination server validation
when connecting to the server. However, no personal information is sent.
UDP destination port 53 is used unencrypted to obtain information needed to verify the server's address on the
internet when connecting to the server. However, no personal information is sent.
Related Topic
Creating an account for Creators' Cloud and linking your camera to the account (Cloud Connection)
Displaying cloud connection information (Cloud Information)
TP1001667095
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
593
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Audio accessories compatible with the Multi Interface Shoe
If you shoot movies with an audio accessory (sold separately) attached to the Multi Interface Shoe of the camera, analog
or digital audio will be recorded via the Multi Interface Shoe.
If you use an audio accessory that supports the digital audio interface, the sound signals will be transmitted in a digital
format. This will allow you a wider range of recordable audio quality, such as the following.
High-quality audio recording with less deterioration
4-channel or 24-bit audio recording
The recordable audio quality differs depending on the audio accessory. For details, refer to the instruction manual for the
audio accessory.
Hint
You can change the audio settings for audio accessories that support the digital audio interface using [ Shoe Audio Set.].
Note
Movies recorded with 24-bit audio may not be played back normally on devices or software incompatible with 24-bit audio,
resulting in unexpectedly loud volumes or no sound.
Related Topic
Shoe Audio Set.
HDMI Output Settings (movie)
4ch Audio Monitoring (movie)
Audio Out Timing
Audio Recording
TP1001659852
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
594
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Mount Adaptor
Using a Mount Adaptor (sold separately), you can attach an A-mount lens (sold separately) to this product.
For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the Mount Adaptor.
Note
You may not be able to use the Mount Adaptor or auto-focus with certain lenses.
The sound of the lens and the product in operation may be recorded during movie recording.
You can turn the sound off by selecting MENU → (Shooting) → [Audio Recording] → [Audio Recording] → [Off].
It may take a long time or may be difficult for the product to focus, depending on the lens used or the subject.
Related Topic
LA-EA3/LA-EA5 Mount Adaptor
LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor
TP1001619326
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
595
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
LA-EA3/LA-EA5 Mount Adaptor
If you use the LA-EA3 Mount Adaptor (sold separately) or LA-EA5 Mount Adaptor (sold separately), the following
functions are available.
Full frame shooting:
Available with full frame shooting-compatible lenses only
Autofocus:
LA-EA3: Available with SAM/SSM lens only
LA-EA5: Available with A-mount AF lenses
*
(For lenses other than SAM and SSM, autofocus is driven by the LA-EA5 AF
coupler.)
AF system:
Phase Detection AF
AF/MF select:
Can be changed using the operating switch on the lens.
Focus Mode:
Single-shot AF/Automatic AF/Continuous AF/Direct manual focus (DMF)/Manual Focus
When using a Mount Adaptor in the movie mode, adjust the aperture value and the focus manually.
Available focus area:
[Wide]/[Zone]/[Center Fix]/[Spot]/[Expand Spot]/[Custom]/[Tracking]
SteadyShot:
In-body
Related Topic
Mount Adaptor
LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor
TP1001619250
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
Autofocus is not available with some Minolta/Konica Minolta lenses and teleconverters.
*
596
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor
If you use the LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor (sold separately), the following functions are available.
Full size shooting:
Available with full frame shooting-compatible lenses only
Autofocus:
Not available.
Only the manual focusing mode is supported.
SteadyShot:
In-body
Related Topic
Mount Adaptor
LA-EA3/LA-EA5 Mount Adaptor
TP1001634189
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
597
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Multi Battery Adaptor Kit
You can use the Multi Battery Adaptor Kit (sold separately) with this camera to shoot for long periods. When using the
Multi Battery Adaptor Kit, remove the camera's battery cover.
For details, refer also to the operating instructions supplied with the Multi Battery Adaptor Kit.
To remove the battery cover
Pull the battery cover release lever (A) in the direction of the arrow, and then remove the battery cover.
To attach the battery cover
Insert the shaft on one side of the battery cover into the attachment site, and then push in the battery cover by attaching
the shaft on the opposite side.
Note
While the plug-in plate of the Multi Battery Adaptor Kit is inserted in the camera, do not slide the battery lock lever of the camera.
The plug-in plate will be ejected from the camera if you do so.
TP1001658922
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
598
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Battery life and number of recordable images
Number of recordable images when shooting still images
Battery life for actual movie shooting
Battery life for continuous movie shooting
The above estimates for battery life and number of recordable images apply when the battery pack has been fully
charged. The battery life and number of images may decrease depending on the conditions of use.
The battery life and number of recordable images are estimates based on shooting with the default settings under the
following conditions:
Using the battery pack at an ambient temperature of 25°C (77°F).
Using a Sony CFexpress Type A memory card (sold separately)
Using a FE 28-70mm F3.5-5.6 OSS lens (sold separately)
The numbers of recordable still images are based on the CIPA standard and shooting under the following conditions:
(CIPA: Camera & Imaging Products Association)
One picture is taken every 30 seconds.
The power is turned on and off once every ten times.
The number of minutes for movie shooting is based on the CIPA standard and shooting under the following
conditions:
The image quality is set to XAVC S HD 59.94p 50M /50p 50M 4:2:0 8bit.
Actual shooting (movies): Battery life based on repeated shooting, shooting stand-by, turning on/off, etc.
Continuous shooting (movies): No operations other than starting and ending shooting are performed.
TP1001642572
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
Screen mode Approx. 520 images
Viewfinder mode Approx. 470 images
Screen mode Approx. 100 min.
Viewfinder mode Approx. 90 min.
Screen mode Approx. 155 min.
Viewfinder mode Approx. 150 min.
599
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Number of recordable images
When you insert a memory card into the camera and turn the camera on, the number of images that can be recorded
(should you continue to shoot using the current settings) is displayed on the screen.
Note
A maximum of 40 000 still images can be recorded to each memory card. If the number of recorded images reaches the upper
limit, replace the memory card.
When “0” (the number of recordable images) flashes in orange, the memory card is full or the number of recorded images
exceeds the number that can be managed using the database file. Replace the memory card with another one, or delete images
from the current memory card. When you transfer images on a memory card to a computer, etc., the number of recordable
images may be displayed as “0”. In this case, you may be able to record images by executing [ Recover Image DB].
When “NO CARD” flashes in orange, it means no memory card has been inserted. Insert a memory card.
The number of images that can be recorded on a memory card
The table below shows the approximate number of images that can be recorded on a memory card formatted with this
camera.
The numbers shown reflect the following conditions:
Using a Sony memory card
[Aspect Ratio] is set to [3:2], and [JPEG Image Size]/[HEIF Image Size] is set to [L: 33M].
*1
The values may vary depending on the shooting conditions and the type of memory card used.
(Unit: images)
JPEG Quality/HEIF Quality/ File Format
SD memory card CFexpress Type A memory card
64GB 128GB 80GB 160GB
JPEG Light 10 000 20 000 11 000 23 000
JPEG Standard 6 900 14 000 8 100 16 000
JPEG Fine 4 900 9 800 5 700 11 000
JPEG Extra fine 2 400 4 900 2 800 5 700
HEIF Light 14 000 29 000 16 000 33 000
HEIF Standard 10 000 21 000 12 000 25 000
HEIF Fine 7 900 15 000 9 200 18 000
HEIF Extra fine 5 400 11 000 6 400 12 000
RAW & JPEG (Compressed RAW)
*2
1 100 2 200 1 200 2 500
RAW & HEIF (Compressed RAW)
*2
1 200 2 400 1 400 2 800
RAW (Compressed RAW) 1 400 2 800 1 600 3 300
600
Note
Even if the number of recordable images is higher than 9 999 images, “9999” will appear.
Related Topic
Memory cards that can be used
TP1001642658
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
JPEG Quality/HEIF Quality/ File Format
SD memory card CFexpress Type A memory card
64GB 128GB 80GB 160GB
RAW & JPEG (Lossless Compressed RAW: L)
*2
1 000 2 000 1 100 2 300
RAW & HEIF (Lossless Compressed RAW: L)
*2
1 100 2 200 1 200 2 600
RAW (Lossless Compressed RAW: L) 1 200 2 600 1 500 3 000
RAW & JPEG (Uncompressed RAW)
*2
660 1 300 770 1 500
RAW & HEIF (Uncompressed RAW)
*2
690 1 400 810 1 600
RAW (Uncompressed RAW) 760 1 500 890 1 700
When [Aspect Ratio] is set to other than [3:2], you can record more images than the numbers shown in the table above. (except when [RAW] is
selected)
*1
JPEG image quality when [RAW & JPEG] is selected: [Fine]
HEIF image quality when [RAW & HEIF] is selected: [Fine]
*2
601
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Recordable movie times
The table below shows the approximate total recording times using a memory card formatted with this camera. The
values may vary depending on the shooting conditions and the type of memory card used.
(h (hour), min (minute))
The recording times when [ Proxy Recording] is set to [Off].
The times shown are recordable times using a Sony memory card.
The duration of time available for movie recording varies depending on the file format/recording settings for movies,
memory card, ambient temperature, Wi-Fi network environment, condition of the camera before you start recording,
and condition of the charging of the battery.
The maximum continuous recording time for a single movie shooting session is approximately 13 hours (a product
specification limit).
Note
The recordable time of movies varies because the camera is equipped with VBR (Variable Bit-Rate), which automatically adjusts
image quality depending on the shooting scene. When you record a fast-moving subject, the image is clearer but the recordable
File Format Rec Frame Rate Record Setting
SD memory card CFexpress Type A memory card
64 GB 128 GB 80 GB 160 GB
XAVC HS 4K 59.94p/50p
200M 35 min 1 h 10 min 40 min 1 h 20 min
150M 45 min 1 h 35 min 50 min 1 h 40 min
100M 1 h 5 min 2 h 10 min 1 h 15 min 2 h 30 min
75M 1 h 25 min 2 h 50 min 1 h 35 min 3 h 10 min
45M 2 h 10 min 4 h 30 min 2 h 20 min 4 h 50 min
XAVC S 4K 59.94p/50p
200M 35 min 1 h 10 min 40 min 1 h 20 min
150M 45 min 1 h 35 min 50 min 1 h 40 min
XAVC S HD 59.94p/50p
50M 2 h 4 h 10 min 2 h 10 min 4 h 30 min
25M 3 h 20 min 7 h 3 h 30 min 7 h 10 min
XAVC S-I 4K
59.94p 600M 10 min 25 min 10 min 25 min
50p 500M 10 min 25 min 10 min 25 min
XAVC S-I HD
59.94p 222M 30 min 1 h 5 min 35 min 1 h 15 min
50p 185M 30 min 1 h 5 min 35 min 1 h 15 min
XAVC S-I DCI 4K
59.94p 600M 10 min 25 min 10 min 25 min
50p 500M 10 min 25 min 10 min 25 min
602
time is shorter because more memory is required for recording. The recordable time also varies depending on the shooting
conditions, the subject or the image quality/size settings.
Notes on continuous movie recording
High-quality movie recording and high-speed continuous shooting require large amounts of power. Therefore, if you
continue to shoot, the temperature inside the camera will rise, especially that of the image sensor. In such cases, the
camera will turn off automatically because the surface of the camera is heated to a high temperature or the high
temperature affects the quality of the images or the internal mechanism of the camera.
The duration of time available for continuous movie recording when the camera records with the default settings after
the power has been turned off for a while is as follows. The values indicate the continuous time from when the
camera starts recording until the camera stops recording.
When [Auto Power OFF Temp.] is set to [Standard]
When [Auto Power OFF Temp.] is set to [High]
XAVC S HD: 59.94p 50M/50p 50M 4:2:0 8bit; when the camera is not connected via Wi-Fi; when using a CFexpress
Type A memory card; when the monitor is open
XAVC S 4K: 59.94p 150M/50p 150M 4:2:0 8bit; when the camera is not connected via Wi-Fi; when using a
CFexpress Type A memory card; when the monitor is open
The duration of time available for movie recording varies with the temperature, file format/record setting for movies,
Wi-Fi network environment, or condition of the camera before you start recording. If you frequently recompose or
shoot images after the power is turned on, the temperature inside the camera will rise and the recording time
available will be shorter.
If the (Overheating warning) icon appears, the temperature of the camera has risen.
If the camera stops movie recording due to a high temperature, leave it for some time with the power turned off. Start
recording after the temperature inside the camera drops fully.
If you observe the following points, you will be able to record movies for longer periods of time.
Keep the camera out of direct sunlight.
Turn the camera off when it is not being used.
Related Topic
Memory cards that can be used
Battery life and number of recordable images
TP1001642690
File Format XAVC S HD XAVC S 4K
Ambient temperature: 25°C (77°F) Approx. 90 minutes Approx. 30 minutes
Ambient temperature: 40°C (104°F) Approx. 90 minutes Approx. 30 minutes
File Format XAVC S HD XAVC S 4K
Ambient temperature: 25°C (77°F) Approx. 90 minutes Approx. 60 minutes
Ambient temperature: 40°C (104°F) Approx. 90 minutes Approx. 60 minutes
603
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
604
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
List of icons on the screen for shooting movies
The displayed contents and their positions in the illustrations are just guidelines, and may differ from the actual displays.
Also, the displayed contents may vary depending on your camera’s system software (firmware) version.
Descriptions are given below the indications of the icons.
In addition to the icons described on this page, there are more icons for touch operations (touch function icons) that are
displayed on the left or right side of the screen when you swipe the monitor. For details, refer to “Touch function icons.”
Basic camera settings
Audio level
Audio recording off
Focus Mode
Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom
Gamma Disp. Assist Typ.
S-log3 s709 709(800%) User1 LUT OFF
LUT
STBY REC
Movie recording standby/Movie recording in progress
1:00:12
Actual movie recording time (hours: minutes: seconds)
4K HD
File format of movies
Fixed-59.94 fps / 15 fps (59.94p)
Frame rate of movies (when [Fixed/Variable Select] is set to [Fixed]/[Variable])
Memory card for recording / Not memory card for recording
NO CARD
No memory card inserted
Nearing the rewriting upper limit of the memory card / Rewriting upper limit of the memory card reached
1.
605
Recording to both memory cards simultaneously
1h 30m
Recordable time of movies
Writing data / Number of images left to write
Remaining battery
Remaining battery warning
USB power supply
Exposure and other settings
1/250 1/250 180.0
Shutter speed/Shutter angle
F3.5 F3.5
Aperture value
Exposure compensation/Metered Manual
ISO400 ISO 400
ISO sensitivity
800EI / 6.0E / L
Exposure Index/Base ISO
7500K A5 G5
White Balance (Auto, Preset, Underwater Auto, Custom, Color temperature, Color filter)
AE lock/AWB lock
Shooting
2.
Other settings (displayed during recording standby)
Shooting mode
Shooting mode (Memory recall)
Tripod recognition
REC Control
4K/RAW/DCI 4K external output
EXT-LK
External lock state of the time code
00:00:00.00
Time code (hours: minutes: seconds. frames)
00 00 00 00
User Bit
Spot Focus
Performing [Spot Focus]
Movie self-timer
Starting/stopping network streaming output
High / Standard / Low / HD (1080p) 59.94p 9.0M
3.
606
Image quality setting for network streaming output
Streaming : Standby / Output / Connecting / Connect. Err. / Not Connect
Network streaming status
USB connection mode (USB streaming)
4K(2160p) 29.97p / 4K(2160p) 25p /4K(2160p) 14.99p / 4K(2160p) 12.5p / HD(1080p) 59.94p /
HD(1080p) 50p / HD(1080p) 29.97p / HD(1080p) 25p / HD(720p) 29.97p / HD(720p) 25p
USB streaming output format
Streaming : Standby / Streaming : Output
USB streaming status
Tracking Cancel
Guide display for tracking
Focus Cancel
Guide display for canceling focusing
Tracking+AE Cancel
Guide display for tracking+AE
Focus+AE Cancel
Guide display for focus+AE
Touch AE Cancel
Guide display for touch AE
Lock Composition/ Cancel Lock Composition
Guide display for locking the composition with [Framing Stabilizer]
Audio format
Guide display for dials
Anti-flicker Tv Scan
Focus Cancel
Touch Focus+AE cancel/TouchTracking+AE cancel/Touch AE cancel
Tracking Cancel
Lock composition/Cancel lock composition
Remote Shooting (connected) / Remote Shooting (connection error)
Connected to the cloud/Communicating with the cloud/Cloud connection error
Connected with FTP / FTP communication in progress / FTP connection error
Transferring to smartphone / Transfer error
Airplane Mode
Connected to Wi-Fi (via a Wi-Fi access point)
Disconnected from Wi-Fi (via a Wi-Fi access point)
Connected to Wi-Fi/Disconnected from Wi-Fi (Wi-Fi Direct)
607
Hint
Area 3 icons may not be displayed while the touch function icons are displayed. To see hidden icons, swipe the touch function
icons left or right to hide the touch function icons.
Related Topic
List of icons on the screen for shooting still images
List of icons on the playback screen
TP1001663372
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
Connected to LAN/Disconnected from LAN (When using a USB-LAN conversion adaptor)
Bluetooth connection available / Bluetooth connection unavailable
Remote control
Obtaining location information / Location information cannot be obtained
Metering Mode
D-Range Optimizer
Histogram
Digital level gauge
Overheating warning
Database file full / Database file error
Cooling fan malfunction warning
608
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
List of icons on the screen for shooting still images
The displayed contents and their positions in the illustrations are just guidelines, and may differ from the actual displays.
Also, the displayed contents may vary depending on your camera’s system software (firmware) version.
Descriptions are given below the indications of the icons.
Monitor mode
Viewfinder mode
In addition to the icons described on this page, there are more icons for touch operations (touch function icons) that are
displayed on the left or right side of the screen when you swipe the monitor. For details, refer to “Touch function icons.”
Shooting mode/Scene recognition
Shooting mode
Shooting mode (Memory recall)
Scene Recognition icons
1.
Camera settings
Memory card for recording / Not memory card for recording
NO CARD
No memory card inserted
Near the rewriting upper limit of the memory card / Rewriting upper limit of the memory card reached
100
Remaining number of recordable images
2.
609
Writing data / Number of images left to write
33M / 29M / 28M / 22M / 14M / 13M / 12M / 9.4M / 8.2M / 7.3M / 6.9M / 5.5M
Image size of still images
RAW recording (compressed/lossless compression (L/M/S)/uncompressed)
J-X.FINE J-FINE J-STD J-LIGHT H-X.FINE H-FINE H-STD H-LIGHT
JPEG Quality / HEIF Quality
4:2:2
Color sampling for HEIF
Focus Mode
Flash charging in progress
Setting Effect OFF
Exposure Effect (Exposure Setting Only)
Anti-flicker Tv Scan
Flickering detected
SteadyShot off/on, Camera shake warning
Displayed at position 6 during vertical display
SteadyShot focal length / Camera shake warning
Displayed at position 6 during vertical display
Smart Zoom/Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom
Remote Shooting (connected) / Remote Shooting (connection error)
USB connection mode (USB streaming)
Bright Monitoring
Silent mode
Remote control
Connected to the cloud/Communicating with the cloud/Cloud connection error
Connected with FTP / FTP communication in progress / FTP connection error
Transferring to smartphone / Transfer error
Connected to Wi-Fi (via a Wi-Fi access point)
Disconnected from Wi-Fi (via a Wi-Fi access point)
610
Connected to Wi-Fi/Disconnected from Wi-Fi (Wi-Fi Direct)
Connected to LAN/Disconnected from LAN (When using a USB-LAN conversion adaptor)
Writing copyright information [On]
–
Writing IPTC information (IPTC1 through IPTC20)
Focus Cancel
Touch Focus+AE cancel/TouchTracking+AE cancel/Touch AE cancel
Tracking Cancel
Bluetooth connection available / Bluetooth connection unavailable
Obtaining location information / Location information cannot be obtained
Airplane Mode
Overheating warning
Database file full / Database file error
Tripod recognition
AE lock/FEL lock/AWB lock
Shooting
Battery
Remaining battery
Remaining battery warning
USB power supply
3.
Shooting settings
Drive Mode
Flash Mode / Wireless Flash / Red Eye Reduction
±0.0
Flash Comp.
Focus Mode
Focus Area
Metering Mode
7500K A5 G5
White Balance (Auto, Preset, Underwater Auto, Custom, Color temperature, Color filter)
4.
611
D-Range Optimizer
Creative Look
Subject Recog in AF/ Recognition Target
Shutter Type
–
Picture Profile
Silent Mode
Aspect ratio
Focus indicator/exposure settings
Focus indicator
1/250
Shutter speed
F3.5
Aperture value
Exposure compensation/Metered Manual
ISO400 ISO AUTO
ISO sensitivity
AE lock/FEL lock/AWB lock
Shooting
±0.0
Flash Comp.
5.
Guides/other
Tracking Cancel
Guide display for tracking
Focus Cancel
Guide display for canceling focusing
Tracking+AE Cancel
Guide display for tracking+AE
Focus+AE Cancel
Guide display for focus+AE
Touch AE Cancel
Guide display for touch AE
Guide display for dials
Bracket indicator
Spot metering area
Histogram
Digital level gauge
6.
612
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
List of icons on the playback screen
The displayed contents and their positions in the illustrations are just guidelines, and may differ from the actual displays.
Also, the displayed contents may vary depending on your camera’s system software (firmware) version.
Descriptions are given below the indications of the icons.
Single-image playback
Histogram display
Basic information
Playback media
IPTC Information
Rating
Protect
3/7
File number/Number of images in the view mode
Remaining battery
Display as Group
Cropped image
Proxy movie included
1.
614
Shot Mark included
FTP transfer status
Smartphone transfer status (when using [ Select on Cam & Send])
Camera settings
Connected to the cloud/Communicating with the cloud/Cloud connection error
Connected with FTP / FTP communication in progress / FTP connection error
Transferring to smartphone / Transfer error
Connected to Wi-Fi (via a Wi-Fi access point)
Disconnected from Wi-Fi (via a Wi-Fi access point)
Connected to Wi-Fi/Disconnected from Wi-Fi (Wi-Fi Direct)
Connected to LAN/Disconnected from LAN (When using a USB-LAN conversion adaptor)
Bluetooth connection available / Bluetooth connection unavailable
Airplane Mode
Overheating warning
Database file full / Database file error
2.
Touch operation icons
Shooting mode switching
Add/Delete Shot Mark1
Jump to the positions of Shot Marks
3.
Shooting settings
Aspect ratio
33M / 29M / 28M / 22M / 14M / 13M / 12M / 9.4M / 8.2M / 7.3M / 6.9M / 5.5M
Image size of still images
RAW recording
J-X.FINE J-FINE J-STD J-LIGHT H-X.FINE H-FINE H-STD H-LIGHT
JPEG Quality/HEIF Quality
4:2:2
Color sampling for HEIF
XAVC HS 4K XAVC S 4K XAVC S HD XAVC S-I 4K XAVC S-I HD XAVC S-I DCI 4K
File format of movies
119.88p 100p 59.94p 50p 29.97p 25p 23.98p 24.00p
Frame rate of movies
4.
615
Related Topic
List of icons on the screen for shooting still images
List of icons on the screen for shooting movies
TP1001663373
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
Record setting of movies
1/250
Shutter speed
F3.5
Aperture value
ISO400
ISO sensitivity
P A S M
Exposure mode
Exposure compensation
Metering Mode
35mm
Lens focal length
Creative Look
7500K A5 G5
White Balance (Auto, Preset, Underwater Auto, Color temperature, Color filter)
D-Range Optimizer
HLG
HDR recording (Hybrid Log-Gamma)
Copyright information exists for image
Image information
Latitude/longitude information
2025-1-1 10:37:00PM
Date of recording
100-0003
Folder number - file number
C0003
Movie file number
Histogram (Luminance/R/G/B)
5.
616
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
List of default setting values (Shooting)
The default setting values at the time of purchase are shown in the following table.
The content of the menu displayed on the screen differs depending on the position of the Still/Movie switch. For details,
refer to “Finding functions from MENU.”
To reset settings to the default values
Select MENU → (Setup) → [Reset/Save Settings] → [Setting Reset] → [Camera Settings Reset] or [Initialize] →
[Enter].
Initialize: All the settings of the camera will be reset to the default values.
Camera Settings Reset: Items that can be reset are limited. See the following table.
(Shooting) tab
MENU item Default setting value
Resettable using
[Camera Settings
Reset]
JPEG/HEIF Switch JPEG
Image Quality Settings ( File Format) JPEG/HEIF
Image Quality Settings (RAW File Type) Compressed
Image Quality Settings (JPEG Quality/HEIF Quality) Fine
Image Quality Settings (JPEG Image Size/HEIF Image Size)
(when [Aspect Ratio] is set to [3:2])
L: 33M
Image Quality Settings (JPEG Image Size/HEIF Image Size)
(when [Aspect Ratio] is set to [4:3])
L: 29M
Image Quality Settings (JPEG Image Size/HEIF Image Size)
(when [Aspect Ratio] is set to [16:9])
L: 28M
Image Quality Settings (JPEG Image Size/HEIF Image Size)
(when [Aspect Ratio] is set to [1:1])
L: 22M
Aspect Ratio 3:2
File Format XAVC S HD
Movie Settings (Rec Frame Rate) (when [ File Format]
is set to [XAVC HS 4K])
23.98p/50p
Movie Settings (Rec Frame Rate) (when [ File Format]
is set to [XAVC S 4K])
23.98p/25p
Movie Settings (Rec Frame Rate) (when [ File Format]
is set to [XAVC S HD])
59.94p/50p
Movie Settings (Rec Frame Rate) (when [ File Format]
is set to [XAVC S-I 4K])
23.98p/25p
617
MENU item Default setting value
Resettable using
[Camera Settings
Reset]
Movie Settings (Rec Frame Rate) (when [ File Format]
is set to [XAVC S-I HD])
59.94p/50p
Movie Settings (Rec Frame Rate) (when [ File Format]
is set to [XAVC S-I DCI 4K])
24.00p
Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is
set to [XAVC HS 4K] and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to
[59.94p]/[50p])
45M 4:2:0 10bit
Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is
set to [XAVC HS 4K] and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [23.98p])
50M 4:2:0 10bit
Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is
set to [XAVC S 4K] and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to
[59.94p]/[50p])
150M 4:2:0 8bit
Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is
set to [XAVC S 4K] and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to
[29.97p]/[25p])
60M 4:2:0 8bit
Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is
set to [XAVC S 4K] and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [23.98p])
60M 4:2:0 8bit
Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is
set to [XAVC S HD] and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to
[59.94p]/[50p])
50M 4:2:0 8bit
Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is
set to [XAVC S HD] and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to
[29.97p]/[25p])
50M 4:2:0 8bit
Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is
set to [XAVC S HD] and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [23.98p])
50M 4:2:0 8bit
Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is
set to [XAVC S HD] and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to
[119.88p]/[100p])
60M 4:2:0 8bit
Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is
set to [XAVC S-I 4K] and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to
[59.94p]/[50p])
600M 4:2:2 10bit/500M
4:2:2 10bit
Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is
set to [XAVC S-I 4K] and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to
[29.97p]/[25p])
300M 4:2:2 10bit/250M
4:2:2 10bit
Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is
set to [XAVC S-I 4K] and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [23.98p])
240M 4:2:2 10bit
Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is
set to [XAVC S-I HD] and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to
[59.94p]/[50p])
222M 4:2:2 10bit/185M
4:2:2 10bit
Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is
set to [XAVC S-I HD] and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to
[29.97p]/[25p])
111M 4:2:2 10bit/93M
4:2:2 10bit
618
MENU item Default setting value
Resettable using
[Camera Settings
Reset]
Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is
set to [XAVC S-I HD] and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [23.98p])
89M 4:2:2 10bit
Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is
set to [XAVC S-I DCI 4K] and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to
[59.94p])
600M 4:2:2 10bit
Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is
set to [XAVC S-I DCI 4K] and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to
[29.97p])
300M 4:2:2 10bit
Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is
set to [XAVC S-I DCI 4K] and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to
[23.98p])
240M 4:2:2 10bit
Movie Settings (Record Setting) (when [ File Format] is
set to [XAVC S-I DCI 4K] and [Rec Frame Rate] is set to
[24.00p])
240M 4:2:2 10bit
FPS (Fixed/Variable Select) Fixed
FPS (FPS Select) (when [ File Format] is set to [XAVC HS
4K])
60fps
FPS (FPS Select) (when [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S
4K])
60fps
FPS (FPS Select) (when [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S
HD])
120fps
FPS (FPS Select) (when [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S-I
4K])
60fps
FPS (FPS Select) (when [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S-I
HD])
120fps
FPS (FPS Select) (when [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S-I
DCI 4K])
48fps
Log Shooting Setting ( Log Shooting) Off
Log Shooting Setting ( Color Gamut)
Log Shooting Setting (Embed LUT File) ―
Log Shooting Setting ( Log Shooting) Off
Log Shooting Setting ( Color Gamut)
Proxy Settings ( Proxy Recording) Off
Proxy Settings ( Proxy File Format) XAVC S HD
Proxy Settings ( Proxy Rec. Settings) (when [
Proxy File Format] is set to [XAVC HS HD])
9M 4:2:0 10bit
Proxy Settings ( Proxy Rec. Settings) (when [
Proxy File Format] is set to [XAVC S HD])
6M 4:2:0 8bit
619
MENU item Default setting value
Resettable using
[Camera Settings
Reset]
Shooting Auto
Long Exposure NR On
High ISO NR Normal
HLG Still Image Off
Color Space sRGB
Lens Compensation (Shading Comp.) Auto
Lens Compensation (Chromatic Aberration Comp.) Auto
Lens Compensation (Distortion Comp.) Off
Lens Compensation (Breathing Comp.) Off
Format ―
Rec. Media Settings ( Recording Media) Slot 1
Rec. Media Settings ( Recording Media) Slot 1
Rec. Media Settings (Auto Switch Media Card) Off
Recover Image DB*
* This item is not reset even if you select [Camera Settings
Reset] or [Initialize].
―
Display Media Info. ―
File/Folder Settings (File Number) Series
File/Folder Settings (Forced File Number Reset) ―
File/Folder Settings (Set File Name) DSC
File/Folder Settings (Folder Name) Standard Form
Select REC Folder ―
Create New Folder ―
IPTC Information (Write IPTC Info) Off
IPTC Information (Import/Delete) ―
IPTC Information (Delete All) ―
Copyright Info (Write Copyright Info) Off
Copyright Info (Set Photographer) ―
Copyright Info (Set Copyright) ―
Copyright Info (Disp. Copyright Info) ―
Write Serial Number Off
620
MENU item Default setting value
Resettable using
[Camera Settings
Reset]
File Settings (File Number) Series
File Settings (Series Counter Reset) ―
File Settings (File Name Format) Cam ID + Reel#
File Settings ([Camera ID]) A
File Settings ([Reel Number]) ―
File Settings ([Camera Position]) C
File Settings (Title Name Settings) C
Exposure Ctrl Type Flexible Exp. Mode
Camera Set. Memory ―
Shoot Mode Manual Exposure
Shoot Mode Manual Exposure
Memory/Recall Media Slot 1
Reg. Custom Shoot Set ―
Drive Mode Single Shooting
Bracket Settings (Selftimer during Bracket) Off
Bracket Settings (Bracket order) 0→-→+
Bracket Settings (Focus Bracket Settings) ―
Bracket Settings (Focus Bracket Order) 0→+
Bracket Settings (Exposure Smoothing) Off
Bracket Settings (Shooting Interval) Shortest
Bracket Settings (Focus Brckt Saving Dest) Current Folder
Interval Shoot Func. (Interval Shooting) Off
Interval Shoot Func. (Shooting Start Time) 1 Sec
Interval Shoot Func. (Shooting Interval) 3 Sec
Interval Shoot Func. (Number of Shots) 30
Interval Shoot Func. (AE Tracking Sensitivity) Mid
Interval Shoot Func. (Shutter Type in Interval) Electronic Shutter
Interval Shoot Func. (Shoot Interval Priority) Off
Silent Mode Settings (Silent Mode) Off
Silent Mode Settings ([Aperture Drive in AF] under [Target
Function Settings])
Standard
621
MENU item Default setting value
Resettable using
[Camera Settings
Reset]
Silent Mode Settings ([Shutter When Pwr OFF] under
[Target Function Settings])
Off
Silent Mode Settings ([Auto Pixel Mapping] under [Target
Function Settings])
Off
Shutter Type Mechanical Shutter
Release w/o Lens Enable
Release w/o Card Enable
Anti-flicker Set. (Anti-flicker Shoot.) Off
Anti-flicker Set. ( Var. Shutter) Off
Anti-flicker Set. ( Var. Shutter Set.) ―
Audio Recording On
Audio Rec Level 26
Audio Out Timing Live
Wind Noise Reduct. Auto
Shoe Audio Set.
Time Code Preset 00:00:00.00
User Bit Preset 00 00 00 00
Time Code Format DF
Time Code Run Rec Run
Time Code Make Preset
User Bit Time Rec Off
SteadyShot On
SteadyShot Standard
SteadyShot Adjust. Auto
Focal Length (when [ SteadyShot Adjust.] is set to
[Manual])
8mm
Framing Stabilizer Off
Zoom Range Optical zoom only
Zoom Lever Speed ( 1st Zoom Spd. ) 3
Zoom Lever Speed ( 2nd Zoom Spd. ) 8 (Fast)
Zoom Lever Speed ( 1st Zoom Spd. ) 3
Zoom Lever Speed ( 2nd Zoom Spd. ) 8 (Fast)
622
TP1001667115
MENU item Default setting value
Resettable using
[Camera Settings
Reset]
Custom Key Z. Speed (Fixed Speed ) 3
Custom Key Z. Speed (Fixed Speed ) 3
Remote Zoom Speed ( Speed Type) Variable
Remote Zoom Speed ( Fixed Speed ) 3
Remote Zoom Speed ( Fixed Speed ) 3
Grid Line Display Off
Grid Line Type Rule of 3rds Grid
Live View Display Set. (Live View Display) Setting Effect ON
Live View Display Set. (Exposure Effect) Exposure Set. & flash
Live View Display Set. (Frame Rate Low Limit) Off
Emphasized REC Display On
Aspect Marker Off
Aspect Marker Type 1:1
Aspect Marker Level 12
Marker Display Off
Center Marker Off
Aspect Marker Off
Safety Zone Off
Guideframe Off
Self-timer Off
Auto Framing Settings (Auto Framing) Off
Auto Framing Settings (Framing Oper. Mode) Auto Start
Auto Framing Settings (Crop Level) Medium crop level
Auto Framing Settings (Framing Tracking Speed) 3
Auto Framing Settings (Movie Rec/Streaming) Crop
Auto Framing Settings (HDMI Output) Crop
AutoCreateStillImage Off
after still img crt Maintain
Selection/Memo Shot (Top Image) Off
623
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
624
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
List of default setting values (Exposure/Color)
The default setting values at the time of purchase are shown in the following table.
The content of the menu displayed on the screen differs depending on the position of the Still/Movie switch. For details,
refer to “Finding functions from MENU.”
To reset settings to the default values
Select MENU → (Setup) → [Reset/Save Settings] → [Setting Reset] → [Camera Settings Reset] or [Initialize] →
[Enter].
Initialize: All the settings of the camera will be reset to the default values.
Camera Settings Reset: Items that can be reset are limited. See the following table.
(Exposure/Color) tab
MENU item Default setting value
Resettable using [Camera Settings
Reset]
Shutter Mode Angle
BULB Timer Settings (BULB Timer) Off
BULB Timer Settings (Exposure Time) 60 seconds
Auto Slow Shutter On
ISO ISO 125
ISO Range Limit ―
ISO AUTO Min. SS Standard
Base ISO ISO 800
Base ISO Switch EI 2000 EI
Exposure Index (when [Base ISO] is set to [ISO
800])
800 EI / 6.0E
Exposure Index (when [Base ISO] is set to [ISO
4000])
4000 EI / 6.0E
Auto/Manual Swt. Set. (Av Auto/Manual Switch) Manual
Auto/Manual Swt. Set. (Tv Auto/Manual Switch) Manual
Auto/Manual Swt. Set. (ISO Auto/Manual Set) Manual
ND Filter ―
Exposure Comp. ±0.0
Exposure step 0.3EV
Exposure Std. Adjust ( Multi) ±0
625
TP1001667114
MENU item Default setting value
Resettable using [Camera Settings
Reset]
Exposure Std. Adjust ( Center) ±0
Exposure Std. Adjust ( Spot) ±0
Exposure Std. Adjust ( Entire Screen
Average)
±0
Exposure Std. Adjust ( Highlight) ±0
Metering Mode Multi
Face Priority in Multi Metering On
Spot Metering Point Center
AEL w/ Shutter Auto
Flash Mode Autoflash
Flash Comp. ±0.0
Exp.comp.set Ambient only
Wireless Flash Off
Red Eye Reduction Off
External Flash Set. (Ext. Flash Firing Set.) ―
External Flash Set. (Ext. Flash Cust. Set.) ―
Reg. Flash Shooting Set ―
White Balance Auto
Priority Set in AWB Standard
Shutter AWB Lock Off
Shockless WB 1 (Fast)
WB Capt. Frame Size Large
D-Range Optimizer
D-Range Optimizer:
Auto
Creative Look ST(Standard)
Picture Profile PP11
Select LUT s709
Manage User LUTs ―
Zebra Display Off
Zebra Level 70
626
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
627
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
List of default setting values (Focus)
The default setting values at the time of purchase are shown in the following table.
The content of the menu displayed on the screen differs depending on the position of the Still/Movie switch. For details,
refer to “Finding functions from MENU.”
To reset settings to the default values
Select MENU → (Setup) → [Reset/Save Settings] → [Setting Reset] → [Camera Settings Reset] or [Initialize] →
[Enter].
Initialize: All the settings of the camera will be reset to the default values.
Camera Settings Reset: Items that can be reset are limited. See the following table.
(Focus) tab
MENU item Default setting value Resettable using [Camera Settings Reset]
Focus Mode Automatic AF
Priority Set in AF-S Balanced Emphasis
Priority Set in AF-C Balanced Emphasis
AF Lvl for Crossing 3(Standard)
AF Trk for Spd Chng Standard
Aperture Drive in AF Standard
Preset Focus/Zoom ―
AF w/ Shutter On
Full Time DMF Off
Pre-AF Off
AF Transition Speed 5
AF Subj. Shift Sensitivity 5(Responsive)
AF Assist Off
Focus Area Wide
Focus Area Limit ―
Switch V/H AF Area Off
Focus Area Color White
AF Area Registration Off
Del. Regist. AF Area ―
AF Area Auto Clear Off
628
TP1001667113
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU item Default setting value Resettable using [Camera Settings Reset]
Area Disp. dur Tracking Off
AF-C Area Display On
Phase Detect. Area Off
Circ. of Focus Point Does Not Circulate
AF Frame Move Amt Standard
Subject Recog in AF On
Recognition Target Human
Recog Trgt Select Set ―
Right/Left Eye Select Auto
Sbj Recog Frm Disp. Off
Sbj Recog Frm Disp. On
Face Memory ―
Regist. Face Priority On
Focus Map Off
Auto Magnifier in MF On
Focus Magnifier ―
Focus Magnif. Time No Limit
Initial Focus Mag. x1.0
AF in Focus Mag. On
Initial Focus Mag. x1.0
Peaking Display Off
Peaking Level Mid
Peaking Color White
629
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
List of default setting values (Playback)
The default setting values at the time of purchase are shown in the following table.
To reset settings to the default values
Select MENU → (Setup) → [Reset/Save Settings] → [Setting Reset] → [Camera Settings Reset] or [Initialize] →
[Enter].
Initialize: All the settings of the camera will be reset to the default values.
Camera Settings Reset: Items that can be reset are limited. See the following table.
(Playback) tab
MENU item
Default setting
value
Resettable using [Camera Settings
Reset]
Play Set of Multi. Media Slot 1
Disp Set of Multi Media Follow PB Settings
Playback Filter Condition ―
Image Order Date Order
Enlarge Image ―
Enlarge Initial Mag. Standard. Mag.
Enlarge Initial Position Focused Position
Protect ―
Rating ―
Rating Set(Custom Key) ―
Clip Flag ―
Delete ―
Delete pressing twice Off
Delete confirm. "Cancel" first
Crop ―
Rotate ―
Copy ―
Photo Capture ―
Create Still Image ―
after still img crt Maintain
630
TP1001667112
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU item
Default setting
value
Resettable using [Camera Settings
Reset]
JPEG/HEIF Switch JPEG
Cont. Play for Interval —
Play Speed for Interval 5
Slide Show (Repeat) Off
Slide Show (Interval) 3 Sec
Image Index 9 Images
Display as Group On
Display Rotation Auto
Focus Frame Display Off
Aspect Marker Disp. ( Aspect Marker
Disp.)
On
Aspect Marker Disp. (Aspect Marker Level) 12
Disp Specified Time Img. —
Image Jump Setting ( Front dial) One by one
Image Jump Setting ( Rear dial) One by one
631
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
List of default setting values (Network)
The default setting values at the time of purchase are shown in the following table.
To reset settings to the default values
Select MENU → (Setup) → [Reset/Save Settings] → [Setting Reset] → [Camera Settings Reset] or [Initialize] →
[Enter].
Initialize: All the settings of the camera will be reset to the default values.
Camera Settings Reset: Items that can be reset are limited. See the following table.
(Network) tab
MENU item Default setting value
Resettable using [Camera
Settings Reset]
Smartphone Connection —
Remote Shoot Function (Remote Shooting) Off
Remote Shoot Function (Pairing) ―
Remote Shoot Function (Wi-Fi Direct Info.) ―
Select on Cam & Send ( Send) ―
Select on Cam & Send (Size of
Sending Image)
2M
Select on Cam & Send (RAW+J/H
Send Target)
JPEG & HEIF
Select on Cam & Send ( Sending
Target)
Proxy Only
Select on Cam & Send (Movie with
Shot Mark)
Cut to 15 seconds
Reset Transfer Status —
Cnct. while Power OFF Off
Remote Shoot Setting (Still Img. Save
Dest.)
Dest.+Camera
Remote Shoot Setting (Save Image Size) 2M
Remote Shoot Setting (RAW+J Save
Image)
JPEG Only
Remote Shoot Setting (RAW+H Save
Image)
HEIF Only
Remote Shoot Setting (Save JPEG Size) Large Size
Remote Shoot Setting (Save HEIF Size) Large Size
632
MENU item Default setting value
Resettable using [Camera
Settings Reset]
FTP Transfer Func. (FTP Function) Off
FTP Transfer Func. (Server Setting) Server 1
FTP Transfer Func. (Save/Load FTP
Settings)
―
FTP Transfer Func. (FTP Transfer) ―
FTP Transfer Func. (Display FTP Error
Info.)
―
FTP Transfer Func. (Display FTP Result) ―
FTP Transfer Func. (Auto FTP Transfer) Off
FTP Transfer Func. (Auto FTP Target) Still Image (All)
FTP Transfer Func. (RAW+J/H Transfer
Target)
JPEG & HEIF
FTP Transfer Func. (Transfer JPEG Size) Large Size
FTP Transfer Func. (Transfer HEIF Size) Large Size
FTP Transfer Func. ( Transfer Target) Proxy Only
FTP Transfer Func. (Protect Image in FTP
transfer)
Off
FTP Transfer Func. (FTP Power Save) Off
Network Streaming (Streaming) Off
Network Streaming (Stream Connect
Error Display)
―
Network Streaming (Output Img.
Quality Set)
Standard / HD (1080p) / 59.94p /
50p / ―
Network Streaming (Output Information
Display)
―
Network Streaming (Movie Rec During
Streaming)
Disable
Network Streaming (Emphasized
Output Display)
On
Network Streaming (Root Certificate
Error)
Does Not Connect
USB Streaming (Output Res/Frame
Rate)
HD(1080p)29.97p
USB Streaming (Movie Rec During
Streaming)
Disable
Cloud Connection* Off
633
*Only available in certain countries and regions
MENU item Default setting value
Resettable using [Camera
Settings Reset]
Cloud Information* ―
Wi-Fi Connect Off
WPS Push ―
Access Point Set. ―
Wi-Fi Frequency Band 2.4GHz
Display Wi-Fi Info. ―
SSID/PW Reset ―
Bluetooth Function Off
Pairing ―
Manage Paired Device ―
Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl Off
Disp Device Address ―
IP Address Setting Auto
Display Wired LAN Info. ―
USB-LAN Connection ―
USB-LAN Disconnection ―
Tethering Connection ―
Tethering Disconnection ―
Airplane Mode Off
Edit Device Name ―
Import Root Certificate ―
Access Authen. Settings (Access Authen.) On
Access Authen. Settings (User) ―
Access Authen. Settings (Password) ―
Access Authen. Settings (Generate
Password)
―
Access Authen. Info ―
Wi-Fi Direct Settings Type1 (Standard)
Reset Network Set. ―
634
TP1001667111
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
635
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
List of default setting values (Setup)
The default setting values at the time of purchase are shown in the following table.
To reset settings to the default values
Select MENU → (Setup) → [Reset/Save Settings] → [Setting Reset] → [Camera Settings Reset] or [Initialize] →
[Enter].
Initialize: All the settings of the camera will be reset to the default values.
Camera Settings Reset: Items that can be reset are limited. See the following table.
(Setup) tab
MENU item Default setting value
Resettable using [Camera
Settings Reset]
Language ―
Area/Date/Time Setting (Area Setting) ―
Area/Date/Time Setting (Daylight Savings) Off
Area/Date/Time Setting (Date/Time) ―
Area/Date/Time Setting (Date Format) ―
NTSC/PAL Selector ―
Setting Reset ―
Save/Load Settings ―
Custom Key/Dial Set. ( Front dial) Follow Custom ( )
Custom Key/Dial Set. ( Rear dial) Follow Custom ( )
Custom Key/Dial Set. (Control Wheel) Follow Custom ( )
Custom Key/Dial Set. (Custom Button 1) Follow Custom ( )
Custom Key/Dial Set. (Custom Button 2) Follow Custom ( )
Custom Key/Dial Set. (Custom Button 3) Follow Custom ( )
Custom Key/Dial Set. (Custom Button 4) Follow Custom ( )
Custom Key/Dial Set. (Custom Button 5) Follow Custom ( )
Custom Key/Dial Set. (Custom Button 6) Movie Shooting
Custom Key/Dial Set. (Custom Button 7) Follow Custom ( )
Custom Key/Dial Set. (Multi-Slc Center Btn) Follow Custom ( )
Custom Key/Dial Set. (Center Button) Follow Custom ( )
636
MENU item Default setting value
Resettable using [Camera
Settings Reset]
Custom Key/Dial Set. (Left Button) Follow Custom ( )
Custom Key/Dial Set. (Right Button) Follow Custom ( )
Custom Key/Dial Set. (Down Button) Follow Custom ( )
Custom Key/Dial Set. (MOVIE Button) Movie Shooting
Custom Key/Dial Set. (Focus Hold Button) Follow Custom ( )
Custom Key/Dial Set. ( Front dial) Aperture
Custom Key/Dial Set. ( Rear dial) ISO/EI
Custom Key/Dial Set. (Control Wheel) Shutter Speed
Custom Key/Dial Set. (Custom Button 1)
L.PressAv
Auto/Manual
Custom Key/Dial Set. (Custom Button 2) White Balance
Custom Key/Dial Set. (Custom Button 3)
L.PressISO
Auto/Manual
Custom Key/Dial Set. (Custom Button 4)
Touch Operation
Select
Custom Key/Dial Set. (Custom Button 5) Not set
Custom Key/Dial Set. (Custom Button 6) Movie Shooting
Custom Key/Dial Set. (Custom Button 7) Finder/Monitor Sel.
Custom Key/Dial Set. (Multi-Slc Center Btn) Focus Standard
Custom Key/Dial Set. (Center Button) Not set
Custom Key/Dial Set. (Left Button) Zebra Display Select
Custom Key/Dial Set. (Right Button)
Peaking Display
Select
Custom Key/Dial Set. (Down Button)
L.PressTv
Auto/Manual
Custom Key/Dial Set. (MOVIE Button) Movie Shooting
Custom Key/Dial Set. (Focus Hold Button) Focus Hold
Custom Key Setting (Custom Button 1)
Follow Custom ( /
)
Custom Key Setting (Custom Button 2)
Follow Custom ( /
)
Custom Key Setting (Custom Button 3)
Follow Custom ( /
)
Custom Key Setting (Custom Button 4) Delete
637
MENU item Default setting value
Resettable using [Camera
Settings Reset]
Custom Key Setting (Custom Button 5)
Follow Custom ( /
)
Custom Key Setting (Custom Button 6)
Follow Custom ( /
)
Custom Key Setting (Custom Button 7)
Follow Custom ( /
)
Custom Key Setting (MOVIE Button)
Follow Custom ( /
)
Custom Key Setting (Fn Button) Function Menu
Fn Menu Settings ―
Fn Menu Settings ―
Different Set for Still/Mv ―
Home (Lower Left) Aperture
DISP (Screen Disp) Set ―
REC w/ Shutter Off
with Shutter Button Do not add
Zoom Ring Rotate Left(W)/Right(T)
Custom Key/Dial Set. ―
Custom Key/Dial Set. ―
My Dial Settings ―
Av/Tv Rotate Normal
Function Ring(Lens) Power Focus
Lock Operation Parts Off
Touch Operation On
Touch Panel/Pad Touch Panel Only
Touch Panel Settings ([Shooting Screen] under [Shooting
Screen])
On
Touch Panel Settings ([Footer Icon Touch] under
[Shooting Screen])
On
Touch Panel Settings ([Swipe Right] under [Shooting
Screen])
Icon Display: L&R
Touch Panel Settings ([Swipe Left] under [Shooting
Screen])
Icon Display: L&R
Touch Panel Settings ([Swipe Up] under [Shooting
Screen])
Open the Fn Menu
638
MENU item Default setting value
Resettable using [Camera
Settings Reset]
Touch Panel Settings ([Swipe Down] under [Shooting
Screen])
Open Home Screen
Touch Panel Settings ([Touch Func. in Shooting] under
[Shooting Screen])
Touch Tracking
Touch Panel Settings ([Icon When Monitor Flipped] under
[Shooting Screen])
Flip
Touch Panel Settings (Playback Screen) On
Touch Panel Settings (Menu Screen) On
Touch Pad Settings (Operation in Vertical Orientation ) On
Touch Pad Settings (Touch Position Mode) Absolute Position
Touch Pad Settings (Operation Area) Right 1/2
Screen Reader (Screen Reader) Off
Screen Reader (Speed) Standard
Screen Reader (Volume) 7
Screen Reader ( Long Press to Switch) On
Enlarge Screen (Enlarge Menu Scrn) Off
Enlarge Screen (Magnification) ―
Select Finder/Monitor Auto: 1
Monitor Brightness Manual
Viewfinder Bright. Auto
Finder Color Temp. ±0
Display Quality Standard
Finder Frame Rate Standard
Monitor Flip Direction Auto
Vertical Display On
TC/UB Disp. Setting TC
Gamma Display Assist Off
Gamma Disp. Assist Typ. Auto
Display LUT On
De-Squeeze Display Off
Remain Shoot Display Not Displayed
Auto Review Off
639
MENU item Default setting value
Resettable using [Camera
Settings Reset]
Display File Name On
Monitor Off Does not turn OFF
Power Save Start Time 5 Min
Power Save by Monitor Does Not Link
Auto Power OFF Temp. Standard
Playback/Monitor. Vol. 7
4ch Audio Monitoring CH1/CH2
Audio Signal(Shooting) On:all
Audio Signal(Start/End) Off
Audio Signal Volume 3
USB Connection Mode Sel. When Connect
USB LUN Setting Multi
USB Power Supply On
HDMI Resolution Auto
HDMI Output Settings (Rec. Media dur HDMI Output) On
HDMI Output Settings (Output Resolution) Auto
HDMI Output Settings (4K Output Set.(HDMI Only)) 59.94p 10bit/50p 10bit
HDMI Output Settings (RAW Output) Off
HDMI Output Settings (RAW Output Setting) 59.94p / 50p
HDMI Output Settings (Time Code Output) Off
HDMI Output Settings (REC Control) Off
HDMI Output Settings (4ch Audio Output) CH1/CH2
HDMI Info. Display Off
CTRL FOR HDMI On
Video Light Mode Power Link
REC Lamp All On
Fan Control Auto
Anti-dust Function (Sensor Cleaning) ―
Anti-dust Function (Shutter When Pwr OFF) Off
Auto Pixel Mapping On
Pixel Mapping ―
640
TP1001667116
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU item Default setting value
Resettable using [Camera
Settings Reset]
Version ―
Display Serial Number ―
Privacy Notice ―
641
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
List of default setting values (My Menu)
The default setting values at the time of purchase are shown in the following table.
To reset settings to the default values
Select MENU → (Setup) → [Reset/Save Settings] → [Setting Reset] → [Camera Settings Reset] or [Initialize] →
[Enter].
Initialize: All the settings of the camera will be reset to the default values.
Camera Settings Reset: Items that can be reset are limited. See the following table.
(My Menu) tab
TP1001667110
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
MENU item Default setting value Resettable using [Camera Settings Reset]
Add Item ―
Sort Item ―
Delete Item ―
Delete Page ―
Delete All ―
Display From My Menu Off
642
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Specifications
System
Camera Type
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
Lens
Sony E-mount lens
Image sensor
Image format
35 mm full frame (35.9 mm × 23.9 mm), CMOS image sensor
Effective pixel number of camera
Movies: Approx. 27 600 000 pixels
Still Images: Approx. 33 000 000 pixels
Total pixel number of camera
Approx. 34 100 000 pixels
SteadyShot
System
In-camera sensor shift image stabilization system
Anti-Dust
System
Charge protection coating on optical filter and image sensor shift mechanism
Auto focus system
Detection system
Phase-detection system/Contrast detection system
Sensitivity Range
–4 EV to +20 EV (at ISO 100 equivalent, F2.0)
Electronic Viewfinder
Type
1.3 cm (0.5 type) Electronic Viewfinder
Total number of dots
3 686 400 dots
Frame coverage
100%
Magnification
643
Approx. 0.70× with 50 mm lens at infinity, –1 m
–1
Eye Point
Approx. 33 mm from the eyepiece and approx. 27 mm from the eyepiece frame at –1 m
－1
Diopter Adjustment
－4.0 m
－1
to ＋3.0 m
－1
Monitor
LCD monitor
7.5 cm (3.0 type) TFT drive, touch panel
Total number of dots
1 036 800 dots
Exposure control
Metering method
1 200-zone evaluative metering
Metering Range
–3 EV to +20 EV (at ISO 100 equivalent with F2.0 lens)
ISO sensitivity (Recommended exposure index)
Still images: ISO 100 to ISO 51 200 (Extended ISO: Minimum ISO 50, maximum ISO 204 800), [ISO AUTO] (ISO 100 to
ISO 12 800, Maximum/Minimum can be set.)
Movies: ISO 100 to ISO 51 200 equivalent (Extended ISO: maximum equivalent to ISO 102 400), [ISO AUTO] (ISO 100
to ISO 12 800 equivalent, Maximum/Minimum can be set.)
Exposure compensation
±5.0 EV (switchable between 1/3 EV and 1/2 EV steps)
Shutter
Type
Electronically-controlled, vertical-traverse, focal-plane type
Speed range
Still images (when shooting with the electronic shutter): 1/8 000 second to 30 seconds
Still images (when shooting with the mechanical shutter): 1/4 000 second to 30 seconds, BULB
Movies: 1/8 000 second to 1 second (1/3 EV step)
60p-compatible devices: up to 1/60 second in AUTO mode (up to 1/30 second in Auto slow shutter mode)
50p-compatible devices: up to 1/50 second in AUTO mode (up to 1/25 second in Auto slow shutter mode)
5.6° to 64F when [Shutter Mode] is set to [Angle] (5.6° to 360° when [Rec Frame Rate] is set to [119.88p]/[100p] or
when [Fixed/Variable Select] is set to [Variable])
Flash sync speed (when using a flash manufactured by Sony)
1/160 second (Full-frame)
1/200 second (APS-C size)
Continuous shooting
Continuous shooting speed
(Continuous Shooting: Hi+) : Maximum of approx. 10 images per second/ (Continuous Shooting: Hi):
Maximum of approx. 8 images per second/ (Continuous Shooting: Mid): Maximum of approx. 6 images per second/
(Continuous Shooting: Lo): Maximum of approx. 3 images per second
644
Based on our measurement conditions. The speed of continuous shooting can be slower, depending on the shooting
conditions.
You can change the speed of continuous shooting.
Recording format
File format
JPEG (compliant with DCF Ver. 2.0, Exif Ver. 2.32, and MPF Baseline), HEIF (MPEG-A MIAF compliant), RAW (Sony
ARW 5.0 format compliant)
Movie (XAVC HS format)
XAVC Ver2.1: MP4 format compliant
Video: MPEG-H HEVC/H.265
Audio: LPCM 2ch (48 kHz 16 bit), LPCM 4ch (48 kHz 24 bit)
*1
, LPCM 2ch (48 kHz 24 bit)
*1
, MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch
*2
Movie (XAVC S format)
XAVC Ver2.1: MP4 format compliant
Video: MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
Audio: LPCM 2ch (48 kHz 16 bit), LPCM 4ch (48 kHz 24 bit)
*1
, LPCM 2ch (48 kHz 24 bit)
*1
, MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch
*2
Recording media
CFexpress Type A memory cards, SD cards
Slot
SLOT 1
Slot for CFexpress Type A memory cards, SD cards (UHS-I and UHS-II compatible)
SLOT 2
Slot for SD cards (UHS-I and UHS-II compatible)
Supports operations between two memory cards.
Input/output terminals
USB Type-C terminal
SuperSpeed USB 10Gbps (USB 3.2)
USB Power Delivery support
Multi/Micro USB Terminal*
Hi-Speed USB (USB 2.0)
HDMI
HDMI type A jack
(Microphone) terminal
Ø 3.5 mm Stereo mini jack
(Headphones) terminal
Ø 3.5 mm Stereo mini jack
Power, general
Rated input
When using the XLR handle unit (supplied or sold separately) or when using accessories that can support 4-channel output and 24 bits with the
multi-interface shoe
*1
Proxy movies
*2
Supports Micro USB compatible devices.
*
645
7.2 V
Power consumption
Using an FE 28-70 mm F3.5-5.6 OSS
When using the viewfinder: Approx. 4.2 W (while shooting still images)/approx. 6.6 W (while shooting movies)
When using the monitor: Approx. 3.8 W (while shooting still images)/approx. 6.3 W (while shooting movies)
Operating temperature
0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)
Storage temperature
–20 °C to 55 °C (–4 °F to 131 °F)
Dimensions (W/H/D) (Approx.)
129.7 × 77.8 × 103.7 mm
129.7 × 77.8 × 85.0 mm (from grip to monitor)
5 1/8 × 3 1/8 × 4 1/8 in.
5 1/8 × 3 1/8 × 3 3/8 in. (from grip to monitor)
Mass (Approx.)
679 g (1 lb 8.0 oz) (including battery pack, SD card)
Microphone
Stereo
Speaker
Monaural
Exif Print
Compatible
PRINT Image Matching III
Compatible
Eco and energy saving
Power consumption (Off mode)
Not available
Power consumption (Standby mode/Low power mode)
0.5 W
Power consumption (Networked standby mode)
2.0 W (Bluetooth) / 2.0 W (all terminals and networks connected)
Low power mode activated
Within 20 minutes (default)
Networked standby mode activated
Within 20 minutes (default)
Wireless LAN
WW934774 (see name plate on the bottom of camera)
Supported format
IEEE 802.11 a/b/g/n/ac
Frequency band
2.4 GHz / 5 GHz
Security
WPA2-PSK/WPA3-SAE
Connection method
Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS)/Manual
Access method
Infrastructure mode
WW295750 (see name plate on the bottom of camera)
646
Supported format
IEEE 802.11 b/g/n
Frequency band
2.4 GHz
Security
WPA2-PSK/WPA3-SAE
Connection method
Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS)/Manual
Access method
Infrastructure mode
Bluetooth communications
Bluetooth standard Ver.5.0
Frequency band
2.4 GHz
XLR handle unit (ILME-FX2 only)
INPUT1/INPUT2 jack
3-pin XLR/TRS, female type
INPUT3 jack
Ø 3.5 mm Stereo mini jack
Mass (Approx.)
305 g (10.8 oz)
Rechargeable battery pack NP-FZ100
Rated voltage
7.2 V
Recommended USB-PD-compatible AC adaptor
Input
100-240 V , 50/60 Hz
Output
9 V / 2 A or more
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.
TP1001667119
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
647
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Trademarks
“α” and “ ” are trademarks of Sony Group Corporation.
XAVC S and are trademarks of Sony Group Corporation.
XAVC HS and are trademarks of Sony Group Corporation.
Mac is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the United States and other countries.
USB Type-C® and USB-C® are registered trademarks of USB Implementers Forum.
The terms HDMI™, HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, HDMI Trade dress and the HDMI Logos are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing Administrator, Inc.
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or
other countries.
SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
The CFexpress™ is a trademark licensed by the CompactFlash Association.
Wi-Fi, the Wi-Fi logo and Wi-Fi Protected Setup are registered trademarks or trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such
marks by Sony Group Corporation and its subsidiaries is under license.
QR Code is a trademark of Denso Wave Inc.
In addition, system and product names used in this manual are, in general, trademarks or registered trademarks of
their respective developers or manufacturers. However, the ™ or ® marks may not be used in all cases in this
manual.
TP1001642723
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
648
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
License
Notes on the License
This product comes with software that are used based on licensing agreements with the owners of that software. Based
on requests by the owners of copyright of these software applications, we have an obligation to inform you of the
following. Licenses (in English) are recorded in the internal memory of your product. Establish a Mass Storage
connection between the product and a computer to read licenses in the “PMHOME” - “LICENSE” folder.
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL USE OF A
CONSUMER OR OTHER USES IN WHICH IT DOES NOT RECEIVE REMUNERATION TO
(i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”)
AND/OR
(ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL ACTIVITY AND/OR
WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO.
NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
INCLUDING THAT RELATING TO PROMOTIONAL, INTERNAL AND COMMERCIAL USES AND LICENSING MAY BE
OBTAINED FROM Via Licensing Alliance LLC
SEE https://www.via-la.com/
Covered by one or more claims of the HEVC patents listed at https://patentlist.accessadvance.com.
On GNU GPL/LGPL applied software
The software included in this product contains copyrighted software that is licensed under the GPLv2 and other licenses
which may require access to source code. You may find a copy of the relevant source code as required under the GPLv2
(and other licenses) at https://www.sony.net/Products/Linux/.
You may obtain the source code as required by the GPLv2 on a physical medium from us for a period of three years after
our last shipment of this product by applying through the form at https://www.sony.net/Products/Linux/.
This offer is valid to anyone in receipt of this information.
TP1001619330
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
649
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Troubleshooting
If you experience trouble with the product, try the following solutions.
Related Topic
Setting Reset
TP1001619332
5-068-663-12(2) Copyright 2025 Sony Corporation
Remove the battery pack, wait for about one minute, re-insert the battery pack, then turn on the power.
1
Initialize the settings.
2
Consult your dealer or local authorized service facility. Additional information on this product and answers
to frequently asked questions can be found at our Customer Support Website.
https://www.sony.net/
3
650
Help Guide
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
ILME-FX2/ILME-FX2B
Warning messages
Set Area/Date/Time.
Set the area, date and time. If you have not used the product for a long time, charge the internal rechargeable backup
battery.
Power insufficient.
The image copying or the image sensor cleaning function will not operate because the remaining battery level is too
low. Recharge the battery pack or supply power by connecting the camera with a computer, etc.
Unable to use memory card. Format?
The memory card was formatted on a computer and the file format was modified. Select [Enter] and then format the
memory card. You can use the memory card again, however, all previous data in the memory card is erased. It may
take some time to complete the format. If the message still appears, change the memory card.
Memory Card Error
An incompatible memory card is inserted.
Formatting has failed. Format the memory card again.
Unable to read memory card. Reinsert memory card.
An incompatible memory card is inserted.
The memory card is damaged.
The terminal section of the memory card is dirty.
Memory card locked.
You are using a memory card with a write-protect switch or a delete-protect switch with the switch set to the LOCK
position. Set the switch to the record position.
Cannot open the shutter since the memory card is not inserted.
No memory card has been inserted into the memory card slot selected in [ Recording Media] or [ Recording
Media].
To release the shutter without inserting a memory card into the camera, set [Release w/o Card] to [Enable]. In this
case, images will not be saved.
This memory card may not be capable of recording and playing normally.
An incompatible memory card is inserted.
Processing...
When performing noise reduction, the reduction process takes place. You cannot do any further shooting during this
reduction process.
Unable to display.
Images recorded with other products or images modified with a computer may not be displayed.
651
Processing on the computer such as deletion of the image files may cause inconsistencies in the image database
files. Repair the image database files.
Check that a lens is mounted. For an unsupported lens, set "Release w/o Lens" in the menu to "Enable".
The lens is not attached properly, or the lens is not attached. If the message appears when a lens is attached,
reattach the lens. If the message appears frequently, check whether the contacts of the lens and product are clean or
not.
When attaching the product to an astronomical telescope or similar instrument, or using an unsupported lens, set [
Release w/o Lens] to [Enable].
Internal temp. high. Allow it to cool.
The product has become hot because you have been shooting continuously. Turn the power off and cool the product
and wait until the product is ready to shoot again.
(Overheating warning)
You have been recording images for a long time, the product temperature has risen.
(Database file error)
The number of images exceeds that for which date management in a database file by the product is possible.
(Database file error)
Unable to register to the database file. Import all the images to a computer and recover the memory card.
Image DataBase File error
There is something wrong in the Image Database File. Select MENU → (Shooting) → [Media] → [
Recover Image DB].
System Error
Camera Error. Turn power off then on.
Remove the battery pack, and then re-insert it. If the message appears frequently, consult local authorized Sony
service facility.
Unable to magnify.
Unable to rotate image.
Images recorded with other products may not be enlarged or rotated.
Cannot create more folders.
A folder in the memory card has the first three digits “999.” You cannot create any more folders on this camera.
(Cooling fan malfunction warning)
The cooling fan has malfunctioned. Please seek repair service.
The cooling fan is malfunctioning. Consult a local authorized Sony service facility.
Related Topic
Notes on memory card
Performing initial setup for the camera
Format
652
